Metercat User Guide

Metercat™
Release 3.5.1
User guide
TM42-2203W
CONTENTS
1 Welcome to Metercat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
What Is Metercat? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the Metercat main window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Customizing the background image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viewing online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Program editor help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viewing release information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using the menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Edit menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Connections menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Windows menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Help menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Changing view mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Understanding the status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Using movement buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Using the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Starting AlphaPlus software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Starting Alpha Keys software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Changing the interface language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
2 Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Starting Metercat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Logging on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Single user system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Multiple user system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
At program startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
As a different user or group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Logging off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Setting up Metercat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Assigning function shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Deleting a function shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Viewing a list of assigned function shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Executing a function using shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Finding Metercat data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Backing up Metercat database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Replicating the Metercat system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Exiting Metercat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3 Using account information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Viewing account information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Metercat User Guide 3
Contents
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Details tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Notes tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Meter Access Level tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Changing your Metercat password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
4 Configuring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Configuring the user environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Configuring the network storage of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Viewing a report of the most recent program update . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Updating program files manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Update master program files on the network manually . . . . . . . . . . . .42
5 Setting system preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Opening System Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Setting supported meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Setting site ID labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Setting holiday options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Configuring seasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Setting programming options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Setting time difference options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Setting stored readings options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6 Managing users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Accessing User Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adding a new group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Entering group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Privileges tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Viewsets tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Functions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Programs tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Membership tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Meter Access Level tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Changing a group’s information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Deleting a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Changing a group’s status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Adding a new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Changing a user’s information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Deleting a user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing a user’s status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Entering user information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Details tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Notes tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Changing a your user password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
7 Security audit log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Viewing Metercat security events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Contents
Viewing only Metercat events list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Viewing Metercat event details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
About common event format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Security events details and examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
8 Synchronizing with EA_MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Downloading a self-signed certificate from EA_MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting synchronization options in Metercat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Deleting a server’s synchronization configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Synchronizing with EA_MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Viewing downloaded meter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Communicating with encryption-enabled devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
9 Managing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Accessing Function Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Metercat’s sample functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Building a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Function Definition tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Entering function definition information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Access Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Enabling a group’s access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Disabling a group’s access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Viewing a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Changing a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Changing a task’s parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Adding a task to a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Removing a task from a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Changing the task execution order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Changing a function’s access control list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Setting a function shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Deleting a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Executing a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Repeating a function execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Function Completion Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Troubleshooting task execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
All tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Program task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Program task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Tasks by Password Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
10 Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Available tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Activating the C12.22 WAN Factory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Activate LAN Factory Key task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Activating the LAN Factory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
A3 Connect Service task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Closing the service control switch on an ALPHA meter . . . . . . .97
A3 Disconnect Service task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Opening the service control switch in an ALPHA meter . . . . . . .98
Contents
Billing Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Configuring the Billing Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Performing a read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Change Demand Overload task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configuring the Change Demand Overload task . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing demand overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Change Demand Threshold(s) task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configuring the Change Demand Threshold(s) task . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing demand thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Change DLMS Password task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Changing the DLMS password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Change KYZ Output task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring the Change KYZ Output task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Changing KYZ output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Change Passwords task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Configuring the Change Passwords task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Changing the Read Only password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Changing the Billing and Unrestricted passwords . . . . . . . . . . 110
Change Modem Init String task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Configuring the Change Modem Init String task . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Changing a modem init string. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Change Out Gatekeeper task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Changing out a gatekeeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Change Pulse Divisor task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuring the Change Pulse Divisor task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Changing the pulse divisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Change Time task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configuring the Change Time task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing a meter’s time and time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Change Utility ID task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Changing a meter’s utility ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Clear Battery Log task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Clearing the meter’s battery log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Clear Data task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Clearing meter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Clear Event Flags task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Clearing event flags in a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Clear Event Log task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Clearing event log in a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Clear PQM Data task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuring the Clear PQM Data task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Clearing PQM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Clear Read Without Power Data task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Clearing Read Without Power data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configure Special Option Board task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configuring a special option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Demand Reset task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Resetting demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagnostic Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Reading without power - A1800 ALPHA only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configuring the Diagnostic Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Performing a read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Disable Node Communication task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Edit PQM Thresholds task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Contents
Configuring the Edit PQM Thresholds task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Changing PQM thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Edit Service Test task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Changing service test parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Enable Node Communication task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configuring the IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Performing a diagnostic read of a router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
IP AxisLink Program task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring the IP AxisLink Program task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Programming an IP AxisLink router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Program task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Configuring the Program task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Programming a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Programming an A3 ALPHA meter with EA_NIC . . . . . 140
Register Edit task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Editing register data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Ping LAN Node task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Pinging a LAN meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
PQ Inspector task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuring the PQ Inspector task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Running PQ Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Replace PQM task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configuring the Replace PQM task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Replacing a PQM component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Replace Program task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configuring the Replace Program task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Replacing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Replace Rates and Dates task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuring the Replace Rates and Dates task . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Replacing the Rates and Special Dates components . . . . . . . . 152
Replace Remote task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Replacing the Remote component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
REX Activate LAN Factory Key task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Activating the REX LAN Factory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REX Billing Reset task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Performing a billing reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REX Change Optical Test Source task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Changing a REX2 meter’s optical source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
REX Change Password task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Changing a REX meter’s password set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
REX Change Utility ID task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Changing a REX meter’s utility ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
REX Clear Data task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Clearing a REX meter’s data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
REX Connect Service task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Closing the service control switch on a REX meter . . . . . . . . . . 160
REX Demand Reset task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Resetting demand in a REX meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
REX Diagnostic Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configuring the REX Diagnostic Read task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Reading REX meter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
REX Disconnect Service task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Opening the service control switch in a REX meter . . . . . . . . . . 163
Contents
REX Meter Identification Info task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Reading REX meter ID information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting the REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
REX Test Mode Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
REX Test Mode On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Set DA I/O Relays task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Set Interposing Control Relay task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Set Interrupter Control Relay task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Set LAN Radio Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting the Set LAN Radio Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Test Mode Off task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Exiting Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Test Mode On task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Entering Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Turn PQM ON/OFF task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Turning PQM testing on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Unlock Service task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Unlocking the service of a meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11 Managing machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Supported connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Optical Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TCP/IP (C12.21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TCP/IP C12.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Accessing Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding a new connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Optical Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
TCP/IP (C12.21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
TCP/IP C12.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Viewing a connection’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Changing a connection’s settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting a connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring for AlphaPlus software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Troubleshooting AlphaPlus serial port conflicts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Establishing communications with a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Optical Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
TCP/IP (C12.21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
TCP/IP C12.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configuring Metercat for automatic call-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
12 Managing meter passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

About meter passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Passwords in ANSI C12.19 meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
REX meter password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ALPHA Plus meter passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Contents
About password sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Password retry options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Accessing Meter Passwords Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Adding a new password set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Changing a password set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Viewing passwords for EA_MS devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Viewing a password set’s history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Deleting a password set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Troubleshooting password problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Invalid passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
13 Managing stored readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Opening stored readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Exporting stored readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Exporting REX2 voltage profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Exporting stored readings using DOS command line. . . . . . . . 214
Creating a MetercatASC CFG file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Example CFG file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Importing stored readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Deleting a stored reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
14 Managing viewsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

What is a viewset? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Accessing Viewset Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using the Viewset Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Viewset Definition tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Access Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Creating a new viewset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Viewing a viewset’s properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing a viewset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Deleting a viewset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Creating a Viewset Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Opening a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Sample viewsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
15 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Available views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Meter views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Constants view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Current Billing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Day Types view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Day Types Pending view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Demand view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters Demand view . 236
REX meter Demand view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Demand Pending view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Display view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Warnings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
REX Display view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Contents
LCD Display Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Display Pending view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Event Log Data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
A3 ALPHA meter events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
DA I/O option board events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
REX2 meter events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
IP AxisLink router events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
History Log Data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
History Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Instrumentation Profiling Config view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Instrumentation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Power Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Interval Data (Instrumentation) view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Interval Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Interval Data (Load Profile) view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
REX2 meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Interval data mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Interval Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Interval Data Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
REX2 meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Logs view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
PQM view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
PQM/Sag Log Data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
PQM/Sag Status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Previous Billing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Previous Season view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Quantities view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Relay Options view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Remote view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Modem tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Answer tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Billing tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Alarms tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Restoration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Outage Modem tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
DCPM tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Self Reads view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Service Test view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Basic Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Advanced Settings - Current tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Advanced Settings - Voltage tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Special Dates view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Special Dates Pending view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Special Features view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Special Option Board view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Special Relay Status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Status view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Identification tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Conditions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Security tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Time tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Contents
Factory Codes tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

EnergyAxis Option tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Read without Power tab - A1800 ALPHA meter . . . . . .327
Switch Times view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Switch Times Pending view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
IP AxisLink router views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
ACL (Access Control List) view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Binary IO view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
DNP view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Logs Configuration view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Event Notifications view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Network view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Security Event Log Data view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
16 Managing the Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Viewing the phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Customizing the phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Sorting the phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Adding a new phone book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
TCP/IP (C12.21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
TCP/IP C12.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Changing a phone book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Printing the phone book contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Deleting a phone book entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
17 Programming a device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Programming a meter using MetercatLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Programming an A1800 ALPHA meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Programming a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Sample program completion report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Overriding program values using the Program task . . . . . . . . 351
Troubleshooting programming a meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Program ID Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Access Denied to Program ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Setting or changing Meter ID or Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Setting Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Programming ALPHA meters with EA_NIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Programming an IP AxisLInk router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
18 Reading a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Reading WIC-enabled meters over WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Reading a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Function Completion Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Troubleshooting reading a meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Reading an IP AxisLink router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Contents
19 Exporting a program or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Exporting a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Exporting a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
20 Importing a program or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Importing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Importing a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Importing duplicate components or programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Renumbering a program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Renaming a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Renaming a password set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Import Completion Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Editing an imported program or component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Creating a Program Report after importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
21 About programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

Program identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Program ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Audit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Create information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Modified information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
About programs and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
About TOU metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Additional resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
22 Using the Program Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Program Editor help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Starting the Program Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Creating a new program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Creating a new meter program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Creating an IP AxisLink router program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Creating a copy of a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Opening an existing program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Using the Program Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Saving a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Creating a Program Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Deleting a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Closing the Program Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
23 Using the Component Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Component Editor help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Starting the Component Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Creating a new component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Creating a copy of a component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Opening an existing component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Saving a changed component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Creating a Component Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Contents
Deleting a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Closing the Component Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
24 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Available components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Memory Allocation tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Examples of memory allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
ALPHA meter components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Constants component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Setting Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Demand component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Demand component - single rate demand meter . . . . 411
Demand component - time of use meter . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Instrumentation Profiling Config component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Logs component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Metering component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Quantities subcomponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Display subcomponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Interval Data Configuration subcomponent . . . . . . . . . 441
PQM component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
PQM testing in the meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
PQM and Sag Logs and statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
PQM tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Configuring PQM testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Voltage Sag Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
1. Service Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
2. Low Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
3. High Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4. Reverse Power Test & PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
5. Low Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
6. Power Factor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
7. Second Harmonic Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
8. Total Harmonic Distortion Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . 451
9. Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10. Voltage Imbalance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
11. Current Imbalance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
12. Total Demand Distortion Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13. IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13. Low Voltage Phase A Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
14. Low Voltage Phase B Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
15. Low Voltage Phase C Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
16. High Voltage Phase A Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
17. High Voltage Phase B Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
18. High Voltage Phase C Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
19. Low Voltage with High Current Phase A Test . . . . 453
20. Low Voltage with High Current Phase B Test . . . . 454
21. Low Voltage with High Current Phase C Test . . . . 454
22. Current Missing Phase A Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
23. Current Missing Phase B Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
24. Current Missing Phase C Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
1. Voltage Interruptions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
2. Rapid Voltage Changes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
3. Frequency Changes 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
4. Frequency Changes 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
5. Service Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Contents
6. Total Harmonic Distortion Current (%) . . . . . . . . . . . 456

7. Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage (%) . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Rates component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Day Types subcomponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Switch Times subcomponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Relay Options component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Configuring standard relay options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Configuring special relay options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Remote component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Configuring COM option boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Sample Remote components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Configuring remote communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Modem tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Answer tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Billing tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Alarms tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Restoration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Outage Modem tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
DCPM tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Service Test component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Setting Basic Service test parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Setting Advanced Service test parameters . . . . . . . . . 489
Special Dates component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Adding a recurring date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Adding a nonrecurring date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Troubleshooting special dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Special Features component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Special Option Board component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Configuring the Ethernet WIC special option board . . 502
Configuring the Wireless WIC special option board . . 502
Configuring the ACB version 3.7 (DNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Configuring the ACB version (1.2 & 1.3) or 2.x . . . . . . . 503
IP AxisLink components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
ACL (Access Control List) component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Binary IO component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
DNP component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Event Logs Configuration component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Event Notifications component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Network component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
A Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
B Report Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Viewset Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Program Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Function Completion Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Import Activities Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
REX Meter ID Info Completion Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Call in log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
ASCII Export Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Interval per Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Interval Data (Profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Interval Data (Instrumentation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Day per Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Contents
Day per Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
C Displayable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

A3 ALPHA Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Displayable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
A1800 ALPHA Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
D Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
KYZ pulse output relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Relay options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
E Meter Events, Errors & Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
A3 ALPHA Meter with EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC Errors. . . . . . . . . . . 565
A3 ALPHA Meter with Gatekeeper or EA_NIC status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
F Configuring the E-WIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

Configuring the E-WIC special option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Configuring for C12.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Configuring C12.22 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Configuring the host access control list . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Configuring exception notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Configuring for C12.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Configuring common protocol parameters . . . . . . . . .576
Configuring C12.21 specific parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Configuring the C12.21 Remote component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
G Configuring the W-WIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Adding the W-WIC display item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
About the W-WIC display item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Configuring the Remote component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
for a gatekeeper with W-WIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
for an A3 ALPHA meter with W-WIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Configuring the Special Option Board component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Configuring WAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Configuring the host ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Configuring exception notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Configuring check-in calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Configuring for last gasp outage notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
H Configuring ACB version 3.7 (DNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

DNP Analog Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
DNP Counter Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
DNP Binary Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Contents
I WIC Exception events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
J Configuring Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Transformer Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
1 WELCOME TO METERCAT
Before you begin using the software, please review the following sections:
• What Is Metercat?
• Using the Metercat main window
• Viewing online help
• Viewing release information
• Using the menu bar
• Understanding the status bar
• Using movement buttons
• Using the calendar
• Changing the interface language
Note: Elster assumes that anyone using the Metercat software has a
basic understanding of using Windows and Windows-based
programs.
What Is Metercat? Metercat™, the meter configuration and analysis tool, is a user-friendly software
application developed to program and read Elster’s A3 ALPHA®, A1800 ALPHA
meters, IP AxisLink routers and to perform various tasks on the REX® and REX2
meters. Designed as a flexible Microsoft Windows-based application, Metercat
runs on Windows XP, Vista, and Windows 7 platforms.
In addition to its basic functionality, Metercat includes the following features:
• function-level security
• a Program Development Wizard
• a Program Editor
• a Component Editor
• user management
• function management
• viewset management
• communications management
• phone book management
Metercat users can include employees in the following positions:
• meter shop administrators and supervisors

• meter readers and programmers
• program developers
1. Welcome to Metercat
Using the Metercat main The Metercat main window is divided into several functional areas which are
window described below.
Figure 1-1. Metercat main window
Close
Maximize
button
Minimize button
Title bar
button
Menu bar
Connection
toolbar
Viewset tree
Content
area
Status bar
• the Title bar area displays the name and release version in addition to the
name of the active meter program, component, viewset, or report; it also
contains the standard window control buttons to minimize, maximize and
close the open window
• the Menu bar lets you access Metercat commands
• the Connection toolbar allows you to select the Function and Viewset to use
when communicating with a meter (see Chapter 11, “Managing machine
settings,” Chapter 9, “Managing functions,” and Chapter 14, “Managing
viewsets”)
• the Stored Readings toolbar allows you to select a reading (containing
stored readings) and a Viewset to organize and view the data (see Chapter
13, “Managing stored readings” and Chapter 14, “Managing viewsets”)
• the Content area displays settings and data
• the Viewset tree lists the views available in the selected viewset (see
“Changing view mode” on page 22).
• the Status bar area displays the current user information (such as log on
name and group) and program or communication status information
Customizing the You can customize the Metercat background to display a specified image. See
background image the Metercat Getting Started Guide for details.
Viewing online help Metercat provides online help and context–sensitive online help to assist you in
performing specific tasks.
Note: You must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later to view
Metercat’s online help system.
The table below describes the types of help available in Metercat and how to
access them.
Help Type Description

F1 Pressing this key displays the help topic for the particular
dialog that is currently displayed by Metercat.
To access context–sensitive help for a Metercat tab page,
click in a text box, a button, drop-list, etc. in the tab page
and then press <F1>.
Help button Clicking this button displays the help for the particular
dialog that is currently displayed by Metercat.
Note: Not all windows/dialog have a Help button. For
those that do not, try pressing F1 or search the help
file for detailed information.
Contents Help Provides overviews, steps, and information on every
function you can perform within the Metercat program.
To access this type of help, from the Help menu select
Contents.
Program editor help

To view context help for a specific tab in the Program or Component Editors, you
must click in a text box, drop-list, etc. on the tab. Performing this action activates
the tab allowing the context help to appear when you press the <F1> key.
Viewing release To view information about your current release of Metercat:

information • From the Help menu, select About.
The About Metercat dialog is displayed.
The table below details the information displayed in the About Metercat dialog:
Item Description
User Name The User Name entered during software installation.
Organization The Organization to which the software is licensed.
100G000######## The Software Serial number entered during software
installation.
3.5.1 The software release number.
Note: If the release number is preceded by DEMO, the
installation is a demonstration version that will
expire on the date indicated.
Expires: mm/dd/YYYY The expiration date for the demonstration version of
Metercat.
Item Description
Close Closes the About Metercat dialog.
Using the menu bar The menu bar is displayed below the title bar and allows command execution via
pull-down menus. Each menu contains commands that are related to one
another by either functionality or process. The functions available under each
menu are described in the tables below.
File menu
Sub-menu Operation
New > Program Opens the Program Development Wizard for creating a
new program. For details on all of the functions and
procedures associated with this function, see “Creating a
new meter program” on page 384.
New > Program as Copy Creates a new program from an existing program. For
details on all of the functions and procedures associated
with this function, see “Creating a copy of a program” on
page 388.
New > Component Creates a new component. For details on all the functions
and procedures associated with this function, see “Creating
a new component” on page 393.
New > Component as Creates a new component from an existing component. For
Copy details on all the functions and procedures associated with
this function, see “Creating a copy of a component” on
page 394.
New > Report Creates a new report for the open and active program,
component or viewset.
Open > Program Opens an existing program in the Program Editor. For
details on all the functions and procedures associated with
opening a program, see “Opening an existing program” on
page 390.
Open > Component Opens an existing component in the Component Editor.
For details on all the functions and procedures associated
with opening a Component, see “Opening an existing
component” on page 396.
Open > Report Opens an existing report.
Close Closes the open window
Delete > Program Deletes a selected program. For details on all the functions
and procedures associated with deleting a program, see
“Deleting a program” on page 392.
Delete > Component Deletes a selected component. For details on all the
functions and procedures associated with deleting a
component, see “Deleting a component” on page 398.
Save Saves new or changed data to an existing file.
Print Sets printer information and then print the report currently
displayed in the window.
Sub-menu Operation
Log Off Logs off your current log on name from Metercat leaving the
application open for another user to log on or for you to log
on using a different group name.
Note: This command is only available in multi-user mode.
See “Configuring the user environment” on page 38.
Exit Closes the Metercat program.
Edit menu
Sub-menu Operation
Cut Removes the currently selected text and stores it on the
Clipboard.
Copy Copies the currently selected text to the Clipboard.
Paste Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point or
replaces any selected text.
Connections menu
Sub-menu Operation
<defined connections> Selects the method for connecting to a meter (example,
Modem, Optical Probe, etc.). See Chapter 11, “Managing
machine settings” for details on defining connections.
Tools menu
Note: Access to the following functions is dependent upon group
access levels. See “Functions tab” on page 56.
Sub-menu Operation
Account Information Displays information about your Metercat account and
allows you to change your log on password. For more
information about viewing your account see Chapter 3,
“Using account information.” For details on changing your
password see “Changing your Metercat password” on
page 37.
System Configuration Configures Metercat for Single or Multiple User accounts.
See Chapter 4, “Configuring the system.”
System Preferences Sets preferences for this Metercat installation. See Chapter
5, “Setting system preferences.”
User Management Creates and manages user and group accounts and assign
users to groups. For more information on managing users
and groups, see Chapter 6, “Managing users.”
EA_MS Synchronization Allows administrators to configure EA_MS Synchronization
Options and user groups with Allow EA_MS Synchronization
privileges to synchronize Metercat WAN seed data with
EA_MS. See Chapter 8, “Synchronizing with EA_MS”
Sub-menu Operation
Function Management Creates and manages functions that contain one or more
tasks. For more information on function management see
Chapter 9, “Managing functions.”
Machine Settings Defines the connection sources used for communicating
with meters, see Chapter 11, “Managing machine settings.”
Meter Passwords Defines and manages password sets for establishing
Management communication for executing functions (such as reading or
programming) connected meters, see Chapter 12,
“Managing meter passwords.”
Stored Readings Imports, exports or deletes stored billing and diagnostic
Management reading files. See Chapter 13, “Managing stored readings.”
Viewset Management Builds and manages viewsets. See Chapter 14, “Managing
viewsets.”
Phone Book Manages meter phone and TCP/IP numbers. See Chapter
16, “Managing the Phone Book.”
Export/Import Program Exports or imports a program file that you can share
programs between Metercat installations or send to Elster
Manufacturing to customize and program your meter order.
See Chapter 19, “Exporting a program or component.”
Export/Import Component Exports or imports a component file that you can share
components between Metercat installations or send to
Elster Manufacturing to customize and program your meter
order. See Chapter 19, “Exporting a program or component.”
Update Programs from Updates programs from files located on a network. See
Network Storage “Updating program files manually” on page 42.
Update Network Storage Updates programs stored on a network from files located
on the computer. See “Update master program files on the
network manually” on page 42.
Launch AlphaPlus Starts the installed version of AlphaPlus software in a MS-
DOS window. See “Starting AlphaPlus software” on page 25
for details.
Launch Alpha Keys Starts the installed version of Alpha Keys 2.0 software. See
“Starting Alpha Keys software” on page 25 for details.
Windows menu
See Windows User Guide for details on Window menu commands.
Sub-menu Operation
Cascade Sets or changes how windows within the application are
displayed.
Tile Horizontally Sets or changes how windows within the application are
displayed.
Tile Vertically Sets or changes how windows within the application are
displayed.
Arrange All Sets or changes how windows within the application are
displayed.
Minimize All Minimizes all open windows within the application. This option
only is displayed when a window is showing.
Help menu
Sub-menu Operation
Contents Displays the Metercat Online Help system.
Function Shortcuts Creates a report of defined shortcut keys for the currently active
connection (Optical Probe, Modem, etc.). See “Assigning
function shortcuts” on page 29 and “Viewing a list of assigned
function shortcuts” on page 30 for more detailed information.
Language Selects the language used by Metercat (for example, Russian,
Portuguese, etc.). Contact Elster for information on language
support.
About Displays Metercat release information. See “Viewing release
information” on page 18.
Changing view mode When viewing a viewset or program, Metercat displays either a tab for each
component (default) or as a tree in the left pane of the main window.
Figure 1-2. Tree mode
To view in tree mode:
• Click on the Metercat icon of the viewset window and select Enable Tree
View.
Figure 1-3. Tab mode
The tree lists the available views in the selected viewset or program. To
display a component, select the component in the tree list. The content area
displays the view data.
To return to tab mode:
• Click on the Metercat icon of the viewset window and deselect Enable Tree
View.
Metercat displays the viewset in tabs.
Understanding the status The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays information about the
bar current Metercat session. The status bar displays information related to the
function or action you are performing (for example, creating a program or
executing a function on a connected meter).
The table below describes the information you may find in the status bar.
Status Field Description

User Displays the log on name for the user that is currently
logged on to Metercat.
Note: Seen in Multiple User mode only.
Group Displays the group name for the currently logged on user.
Note: Seen in Multiple User mode only.
Meter Family Displays the meter family of the currently selected program
(that is, A3 ALPHA).
Note:Seen with a program open only.
Status Field Description

Type Displays the meter type of the currently selected program
(that is, D (Demand) or T (Time of Use), K (Apparent power),
R (Reactive power), or Q (Q-hour power).
Program Function Displays the type of program currently selected (that is,
Single Rate Demand or Time of Use).
Account Displays the ID #1 (for example, Account) programmed into
the meter. See “Setting site ID labels” on page 44.
Note:Seen with a stored reading open or a meter
connected and read.
Meter ID Displays the ID #2 (for example, Meter ID) programmed
into the meter. See “Setting site ID labels” on page 44.
Note:Seen with a stored reading open or a meter
connected and read.
Using movement buttons Use the movement buttons to add, remove or reposition items in a Select/
Enabled list.
Note: You can select multiple items by holding down the <Shift> key
and selecting the first and last item or by holding down the
<Ctrl> key and selecting each desired item.
The following table describes the movement buttons used in Metercat:
Button Description
Add > Moves the selected item in the Available list to the Select/Enabled list.
Double clicking on an item will also move it to the Select list.
All >> Moves all of the items in the Available list to the Select/Enabled list.
< Remove Removes the selected item from the Select/Enabled list to the Available
list.
Double clicking on an item will also move it to the Available list.
<< All Removes all of the items from the Select/Enabled list to the Available
list.
Up Moves the selected item up one place in the list.
Down Moves the selected item down one place in the list.
Note: You can add or remove items by clicking and holding down the
mouse button then dragging the selected item to the desired
location (“drag-and-drop”).
Using the calendar When you create a TOU meter program, you may need to enter Special Dates.
Metercat provides a Calendar function that lets you select a month, day, and year
for each field requiring a date.
Note: If you define a date without setting a specific time, Metercat

defaults to the hour “00:00:00” (that is, midnight) unless
otherwise noted.
Starting AlphaPlus Metercat allows you to open an installed version of AlphaPlus software in a MS-
software DOS window using your Metercat log on password.
AlphaPlus meter support software allows you to read and program Elster’s
ALPHA, ALPHA Plus, and AIN ALPHA meters.
Note: Before you can start AlphaPlus (releases prior to 1.30) you must
edit the APLUS.BAT file located in the \APLUS folder on your
computer and edit the APMENU line to read APMENU %1.
Before you can start AlphaPlus from Metercat, you must set the path to AlphaPlus
using the procedure described in “Configuring for AlphaPlus software” on
page 187.
To start AlphaPlus meter support software:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select Launch AlphaPlus.

AlphaPlus software displays in a MS-DOS window.
2. To begin using AlphaPlus, press Enter.
3. To exit AlphaPlus, press Esc and confirm by pressing Y.
Starting Alpha Keys Metercat allows you to open an installed version of Alpha Keys software using
software your Metercat log on password.
Alpha Keys is a combination of hardware and Windows software that can

upgrade an A3 ALPHA meter. Using Alpha Keys, you can perform either meter
type upgrades (for example, A3D to A3T) or feature upgrades (A3T to A3TL).
Note: Alpha Keys software is shipped on the Metercat installation CD-

ROM. The software is accessed from Metercat using the Tools
menu.
To start Alpha Keys:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select Launch Alpha Keys.
Alpha Keys launches and displays the Alpha Keys main window.
2. Before you can begin using Alpha Keys you must do the following:
a. Connect a Hard Key III with Soft Keys available to your computer’s USB
port.
b. Connect an A3 ALPHA meter to your computer using an optical probe.
3. Click Start.
Changing the interface Metercat, supports languages other than English.

language To change the language of the interface:
1. From the Help menu, select Language.

2. Select your language from the list. The Metercat interface is display using the
selected language.
2 GETTING STARTED
Before you can start using Metercat, you must learn a few basics including:
• Starting Metercat
• Logging on
• Logging off
• Setting up Metercat
• Assigning function shortcuts
• Finding Metercat data files
• Backing up Metercat database
• Exiting Metercat
Starting Metercat Beginning with version 3.2, Metercat introduced improved security for the storage
of user IDs and passwords and meter passwords. The first time Metercat
launches, the Administrator configures the password security policy and, if
necessary, changes users’ logon passwords that do not conform to the policy.
The Administrator log on name must be the first time Metercat is opened after a
new installation or an upgrade installation. See the Metercat Getting Started
guide for more details.
WARNING: If you forget the Administrator password, you will be locked out of
Metercat. The Administrator password is not recoverable.
If you are upgrading from an earlier release of Metercat, you will be asked if you
want to keep your existing databases (that is, your databases will be upgraded to
the current version).
To start Metercat:
1. Click on the Start button.

2. From the All Programs menu, select Metercat > Metercat 3.5.1. You can also
double-click the Metercat icon on your Windows Desktop.
The splash screen is displayed.
3. Log into Metercat as appropriate.
If the system is set up for a single user (that is, one log on name), you must
log on as Administrator.
If the system is setup for multiple users (that is, more than one log on ID), the
system prompts you for a log on name, password, and group.
For information about logging on see “Logging on” on page 26.
Logging on Depending upon how you have configured Metercat (Chapter 4, “Configuring the
system”), you have the following log on options:
2. Getting started
• Single user system

• Multiple user system
• At program startup
• As a different user or group
Note: After you receive your Metercat log on name and password,
you should change your password (see “Changing your
Metercat password” on page 37) and review your Details
information to verify that it is correct.
Single user system

If your Metercat software has been configured as a single user system, you must
log on as the Administrator. The default Administrator password is Administrator.
To preserve security, change this password after you first log on to Metercat (see
“Changing your Metercat password” on page 37 for details on changing a
password).
If Metercat was configured for multiple users during software installation, you
cannot change Metercat to a single user. If Metercat was configured for a single
user during installation, you can configure Metercat for multiple users using the
Metercat Tools > System Configuration command. See “Configuring the user
environment” on page 38 for details.
Multiple user system

If your Metercat software has been configured as a multiple user system, you
must log on to the system using your log on name and password. The log on
name and password provide security and limit you to only those tasks for which
you have been given access privileges.
To have a log on name, an administrator must first:
• create your log on name and password

• create at least one group (with defined privileges and access to the required
elements)
• assign your log on name to one or more groups
See Chapter 6, “Managing users” for details on managing users and groups.
There are two ways you can log on to Metercat:
• log on at program startup - see “At program startup” on page 27.

• log on after the program has already been started - see “As a different user
or group” on page 28.
At program startup
To start the program and log on to the system:
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Metercat > Metercat 3.5.1.
The Metercat splash screen is displayed while Metercat starts and then the
Welcome to Metercat dialog is displayed.
2. our network log on ID is displayed automatically in the Log On Name box. If
this is not the log on name you are using for your Metercat log on, type in
the correct name.
3. Type your Metercat password in the Log On Password box.
2. Getting started
Note: The Log On Password text box is case sensitive.

After entering your log on name, the Group Name field is automatically
filled.
4. If you have been assigned to more than one group, change the group you
want to use for this session in the Group Name list.
5. Click OK to log on.
As a different user or group

To log on to Metercat using another Log On Name or Group Name:
1. From the File menu, select Log On.
The Welcome to Metercat dialog is displayed.
2. Your network log on ID is displayed automatically in the Log On Name field.
If this is not the log on name you are using for your Metercat log on, type in
the correct name.
3. Type your Metercat password in the Log On Password box.
Note: The Log On Password text box is case sensitive.
4. If you have been assigned to more than one group, change the group you
want to use for this session in the Group Name list.
5. Click OK to log on.
Logging off There are times when you may want to log off Metercat without closing the
application, for example, when you want to log on using another Group Name or
to ensure that no one else uses your log on name to configure a meter when you
are away from the computer.
To log off of Metercat without closing the program:
• From the File menu, select Log Off.

You are immediately logged off of the system.
If you wish to close the program, see “Exiting Metercat” on page 33.
If you wish to log on to Metercat using another Log On Name or Group Name,
see “As a different user or group” on page 28.
Setting up Metercat Before you can begin programming or reading meters you need to perform
certain basic actions that will prepare Metercat for use. For example, before you
can read or program a meter you must first define the connection you will use to
communicate with the meter (as described in “Adding a new connection” on
page 180).
The following topics contain additional information on setting up Metercat:
• Chapter 4, “Configuring the system”

• Chapter 5, “Setting system preferences”
• Chapter 18, “Reading a device”
• Chapter 17, “Programming a device”
2. Getting started
Assigning function shortcuts

Metercat allows you to configure function shortcut keys that will execute Metercat
functions and commands using a single key press (for example, F2) or a
combination of key presses (for example, Ctrl + F2, Alt + F2, Ctrl + Shift + F2, etc.).
Note: To avoid overriding existing Metercat menus, the connection

bar, the stored readings bar, and Metercat dialog buttons (for
example, New) do not use the Alt + <single key press>
combination (for example, Alt + F(ile), Alt + N(ew), etc.).
To assign or change function shortcut keys:
1. From the Tools menu, select Function Management.

2. Select a function from the list.
Note: The Keyboard Shortcut assigned to the selected function is
displayed.
3. Click Edit.
4. In the Function Builder dialog, enter the key or key sequence to be assigned
to the function.
Note: Pressing Delete or Shift + Delete changes the assigned key
sequence to None.
The table below lists the usage status of special key sequences:
Key Sequence Usage Status
Alt + C Not allowed (Metercat Cancel button shortcut)
Ctrl + C, Ctrl+X, Ctrl+V Not allowed (Windows defined shortcuts and defined in
Metercat's Edit menu)
Delete, Shift+Delete Not allowed (deletes the currently assigned shortcut key
combination)
F1 Allowed, but will override Metercat’s context sensitive
online help shortcut
Alt + [character] Allowed, but may override Metercat’s menu and dialog
buttons shortcuts.
Note: If the selected Alt + [character] sequence is an
existing Metercat hot key, the hot key sequence
will be overridden by the new sequence.
Alt + [number] Not allowed for any of the Alt + [number] defined
connections,
Allowed if a number greater than the last defined
connection is used.
F9 Repeat function
2. Getting started
Figure 2-4. Function Builder
Deleting a function shortcut

To delete an existing function shortcut:

2. Select the function from the displayed list.
3. Click Edit.
4. In the Function Builder dialog, click in the Keyboard Shortcut text box.
5. Press the Delete key or the Shift + Delete keys.
6. Click OK to exit the Function Builder.
Viewing a list of assigned function shortcuts

To view a report of function shortcut key assignments for the currently active
connection:
• From the Help menu, select Function Shortcuts.

Metercat displays an HTML report of assigned keys.
You can print this report using File > Print.
Note: You must have a connection (Optical Probe, Modem, etc.) active
to see the Function Shortcuts command.
Executing a function using shortcuts

If you have not selected a viewset from the connection bar before you execute a
read function, the function will execute and no viewset will be displayed.
See “Executing a function” on page 87 for details and requirements on executing

a function.
2. Getting started
To execute a function using the shortcut keys:
1. From the Metercat Connections menu, select the proper Connection.

See “Establishing communications with a meter” on page 188 for details on
communicating with a meter.
2. For a reading function, if you want to display a viewset after the reading,
select the proper viewset from the Viewset drop list.
3. Press the proper function key shortcut sequence for the selected function.
The function will execute; any override dialogs will display.
When the function has completed, Metercat displays the completion report.
Finding Metercat data Metercat data files are stored in the following location on the computer:
files [Windows XP]
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Elster\Metercat\
[Windows Vista]
C:\ProgramData\Elster\Metercat
[Windows 7]
C:\ProgramData\Elster\Metercat\Config
Note: If you do not see these folders, contact your System
Administrator.
2. Getting started
Backing up Metercat Elster recommends that you create periodic backup files of your Metercat
database database file (mcat.mdb) that is located in either of the following locations
depending on your operating system:
[Windows XP]
Data\Elster\Metercat\Config
[Windows Vista]
[Windows 7]
CAUTION: The .bak files located in that directory should not be deleted
from the system.
See “Replicating the Metercat system” on page 32 for details.
Replicating the Metercat Metercat system replication involves copying the database file from one Metercat
system installation folder on one computer to the Metercat installation folder on another
computer. Because the database format may vary from version to version, only
copy databases of the same version of Metercat (for example, from Metercat 3.0
to another copy of Metercat 3.0).
Sharing one Metercat database between several different installations (for

example, over a network) is not recommended. However, Metercat does support
network storage of Metercat program files (see Chapter 4, “Configuring the
system” for details).
Meter readings are not stored in any database. To copy or transfer readings, use
Tools > Stored Readings Management to export the needed readings from the
source Metercat installation then import them into the destination Metercat
installation.
Note: Before copying database files from one system to another be

sure to close the Metercat application on both computers.
Failure to do so may lead to unpredictable results.
To replicate a Metercat system:
1. Exit Metercat on both the source computer and the destination computer.
2. Copy the following files to the appropriate location depending on the
operating system of the respective computers:
[Windows XP]
Data\Elster\Metercat\Config
[Windows Vista]
2. Getting started
[Windows 7]
• mcat.mdb - contains Metercat programs, user logon passwords, meter

passwords, functions/tasks definitions, viewset definitions, system
preferences, etc.
• installations.mte - contains the phone book entries
• connections.mte - contains the machine settings entries
Exiting Metercat To exit and close Metercat:
• From the File menu, select Exit or click on the Windows Close button
The program immediately closes.
3 USING ACCOUNT
INFORMATION
The Account Information command allows you to view your user account
information as well as change your logon password. If you are using Single User
mode (see “Configuring the user environment” on page 38), you may also set
your meter access level.
Note: After you receive your Metercat logon name and password, you
should change your password and review your Details
information to verify that it is correct.
Viewing account To view your current account information:

information 1. From the Tools menu, select Account Information.
The Account Information dialog is displayed with two tabs:
• General tab
• Details tab
• Meter Access Level tab (available in single-user mode only)
2. After reviewing your information, click OK or Cancel to exit the Account
Information dialog and return to the main window.
General tab
The General tab allows you to change your Metercat logon password and to view
your general user information. To protect your security, Metercat stores any logon
passwords as a cryptographic hash in the database.
Note: You can only change your logon password using the Account
Information command. Other changes to user information must
be performed by an administrator using the User Management
command (see Chapter 6, “Managing users”..
The following table describes the items in the General tab of the Account
Information dialog.
Item Description
Meter Programmer's A unique numerical identifier (ranging from 1 to 9999) set by
Identifier the administrator and stored in meters that you program.
Logon Name The logon name you used to log on to Metercat.
Logon Password The password you are currently using to log on to Metercat.
Confirm Logon Password re-typed for verification (must match the
Logon Password if that field is changed).
Member Groups List of groups to which your logon name is assigned.
3. Using account information
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to view additional information about your logon name.
Note: Any changes to your user information must be performed by an

administrator via the User Management command (see
Chapter 6, “Managing users”).
The following table describes the items in the Details tab of the Account
Information dialog:
• Full name
• Description (job title)
• Email address
• Telephone number
• Alternate telephone number
• Pager number
• Fax machine number
• Address
Notes tab
The Notes tab is only available to Administrators on computers that are
configured for single user mode (see “Configuring the user environment” on
page 38). The Notes tab allows you to enter information or remarks about a user.
Possible entries could include changes to status (that is, inactive date).
Meter Access Level tab

Note: This tab is only visible if Metercat is configured as a single user
system (see “Configuring the user environment” on page 38 for
details on configuring Metercat). If Metercat is configured as a
multi-user system, Meter Access Level is set using User
Management (see “Meter Access Level tab” on page 57).
The Meter Access Level tab allows you to select the meter password set that the
user will use to communicate with Elster meters (see Chapter 12, “Managing
meter passwords” for more information).
Each ANSI C12.19 and ALPHA Plus password set contains three passwords (read
only, billing read, and unrestricted). The meter access level determines which of
the three A3 ALPHA passwords in the password set is used when members of
the group attempt meter communications. See “Tasks by Password Level” on
page 93 for a listing of Password Levels for each task.
The REX password set is one 8-digit password (padded with zeros on the right if
less than 8 digits are entered) that is used to communicate with REX meters
through the optical port.
Figure 3-5. Meter Access Level tab
The following table describes the items in the Meter Access Level tab of the
Account Information dialog.
Item Description
ANSI C12.19 Password Set Determines the password set the user can use to
communicate with A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters.
ALPHA Plus Password Set To use Alpha Keys to upgrade ALPHA Plus meters,
select the ALPHA Plus Password Set the user will use to
communicate with meters.
Note: Alpha Keys uses only the Unrestricted meter
password for communicating with an ALPHA
Plus meter and uses the Unrestricted optical
password for a meter programmed with a non-
zero Device ID.
Password Level for ALPHA • If Read Only Password is selected, this user will use
Meter Communications the lowest level meter password of the selected
password set.
• If Billing Read Password (Allow Demand Reset) is
selected, this user will use the billing read meter
password of the selected password set.
• If Unrestricted Password is selected, this user will use
the highest level password of the selected password
set.
REX Password Set Determines the password the user will use to
communicate with REX meters.
Changing your Metercat To change your Metercat logon password:

password 1. From the Tools menu, select Account Information.
2. Select the General tab.
3. Select the text in the Log On Password box.
4. Type in your new password (from 0 to 50 characters) replacing the selected
password with the new one.
Note: Your password must conform to the user password security
policy configured by the Metercat Administrator. To view the
current password security policy, from the Tools menu, select
System Configuration. See “Configuring the user environment”
on page 38 for an example of a password security policy.
5. To confirm that you entered your password correctly, re-type the new
password in the Confirm box.
6. Click OK to save your changes or click Cancel to cancel the change and
return to the main window.
4 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM
Metercat allows authorized users to configure the software user environment and
network storage of programs. The user environment can be run as either a single
or a multi–user system.
Note: To see the User Management command on the Tools menu,

you must configure Metercat as a Multiple User system. If you
cannot see the User Management command, from the Tools
menu, select System Configuration and then select Multiple
User.
Configuring the user CAUTION: User password requirements can only be changed at the first
environment launch after installing the software. These settings cannot be
edited after the first launch of Metercat. The Administrator can
change the maximum number of days before a user’s
password must be changed any time after installation.
To configure the user environment:

1. From the Tools menu, select System Configuration.
The System Configuration dialog is displayed.
4. Configuring the system
Figure 4-6. Configured for multiple users at installation
Note: If Metercat was configured for multiple users during software

installation, you cannot change Metercat to support a single
user. However, if Metercat was configured for a single user
during installation, you can configure Metercat for multiple
users.
Figure 4-7. Configured for single user at installation
2. Select the appropriate User Environment (either Single User or Multiple

Users).
Note: To use Metercat configured for a Single User, you must log on
as the Administrator.
Note: The user password security policy is displayed. These settings
are only configured the first time Metercat is opened after an
upgrade or new installation. See the Metercat Getting Started
Guide for details.
3. Click OK to save the configuration or click Cancel to keep the existing
configuration and return to Metercat.
See “Logging on” on page 26 for details about using Single User or Multiple User
mode.
Configuring the network Note: If you are using network storage of programs and have
storage of programs upgraded to Metercat 3.0 or higher, you will need to manually
import the stored programs into Metercat as described in
“Importing a program” on page 369 before you run the Update
Network Storage command.
Metercat allows programs to be stored as master files on a network server. When
enabled, each time Metercat opens it will check the master programs on the
network and will automatically overwrite local programs with master programs
that have been changed and import any new programs.
Figure 4-8. Network storage of programs
In releases of Metercat prior to Rel. 3.2, only the Administrators group had the
privilege of executing the Update Network Storage command. In Metercat Rel.
3.2 and higher, the following privileges grant user groups access to:
• A user belonging to a group with the Export Meter Programs privilege can
execute the Tools > Update Network Storage command.
• A user belonging to a group with the Import Meter Programs privilege can
execute the Tools > Update Programs from Network Storage command.
See “Privileges tab” on page 54 for details on these privileges.
When Metercat updates local programs from a network storage location the
following conditions apply:
• local user privileges for existing programs are not changed
• when retrieving a new program from the network, local user access
privileges are for the Administrators group only
• password sets are imported with master programs
• if imported password sets are changed, Metercat lists the names of
changed password sets
• if new password sets are imported, Metercat lists the names of the new
password sets
• Metercat reports changed components after updating from master
program
To configure Metercat to allow the storage of Metercat programs on a network:
1. From the Tools menu, select System Configuration.

The System Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the location on the network where programs are to be stored (in the
format \\server-name\path).
— OR —
Browse to the network location where the programs will be stored.
3. Check to Automatically update programs from Network Storage to update
the computer’s programs every time Metercat is launched.
Note: Only a Metercat user group with Export Meter Programs

privileges on the computer can change the configuration
settings or change the Network Storage Location. See “Entering
group information” on page 53 for details.
4. Click OK to save the configuration or click Cancel to keep the existing
configuration and return to Metercat.
Viewing a report of the To view a report of the most recent programs update, open the netstore.html file
most recent program located at the following locations:
update [Windows XP]
Data\Elster\Metercat\Reports
[Windows Vista]
C:\ProgramData\Elster\Metercat\Reports
[Windows 7]
C:\ProgramData\Elster\Metercat\Reports
Updating program files In releases of Metercat prior to Rel. 3.2, the Administrators group only had the
manually privilege of executing the Update Network Storage commands. In Metercat Rel.
3.2 and higher, any user belonging to a group with the Import Meter Programs
privilege has access to the Update Network Storage command. See “Privileges
tab” on page 54 for details on these privileges.
To update the local computer with files from the network:
• From the Tools menu, select Update Programs from Network Storage.
Metercat updates the local Metercat program files from the network
location. After the files are updated, Metercat displays a report summarizing
the activity of the update. The report displays information such as programs
that were successfully imported into Metercat and any failures that
occurred.
Update master program In releases of Metercat prior to Rel. 3.2, The Administrators group only had the
files on the network privilege of executing the Update Network Storage command. In Metercat Rel.
3.2 and higher, the following privilege grant user groups access to the Update
manually Network Storage command:
• a user belonging to a group with the Export Meter Programs privilege

See “Privileges tab” on page 54 for details on these privileges.
To update the network master programs from programs in Metercat:
• From the Tools menu, select Update Network Storage.

Metercat updates the master programs stored on the network from
programs contained in Metercat.
5 SETTING SYSTEM
PREFERENCES
Metercat allows an authorized user to set system preferences for the computer
running Metercat. Using the System Preferences command, you can set the
following options:
• supported meters
• site ID labels
• holiday
• dates and rates
• programming
• time difference
• stored readings
Note: To change system preferences, you must be a member of a
group with edit privileges to System Preferences (see “Privileges
tab” on page 54).
Opening System To open the System Preferences dialog:

Preferences • From the Tools menu, select System Preferences.
The System Preferences dialog is displayed.
The following table details the default values for System Preferences:
Preference Default Value
Meters Supported All installed meter types enabled. Available devices
include;
• A3 ALPHA meter
• A1800 ALPHA meter
• IP AxisLink router
• REX meter
• REX2 meter
• gREX meter
Site ID Labels #1 - Account:
#2 - Meter ID:
Holidays No holidays will be generated automatically in Special
Dates components.
Dates and Rates Options • Winter, Spring, Summer, Fall, Season 5, Season 6, etc.
• only 4 seasons will be enabled
• midnight switch times will be generated automatically
5. Setting system preferences
Preference Default Value

Programming Options • line frequency will be the meter clock source
• one cycle of the alternate display list will be seen at
power up
• KYZ Value and Adjusted Kh will be disabled
Time Difference Options Metercat will not check for time errors.
Stored Readings Account value will be used when importing stored
readings.
Setting supported meters Metercat allows you to specify those meter families and meter types a particular
Metercat installation can support.
Note: During Metercat installation time, you selected which meter
families and types would be supported by Metercat. Available
devices include: A3 ALPHA meter, A1800 ALPHA meter,
IP AxisLink router, REX meter, REX2 meter and gREX meter.
To set the meter family and meter types supported by Metercat:
1. From the Tools menu, select System Preferences.

2. On the Meters Supported tab, you may check or uncheck any individual
meter family and type (default is to have all displayed meter families and
types checked.).
Note: You must select at least one meter family/type item.
Note: The meter families shown are based on selections made during
Metercat software installation.
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Metercat main window;
click Apply to apply your changes now and continue setting preferences; or
click Cancel to return to the main window without saving any unapplied
changes.
Setting site ID labels Metercat allows you to set labels used to identify values used in reports and used
by the computer. These values are then used during:
• setting stored readings options

• configuring the Billing Read task
• configuring the Diagnostic Read task
• configuring the Program task
Additionally, Site ID #2 allows masking of the ID value to restrict editing to certain
allowed characters in the string. This feature is used by the Program task.
To set labels to be used by your computer:

2. Select the Site ID Labels tab.
3. For ID #1 Options, type a Label (up to 20-characters maximum length) in the
box (the default is Account:).
4. For ID #2 Options:
a. Type a Label (up to 20 characters maximum length) in the box (the default
is Meter ID:).
b. To specify a default value for ID #2 (maximum of 20 characters), type the
value (default is 00000000000000000000, 20 zeroes).
c. To specify unmasked characters or which characters are digits, enter:
• N to specify masked, or non-editable, characters for each correct
position in the 20 character string
• Y, for editable characters, for each correct position in the 20 character
string;
• D, for editable digits for each correct position in the 20 character string;
restricts the editable characters to numeric digits (0-9) only
For example, an ID #2 mask setting of

NNNNNNNNNYYDDDDDDDDD
could have the value of

EG8765432AB987654321
Note: If you change the ID #1 and ID #2 labels, the corresponding

labels used throughout Metercat are changed after the OK or
Apply button is clicked.
5. To restore the default values for the ID labels, click Use Defaults:
Item Default
Label 1 Account:
Label 2 Meter ID:
Default (20 zeroes) 00000000000000000000
Mask YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
Note: Clicking Use Defaults changes any non-default settings to the

default values.
click Apply to apply your changes now and continue setting preferences or
changes.
Setting holiday options Metercat can automatically generate 20 years of special dates for the Roman
Catholic/Protestant calendar’s Easter, Good Friday, and the Monday following
Easter when a new Special Dates component is created.
To enable Metercat to automatically generate these holidays for any new special
dates component:
2. Select the Holidays tab.
3. Check the holidays that you want to be included as nonrecurring dates in
any new special dates components.
changes.
Configuring seasons To support both the A3 ALPHA and the A1800 ALPHA meters, Metercat allows you
to specify the number and the names of the seasons used in Metercat. The
settings for this preference affect the following components:
• Special Dates component

• Rates component:
• Day Types subcomponent
• Switch Times subcomponent
To set the dates and rates options for this particular installation of Metercat:

2. Select the Dates and Rates Options tab.
Figure 5-9. System Preferences - Dates and Rates Options tab
Note: You can specify that Metercat supports either 4 seasons or that
the Rates component sets the number of seasons supported.
See “Switch Times subcomponent” on page 457 for details.
Note: If you are supporting both the A3 ALPHA and the A1800 ALPHA
meters (with more than 4 seasons), Elster recommends you
select Specify by the User in Rates Component (up to 12).
3. For the A3 ALPHA meter and A1800 ALPHA meter, you can specify up to 12
seasons (default is 4):
• Select 4 Seasons to use the default number or seasons.
• Select Specify by the User in Rates Component (up to 12).

• Double-click to enter Season Names as appropriate.
4. Check Automatically Generate Midnight Switches for all Rates Components
to automatically create midnight (00:00) switch times for new Rates
components created by this Metercat installation.
Note: Rates components created prior to enabling this setting will not
automatically generate midnight switch times.
Note: If checked, midnight switch times will set the rate to the default
rate defined for each Rate component. See “Switch Times
subcomponent” on page 457.
5. Click Use Defaults to if you wish to reset the existing values to the default
values:
Item Default
Season Name Season 1-12
Number of Seasons 4 Seasons
Automatically Generate Midnight Enabled
Switches for all Rates Components
Setting programming Metercat allows you to control programming options for meter programs created
options by a particular computer. The currently supported options are:
• meter clock source.

• KYZ value method
• Adjusted Kh value
To set the program options for this particular installation of Metercat:

2. Select the Programming Options tab.
Figure 5-10. System Preferences - Programming Options tab
3. Select the Meter Clock Source (whether an internal oscillator or the power
line frequency is used as a basis for timekeeping) for all meters
programmed from this computer.
4. Elster meters are factory-configured to scroll once through the alternate
display list at power up before entering normal scroll mode. Uncheck Show
One Cycle of Alternate Display List at Power Up to disable this feature.
5. Check to Use KYZ Value Method for determining output pulses.
Note: A3 ALPHA meters with firmware version 3.01 and higher and all
A1800 ALPHA meters support the use of a KYZ Value [in kilo
units (for example, kWh)].
If you do not select to use KYZ Value, a KYZ Divisor will be used. See “Relay
Options component” on page 460 for a detailed explanation of how the KYZ
divisor and KYZ value are used.
6. If you are using KYZ Value, click Add and enter a positive number in the
range of 0.000001 to 100.000000.
Repeat as needed to add additional values to the list. These numbers will
appear as default values in the KYZ Value drop list (see “Change KYZ Output
task” on page 106 and “Relay Options component” on page 460).
7. Check to Use Adjusted Kh Value to Configure Meter Constants to specify the
meter’s Adjusted Kh be used instead of the meter’s register multiplier.
8. If you are using Adjusted Kh Value, click Add and enter a positive number in
the range of 0.001 to 999.999.
Repeat as needed to add additional values to the list. These numbers will
appear as default values in the Adjusted Kh drop list (see “Program task” on
page 134 and “Constants component” on page 408).
9. Click Use Defaults if you wish to reset the existing values to the default
values:
Item Default
Meter Clock Source Line Frequency
Show One Cycle ALT Display Checked
Use KYZ Value Method Unchecked
KYZ Values Disabled
Adjusted Kh Disabled
Note: Clicking Use Defaults changes any non-default settings but

leaves any KYZ values and adjusted Kh values you have
entered.
10.Click OK to save your changes and return to the Metercat main window;
changes.
Setting time difference You may configure Metercat so that a time difference test is performed each time
options Metercat communicates with a meter during a billing or a diagnostic read. This
test determines how close the meter’s internal timekeeping matches the clock on
the computer running Metercat.
If the time difference between the meter and computer exceeds the time
difference specified, a time error will be reported on the Function Completion
Report. If the time difference falls within the specified adjustment limits, then
Metercat will attempt to adjust the meter’s time within the day boundary (that is,
the meter’s date will never be adjusted).
To set time difference options:

2. Select the Time Difference Options tab.
Figure 5-11. System Preferences - Time Difference Options tab
3. Select one of the following Time Error Criteria options:

Note: Time errors are only checked and reported during billing or
diagnostic reads.
a. No Time Error Checking to disable the test.
b. If Time Difference Exceeds to enable the test.
4. If you have selected If Time Difference Exceeds, type a time (between 00:00
and 23:59).
5. Select one of the following Time Adjustment Criteria:
Note: Time adjustments are only performed during billing reads.
a. Never Adjust Meter Time to never allow Metercat to adjust the time of the
connected meter.
b. Always Adjust Meter Time to always adjust the meter time to the time of
the computer running Metercat.
c. Adjust Meter Time if Difference is in Range to adjust the meter time only if
the time difference falls within the minimum and maximum range
entered (between 00:00 and 99:59).
Note: The minimum time must be less than the maximum time.
6. Click Use Defaults if you wish to reset the existing values to the default
values (No Time Error Checking and Never Adjust Meter Time).
Item Default
Time Error Criteria No Time Error Checking
Time Adjustment Criteria Never Adjust Meter Time
Note: Clicking Use Defaults changes any non-default settings.

changes.
Note: The Status section of a function completion report will display an
error if the time in the meter differs from the computer’s time by
more than the time specified.
Setting stored readings Metercat allows you to specify options for storing meter reading data.
options To set stored reading options:

2. Select the Stored Readings tab.
Note: See “Setting site ID labels” on page 44 for details on setting ID
preferences.
3. Select the ID to be used when you import stored readings:
a. ID #1 [default is Account:]
b. ID #2 [default is Meter ID:]
Note: The imported file’s name will consist of the selected label (meter
type + ID + date-time read). For example, A3K 0123456789
20031216163041.msr indicates an A3K meter with Account
0123456789 read on 2003.12.16 at 16:30:41.
4. Check Send Stored Readings to the Recycle Bin instead of deleting them to
send stored readings (via Tools > Stored Readings Management > Delete)
to your Recycle Bin rather than purge them immediately from the computer
(files in the Recycle Bin are recoverable if it has not been emptied).
6 MANAGING USERS
Note: To see the User Management command on the Tools menu you
must configure Metercat as a Multiple User system. See
Chapter 4, “Configuring the system.”
User Management is used by Metercat administrators to view and manage user
and group information including:
• Adding a new group • Adding a new user

• Changing a group’s information • Changing a user’s information
• Deleting a group • Deleting a user
• Changing a group’s status • Changing a user’s status
Note: Only members of the Administrators group can access the User
Management command.
Accessing User To open User Management:

Management 1. From the Tools menu, select User Management.
The User Management dialog is displayed.
The User Management dialog contains the following buttons:
Button Description
New User Creates a new user.
New Group Creates a new group.
Edit Edits the currently selected group in the Groups list or the currently
selected user in the Users list.
Delete Deletes the currently selected group in the Groups list or the
currently selected user in the Users list.
Close Closes the User Management dialog.
Help Launches Metercat Help for User Management.
2. Select the appropriate group in the Groups list; the Users list changes to
display the users that are currently assigned to that group.
Note: The -- All Users -- group name displays all users defined in
Metercat regardless of their group memberships.
3. Click Close to close the User Management dialog and return to the main
window.
Adding a new group To add a new group to Metercat:

1. From the Tools menu, select User Management.
6. Managing users
2. Click New Group.

An empty Group Information dialog is displayed.
3. Check Active to make the group’s settings enabled.
4. Enter group information as described in “Entering group information” on
page 53.
Entering group information

The Group Information dialog allows you to view or edit a group’s information
and settings.
The following actions may be performed using the Group Information dialog:
• add a group
• change a group’s information
• set a group’s status
To enter group information:
1. Select the General tab and enter the new group’s information as described
in “General tab” on page 53.
2. Select the Privileges tab and check the needed access levels for the various
items as described in “Privileges tab” on page 54.
3. Select the Viewsets tab and select those viewsets to which the group needs
access as described in “Viewsets tab” on page 55.
4. Select the Functions tab and select those functions to which the group needs
access as described in “Functions tab” on page 56.
5. Select the Programs tab and select those programs to which the group
needs access as described in “Programs tab” on page 56.
6. Select the Membership tab and select the users who should be members of
the new group as described in “Membership tab” on page 57.
7. Select the Meter Access Level tab and select the group’s appropriate
Password Set for each meter family and Password Level as described in
“Meter Access Level tab” on page 57.
8. After adding the information in the applicable tabs, click OK to complete the
addition or Cancel to exit the Group Information dialog without adding the
new group.
General tab
The General tab allows you to define the new group’s general information.
To enter or edit the group’s general information:
1. Leave Active checked if you want the group’s status to be active.

Note: To set the group’s status to Inactive, uncheck the Active
checkbooks. Users can not log on to Metercat as members of
an inactive group.
2. Enter the Group Name (required).
3. Enter the Description.
4. Enter any Notes (such as, recording the date of changes make to the group’s
information).
6. Managing users
Privileges tab
The Privileges tab allows you to set the level of access that a group has, including
access to specific functionality.
The Administrator’s group is the only group with the Administer Groups and
Users privileges that allow the following actions:
• create, edit, or delete groups and users
• access the Tools > EA_MS Synchronization > Edit Options command
Additionally, the Administrator’s group can allow other groups to access user
management for the purpose of authorizing other groups’ privileges. The
administrator may authorize other groups with access for the following tools:
• Authorize Functions
• Authorize Viewsets
• Authorize Programs
• Manage Meter Passwords
Depending on which parameters are authorized (that is, functions, viewsets,
programs or meter password management), the group with Authorize privileges
can authorize other groups for the specified tool.
Note: User groups will only be able to edit other Group’s information
to which they have Authorize privileges. For example, a group
with the Authorize Viewsets privilege will only be able to edit
another group’s Viewsets settings (see “Viewsets tab” on
page 55).
To set privileges for a group:
1. Check each privilege allowed for the group:

• Manage Meter Passwords - allows the group to add, change, or delete
meter passwords (see Chapter 12, “Managing meter passwords”)
• Allow EA_MS Synchronization - allows the group to synchronize Metercat
with an EnergyAxis Management System (EA_MS) (see Chapter 8,
“Synchronizing with EA_MS”)
Note: Groups with the Allow EA_MS Synchronization privilege can
also communicate with EA_MS meters provided that the group
also has the View Phone Book Entries privilege and has access
to at least one function to select in the Connection bar. The
communication is allowed in both Cleartext with Authentication
and Ciphertext with Authentication depending on the
configuration of the meter.
• Edit System Preferences - allows a group to edit system preferences (see
Chapter 5, “Setting system preferences”)
• Authorize Functions - allows a group to authorize other groups’ access to
function management
• Create/Edit Functions - allows a group to create and modify functions (see
Chapter 9, “Managing functions”)
• View Functions - allows a group to view functions but make no
changes.
• Authorize Viewsets - allows a group to authorize other groups’ access to
viewset management
• Create/Edit Viewsets - allows a group to create and modify viewsets (see
Chapter 14, “Managing viewsets”)
6. Managing users
• Authorize Meter Programs - allows a group to authorize other groups’

access to programs but make no changes
• Create/Edit Meter Programs - allows a group to create and modify
programs (see Chapter 22, “Using the Program Editor”)
• View Meter Programs - allows a group to view meter programs but
make no changes
• Delete Meter Programs - allows a group to delete meter programs
• Export Meter Programs - allows a group to export meter programs (see
Chapter 19, “Exporting a program or component”)
• Import Meter Programs - allows a group to import meter programs (see
Chapter 20, “Importing a program or component”)
• Create/Edit Phone Book Entries - allows a group to create and modify
phone book entries (see Chapter 16, “Managing the Phone Book”)
• View Phone Book Entries - allows a group to view phone book entries
but make no changes
Note: Groups with the View Phone Book Entries privilege can also
communicate with EA_MS meters provided that the group also
has the Allow EA_MS Synchronization privilege and has access
to at least one function to select in the Connection bar. The
communication is allowed in both Cleartext with Authentication
and Ciphertext with Authentication depending on the
configuration of the meter.
• Delete Stored Readings - allows a group to delete Metercat stored
readings (see Chapter 13, “Managing stored readings”)
• Export Stored Readings - allows a group to export Metercat stored
readings
• Import Stored Readings - allows a group to import Metercat stored
readings
• Launch Alpha Keys - allows a group to launch Alpha Keys (see “Starting
Alpha Keys software” on page 25)
Viewsets tab
The Viewsets tab allows you to select the viewsets that members of the group can
use to view particular subsets of meter data. Different viewsets allow viewing of
different sets of meter data. See Chapter 14, “Managing viewsets” for details on
the type of meter information each view displays.
Note: You may also use Viewset Management to add or remove

group access (see Chapter 14, “Managing viewsets” for details.)
Adding a viewset
To add a viewset to a group’s Enabled Viewsets list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired viewsets from the
Available Viewsets list.
2. Click Add to move the selected viewsets to the Enabled Viewsets list.
— OR —
Click All to move all of the available viewsets to the Enabled Viewsets list.
Note: Any group with create/edit privileges for viewsets (see
“Privileges tab” on page 54) can define group access rights for
any viewsets they create at the time they are created.
6. Managing users
Removing a viewset
To remove a viewset from a group’s Enabled Viewsets list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired viewsets from the
Enabled Viewsets list.
2. Click Remove to move the selected viewsets to the Available Viewsets list.
— OR —
Click All to remove all of the viewsets from the Enabled Viewsets list.
Functions tab
The Functions tab allows you to select the functions that members of the group
may execute.
Note: You may also use the Function Builder to add or remove a
group’s access to a function (see Chapter 9, “Managing
functions” for details.).
Adding a function
To add a function to a group’s Enabled Functions list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired functions from the
Available Functions list.
2. Click Add to move the selected functions to the Enabled Functions list.
Note: Any group with create/edit privileges for functions (see
any new functions they create at the time they are created.
Removing a function
To remove a function from a group’s Enabled Functions list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired functions from the
Enabled Functions list.
2. Click Remove to move the selected functions to the Available Functions list.
Programs tab
The Programs tab allows you to select the meter programs that members of the
group can load into meters.
Note: Creating, editing and viewing programs is controlled by the
Group Management Privileges tab. Executing functions is
controlled by the Group Management Functions tab.
When building a function, the selection of a default program on the Program task
configuration form is unrestricted. See “Program task” on page 134 for details.
Adding a program
To add a program to a group’s Enabled Programs list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired programs from the
Available Programs list.
2. Click Add to move the selected programs to the Enabled Programs list.
Note: Any group with create/edit privileges for programs (see
any new programs they create at the time they are created.
6. Managing users
Removing a program
To remove a program from a group’s Enabled Programs list:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the desired programs from the
Enabled Programs list.
2. Click Remove to move the selected programs to the Available Programs list.
Membership tab
The Membership tab allows you to select those users who will be members of the
group.
Note: You may also use User Information to add or remove a user
from a group (see “Entering user information” on page 61 for
details).
Adding users to a group

To add a user to a group:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the logon names of the desired
users from the Non-members list.
2. Click Add to move the selected users to the Member Users list; click All>> to
add all users to the group.
Note: Adding a non-member to the Member Users list updates the
user’s information.
Removing users from a group

To remove a user from a group:
1. Using either the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key, select the logon names of the desired
users from the Member Users list.
2. Click Remove to move the selected user to the Non-member Users list; click
<<All to remove all users from the group.
Meter Access Level tab

The Meter Access Level tab allows you to select the meter password set that the
group will use to communicate with Elster meters. Each ANSI C12.19 password set
contains three passwords (read only, billing read, and unrestricted). The meter
access level determines which of the three passwords in the password set is
used when members of the group attempt meter communications.
The REX password set is one 8-digit password (padded with zeros on the right if
less than 8 digits are entered) that is used to communicate through the optical
port only.
Note: The password set and meter access level do not affect which
Metercat features are available to members of the group (this is
determined by the Privileges tab). For example, a group that
has an unrestricted password has only those features and
functions as determined by the Privileges tab, Viewsets tab,
Functions tab, and Programs tab.
See Chapter 12, “Managing meter passwords” for detailed information on meter
password sets.
6. Managing users
Note: To configure user settings when Metercat is configured as a

Single User system, from the Tools menu, select Account
information. See “Meter Access Level tab” on page 35 for details
on setting single user meter password sets.
Figure 6-12. Group information - Meter Access Level tab

.
To set a group’s meter password options:

1. From the ANSI C12.19 Password Set drop list, select the password set the
group will use to communicate with A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters.
Note: The Elster default password set consists of 20 zeros for all
password levels.
Note: For IP AxisLink routers, the Billing Read Password is used for
remote access to the router’s web interface by EA_MS and for
local access using the router’s Mini-B USB port.
2. To use Alpha Keys to upgrade ALPHA Plus meters, select the ALPHA Plus
Password Set the group will use to communicate with ALPHA Plus meters.
Note: Alpha Keys uses only the Unrestricted meter password for
communicating with an ALPHA Plus meter and uses the
Unrestricted optical password for a meter programmed with a
non-zero Device ID.
3. For A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meters, select the appropriate type of
Password Level for ANSI C12.19 Meter Communications.
Note: Elster recommends that each password level within a
password set should be different because the meter compares
the transmitted password with its programmed passwords in
sequence: 1) highest, 2) normal, and then 3) lowest. If the Ready
Only password is the same as the Unrestricted password,
theoretically a Read Only group could gain unrestricted access
to the meter.
6. Managing users
• If Read Only Password is selected, members of this group will only be

able to use the lowest level meter password of the selected password
set.
• If Billing Read Password (Allow Demand Reset) is selected, members of
this group will be able to use the billing read meter password of the
selected password set.
• If Unrestricted Password is selected, members of this group will be able
to use the highest level password of the selected password set.
4. For REX meters, select the appropriate Password from the drop list.
Changing a group’s To change a group’s information:

information 1. From the Tools menu, select User Management.
2. Select the group’s name from the Groups list.
3. Click Edit.
The Group Information dialog is displayed with the current group settings.
4. Edit the group’s information on any of the seven tabs as needed:
• General tab
• Privileges tab
• Viewsets tab
• Functions tab
• Programs tab
• Membership tab
• Meter Access Level tab
5. After editing the information in the applicable tabs, click OK to save your
changes or Cancel to exit the Group Information dialog without saving your
changes.
Deleting a group Note: You cannot delete a group if the account you are using is a
member of that group. See “Removing users from a group” on
page 57.
Occasionally you may need to delete a group from Metercat.
Note: If you prefer to assign an inactive status rather than deleting a

group, see “Changing a group’s status” on page 60.
Note: The Administrators group cannot be deleted nor made inactive.
To delete an existing group:

3. Click Delete.
Metercat prompts you to confirm the deletion.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the selected group; click No to
cancel the command.
6. Managing users
Changing a group’s Instead of deleting a group from Metercat, you may set the group’s status to
status inactive. This would mean any users who were members of only that one group
would be unable to perform any work using Metercat. However, users who are
also members of other active groups could continue to perform those activities for
which the active groups were granted privileges.
To change an existing group’s status:

3. Click Edit.
The Group Information dialog is displayed.
4. Uncheck the Active box to set the group’s status to inactive.
5. Click OK to save your change and return to the User Management dialog.
Adding a new user To add a new user to Metercat:

2. Click New User.
An empty Account Information dialog is displayed with three tabs: General,
Details, and Notes.
3. Select the General tab and enter the new user’s general information as
described in “General tab” on page 62.
4. Select the Details tab and enter detailed information on the new user as
described in “Details tab” on page 62.
5. Select the Notes tab and enter any notations on the new user as described
in “Notes tab” on page 63.
6. After you have entered all of the relevant information regarding the new
user, click OK to complete the addition and return to the User Management
dialog.
Changing a user’s To change a user’s information:

information 1. From the Tools menu, select User Management.
2. Select the user’s name from the Users list.
Note: If you do not see the user’s name in the Users list, select the --
All Users -- group to view all users.
3. Click Edit.
The Account Information dialog is displayed.
An Administrator may edit information for any of the following tabs:
• General tab
• Details tab
• Notes tab
6. Managing users
4. After editing the user’s information in the applicable tabs, click OK to save
your changes or Cancel to exit the Account Information dialog without
saving your changes.
Deleting a user To ensure data integrity, no existing user should be deleted from Metercat;
instead, you should set the user’s status to inactive. However, if a particular user
has performed no work in Metercat (that is, there are no data records associated
with the particular user), you may delete the user from the system without risking
data integrity.
If you prefer to set a user to an inactive status rather than deleting them from the
database, see “Changing a user’s status” on page 61.
Note: The Administrator user cannot be deleted nor can it be made

inactive.
To delete an existing user:

2. Select the desired user’s name from the Users list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the selected user or click No to
cancel the command.
Changing a user’s status A user’s status may be either active or inactive. If a user leaves the company, you
can set the status to inactive. This action would allow you to continue to view all of
the user’s information, but the user will have no system access.
To set an existing user’s status:

2. Select the user’s name from the Users list.
3. Click Edit. to display the Account Information dialog.
4. Uncheck the Active box to make the user inactive.
Check the Active box to make the user active.
5. Click OK to confirm your change and return to the User Management dialog
or click Cancel to exit the Account Information dialog without saving your
changes.
Entering user information The User Information dialog allows you to perform the following actions:
• change a user’s information

• set a user’s status (that is, to active or inactive)
6. Managing users
Clicking New User or Edit from the User Management dialog displays the User
Information dialog with the following tabs:
• General tab
• Details tab
• Notes tab
Note: You must be a member of the Administrators group to enter or
change any user information.
General tab
The General tab allows you to define a new user’s or edit an existing user’s logon
name, password and group associations.
To enter or change a user’s general information:
1. Leave Active checked if you want the user status to be active.

Note: To set the user’s status to Inactive, uncheck the Active check box.
Inactive users can not log on to Metercat.
2. Enter a Meter Programmer’s Identifier if you want the user to have a
programmer’s ID different from the default value assigned. ANSI requires
that the number be unique and between 2 and 9999. Clicking the up or
down arrows automatically selects the next available number in the
sequence.
Note: This number will be stored in the meter when it is programmed
by the user.
3. Enter the Logon Name (required). The logon name may consist of any
alphanumeric string.
4. Enter the Logon Password (optional).
Note: Leaving the password blank allows the user to access Metercat
without entering a password.
5. Enter the logon password in the Confirm box to verify that you entered it
correctly (required unless the password is blank).
6. From the Available Groups list, select a group and click Add to add the user
to the group (Member Groups list); repeat for each additional group you
want the user to be a member.
Note: You may also use the Group Management > Membership tab
to add/remove users.
7. After you have entered or changed the user’s general information, click OK
to save your changes and return to the User Management dialog or select:
• the Details tab to enter user details
• the Notes tab to enter notes about the user
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to enter detailed information about the user (for
example, full name, job description, phone number, etc.).
Note: You do not have to enter any information on this tab.

6. Managing users
To enter or change a user’s information:
1. Enter the user’s Full Name (optional).

2. Enter the user’s Description (optional).
3. Enter the user’s E-mail address (optional).
4. Enter the user’s Phone number (optional).
5. Enter any Other Phone number (optional).
6. Enter the user’s Pager number (optional).
7. Enter the user’s Fax number (optional).
8. Enter the user’s Address (optional).
9. After you have entered or changed the user’s detailed information, click OK
to save your changes and return to the User Management dialog or select:
• the General tab to change the user’s logon name, password, status, or
group memberships
• the Notes tab to enter notes about the user
Notes tab
Note: You must be a member of the Administrator group to view or
edit this tab.
The Notes tab allows you to enter information or remarks about a user. Possible
entries could include:
• creation and creator date

• changes to group assignments
• changes to status
To add notes about a user:
1. Enter the desired information in the Notes tab (for example, date created,
creator’s name, and a log of any changes to the user’s information).
2. After you have entered or changed the user’s notes, click OK to save your
changes and return to the User Management dialog or select:
• the General tab to change the user’s logon name, password, status, or
group memberships
• the Details tab to enter user details
Changing a your user See “Changing your Metercat password” on page 37.
password
7 SECURITY AUDIT LOG
Metercat includes logging of security-related Metercat events (adding a new

user, user login, etc.) to the Windows Application Event Logs. You can view these
events using the Windows Event Viewer.
Table 7-1. Metercat generated security events

Event description Event Code
create new user 102
create new user group 105
change user 103
change user group 106
delete user 104
delete user group 107
user login success 100
user login failure 100
user logoff 101
create new EA_MS config 108
change EA_MS configuration 109
delete EA_MS configuration 110
perform EA_MS synchronization 111
change system configuration 112
create new meter password set 113
change meter password set 114
delete meter password set 115
execution of task on C12.22 encrypted communication 116
security failure in ANSI C12.xx communication 117
export meter program 120
import meter program 121
execution of Activate Factory WAN Key task 122
execution of Activate Factory LAN Key task 123
execution of Change Password task 124
7. Security audit log
Viewing Metercat To view a list of Metercat generated security events:

security events 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Event Viewer.
The Event Viewer is displayed.
2. Select Application from the left pane.
3. Sort the Source column by clicking the column header.
4. Scroll down the sorted list to find events with Metercat listed as the Source.
Viewing only Metercat events list

To create a filter to view only Metercat-related events:
1. With the Event Viewer displayed, select Application in the left pane.
2. Right click on Application and select View > Filter.
The Application Properties dialog displays the Filter tab.
3. From the Event Source drop list, select Metercat.
4. Click OK.
The Event Viewer displays only Metercat application events.
Viewing Metercat event details

To view details on a Metercat security event:
1. In the Event Viewer, select a Metercat sourced event from the list.
2. Double click the event.
The Event Properties dialog is displayed.
About common event format

Metercat generated security events are recorded according to the CEF (common
event format) specification. The CEF formatted log details are captured in the
Description field of the log entry in the Event Properties dialog. The CEF Description
consists of two parts:
• CEF header
• CEF extension
See “Security events details and examples” on page 68 for additional examples
of CEF Metercat-sourced security events.
CEF header
The following text illustrates a CEF header:
CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG
3.4.0|SecurityServiceOrMechanism(9)|AuthenticationSuccess(799
)|Information(6)
The CEF header has a fixed number of fields, specified below. The fields are
separated by the '|' character:
• Version of the CEF log format:
• CEF:0'
• 0 is the first CEF version
• Device vendor:
• Elster
• Device Product:
• Metercat
• Device Version:
• example: 3.4.0.0
• Signature ID
• general category of the event
• example: securityServiceOrmechanism(9)
• Name attribute
• Indicates probable cause of the event
• Each Signature ID has a specified list of possible name attributes
• example: AuthenticationSuccess(799)
• Severity
• Severity of the event
• example: Information(6)
CEF extensions
This is an example of the CEF extension fields, for the specific case of the User
Login event:
externalID=0 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-1369e00a9684}
suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA}
suser=Administrator reason=user login cat=securityAudit(1)
rt=Nov 01 2011 14:01:47 outcome=success cs3Label=eventId
cs3=100
The extension part follows the header and can be divided in two parts:
• Standard extension attributes

• Custom extension attributes
The Standard extension attributes are:
• External ID
• externalID - a sequentially increasing number assigned to each event
• Device reporting the event
• deviceExternalID - the computer machine GUID where Metercat is
installed
• The machine GUID is generated at windows installation and is
stored at
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Cryptography\Machi
neGuid
• Who attempted the action (source)
• suid (source user ID) - User GUID in Metercat database
• suser (source user name) - User name in Metercat database
• Destination of attempted action
• CEF extension fields (attributes) are dependent on the specific event; not
all events have these fields
For example for the "Create New User" event the following extension
attributes are captured by the event:
• duid (destination user ID) - User GUID in Metercat database

• duser (destination user name) - User name in Metercat database
• What is the attempted action
• reason - free format string (max 1023 char) describing the event, for
example, 'user login'
• When the action was attempted
• rt (receipt time)
• certain events (for example, perform EA_MS synchronization) may also
record 'start' and 'end' times
• time is GMT (no time zone offset applied)
• Result of the attempted action
• Outcome
• success
• failed
• Category of the event
• cat - always set as 'securityAudit(1)'
The Custom Extension attributes are:
• Original or Removed Values

The purpose of this custom extension is to capture, for configuration change
events, the values before the change event.
• For example when a Metercat Administrator changes a user name
and/or ID of a certain user, the origRemValues field contains the values
before the change
• Another example is when a user group is changed and Enable
Programs are removed; the origRemValues field contains the
programs that were removed. Similarly for Functions and Viewsets.
• cs1Label
• set as 'origRemValues'
• this is the description label for the custom extension
• origRemValues
• value is captured with "name: value" syntax
• multiple values are separated by the ";" character
• Modified or Added Values
The purpose of this custom extension is to capture, for configuration change
events, the values after the change event.
• For example when a Metercat Administrator changes a user name
and/or ID of a certain user, the modAddValues field contains the
values after the change.
• Another example is when a user group is changed and Enable
Programs are added; the origRemValues field contains the programs
that were added. Similarly for Functions and Viewsets.
• cs2Label
• set as 'modAddValue'
• modAddValues
• value is captured with "name: value" syntax

• multiple values are separated by the ";" character
• Event ID
• cs3Label
• set as 'eventId'
• eventId
• set according to the Event code number in Table 7-1 on page 64.
Security events details

and examples
Event ID Type Description and examples Notes
create new 102 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat| The Administrator user
user 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| created the new user
externalID=1 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- “TestUser”
1369e00a9684} duid={9C6C3A34-94CA-47B4-BD96-
0680987C341D} duser=TestUser suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-
ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator reason=create new
user cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 04 2011 16:43:22 outcome=success
cs3Label=eventId cs3=102
create new 105 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat| The Administrator user
user group 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| created the new group
externalID=2 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- “TestGroup”
1369e00a9684} duid={D8B5B23A-CA00-4A89-A847-
48E5068F8110} duser=TestGroup suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-
ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator reason=create new
user group cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 04 2011 16:51:27
outcome=success cs3Label=eventId cs3=105
change user 103 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| changed the
externalID=3 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- configuration of
1369e00a9684} duid={9C6C3A34-94CA-47B4-BD96- “TestUser”.
0680987C341D} duser=TestUser suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965- The Logon name was
ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator reason=edit user “TestUser” and was
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 04 2011 17:39:03 outcome=success changed to “TestUser1”,
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1=Meter Programmer's Identifier: "3" Log the “Meter
On Name: "TestUser" cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=Meter Programmer’s
Programmer's Identifier: "5" Log On Name: "TestUser1" Identifier” was 3 and
cs3Label=eventId cs3=103 was changed to 5.

group 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| changed the
externalID=15 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- configuration of
33b148cf28f5} duid={147D13E1-52E2-49DB-A993-7B73BBF302B4} “TestGroup”.
duser=TestGroup suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4- The name of the group
3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator reason=edit user group was “TestGroup” and
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 11 2011 18:18:56 outcome=success was changed to
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1=Group Name: "TestGroup" “TestGroup1”.
cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=Group Name: "TestGroup1" The “Authorize Viewset”
Privileges:"Authorize Viewsets" Enabled Functions:"Billing Read with privilege was added,
Reset" "Diagnostic Read" Enabled Programs:"A3D - 998 - Sample Functions were enabled
A3D - Demand Only" cs3Label=eventId cs3=106 for the group: Billing
Read with Reset"
"Diagnostic Read
Programs were
enabled for the
group:"A3D - 998 -
Sample A3D - Demand
Only", etc.
delete user 104 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| deleted the “TestUser”
externalID=5 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- user
1369e00a9684} duid={9C6C3A34-94CA-47B4-BD96-
0680987C341D} duser=TestUser1 suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-
ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator reason=delete user
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 04 2011 18:07:41 outcome=success
group 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| deleted the
externalID=6 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- “TestGroup1” user group
1369e00a9684} duid={D8B5B23A-CA00-4A89-A847-
48E5068F8110} duser=TestGroup1 suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-
group cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 04 2011 18:11:23
user login 100 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
success 3.4.0|SecurityServiceOrMechanism(9)|AuthenticationSuccess(799)|In logged in successfully
formation(6)|
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
1369e00a9684} suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA}
suser=Administrator reason=user login cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov
01 2011 14:01:47 outcome=success cs3Label=eventId cs3=100
user login 100 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG Someone attempted to
failure 3.4.0|SecurityServiceOrMechanism(9)|AuthenticationFailure(750)|Inf login as Administrator
ormation(6)| user, but failed.
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
04 2011 18:28:15 outcome=failed cs3Label=eventId cs3=100

Read with Reset"
"Diagnostic Read
Programs were
enabled for the
group:"A3D - 998 -
Sample A3D - Demand
Only", etc.
1369e00a9684} duid={9C6C3A34-94CA-47B4-BD96-
1369e00a9684} duid={D8B5B23A-CA00-4A89-A847-
formation(6)|
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-

Read with Reset"
"Diagnostic Read
Programs were
enabled for the
group:"A3D - 998 -
Sample A3D - Demand
Only", etc.
1369e00a9684} duid={9C6C3A34-94CA-47B4-BD96-
1369e00a9684} duid={D8B5B23A-CA00-4A89-A847-
formation(6)|
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-

user logoff 101 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
3.4.0|SecurityServiceOrMechanism(9)|AuthenticationSuccess(799)|In logged off.
formation(6)|
1369e00a9684} duid={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029-
suser=Administrator reason=user logoff cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov
create new 108 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
EA_MS config 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| has created an new
externalID=10 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- EA_MS configuration for
1369e00a9684} dst=10.65.1.131 dhost=EAMS test server dpt=8490 “EAMS Test Server” with
suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} address 10.65.1.131 and
suser=Administrator reason=create EA_MS configuration port 8490.
change 109 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
EA_MS 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| has changed the
configuration externalID=11 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- password in the EA_MS
1369e00a9684} dst=10.65.1.131;8490 dhost=EAMS test server configuration named “
dpt=8490 suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} EAMS test server ”.
suser=Administrator reason=edit EA_MS configuration
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1= cs2Label=modAddValues
cs2=EA_MS Password: "password changed" cs3Label=eventId
cs3=109
CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG
3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)|
externalID=17 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- The Administrator user
33b148cf28f5} dst=10.65.1.131 dhost=EARG dpt=8490 changed the EA_MS
suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} User Account from
suser=Administrator reason=edit EA_MS configuration “Donato_sec_admin” to
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 11 2011 18:28:14 outcome=success “Donna_admin”.
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1=EA_MS User Account:
"Donato_sec_admin" cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=EA_MS User
Account: "Donna_admin" cs3Label=eventId cs3=109
delete EA_MS 110 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
configuration 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| deleted the EA_MS
externalID=15 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- server, “EAMS test
1369e00a9684} dst=10.65.1.131 dhost=EAMS test server dpt=8490 server”.
suser=Administrator reason=delete EA_MS configuration
perform 111 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
EA_MS 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| has performed a
synchronizati externalID=14 deviceExternalID={2705be3c-dd9a-49c8-8029- synchronization with
on 1369e00a9684} dst=10.65.1.131 dhost=EAMS test server dpt=8490 EA_MS. Note that this
suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} event records ‘start’ and
suser=Administrator reason=perform EA_MS synchronization ‘end’ time.
cat=securityAudit(1) start=Nov 04 2011 20:30:30 end=Nov 04 2011
20:30:49 outcome=success cs3Label=eventId cs3=111

change 112 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
system 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| added the location for
configuration externalID=265 deviceExternalID={60a24038-04b3-4696-84af- Network Storage files.
3e560008af95} duid={60a24038-04b3-4696-84af-3e560008af95}
suser=Administrator reason=edit system configuration
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1= cs2Label=modAddValues
cs2=Location of Network Storage files: "J:\" cs3Label=eventId
cs3=112
create new 113 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
meter 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| created a new
password set externalID=6 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- password set named
33b148cf28f5} duid={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-33b148cf28f5} "New Password Set".
suser=Administrator reason=create meter password
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1= cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=meter
type:"ANSI C12.19" password name:"New Password Set"
change meter 114 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
password set 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| has performed an Edit
externalID=6 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- on the Meter Password
33b148cf28f5} duid={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-33b148cf28f5} Set, “Test Password Set”,
suid={7CE2595E-FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} and changed the name
suser=Administrator reason=edit meter password of the set to “changed
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 11 2011 17:57:14 outcome=success name”.
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1=password name:"Test Password Set"
cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=password name:"changed name"
delete meter 115 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
password set 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| deleted the Meter
externalID=286 deviceExternalID={60a24038-04b3-4696-84af- Password Set, “Test
3e560008af95} duid={60a24038-04b3-4696-84af-3e560008af95} Password Set”.
suser=Administrator reason=delete meter password
cs1Label=orgRemValues cs1=meter type:"ANSI C12.19" password
name: "Test Password Set" cs2Label=modAddValues cs2=
execute of 116 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
task on 3.4.0|Operational(7)|UnspecifiedReason(2048)|Information(6)| executed a Diagnostic
C12.22 externalID=19 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- Read using TCP/IP
encrypted 33b148cf28f5} dst=166.142.73.112 duid=12749277 suid={7CE2595E- C12.22 with encryption
communicati FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator enabled.
on reason=execute task DiagnosticRead cat=securityAudit(1) start=Nov
11 2011 18:40:45 end=Nov 11 2011 18:43:44 outcome=success

security 117 Warning CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
failure in ANSI 3.4.0|Operational(7)|UnspecifiedReason(2048)|Warning(7)| attempted to perform a
C12.xx externalID=11 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- Diagnostic Read on a
communicati 33b148cf28f5} dst=unknown duid=11159862 suid={7CE2595E- meter using an invalid
on FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator password.
reason=security failure in C12.xx communication Attempts to
communicate with this meter failed due to invalid password. Retries
expired with error: 0x01 Error, no reason provided (ERR) in Security
cat=securityAudit(1) rt=Nov 14 2011 19:48:58 outcome=failed
export meter 120 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
program 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ServiceStateChange(699)|Information(6)| exported a Program.
externalID=23 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-
33b148cf28f5} duid={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-33b148cf28f5}
suser=Administrator reason=export program C:\Documents and
Settings\VaughanD\Desktop\A1800R - 003 - A1800R 3.2.0
RelayOptions Prog.ped cat=securityAudit(1) start=Nov 11 2011
18:57:43 end=Nov 11 2011 18:57:44 outcome=success
import meter 121 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
program 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ServiceStateChange(699)|Information(6)| imported a Program.
externalID=22 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-
33b148cf28f5} duid={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab-33b148cf28f5}
suser=Administrator reason=import program
Y:\DonnaV\10.65.1.131_EAMS\A1800R - 003 - A1800R 3.2.1
RelayOptions Prog.ped cat=securityAudit(1) start=Nov 11 2011
execution of 122 Information CEF:0|Elster|Metercat|DEBUG The Administrator user
Activate 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| executed the task,
Factory WAN externalID=5 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- Activate C12.22 WAN
Key task 33b148cf28f5} dst=unknown duid=11159862 suid={7CE2595E- Factory Key.
FAC7-4965-ACA4-3D1FE65462EA} suser=Administrator
reason=activate factory wan key task over PROTOCOL_ANSI_C12_18
Activate 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| executed the task,
Factory LAN externalID=3 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- Activate LAN Factory
Key task 33b148cf28f5} dst=unknown duid=12345678 suid={7CE2595E- Key.
reason=activate factory lan key task over PROTOCOL_ANSI_C12_18
Change 3.4.0|Operational(7)|ConfigurationDataChange(692)|Information(6)| executed the Change
Password externalID=26 deviceExternalID={ded2a615-c409-4e75-a2ab- Password task.
task 33b148cf28f5} dst=10.65.4.45 duid=13998320 suid={7CE2595E-
reason=change meter password task over
PROTOCOL_ANSI_C12_22 cat=securityAudit(1) start=Nov 11 2011
8 SYNCHRONIZING WITH
EA_MS
The EnergyAxis Management System (EA_MS) implements both WAN and LAN
communications encryption. In EnergyAxis, WAN communication is according to
ANSI C12.22 standard and implemented in A3 ALPHA/A1800 ALPHA meters
equipped with either an E-WIC or a W-WIC card and in IP AxisLink routers. LAN
communication occurs in the EA_LAN endpoints (for example, REX2 and
A3 ALPHA meters).
The C12.22 WAN communication packet is encrypted using a WAN encryption key
(or WAN key) which must be known by both the client (for example, Metercat,
EA_MS, etc.) and the endpoint. Similarly, a LAN communication packet is
encrypted using a LAN encryption key (or LAN key) which also must be shared
between the gatekeeper and its registered EA_LAN endpoints.
Each meter has a unique WAN key or LAN key. These unique keys are generated
using the following strings:
1. a utility-specific WAN seed or LAN seed that is common to all meters with
the same Utility ID
2. the meter’s manufacturing serial number (which is meter specific)
WAN keys are generated internally by the client and by the meter and, to ensure
security, the keys are never exchanged.
When Elster manufactures C12.22-enabled devices, a factory WAN seed and/or a

factory LAN seed is configured. The combination of the factory WAN seed and the
device serial number creates the factory WAN key. The combination of the factory
LAN seed and the device serial number creates the factory LAN key.
To change the WAN or LAN key in a population of meters, EA_MS sends a new
WAN or LAN seed to all meters that share the same utility ID. As a result, changing
the WAN or LAN seed in a meter results in a changed WAN or LAN key.
8. Synchronizing with EA_MS
Figure 8-13. EA_MS management of WAN and LAN seeds
The utility can change the WAN or LAN seed in the meter using the Security
Console in EA_MS. Occasionally, a utility may change a WAN or LAN seed in a
meter and then loses the seed. The only way to communicate with the device
again is to use Metercat to reset the meter’s WAN or LAN seed back to the factory
value (see “Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task” on page 96 and “Activate LAN
Factory Key task” on page 96).
To ensure that Metercat can communicate with ANSI C12.22-enabled

gatekeepers and meters (that is, using Ciphertext with Authentication) you must
synchronize Metercat with EA_MS. Synchronization downloads WAN seed data to
Metercat.
EA_MS provides a SOAP-compliant Web Services interface that allows clients (for
example, Metercat) to retrieve the WAN seed data stored in EA_MS. The
downloaded WAN seed data consists of:
1. A list detailing every active WAN seed value, WAN seed ID, Utility ID set.
2. For each WAN seed set, a list of meters that uses the set in terms of ANSI
C12.22 AP Title, IP address, etc.
The WAN seed value is needed by a client to communicate with ANSI C12.22-
capable meters using Ciphertext with Authentication. Communication between
the client and the server occurs using a secure encryption channel.
Figure 8-14. Metercat-to-EA_MS communication
When Metercat communicates with EA_MS, two layers of security are used:
1. Authentication using standard certificate verification and exchange of an

established session key.
At the Web Services level, the server must authorize the client. The client
includes the authorization credentials (user name/password) in the Web
Services request.
The EA_MS server verifies the credentials and, if valid, grants the client
access to Web Services interface for retrieving WAN seeds.
2. Secure communications proceeds and all data (that is, the Web Services
request and response) are encrypted using the session key.
Note: WAN seeds retrieved through Web Services are stored
encrypted in the Metercat database.
Before Metercat can be synchronized with EA_MS, an administrator must first
perform the following actions:
1. Downloading a self-signed certificate from EA_MS

2. Setting synchronization options in Metercat
Downloading a self- Before Metercat can communicate securely with EA_MS, you must download a
signed certificate from security certificate from the EA_MS server.
EA_MS To download a self-signed certificate from the EA_MS server:
1. Using Internet Explorer, access the EA_MS server by entering the HTTPS
address and port number:
https://<server name>:8490/mas
The browser displays an error message.

2. Left click on the Error displayed in the Address bar of the browser and select
View Certificate.
The Certificate dialog is displayed.
3. Select the Details tab.
4. Click Copy to File.
The Certificate Export Wizard is displayed.
5. Click Next.
The Export File Format selection dialog is displayed.
6. Select Base-64 encoded X.509 (.CER) and click Next.
The File to Export file name dialog is displayed.
7. Enter the File name for the certificate and click Browse.
8. Navigate to a folder location for the certificate and click Save.
9. Click Next.
The Completing the Certificate Export Wizard is displayed.
10.Click Finish.
A message displays indicating the certificate export was successful.
11. Click OK.
Setting synchronization Note: Only members of the Administrators group can set EA_MS
options in Metercat Synchronization Options.
Note: Only user groups with the Allow EA_MS Synchronization
privilege can synchronize Metercat with EA_MS. See “Adding a
new group” on page 52 for details.
Metercat can support synchronization with more than one EA_MS server. This is
useful for utilities who have, for example, both a production and a test server. You
can separately synchronize the servers and access the related meters
independently.
To configure Metercat to synchronize with EA_MS:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select EA_MS Synchronization > Edit
Options.
EA_MS Synchronization Options dialog is displayed.
2. Enter a Name for the EA_MS server (for example, Production server).
This is the name that Metercat calls the server.
3. Enter the EA_MS server Address or domain name including the HTTPS port
number (for example, 132.45.67.89:8490).
Note: Contact the EA_MS system administrator for the IP Address and
HTTPS port number.
4. Enter the EA_MS User Account (EA_MS log on ID) to be used by Metercat.
Note: The log on ID and Password must be created in EA_MS and
must have EA_MS Security Administrator privileges. Contact
your EA_MS System Administrator.
5. Enter the EA_MS Password (EA_MS log on password) to be used by
Metercat.
6. Click Load/Reload Certificate.
7. Navigate to the folder location where the security certificate was saved (see
“Downloading a self-signed certificate from EA_MS” on page 77).
8. Select the certificate and click OK.
9. If needed, check Prompt for Synchronization at System Startup to have
Metercat synchronize with EA_MS at every start up.
10.Click OK.
Deleting a server’s CAUTION: When the Server configuration is deleted by the user, all the
synchronization associated WAN seed data is also deleted in the Metercat
database.
configuration
To delete an EA_MS server from the synchronization configuration from Metercat:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select EA_MS Synchronization > Edit
Options.
EA_MS Synchronization Options dialog is displayed.
2. Select tab with the name of the server to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
Synchronizing with Note: Only user groups with the Allow EA_MS Synchronization
EA_MS privilege can synchronize Metercat with EA_MS. See “Adding a
To synchronize Metercat with EA_MS:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select EA_MS Synchronization > Synchronize
<server name> where <server name> is Metercat’s name for the EA_MS
server.
Note: Synchronization may take several minutes depending on the
number of ANSI C12.22 meters installed in the EA_MS server.
Metercat displays an hourglass until the synchronization is
finished.
For each meter imported from EA_MS, Metercat imports the following:
• communication information into the Phone Book
See “Viewing the phone book” on page 339.
• unrestricted and billing passwords
See “Viewing passwords for EA_MS devices” on page 202.
After the synchronization is complete, Metercat displays a message
indicating the number meters and WAN seeds that were synchronized.
2. Click OK.
Viewing downloaded Metercat imports the data received from EA_MS into the Phone Book. See
meter data “Grouping phone book entries” on page 340 for an example of viewing imported
EA_MS meters’ entries. See “Viewing passwords for EA_MS devices” on page 202
for details on imported meter passwords.
Communicating with See “TCP/IP C12.22” on page 190 for details on communicating with encryption-
encryption-enabled enabled devices.
devices See “Reading WIC-enabled meters over WAN” on page 358 for details on reading
a meter using a TCP/IP C12.22 connection.
See “Performing a diagnostic read of a router” on page 132 for details on reading
an IP AxisLink router using a TCP/IP C12.22 connection.
9 MANAGING FUNCTIONS
Note: To manage functions your group must have privileges. See

“Privileges tab” on page 54.
The Function Management tool allows you to view and manage metering
functions including:
• Building a function
• Viewing a function
• Metercat’s sample functions
• Changing a function
• Deleting a function
• Executing a function
• Repeating a function execution
• Troubleshooting task execution
Accessing Function To open the Function Management dialog:

Management 1. From the Tools menu, select Function Management.
The Function Management dialog is displayed.
Figure 9-15. Function Management
2. Click Close to close the dialog and return to the Metercat main window.
9. Managing functions
The following table describes the buttons found on the Function

Management dialog.
Button Description
New Builds a new function.
Note: You must be a member of an authorized group to perform this
action.
Edit Edits the currently selected function.
action.
Note: Double clicking a function opens the selected function for editing.
Note: Double clicking an included task opens the selected function and
displays the selected task’s parameter dialog for editing.
Delete Deletes the currently selected function.
action.
Close Closes the Function Management dialog
Help Opens Metercat Help for Function Management.
Metercat’s sample Metercat includes the following sample functions:

functions Function Name Task & Settings
Billing Read with Reset Billing Read task - storage mode = Append;
Meter ID; Perform Demand Reset; read the
following:
• Interval Data (Pulses) - All
• Interval Data (Instrumentation) - None
• History Log - All
• Event Log - All
• PQM Log - All
• Self Read Data - All
• Gatekeeper/Node Data - Status
Change Demand Overload Change Demand Overload task - Enter at Run
time
Change Demand Threshold Change Demand Threshold(s) task - Enter at
Run time
Change Higher Passwords Change Passwords task - change billing read
and unrestricted meter passwords
Change KYZ Divisor Change KYZ Output task - Enter at Run time
Change Modem Init String Change Modem Init String task - Enter at
Runtime
Change Read Only Password Change Passwords task - change Read Only
meter password
Change Remote Definition Replace Remote task
Change Time Change Time task - Enter at Run time; Do not
change Time Zone
Clear Battery Log Clear Battery Log task
Clear Event Flags Clear Event Flags task
Clear Event Log Clear Event Log task
Clear Values & Statuses Clear Data task
Function Name Task & Settings

Configure Special Option Board Configure Special Option Board task
Diagnostic Read Diagnostic Read task - storage mode
=Replace; reading filename ID = Account;
read the following:
• Interval Data (Pulses) - Number of Days
• Interval Data (Instrumentation) - Number of
Days
• History Log - All
• Event Log - All
• PQM Log - All
• Self Read Data - All
• Gatekeeper/Node Data - Status
Edit Service Test Edit Service Test task
Program Program task
Register Edit Register Edit task
Reset Demand Demand Reset task
Turn OFF Test Mode Test Mode Off task
Turn ON Test Mode Test Mode On task
Unlock Service Unlock Service task
The following tasks are not included in any sample functions:
• Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task • Replace Rates and Dates task
• Activate LAN Factory Key task • Set DA I/O Relays task
• A3 Connect Service task • Set Interrupter Control Relay task
• A3 Disconnect Service task • Set LAN Radio Test Mode
• Change DLMS Password task • Turn PQM ON/OFF task
• Change Out Gatekeeper task • REX Activate LAN Factory Key task
• Change Utility ID task • REX Billing Reset task
• Clear PQM Data task • REX Change Password task
• Clear Read Without Power Data task • REX Change Utility ID task
• Change Pulse Divisor task • REX Clear Data task
• Edit PQM Thresholds task • REX Connect Service task
• IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task • REX Demand Reset task
• IP AxisLink Program task • REX Disconnect Service task
• Ping LAN Node task • REX Meter Identification Info task
• PQ Inspector task • REX Diagnostic Read task
• Replace PQM task • REX Change Optical Test Source task
• Replace Program task • REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode task
To use the above tasks you must define a function containing the desired task.
See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
Building a function To build a new function:

2. Click New.
The Function Builder dialog is displayed with two tabs: Function Definition
and Access Control.
3. Select the Function Definition tab to enter the new function’s information.
4. Select the Access Control tab to select those groups that will have access to
the new function.
5. If desired, enter a Keyboard Shortcut to assign a key combination (for
example, Ctrl + Shift + L, Ctrl + T, etc.) to the function (see “Assigning function
shortcuts” on page 29 for recommended key sequences.
6. After selecting functions and groups, click OK to return to the Function
Management dialog.
Function Definition tab

The Function Definition tab allows you to select from a list of Available Tasks those
Included Tasks that will be executed by the function.
Note: Metercat provides a set of tasks to be used in building functions.

See “Available tasks” on page 95 for more detailed information.
Entering function definition information

To enter the new function’s definition information:
1. Enter the Function Name (for example, Change Meter ID for a program task
with the Meter ID parameter set to Enter at Run Time).
2. To add or remove tasks:
a. From the Available Tasks listing select a task you want to be performed by
the function on a meter and click Add to add the selected task to the
bottom of the Included Tasks list.
Note: Using either the <Shift> or the <Ctrl> keys you can select more
than one task to add to the list.
Note: You may add more than one of the same tasks to the Included
Tasks list. Elster recommends that only one Program task be
included in a function definition.
Note: REX meter tasks cannot be included with A3 ALPHA meter tasks
in a function definition.
b. Select a task from the Included Tasks list and click Remove to remove the
selected task from the Included Tasks list.
c. Click All to remove all Included Tasks.
Note: See “Available tasks” on page 95 for detailed information on
tasks.
3. Depending on the task added, a Parameters dialog may display for you to
set the configuration settings of the selected task.
4. To change the execution order of the Included Tasks list:
a. Select a task from the Included Tasks list and click Up to move the
selected task up one position in the list (that is, it will execute earlier).
b. Select a task from the Included Tasks list and click Down to move the
selected task down one position in the list (that is, it will execute later).
5. Select the Access Control tab to add groups to the Enabled Groups list or
click OK to save the new function and return to the Function Management
dialog.
Access Control tab

Note: This tab is only seen when Metercat is configured as a multi-
user system. See “Configuring the user environment” on
page 38 for details.
The Access Control tab allows you to select those groups that will be able to
execute the new function.
Enabling a group’s access

To grant a group access to a particular function:
1. From the Disallowed Groups list, select a group.

than one group to add to the list.
2. Use the arrow buttons (see “Using movement buttons” on page 24) to add
the group to the Enabled Groups list.
3. Click OK to save the new function and return to the Function Management
dialog.
Disabling a group’s access

To remove a group from access to a particular function:
1. Select a group from the Enabled Groups list.

than one group to add to the list.
2. Use the arrow buttons (see “Using movement buttons” on page 24) to move
the group to the Disallowed Groups list.
3. Click OK to save the new function and return to the Function Management
dialog.
Viewing a function To view a function’s settings:

2. Select a function from the Functions list.
3. Click Edit.
The Function Builder dialog is displayed with the selected function’s task list
displayed.
4. Select the tasks you need to view from the Included Tasks list.
5. Click Parameters to view the configuration settings for the selected task for
those tasks that have configurable parameters (for example, program task).
6. After you have reviewed the selected task, click Cancel to return to the
Function Builder dialog.
7. Repeat for any additional tasks in the function.
8. When you have completed reviewing the selected function, click Cancel to
close the Function Builder dialog and return to the Function Management
dialog.
Changing a function To change a function’s definition:

3. Click Edit.
— OR —
Double click a function or a function task to open the selected function in the
Function Builder.
Note: Double clicking an included task displays the parameter dialog
for editing.
The Function Builder dialog is displayed with the selected function’s task list
displayed.
4. Make the needed changes:
• Changing a task’s parameters
• Adding a task to a function
• Removing a task from a function
• Changing the task execution order
• Changing a function’s access control list
• Setting a function shortcut
5. After you have made all of your changes, click OK to save your changes or
Cancel to close the Function Management dialog and return to the Metercat
main window.
Changing a task’s parameters

To change a task’s parameters:
1. Select the task you need to change from the Included Tasks list.
2. Click Parameters to edit the settings for the selected task.
— OR —
Double click a task to open the selected task’s parameters.
Note: See “Available tasks” on page 95 for information on available
tasks and their parameters.
3. When you have completed your changes, click OK to save the changed task
or click Cancel to close the Function Builder dialog and return to the Function
Management dialog.
4. Repeat for any additional tasks.
Adding a task to a function

To add a task to the list of Included Tasks:
1. Select the tasks you need to add from the Available Tasks list.
than one task to add to the list.
2. Click Add.
Removing a task from a function

To remove a task from the list of Included Tasks:
1. Select the tasks you need to remove from the Included Tasks list.
than one task to remove from the list.
2. Click Remove.
Changing the task execution order

Tasks are processed in the order that they occur in the Function Builder Included
Tasks listing.
To change the execution order of Included Tasks:
1. From the Included Tasks list, select the task to be moved.

2. Click Up to move the task up in the list (the task executes earlier); click Down
to move the task down in the list (the task executes later).
Changing a function’s access control list

To change the Access Control list for the function:
1. Select the Access Control tab.

2. From the Enabled Groups list, select the group to remove and click Remove.
3. From the Disallowed Groups list, select a group to add and click Add to add
the group to the Enabled Groups list.
Setting a function shortcut

If desired, enter a Keyboard Shortcut to assign a key combination (for example,
<Ctrl> + <Shift> + <L>, <Ctrl> + <F1>, etc.) to the function (see “Assigning function
shortcuts” on page 29 for recommended key sequences.
Deleting a function To delete a function:

3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the selected function; click No to
cancel the command.
Executing a function To execute a function you must first:
1. Define a connection as described in “Adding a new connection” on

page 180.
2. Establish a connection with the meter as described in “Establishing
communications with a meter” on page 188.
3. Execute the created function as described below or see “Executing a

function using shortcuts” on page 30 for details in using function shortcut
keys to execute a function.
Note: Your group must have privileges and have the appropriate
password access level to execute the function. See “Functions
tab” on page 56 for details on setting function privileges and
“Meter Access Level tab” on page 57 for details on setting meter
password access level.
If the function contains more than one task and you do not have the proper
password access for one or more tasks, only those tasks to which you have
the proper password access will execute. For example, if your password
access level is Read Only and you attempt to execute a function containing a
Diagnostic Read task (password access Read Only) followed by a Demand
Reset task (password access Billing), the Diagnostic Read task will complete
successfully but the Demand Reset task will fail.
If the task execution order were reversed (that is, Demand Reset task
followed by a Diagnostic Read task) the Demand Reset task would fail and
the function will stop executing (the Diagnostic Read will not be initiated).
To execute a function on a connected meter:
1. From the Connections menu, select a Connection.

The connection toolbar is displayed with the Function and Viewsets drop-
lists.
2. If you are connecting to a meter on a modem sharing unit (MSU), enter the
Device ID.
3. From the Function drop-list, select the function.
Note: Programs are identified by their ‘Meter Type - ID Number -
Program Description’ for example, A3K - 002 - TOU, LP
Program.
Note: The Viewset list of the connection toolbar is enabled only if the
selected function contains a Read task (Billing or Diagnostic).
4. Click Go to execute the function.
After clicking Go, the button changes to Cancel.
Clicking Cancel during function execution stops all meter communication;
the progress indicator displays ‘cancelling’ message while the command is
processed.
5. After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter.
The area on the far right of the connection toolbar indicates the progress of
the tasks and any errors that occur during the execution.
6. After the meter is identified, a dialog is displayed for you to enter the task’s
run time settings.
Note: A dialog will appear for each task in the function regardless of
any settings of Prompt.
Note: The meter family (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA) and type (D/T/K/
R/Q) of the connected meter is used to filter the list of programs
displayed in the Program ID drop list. Additionally, the list is
filtered by programs that are available to the user’s logged on
group.
7. After you have entered all run time data, the tasks are processed in their
execution order (see “Changing the task execution order” on page 87).
Note: A progress indicator is displayed to the right of the Viewset

drop-list on the connection toolbar.
After the successful completion of the function:
• a function completion report is displayed (see “Function Completion
Report” on page 91 for details)
• the Repeat button is enabled (see “Repeating a function execution” on
page 89 for details)
Note: If an error occurs during the execution of a task, Metercat
terminates the execution and all tasks subsequent to the failed
task are not executed. If the error occurs after the meter is
identified, the error message is logged to the Function
Completion Report.
Repeating a function Repeatable functions

execution The following table lists the functions that can be repeated using the Repeat
button on the Connections toolbar:
Repeat without re-entering settings

Diagnostic Read task Change Modem Init String task
Billing Read task Change Out Gatekeeper task
Change Time task Clear Battery Log task
Demand Reset task Clear Data task
REX Change Password task Clear Event Flags task
REX Clear Data task Clear Event Log task
REX Connect Service task Clear PQM Data task
REX Diagnostic Read task Configure Special Option Board task
REX Demand Reset task IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task
REX Disconnect Service task IP AxisLink Program task
REX Meter Identification Info task Replace PQM task
Change Demand Overload task Replace Program task
Change Demand Threshold(s) task Replace Rates and Dates task
Change KYZ Output task Replace Remote task
Change Passwords task Set DA I/O Relays task
Change Pulse Divisor task Test Mode Off task
Turn PQM ON/OFF task
Unlock Service task
Optional to re-enter settings

Program task
• Account is different from <Factory Serial Num> or <Utility Serial Num>
• Meter ID is different from <Factory Serial Num> or <Utility Serial Num>
• Device ID is present and is different from Always Master
Replace Remote task
• Device ID is present
Must re-enter settings
Register Edit task Set DA I/O Relays task
Edit Service Test task
Edit PQM Thresholds task
Test Mode On task
Using the Repeat button

To execute a function again using the Repeat button:
1. After executing a function for the first time in a Metercat session, connect to
another meter.
Note: You must successfully execute the function the first time before
the Repeat button will be enabled.
2. Click Repeat button on the connection toolbar.
— OR —
Press F9 on the keyboard.
The function executes using the same run time settings from the first
execution.
A Completion Report will display after the first execution of a function. If the
Completion Report is not closed, for each use of the Repeat command,
details for the executed function will be appended to the open Completion
Report.
Function Completion A function completion report is composed at the end of function execution. This
Report report summarizes all activity performed by the function. The report is presented
in an HTML viewer and can be either saved or printed. Appendix B, “Report
Samples” contains samples of reports created by Metercat. See “Sample
program completion report” on page 350 for an example of a program
completion report.
Errors are also reported in the completion report (except for errors involving the
HTML file itself which are reported by a message dialog and errors that occur
prior to meter identification). Errors include: communications errors, data content
errors, file errors, and database errors.
The completion report may include the following information:

• Title
• Name of function
• Name of the logged-in user
• Time and Time Zone when function execution began (computer local)
• ID #1 and #2
• Sections for each task including:
• task name
• task success or failure
• if a program task was executed the following information is also
provided:
• Program ID
• Time Zone (for timekeeping meters only)
• IDs
• Factory Ke
• Adjusted Ke (if different from Factory Ke)
• Metering Application
• CT
• VT
• Multiplier
• Special Dates
• Demand Overload (if overridden or truncated)
• KYZ Divisor or KYZ Value1 (if overridden)
• Demand Threshold(s) (if truncated)
• Service Test Component
• PQM Component
• Remote Component
• Pulse Interval Data Recording status (ENABLED or disabled) and
allocation (in days)
• Instrumentation Set 1 and 2 interval data recording status (ENABLED or
disabled) and allocation (in days)
• Power Quality Monitoring status (ENABLED or disabled) and feature
status (ON or OFF)
1. Depends on System Preferences. See “Setting programming options” on page 47

for more information.
• Loss Compensation status (ENABLED or disabled) and whether

configured
If the function definition included a Billing or Diagnostic Read task, after reviewing
the report, click the form Close button to view the viewset’s data.
Troubleshooting task All tasks

execution Message: Attempts to communicate with this meter failed due to invalid
password.
You experience problems executing a task. The Function Completion Report error
message states “Attempts to communicate with this meter failed due to invalid
password.”
Corrective action
Verify with your Metercat Administrator that your group has access to the correct
password set and level to execute the specified task. See “Meter Access Level
tab” on page 57 for additional details.
Program task
Message: The program specified for this function is not available for the
connected meter.
The Program task is configured with a default Program ID and Prompt for
Override at Run Time is not checked. At function execution, instead of the run time
dialog you see an error message stating “The program specified for this function
is not available for the connected meter.” After acknowledging the message, the
Program Completion Report displays stating “The program specified for this
function is not available for the connected meter! The function will be canceled.”
— OR —
The Program task is configured with a default Program ID with Prompt for
Override at Run Time. At function execution, instead of the run time dialog you
see an error message stating “The program specified for this function is not
available for the connected meter.” You must select one of the available Program
IDs or click Cancel.
Corrective action
Verify that the program is available and is appropriate for the connected meter
type. Verify with your Metercat Administrator that your group has access to the
proper Program ID. The list of available programs depends on your Group’s
enabled programs (see “Programs tab” on page 56 for additional details).
Program task
PQM is not Turned On
The program’s PQM component has PQM ON checked and the meter shows that
PQM is ENABLED but a reading report PQM view shows the PQM ON is
unchecked.
Corrective action
Check the Program task that PQM is not set to Do Not Change. If it is, you can edit
the task parameters to change the PQM setting or you can turn PQM ON by
executing the Turn PQM ON/OFF task and selecting ON (if it is available to your
group).
Tasks by Password Level The following table lists tasks by password level.
Password Level Task

Read Only Diagnostic Read task
IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task
Billing Read Only tasks plus the following:
Billing Read task
Demand Reset task
Optical REX Activate LAN Factory Key task
REX Billing Reset task
REX Change Optical Test Source task
REX Change Password task
REX Change Utility ID task
REX Clear Data task
REX Connect Service task
REX Demand Reset task
REX Diagnostic Read task
REX Disconnect Service task
REX Meter Identification Info task
REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode task
Password Level Task

Unrestricted Read Only and Billing tasks plus the following:
Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task
Activate LAN Factory Key task
A3 Connect Service task
A3 Disconnect Service task
Change Demand Overload task
Change Demand Threshold(s) task
Change DLMS Password task
Change KYZ Output task
Change Passwords task
Change Modem Init String task
Change Out Gatekeeper task
Change Pulse Divisor task
Change Time task
Change Utility ID task
Clear Battery Log task
Clear Data task
Clear Event Flags task
Clear Event Log task
Clear PQM Data task
Clear Read Without Power Data task
Configure Special Option Board task
Disable Node Communication task
Edit PQM Thresholds task
Edit Service Test task
Enable Node Communication task
IP AxisLink Program task
Ping LAN Node task
PQ Inspector task
Register Edit task
Replace PQM task
Replace Program task
Replace Rates and Dates task
Replace Remote task
Set DA I/O Relays task
Set Interposing Control Relay task
Set Interrupter Control Relay task
Test Mode Off task
Test Mode On task
Turn PQM ON/OFF task
Unlock Service task
10 TASKS
Available tasks Metercat includes the following basic tasks to be used when you build a function:
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter tasks

Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task Disable Node Communication task
Activate LAN Factory Key task Edit PQM Thresholds task
Billing Read task Edit Service Test task
Change Demand Overload task Enable Node Communication task
Change Demand Threshold(s) task Ping LAN Node task
Change KYZ Output task PQ Inspector task
Change Modem Init String task Program task
Change Passwords task Register Edit task
Change Pulse Divisor task Replace PQM task
Change Time task Replace Program task
Change Utility ID task Replace Rates and Dates task
Clear Battery Log task Replace Remote task
Clear Data task Set LAN Radio Test Mode
Clear Event Flags task Set Interrupter Control Relay task
Clear Event Log task Test Mode Off task
Clear PQM Data task Test Mode On task
Configure Special Option Board task Turn PQM ON/OFF task
Demand Reset task Unlock Service task
Diagnostic Read task
A3 ALPHA meter
A3 Connect Service task Change Out Gatekeeper task
A3 Disconnect Service task Set DA I/O Relays task
A1800 ALPHA meter

Clear Read Without Power Data task Change DLMS Password task
Set Interposing Control Relay task
IP AxisLink router
Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task Clear Data task
Change Passwords task Clear Event Log task
Change Time task IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task
Change Utility ID task IP AxisLink Program task
Change Out Gatekeeper task Replace Rates and Dates task
REX, REX2 and gREX meters

REX Activate LAN Factory Key task REX Demand Reset task
REX Billing Reset task REX Diagnostic Read task
REX Change Optical Test Source task REX Disconnect Service task
REX Change Password task REX Meter Identification Info task
REX Change Utility ID task REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode task
REX Clear Data task REX Test Mode Off
REX Connect Service task REX Test Mode On
10. Tasks
Note: For each task, the indicated password level (Min. Password
Level) is the minimum level required to execute the specific task.
See “About meter passwords” on page 193 for more
information.
Activate C12.22 WAN Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Factory Key task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA, IP AxisLink
By adding an Activate C12.22 WAN Factory Key task to a function definition, the
function will restore the WAN Factory Default key in the meter’s WAN interface
card (WIC).
Note: This task may only be executed using the optical port for the
meter or the local Mini-B USB port of the IP AxisLink router.
Activating the C12.22 WAN Factory Key

To activate the C12.22 WAN Factory Key in a meter’s WAN interface card:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Activate
C12.22 WAN Factory Key task.
— OR —
Press the assigned function shortcut keys.
After clicking Go, the button changes to Cancel. Clicking Cancel during
function execution stops all meter communication.
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and if the meter
has a WIC Metercat resets the WAN C12.22 Key back to the Factory Key that
was originally programmed into the WIC.
Activate LAN Factory Key Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding an Activate LAN Factory Key task to a function definition, the function
will restore the LAN Factory Default key in the meter’s EnergyAxis network
interface card (EA_NIC).
Note: This task may only be performed on A3 ALPHA and A1800

ALPHA meters FW 4.0 or higher.
Activating the LAN Factory Key

To activate the LAN Factory Key in an A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter’s EA_NIC:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Activate LAN
Factory Key task.
— OR —
10. Tasks

After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and if the meter
has a EA_NIC Metercat resets the LAN Key back to the Factory Key that was
originally programmed into the EA_NIC.
A3 Connect Service task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA meter FW 4.3 and higher
Note: The polyphase service control switch is only available as an

option for Form 16S meters supporting 100-ampere (continuous)
operation and 120 V nominal service.
Note: This task requires the A3 ALPHA meter have the polyphase
internal service control switch. When the service control switch
is installed in the meter, the Status > General view will indicate
in the Options Board section: “A3 Polyphase Internal Disconnect
Control Board.”
Some A3 ALPHA meters come equipped with an optional polyphase service
control switch. The service control switch enables disconnection (open switch)
and reconnection (closed switch) of polyphase electrical service.
By adding an A3 Connect Service task to a function definition, the function will
close the service control switch restoring polyphase electrical service.
Note: This task will execute only if the switch’s storage capacitor is fully
charged and no load side voltage is present.
Since closing the service control switch when load side voltage is present can
result in equipment damage, personal injury, or death, the meter will not allow
the service control switch to close when load side voltage is present.
Closing the service control switch on an ALPHA meter

Note: You will need to define a function containing the A3 Connect
Service task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To connect the service (that is, close the service control switch) of a ALPHA meter:
1. Establish a connection with the meter with the optical probe as described in
“Establishing communications with a meter” on page 188.
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the A3 Connect
Service task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and displays the
Task Warning run time dialog.
10. Tasks
4. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the A3 Connect Completion
Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed) and the state of
the service control switch.
When the polyphase service control switch is closed, the potential indicators
on the meter LCD will return to the normal functioning state. See the
A3 ALPHA meter technical manual (TM42-2190 or TM42-2195) for details on
the meter’s LCD.
See “A3 Disconnect Service task” on page 98 for details on disconnecting service.
See the Polyphase service control for the A3 ALPHA meter product guide (PG42-
1026) for detailed information.
A3 Disconnect Service Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA meter FW 4.3 and higher
Note: The polyphase service control switch is only available as an

option for Form 16S meters supporting 100-ampere (continuous)
operation and 120 V nominal service.
is installed in the meter, the Status > General view will indicate
in the Options Board section: “A3 Polyphase Internal Disconnect
Control Board.”
Some A3 ALPHA meters come equipped with an optional polyphase service
control switch. The service control switch enables disconnection (open switch)
and reconnection (closed switch) of polyphase electrical service.
By adding an A3 Disconnect Service task to a function definition, the function will
open the service control switch disconnecting polyphase electrical service.
charged.
Opening the service control switch in an ALPHA meter

Note: You will need to define a function containing the A3 Disconnect
To disconnect the service (that is, open the service control switch) in a meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the A3
Disconnect Service task.
— OR —
ALPHA Task Warning run time dialog.
10. Tasks
4. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the A3 Disconnect
Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed) and
the state of the service control switch.
When the polyphase service control switch is open, the potential indicators
on the meter LCD will blink to indicate that phase voltages are missing. See
the A3 ALPHA meter technical manual (TM42-2190 or TM42-2195) for details
on the meter’s LCD.
The ALPHA meter LCD provides the following status codes for the service
control switch:
• F1 001000: Service control switch open
• F1 010000: Potential indicator warning
is opened in the meter, the Status > Conditions view will indicate
a warning: “Service Disconnect Switch is open.”
See “A3 Connect Service task” on page 97 for details on connecting service to the
meter.
See the Polyphase service control for the A3 ALPHA meter product guide (PG42-
1026) for detailed information.
Billing Read task Minimum Password Level: Billing

Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Billing Read task to a function definition, the function will perform a
billing read of the connected meter. The billing read file will be stored as an MSR
file in the Metercat\Readings\Billing folder.
Note: A successful Billing Read task will clear meter statuses.

Note: Based on your System Preferences > Setting time difference
options, a successful Billing Read may adjust the meter’s time.
Note: If you experience problems when reading a meter, ensure that
you have Full Access to Metercat’s \Config, \Readings, and
\Reports folders (and their subfolders). See your IS Administrator
for assistance.
Configuring the Billing Read task

To configure the Billing Read task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Billing Read function or a
function that includes the Billing Read task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Billing Read task.
4. Click Parameters.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-16. Billing Read task configuration
5. Select the Storage Mode for the reading file:

• None - a stored reading file will not be generated; data will be displayed
in the selected viewset
• Append - a new stored reading file will be created with each read (no
data is overwritten)
• Replace - the new stored reading file will replace (that is, overwrite) the
most recently stored billing reading for the same meter
6. Select the Reading Filename ID, that is, the meter’s ID used to create the
billing read filename:
• Account: [default]
• Meter ID:
See “Setting site ID labels” on page 44 for details on configuring ID labels.
7. Select to read Interval Data (Pulses):
• None - no load profiling data will be read
• All - all load profiling data will be read
• Unread - load profiling data that is not marked as read will be read
• Unread with Update - load profiling data marked as unread will be read
and the unread marker will be updated to indicate the data that has been
read
• Number of Days (specify a number from 1 to 999) - load profiling data for
the specified number of days will be read
8. Select to read Interval Data (Instrumentation):
• None - no instrumentation profiling data will be read
10. Tasks
• All - all instrumentation profiling data will be read

• Unread - instrumentation profiling data marked as unread will be read
• Unread with Update - instrumentation profiling data marked as unread
will be read and the unread marker will be updated to indicate the data
that has been read
• Number of Days (specify a number from 1 to 999) - instrumentation
profiling data for the specified number of days will be read
Note: The meter has separate unread markers for load profiling data
and instrumentation profiling data.
9. Select to read History Log:
• None - no history log data will be read
• All - all history log data will be read
10.Select to read Event Log:
• None - no event log data will be read
• All - all event log data will be read
11. Select to read PQM Logs:
• None - no PQM log or Sag log data will be read
• All - all PQM log and Sag log data will be read
Note: PQM and Sag statuses are always read.
12.Select to read Self Read Data:
• None - no self read data will be read
• All - all self read data will be read
13.Select to read Harmonic Content Data:
• None - no harmonic data will
be read
• All - all harmonic data will be read
14.Select to read Gatekeeper/Node Data:
Note: Only applies for A3 ALPHA meters with EA_Gatekeeper or
EA_NIC option boards.
Item Description Password Level
Status if the connected meter has an Read Only, Billing or
EA_Gatekeeper or an EA_NIC option board Unrestricted
only LAN status data will be read
All all LAN status and LAN read data will be Unrestricted
read
Note: For meters with EA_NIC, selecting All or All Except LP will read
status, configuration, and billing data (LP data will not be read).
Note: If the EA_NIC contains no data when the meter is read (that is,
no data yet has been stored in the option board or data has
been recently cleared), the task will succeed but a message will
appear in the function completion report “Reading of Internal
LAN Node Current Billing data failed.”
15.Check Perform Demand Reset to perform a demand reset in the meter after
a successful billing read.
16.Check Create PROFILE HHF to create an MV-90 HHF file whenever interval
data is read.
10. Tasks
Note: This setting is only available if Storage Mode is set to Append or

Replace and Interval Data (Pulses) is not set to None.
The HHF reading filename is based on the reading filename ID selection
and is placed in the \Metercat\Readings\HHF folder. See “Exporting stored
readings” on page 207 for more information on exporting files.
17.Click OK.
18.Click OK to exit the Function Builder.
See “Diagnostic Read task” on page 123 for diagnostic read task details.
Performing a read
See “Reading a meter” on page 359 for details on performing a billing read.
Change Demand Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Overload task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Change Demand Overload task to a function definition, the function

will change the current overload value programmed in the meter.
Configuring the Change Demand Overload task

To configure the Change Demand Overload task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Change Demand

Overload function or a function that includes the Change Demand Overload
task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change Demand Overload task.
The Change Overload Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Enter the new Overload value (range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is
0.0000).
Note: If the value is truncated at function execution, a note will appear
on the Function Completion Report.
6. Check Prompt for Override to enter overload value at task execution time;
otherwise, the default value entered as Overload will be programmed into
the meter.
CAUTION: The Register Multiplier, Demand Overload, and Demand

Threshold values cannot all be set to their maximum values. If
you set these to their maximum value, executing any of the
following tasks will fail: Program task, Change Demand
Overload task, Change Demand Threshold(s) task. For example,
if the Register Multiplier is set to 1000000.0 and you attempt to
change the Overload value to 999999.9999; the attempt will fail
with the error: The calculated Overload (kilo units): value has too
many significant digits.
7. Click OK.
10. Tasks
Changing demand overload

To change the demand overload value in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Change
Demand Overload task.
— OR —
Change Demand Overload run time dialog.
4. Enter the value for Overload within the range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999
[default is 0.0000].
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Demand
Overload Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed) and the new overload value.
Change Demand Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Threshold(s) task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Change Demand Threshold(s) task to a function definition, the

function will change the following:
• if the meter is single rate demand, a single (total) threshold is replaced
• if the meter is multi-rate (that is, TOU), four tiered thresholds are replaced
Configuring the Change Demand Threshold(s) task

To configure the Change Demand Threshold(s) task:

Thresholds function or a function that includes the Change Demand
Threshold(s) task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change Demand Threshold(s) task.
The Change Thresholds Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-17. Change Thresholds task configuration
5. Enter the value for a Single Rate Demand Threshold:

• Enter value in the range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is 0.0000)
• Prompt for Override at Run Time - check to enter value at task execution
time.
6. Enter the values for Multi-rate Demand Threshold:
• Rate A - Enter value: range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is 0.0000)
• Rate B - Enter value: range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is 0.0000)
• Rate C - Enter value: range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is 0.0000)
• Rate D - Enter value: range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999 (default is 0.0000)
• Prompt for Override at Run Time - for each rate, check to enter value at
task execution time.
Note: If any value is truncated at function execution, a note will
appear on the Function Completion Report.

7. Click OK.
10. Tasks
Changing demand thresholds

To change the demand threshold values in a meter:

Demand Threshold(s) task.
— OR —
Change Thresholds Task Configuration run time dialog.
4. For multi-rate meters, enter the appropriate value for each rate; for single
rate meters, enter the value.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Demand
Threshold Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed) and the new threshold values.
Change DLMS Password Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Change DLMS Password task to a function definition, the function will
change the Level 1 DLMS password.
Note: The Change DLMS Password task works on A1800 ALPHA
meters with firmware version 2.1 and higher.
Changing the DLMS password

To change the DLMS password in a meter:

DLMS Password task.
— OR —
Change DLMS Password Task run time dialog.
4. Enter the DLMS Password (up to 40 HEX characters [0-9, A-F]).
5. Click OK.
10. Tasks
Change KYZ Output task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Change KYZ Output task to a function definition, the function will
change the KYZ Divisor or KYZ Value that is currently programmed for the meter’s
relays.
Configuring the Change KYZ Output task

To configure the Change KYZ Output task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Change KYZ Output
function or a function that includes the Change KYZ Output task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change KYZ Output task.
The Change KYZ Output Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 10-18. Change KYZ Output task configuration
KYZ Value disabled KYZ Value enabled
Note: If KYZ Value is enabled you will see both KYZ Divisor and KYZ
Value. See “Setting programming options” on page 47 for
details.
5. For KYZ Divisor, enter a non-zero integer in the range of 1 to 999.
6. For KYZ Value, enter a number or select a non-zero number from the drop
list.
Note: The numbers listed in the drop list are dependent on the values
entered for KYZ Value in your System Preferences. Entering a
number will not add it to the list of values in the drop list. See
“Setting programming options” on page 47 for details.
7. Check Prompt for Override at Run Time to enter a different value at task
execution time.
8. Click OK.
10. Tasks
Changing KYZ output values

To change the KYZ Divisor or KYZ Value in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Change KYZ
Output task.
— OR —
Change KYZ Output Task run time dialog.
Note: For A1800 ALPHA meters and A3 ALPHA meters with firmware
3.01 or higher, if you enabled KYZ Value in your System
Preferences, you will see KYZ Value in the run time override
form.
Note: If you disabled KYZ Value in your System Preferences, you will
see KYZ Divisor in the run time override form.
Figure 10-19. Change KYZ Output run time
KYZ Value disabled KYZ Value enabled
4. Enter the value for the KYZ Divisor or select or enter the KYZ Value.
Note: Entering a number for the KYZ Value will not add it to the list of
default values in the drop list. To edit the listed values, edit
System Preferences > Setting programming options.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change KYZ Output
the new threshold values.
See “Program task” on page 134 and “Relay Options component” on page 460 for
other methods of setting the KYZ divisor and KYZ value.
10. Tasks
Change Passwords task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA, IP AxisLink
By adding a Change Passwords task to a function definition, the function will

change the specified meter passwords in the connected meter. See Chapter 12,
“Managing meter passwords” for more information on meter passwords.
You can use the function to change the Unrestricted and Billing passwords, the
Read Only password or all passwords in a connected meter.
Note: For the IP AxisLink router (both IPGKR and IPGWR), the
Unrestricted & Billing passwords are used by EA_MS; the Billing
password allows access to the router’s web interface and the
Unrestricted password provides full access by EA_MS and
Metercat. The Read Only password is used by Metercat users.
Metercat includes the following pre-defined functions for passwords:
• Change Higher Passwords

• Change Read Only Password
Configuring the Change Passwords task

To configure the Change Passwords task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Change Higher

Passwords or the Change Read Only Password function or a function that
includes the Change Passwords task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change Passwords task.
The Change Passwords Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Check Unrestricted & Billing to change the connected meter’s Unrestricted
and Billing passwords to the current Billing and Unrestricted meter
passwords in your group’s assigned meter password set (see “Meter
Access Level tab” on page 57 and Chapter 12, “Managing meter
passwords”).
6. Check Read Only to have the following options for the Read Only password:
• change the connected meter’s Read Only password to the current Read
Only password in your group’s assigned meter password set
• manually change the connected meter’s Read Only password by entering
a password at task run time
Note: If you manually enter a different password in the run time
dialog, the Read Only password in your group’s assigned
password set is not changed. It is up to you to update the Read
Only password in your group’s assigned password set, if
needed. See “Changing a password set” on page 202 for
details on changing a password set.
Note: If a meter has an EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC option board, the
passwords in the option board are updated to match those
written to the meter using this task.
10. Tasks
CAUTION: Metercat does not require that the first eight characters of each
access level password be unique when the Read Only
password is changed using this task. However, Elster strongly
recommends that the first eight characters of each password
level be unique from the other passwords (see “Passwords in
ANSI C12.19 meters” on page 194 for a more detailed
explanation of password encryption).
7. Click OK.
Changing the Read Only password

Changing the Read Only password with this task at run time will not change the
corresponding Read Only password in your group’s assigned password set. That
means each time you execute this task and enter a value other than the
displayed Read Only password displayed in the run time dialog, you must
manually enter the Read Only password. However, by changing the Read Only
password of your group’s assigned password set, the Change Passwords run
time dialog will display your group’s updated Read Only password (that is, you
only need to click OK to change the password in the connected meter).
To change the Read Only password in a meter:
1. If you wish to update the Read Only password in your group’s assigned
password set:
a. If your group has privileges to management meter passwords (see
“Privileges tab” on page 54), from the Tools menu select Meter Passwords
Management.
If your group does not have privileges, have your Metercat Administrator
perform the procedure.
b. Use the procedure described in “Changing a password set” on page 202
to change the Read Only password in your group’s assigned password
set.
c. Click OK to save your changes.
3. From the Function drop-list, select the Change Read Only Password function
or another function that contains the Change Passwords task.
— OR —
Change Passwords run time dialog.
The Change Passwords run time dialog displays the most recent Read Only
password in your group’s assigned password set.
10. Tasks
Note: If you are changing the Read Only and the Billing and
Unrestricted passwords, at task execution time you will see the
Change Passwords run time dialog for entering the Read Only
password. Billing and Unrestricted passwords do not have a
run time dialog because Metercat writes your group’s most
recent password set passwords directly to the meter.
5. If you have updated the Read Only password in your group’s assigned
password set to the new password, click OK.
Otherwise, enter a string of up to 20 alphanumeric characters and click OK.
CAUTION: Remember to change your group’s assigned password set’s

Read Only password if you have manually entered it using the
run time dialog. Failure to update your group’s assigned
password set will result in meter communication failure at a
later time.
Note: If a meter has an Gatekeeper module or EA_NIC option board,

the passwords in the option board are updated to match those
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Passwords

the new Read Only password. If the Billing and Unrestricted passwords
were changed, the completion report will indicate only that the task has
succeeded or failed.
Changing the Billing and Unrestricted passwords

To change the Billing and Unrestricted passwords in a meter:
1. Edit your group’s assigned password set:
a. If your group has privileges to management meter passwords (see
“Privileges tab” on page 54), from the Tools menu select Meter Passwords
Management.
If your group does not have privileges, have your Metercat Administrator
perform the action.
b. Use the procedure described in “Changing a password set” on page 202
to change the Billing and Unrestricted passwords in your group’s
assigned password set.
c. Edit the Read Only password as needed.
10. Tasks
d. Click OK to save your changes.

3. From the Function drop-list, select the Change Higher Passwords function or
another function that contains the Change Passwords task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter.
If you are only changing the Billing and Unrestricted passwords, you will not
see a run time dialog at task execution. Metercat automatically writes your
group’s most recent assigned password set passwords to the connected
meter.
If you are changing the Read Only and the Billing and Unrestricted
passwords, at task execution time you will see the Change Passwords run
time dialog for entering the Read Only password.
Note: If a meter has an EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC option board, the
passwords in the option board are updated to match those
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Passwords
the Read Only password. If the Billing and Unrestricted passwords were
changed, the completion report will indicate only that the passwords were
updated.
Change Modem Init Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

String task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Change Modem Init String task to a function definition, the function
will change the Modem Init String of the modem in the meter. See “Remote
Configuring the Change Modem Init String task

To configure the Change Modem Init String task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Change Modem Init
String function or a function that includes the Change Modem Init String
task.
2. Click Edit.
10. Tasks
3. Select the Change Modem Init String task.

The Change Modem Init String Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Select the Port Number for the modem (Port 1 or Port 2).
6. Check Prompt for Override at Run Time to select a port number at task
execution time.
7. Enter the new Modem Initialization String of the modem (up to 32 ASCII
characters).
8. Check Prompt for Override at Run Time to enter the string at task execution
time.
9. Click OK.
Changing a modem init string

To change a meter’s modem init string:

Modem Init String task.
— OR —
Change Modem Init String run time dialog.
4. If prompted, select the meter’s Port Number for the modem (Port 1 or Port 2).
5. If prompted, enter the new Modem Initialization String (up to 32 ASCII
characters).
6. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Modem Init
String Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed) and the new modem init string value.
Change Out Gatekeeper Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA. IP AxisLink [IPGKR]
By adding a Change Out Gatekeeper task to a function definition, the function will
unregister any REX meters registered to the ‘old’ meter/gatekeeper’s LAN ID and
register them to the ‘new’ gatekeeper’s LAN ID.
Elster recommends that before the change out you do the following:
• Read the data from the old gatekeeper prior to the change out - see
“Reading a meter” on page 359 for details
• Ensure the new gatekeeper’s Remote component has been programmed
correctly (ITM3 and EA_Gatekeeper are configured properly for a
gatekeeper - see “Remote component” on page 468 for details).
10. Tasks
Changing out a gatekeeper

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Change Out
Gatekeeper task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for
details.
CAUTION: Read all data (including all gatekeeper/node data) from the
original Gatekeeper before switching it out with the new
gatekeeper. See “Reading a meter” on page 359 for details.
CAUTION: Ensure the new gatekeeper’s Remote component has been

programmed correctly (that is, the ITM3 and EA_Gatekeeper are
configured properly for a gatekeeper. See “Remote component”
on page 468 for details).
To exchange a Gatekeeper or gatekeeper in the field:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Change Out
Gatekeeper task.
— OR —
Change Out Gatekeeper run time dialog.
4. Enter the Old LAN ID - the nameplate LAN ID (a 1 to 10 digit number to a
maximum of 2147483647) for the old gatekeeper.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Out
Gatekeeper Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded
or failed) and the new Gatekeeper ID.
The new gatekeeper will initiate a node scan to register LAN meters with the
same utility ID.
Change Pulse Divisor Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Change Pulse Divisor task to a function definition, the function will set
the meter’s pulse divisor.
Note: If the connected meter is configured as a single rate demand

meter (A3D or A1800D), you will see the following message,
“Feature is not supported for this meter type.”
Note: If the connected meter is not configured to collect interval
profiling data, you will see the following message, “Basic Load
Profiling is not enabled in this meter.”
10. Tasks
Configuring the Change Pulse Divisor task

To configure the Change Pulse Divisor task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Change Pulse Divisor
function or a function that includes the Change Pulse Divisor task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change Pulse Divisor task.
The Change Pulse Divisor Task configuration dialog is displayed.
5. For Pulse Divisor, enter a non-zero integer in the range of 1 to 255 (default is
1).
6. Check Prompt for Override at Run Time to enter a different value at task
execution time.
7. Click OK.
Changing the pulse divisor
CAUTION: Changing the pulse divisor programmed in a meter will clear

any interval data stored in the meter. If the pulse divisor is set to
the value that is already programmed in the meter, interval data
will not be cleared.
To change the Pulse Divisor in a meter:

2. 2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Change
Pulse Divisor task.
— OR —
3. Press the assigned function shortcut keys.
Change Pulse Divisor Task run time dialog.
5. Enter the value for the Pulse Divisor.
6. Click OK.
If Interval Data is configured with zero days of storage, a warning message
is displayed.
7. Click OK to acknowledge the warning message.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Pulse Divisor
the new divisor value.
10. Tasks
Change Time task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Change Time task to a function definition, the function will set the
meter’s time to the time that is displayed by the computer (taking into account
both computer and meter time zones and DST (daylight saving time) settings.
The DST time change settings will be appropriately set based on the time zone.
For time zones that do not use DST, the meter will be programmed with a DST
change time but would still require Special Dates component be configured for
DST Start and DST End dates. In situations where the time change would cross a
midnight, 00:00, boundary, the time change will occur at 02:00.
Note: If the time change would cross a date boundary, the task will fail
and generate an error message.
Note: To change the date in a meter or device, use the Program task.
Configuring the Change Time task

To configure the Change Demand Overload task:

Overload function or a function that includes the Change Demand Overload
task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Change Demand Overload task.
The Change Time Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Select the Time Zone Entry Option - select one of the following:
• Do Not Change - select to prevent changes to Time Zone set in the meter
• No Default - select to force a selection from the drop list
• time zone - select the appropriate default time zone for the meters
6. Check Prompt for Override to allow selection of time zone at task execution
time; otherwise, the default time zone entered will be programmed into the
meter.
7. Click OK.
Changing a meter’s time and time zone

To change the time in a meter:

Time task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
Change Time Task run time dialog.
4. Select the appropriate Time Zone from the drop list.
Note: If there are differences between the computer time and the
meter time that would result in the meter being set to a different
date, the function will fail.
Note: If the selected time zone in the task is not present on the system
when the task is executed the task uses the time zone presently
in use by the system to configure the target meter.
Note: This task does not affect the meter’s DST Start and End date
settings (see “Special Dates component” on page 492).
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Time
the new time values. The task completion report will indicate the old and
new DST adjusted time even though the time zone may not use DST.
See “Program task” on page 134 for another method for setting the time zone.
Change Utility ID task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA, gatekeepers, IP AxisLink [IPGKR]
Note: This task is only supported by A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA

meters with EA_NIC FW 5.0 or higher and gatekeepers with FW
7.0 and IP AxisLink routers (IPGKR).
By adding a Change Utility ID task to a function definition, the function will change
the meter’s utility ID to the value selected in the drop list.
Changing a meter’s utility ID

Note: The list of available utility ID’s (up to 8) are programmed by Elster
at the time of manufacture.
You will need to define a function containing the Change Utility ID task. See
“Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To change the utility ID in a meter:

Utility ID task.
— OR —
Change UID task run time dialog.
4. Select the appropriate Utility ID from the drop list.
5. Click OK.
10. Tasks
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Change Utility ID

the new Utility ID.
Clear Battery Log task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Clear Battery Log task to a function definition, the function will clear
the number of power outages and cumulative power outage counters to zero.
The Clear Battery Log task clears the number of power outages counter and
power outage time (displayed on the Status view > Security tab, see “Status view”
on page 302).
Clearing the meter’s battery log

To clear the battery log in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear Battery
Log task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies and validates the connected meter then
clears the battery log.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Clear Battery Log
Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed).
Clear Data task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Clear Data task to a function definition, the function will clear:
• billing data (current and previous)

• interval data (pulses)
• interval data (instrumentation)
• event log
• event flags
• self reads
• data stored in any connected EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC option boards - A3
ALPHA meters only
Note: Programming and configuration information is unchanged.
Note: The execution of this task will not clear the Battery Log.
10. Tasks
Clearing meter data

To clear data in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear Data
task.
— OR —
Clear Data Task run time dialog.
4. Click OK to confirm that you wish to clear all data and statuses in the
connected meter.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Clear Data Completion
Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed) and the values
cleared. If the meter has an EA_NIC or EA_Gatekeeper option board, the
data and statuses in the option board are also cleared.
Clear Event Flags task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Clear Event Flags task to a function definition, the function will clear
all event, warning, and error status flags. Events include power failure, time
change, demand reset, configuration, or program change.
The Clear Event Flags task clears events that are displayed on the Status view >
Conditions tab (see “Status view” on page 302). Event Log Data view remains
unchanged. To clear the event log, see “Clear Event Log task” on page 119.
Note: To clear event flags and event log, create a function containing
both the Clear Event Flags and Clear Event Log tasks.
Clearing event flags in a meter

To clear the event flags in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear Event
Flags task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and begins
clearing the event flags.
10. Tasks
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Clear Event Flags
the values cleared.
Clear Event Log task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Clear Event Log task to a function definition, the function will clear all
records from the event log
The Clear Event Log task clears data displayed on the Event Log Data view (see
“Event Log Data view” on page 246) except the Event Log cleared event. To clear
event flags, see “Clear Event Flags task” on page 118.
Note: To clear event flags and event log, create a function containing
both the Clear Event Flags and Clear Event Log tasks.
Clearing event log in a meter

To clear the event log in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear Event
Log task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and clears the
event log.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Clear Event Log
the values cleared.
Clear PQM Data task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Clear PQM Data task to a function definition, the function will clear
one or more of the following:
• PQM log and PQM status (counter and timer)

• Sag log and Sag status (counter and timer)
See “Replace PQM task” on page 144 for information on replacing the PQM
component and clearing PQM and Sag logs and statuses and “Edit PQM
Thresholds task” on page 126 for information on changing PQM test settings.
See “PQM/Sag Log Data view” on page 276 and “PQM/Sag Status view” on
page 279 for details on PQM and Sag information displayed.
10. Tasks
Configuring the Clear PQM Data task

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Clear PQM
Data task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To configure the Clear PQM Data task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the function that includes the
Clear PQM Data task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Clear PQM Data task.
The Clear PQM Data Task configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Check either or both Clear item (PQM or Sag) to clear corresponding log and
status.
6. Click OK.
Clearing PQM data

To clear the PQM data in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear PQM
Data task.
— OR —
Clear PQM Data run time dialog.
4. Check either or both Clear item (PQM or Sag) to clear corresponding log and
status.
5. Click OK.
Note: If the Clear PQM Data task is executed during a sag event on
one or more phases or while a PQM test is currently failing,
Metercat will clear the logs, counters and timers. Immediately
after the task has completed, the meter will update the logs,
counters, and timers to show the test failures.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Clear PQM Data
the cleared values.
Note: If the connected meter is not configured for power quality
monitoring (PQM), you will see the following message, “PQM is
not enabled in this meter.”
10. Tasks
Clear Read Without Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Power Data task Supported Meters: A1800 ALPHA
Note: This task works on A1800 ALPHA meters FW version 3.0 or

higher that are equipped with a special Read without Power
battery. This special battery allows the meter to be read when
the meter is not powered.
By adding a Clear Read Without Power Data task to a function definition, the
function will clear the following Read Without Power battery data:
• Total Active Time

• Total Use Count
See the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for details on reading a meter that
is not powered.
Note: Use the Clear Read Without Power Data task only when
replacing the special battery needed by the Read Without
Power function.
Clearing Read Without Power data

To clear the Read Without Power data in a meter:
1. Define a function containing the Clear Read Without Power Data task as
described in “Building a function” on page 83.
3. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Clear Read
Without Power Data task.
— OR —
Clear Read Without Power Data run time dialog.
5. Click OK.
Configure Special Option Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Board task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA
By adding a Configure Special Option Board task to a function definition, the

function will configure the selected special option board component
programmed in the meter.
Note: You can use the Configure Special Option Board task to reset
EA_Gatekeepers’ ACLs that have been set using EnergyAxis
Management System. To clear ACLs in a gatekeeper disable
Enable Source Checking and reprogram the gatekeeper.
10. Tasks
Configuring a special option board

To configure a special option board in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Configure
Special Option Board task.
— OR —
Configure Special Option Board Task run time dialog.
4. Select the desired Special Option Board Component from the drop list that
you want program in the meter.
Note: The Special Option Board component must be defined to be
available in the drop list. See “Special Option Board component”
on page 500 for details.
Note: When programming a meter with an ACB option board, you will
be prompted for overriding additional parameters.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Configure Special
Option Board Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded
or failed) and the option board configured.
Demand Reset task Minimum Password Level: Billing

By adding a Demand Reset task to a function definition, the function will perform
a demand reset of the connected meter. See the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical
Manual (TM42-2190) and the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410)
for details on the effects of a demand reset.
Resetting demand
To reset demand in a meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Demand
Reset task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and begins
resetting demand.
10. Tasks
Demand reset events are displayed in the Event Log Data view (see “Event
Log Data view” on page 246).
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Demand Reset
Diagnostic Read task Minimum Password Level: Read Only

By adding a Diagnostic Read task to a function definition, the function will perform
a diagnostic read of the connected meter. The diagnostic read file will be stored
as an MSR file in the Metercat\Readings\Diagnostic folder (if Storage Mode is set
to Append or Replace). If Storage Mode is None, the reading data will be
displayed in the selected viewset but no reading file will be created.
Note: If you experience problems when reading a meter, ensure that
for assistance.
Note: A diagnostic read cannot perform a demand reset, clear
statuses, or adjust the meter’s time.
Reading without power - A1800 ALPHA only

A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 3.0 or higher and equipped with an
internal Read without Power battery may be read via the optical port using Read
without Power mode and the Diagnostic Read task only. Attempting to perform
any task except a Diagnostic Read task will fail. Additionally, if a function contains
a Diagnostic Read task and another task the function will fail on the other task. If
the Diagnostic Read task is the second task in the function, then the function will
fail and the diagnostic read will not be performed. If the Diagnostic Read is the
first task in the function the Diagnostic Read task succeeds and the second task
will fail causing the entire function to fail.
When performing a diagnostic read on an A1800 ALPHA meter that is in Read

without Power mode the following conditions apply:
• instrumentation data is not read and is not displayed in the corresponding
view
• because option boards with extended memory are not powered by the
Read without Power battery, interval data allocated to extended memory
cannot be read and is not displayed in the corresponding view
Note: If Metercat detects that there is LP/IP data allocated to extended
memory, and the memory cannot be read (because it is on an
option board that is not powered in Read without Power mode,
the Completion Report for Diagnostic Read will contain the
message: “Option Board data has not been read because the
meter is in Read Without Power Mode.”
10. Tasks
Configuring the Diagnostic Read task

To configure the Diagnostic Read task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Diagnostic Read function
or a function that includes the Diagnostic Read task.
— OR —
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Diagnostic Read task.
The Diagnostic Read Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 10-20. Diagnostic Read task configuration
5. Select the Storage Mode:

• Meter ID:
10. Tasks
• None - no load profiling data will be read

• All - all load profiling data will be read
• Unread - load profiling data that is not marked as read will be read
• Unread with Update - load profiling data marked as unread will be read
and the unread marker will be updated to indicate the data that has been
read
• Number of Days (specify a number from 1 to 999) - load profiling data for
the specified number of days will be read
8. Select to read Interval Data (Instrumentation):
• None - no instrumentation profiling data will be read
• All - all instrumentation profiling data will be read
• Unread - instrumentation profiling data marked as unread will be read
• Unread with Update - instrumentation profiling data marked as unread
will be read and the unread marker will be updated to indicate the data
that has been read
• Number of Days (specify a number from 1 to 999) - instrumentation
profiling data for the specified number of days will be read
Note: The meter has separate unread markers for load profiling data
and instrumentation profiling data.
9. Select to read History Log:
• None - no history log data will be read
• All - all history log data will be read
10.Select to read Event Log:
• None - no event log data will be read
• All - all event log data will be read
11. Select to read PQM Logs:
• None - no PQM log or Sag log data will be read
• All - all PQM log and Sag log data will be read
Note: PQM and Sag statuses are always read.
12.Select to read Self Read Data:
• None - no self read data will be read
• All - all self read data will be read
13.Select to read Harmonic Content Data:
• None - no harmonic data will
be read
• All - all harmonic data will be read
14.Select to read Collector/Node Data:
Note: Only applies for A3 ALPHA meters with EA_Gatekeeper or
EA_NIC option boards.
Status if the connected meter has an Read Only, Billing or
EA_Gatekeeper or an EA_NIC option Unrestricted
board only LAN status data will be
read
All all LAN status and LAN read data will Unrestricted
be read
10. Tasks
Note: If the EA_NIC contains no data when the meter is read (that is,
no data yet has been stored in the option board or data has
been recently cleared), the task will succeed but a message will
appear in the function completion report “Reading of Internal
LAN Node Current Billing data failed.”
15.Click OK.
See “Billing Read task” on page 99 for billing read task details.
Performing a read
See “Reading a meter” on page 359 for details on performing a diagnostic read.
Disable Node Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Communication task Supported Meters:A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW 4.x or 5.0
CAUTION: Only perform this task if you are attempting to program an A3

ALPHA or an A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC firmware
version 4.x or 5.0 and experience repeated communication
errors.
To program A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW 4.x or 5.0 define
a function with the following tasks in the order specified:
1. Disable Node Communication task

2. Program task
3. Enable Node Communication task
See “Programming ALPHA meters with EA_NIC” on page 354 for details on using
the function.
Edit PQM Thresholds task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Edit PQM
Thresholds task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for
details.
By adding an Edit PQM Thresholds task to a function definition, the function will
change the PQM settings for the PQM tests of the connected meter. You can also
enable the following actions:
• clear PQM and Sag logs and statuses during task execution (see “Clear
PQM Data task” on page 119 for details)
• turn PQM On (see “Turn PQM ON/OFF task” on page 175 for details)
Note: This task does not change the PQM Set that is programmed in
the meter. It only changes the test settings for the programmed
PQM Set.
10. Tasks
See the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2190) and the A1800 ALPHA
Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for details on power quality monitoring
(PQM).
Configuring the Edit PQM Thresholds task

To configure the Edit PQM Thresholds task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Edit PQM Thresholds
function or a function that includes the Edit PQM Thresholds task.
— OR —
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Edit PQM Thresholds task.
The Edit PQM Thresholds configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Check Clear PQM and Sag Logs and Statuses if you wish to clear them
during task execution.
6. Click OK.
Changing PQM thresholds

To change the PQM thresholds in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Edit PQM
Thresholds task.
— OR —
Edit PQM Thresholds run time dialog.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-21. Edit PQM Thresholds run time
The dialog displays the status of PQM metering in the connected meter (On
or Off) and the PQM Set that is programmed into the meter.
4. Check to turn PQM ON.
5. For each test in the PQM Set, set the thresholds and parameters as desired.
See “PQM tests” on page 446 for details on the PQM tests and their settings.
Edit Service Test task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding an Edit Service Test task to a function definition, the function will allow
you to view the basic service voltage test and service current test parameters in a
meter, edit these parameters, and write them back to the meter.
Note: The Edit Service Test task allows you to only edit the basic
parameters. Advanced service test parameters cannot be
edited.
Changing service test parameters

To change the service test parameters in a meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Edit Service
Test task.
10. Tasks
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and, if the service
is locked, displays the Edit Service Test run time dialog.
Note: Changes can only be made to the parameters for the currently
locked service on the meter.
Note: Service tests cannot be performed on meters that are not locked
to a service.
Figure 10-22. Edit Service Test run time - locked service
4. Set the appropriate Service Voltage Test Parameters:

a. Service Test Mode - select the method the meter will use to lock service:
• Smart Auto Lock - automatically locks the service found; if no valid
service is found, the last locked service is kept
• Manual - a technician must press the RESET button to manually accept
the service found
• None - turns service test off
b. Rotation Test - select the rotation tests the meter performs:
• Both - service test validates either phase rotation
• ABC only - service test validates ABC phase rotation only
• CBA only - service test validates CBA phase rotation only
Note: If an incorrect rotation is detected, an error message will be
displayed on the meter’s LCD. See the appropriate meter
technical manual for details.
c. Phase Indicator Threshold - enter the meter’s current threshold as a
percentage of the nominal (range of 0.00 to 100.00).
10. Tasks
Note: The Phase Indicator Threshold is also used in the Voltage Sag
Test of PQM (see “Voltage Sag Test” on page 447).
d. Service Voltage Tolerance - select the meter’s current tolerance settings
as a percentage of the nominal.
• Minimum - range of 0.00 to 100.00
• Maximum - range of 100.00 to 199.99
5. Check to Run Current Test After Powerup Voltage Test to enable the meter to
run a current test after powerup voltage test (enabled/disabled).
6. Set the Service Current Test Parameters (also displays the detected service,
for example, 3 El. 3 phase, ABC rotation):
Note: Metercat automatically rounds the values entered for
thresholds according to the meter’s storage format limitations.
When displayed in the viewset, the corrected (that is, rounded)
values will be seen.
Note: The current test thresholds are also used in PQM testing for
Reverse Power Test (see “4. Reverse Power Test & PF” on
page 449) and Low Current Test (see “5. Low Current Test” on
page 449).
a. Zero Current - enter value in range 0.00% to 39.99%
b. Over Current - enter value in range 100.10% to 199.95%
c. Low Current - for each A phase, B phase, C phase - enter value in range
0.00% to 39.99%
d. Min Lagging PF - for each A phase, B phase, C phase - enter value in
range 0.00 to 1.00
e. Min Leading PF - for each A phase, B phase, C phase - enter value in
range 0.00 to 1.00
f. Conditions that Trigger Warnings - check which individual phases will
trigger a warning for the specified thresholds:
• Zero Current - for each A phase, B phase, C phase
• Low Current - for each A phase, B phase, C phase
• Over Current - for each A phase, B phase, C phase
• Reverse power (Reverse Energy Flow) - for each A phase, B phase, C
phase
• Power Factor - for each A phase, B phase, C phase
Note: See the appropriate meter technical manual for details on
warning codes.
7. If the service to the meter is not locked, the Edit Service Test run time dialog is
displayed allowing you to attempt to lock the service.
8. Select Smart Auto Lock or Manual and click OK to attempt to lock service.
9. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Edit Service Test
the new service test values.
10. Tasks
Enable Node Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Communication task Supported Meters:A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW 4.x or 5.0
CAUTION: Only perform this task if you are attempting to program an A3

ALPHA or an A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC firmware
version 4.x or 5.0 and experience repeated communication
errors.
To program A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW 4.x or 5.0 define
a function with the following tasks in the order specified:
1. Disable Node Communication task

2. Program task
3. Enable Node Communication task
See “Programming ALPHA meters with EA_NIC” on page 354 for details on using
the function.
IP AxisLink Diagnostic Minimum Password Level: Read Only

Read task Supported Meters: IP AxisLink
By adding an IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task to a function definition, the function

will perform a diagnostic read of the connected IP AxisLInk router.
Note: You must be connected to the IP AxisLink router using either the
WAN connection or the local Mini-B USB port of the router to
perform this task.
Configuring the IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task

To configure the IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, click New.

The Function Builder dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the Function Name (for example, Diagnostic Read IP AxisLink).
3. Select the Function Definition tab.
4. From the Available Tasks list, select IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task.
5. Click Add.
The IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read Task configuration dialog is displayed.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-23. IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task configuration
6. Select the appropriate Storage Mode:

• Replace - [default] the new stored reading file will replace (that is,
overwrite) the most recently stored reading for the same device
7. Select the Reading Filename ID, that is, the device’s ID used to create the
read filename:
• Meter ID:
8. Select the Event Log data to read:
• None - no event log data is read
• All - [default] all event log data is read
9. Select the Collector Data to read:
• Status - [default] only LAN status data is read
• All - all LAN status and LAN node data is read
10.Click OK.
Metercat creates the function.
Performing a diagnostic read of a router

See “Reading an IP AxisLink router” on page 361 for details.
IP AxisLink Program task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Supported Meters: IP AxisLink
By adding an IP AxisLink Program task to a function definition, the function will

program the connected IP AxisLInk router.
10. Tasks
Note: You must be connected to the IP AxisLink router using either the
WAN connection or the local Mini-B USB port of the router to
perform this task.
Configuring the IP AxisLink Program task

To configure the IP AxisLink Program task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, click New.
The Function Builder dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the Function Name (for example, Program IP AxisLink).
3. Select the Function Definition tab.
4. From the Available Tasks list, select IP AxisLink Program task.
5. Click Add.
The IP AxisLink Program task configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 10-24. IP AxisLink Program task configuration dialog
6. From the Program drop list, select the IP AxisLink program.

7. Check Prompt for Override at Run Time to allow the user to change the
program value during task run time.
8. From the Account drop list, select the element used for the Account:
• <No Default> - default
• <Factory Serial Num>
• <Utility Serial Num>
9. From the Meter ID drop list, select the element used for the Meter ID:
• <Factory Serial Num> - default
• <No Default>
• <Utility Serial Num>
10.From the Time Zone drop list, select the time zone to be used by the device:
• <System Setting> - default
• system time zones
11. Check Prompt to allow the user to change the Time Zone value during task
run time.
12.Click OK.
10. Tasks
Metercat creates the function.
Programming an IP AxisLink router

See “Programming an IP AxisLInk router” on page 355 for details.
Program task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Program task to a function definition, the function will program the
connected meter with the specified parameters.
CAUTION: You should not define a function containing two Program tasks.
Successfully programming a meter accomplishes the following tasks:
• downloads the specified program

• downloads new passwords
• resets previously calculated data to zero
• clears previous status information
• resets the programming date in the meter to the current date (not applicable
for demand only meters)
• clears data stored in any connected EA_NIC option board - A3 ALPHA
meters only
Note: The Program task does not clear data stored in any connected
Gatekeeper module.
Note: The Program task will enable DA I/O relay events when the task
is executed on an A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4 or higher.
Note: If the selected program contains a Special Option Board
component, the WIC will be configured with the DA I/O relay
events. To configure DA I/O relays events without programming
the meter, see “Configure Special Option Board task” on
page 121
Configuring the Program task

To configure the Program task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the Program function or a

function that includes the Program task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Program task.
The Program Task Configuration dialog is displayed.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-25. Program task configuration
The following table describes the parameters found on the configuration dialog.
5. Select the Program to use to configure the connected meter:

• <No Default> with Prompt for Override at Run Time - default; at task run
time you will be prompted to select a program for configuring the meter
• select a Program ID (as a default) from the list (with or without Prompt for
Override at Run Time) - the selected program will be used to configure the
connected meter (with prompt, you can specify a different program at run
time)
Program Description’ for example, A3T - 002 - TOU, LP
Program.
6. Select the ID 1 setting - (default is Account:) - specify which ID to program in
the meter:
• <No Default> with Prompt - default; at run time you will be prompted to
enter an ID
• <Factory Serial Num> (no prompt) - the connected meter’s factory serial
number will be used as the ID; cannot be changed at task execution
• <Utility Serial Num> (no prompt) - the utility’s serial number will be used
as the ID; cannot be changed at task execution
10. Tasks
• Enter a value (as default) (with or without Prompt) - the entered value will
be programmed into the meter (with prompt, you can enter a different
value at run time)
Note: You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric and special characters.
See “Displaying Extended Display Items” on page 434 for details on
displaying the ID on the LCD.
7. Select the ID 2 setting - (default is Meter ID:) - specify which ID to program in
the meter:
• <No Default> with Prompt - at run time you will be prompted to enter an
ID
• <Factory Serial Num> (no prompt) - default; the connected meter’s factory
serial number will be used as the ID; cannot be changed at task
execution
• <Utility Serial Num> (no prompt) - the utility’s serial number will be used
as the ID; cannot be changed at task execution
• Enter a value (as default) (with or without Prompt) - the entered value will
be programmed into the meter (with prompt, you can enter a different
value at run time)
• <Use Mask> (with Prompt) - you will be prompted to enter the
appropriate masked value during task execution; see “Setting site ID
labels” on page 44 for details.
Note: You can use up to 20 alphanumeric and special characters
unless Use Mask is specified and the mask specifies D which
restricts editable values to numeric characters only.
Note: If you select Use Mask, <Factory Serial Num> and <Utility Serial
Num> will not be available at task execution.
See “Displaying Extended Display Items” on page 434 for details on
displaying the ID on the LCD.
8. Select the Time Zone to program in the meter.
Note: Only available for meters configured for TOU.
• <System Setting> (with or without Prompt) - default; the time zone of the
Metercat computer will be programmed into the connected meter (with
prompt, you can select a different time zone at run time)
• Select a Time Zone from the drop list (with or without Prompt) - the
specified time zone will be programmed into the connected meter (with
prompt, you can select a different time zone at run time)
Note: The time zones listed are in standard Microsoft® operating
system format (for example, (GMT -05:00) Eastern Time (US &
Canada), (GMT -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada) and (GMT -
07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)).
Note: This setting does not affect the meter’s Daylight Saving Time
settings.
Note: The DST time change settings will be appropriately set based on
the time zone. For time zones that do not use DST, the meter will
be programmed with a DST change time but would still require
Special Dates component be configured for DST Start and End
dates. In situations where the time change would cross a
midnight, 00:00, boundary, the time change will occur at 02:00.
The task completion report will indicate the old and new DST
adjusted time even though the time zone may not use DST.
Also see “Change Time task” on page 115.
10. Tasks
9. Select the Metering Application (where energy is being measured in relation

to either current or voltage transformers):
• <Program Value> (with or without Prompt) - default; the setting in the
meter program will be programmed into the connected meter (with
prompt, you can override at run time)
• select Primary or Secondary (with or without Prompt) - the selected setting
will be programmed into the connected meter (with prompt, you can
override at run time)
Also see “Constants component” on page 408.
10.Enter the current transformer (CT) ratio and voltage transformer (VT) ratio for
current and voltage transformers:
• <Program Value> (with or without Prompt) - default; the setting in the
meter program will be used (with prompt, you can enter a different value
at run time)
• Enter a value in the range of 1.00 to 9999.99 in the respective boxes to be
programmed into the connected meter (with Prompt, you can enter a
different value at run time).
Note: CT * VT displays the product of CT and VT (that is transformer
factor).
Also see “Constants component” on page 408.
11. Enter the Register Multiplier (register multiplier)) to be used to convert values
on the meter’s display to engineering units:
• <Program Value> [default] the setting specified in the meter program will
be programmed into the connected meter (with Prompt you can enter a
• Select a value from the drop list (in the range of 0.1 to 1000000.0 with one
only digit after the decimal) (with Prompt you can enter a different value at
run time).
Note: If you are configured to use Adjusted Kh in your System
Preferences > Programming Options, Metercat will require you
to enter the Adjusted Kh regardless of your settings for this
parameter. See “Overriding program values using the Program
task” on page 351 for details on setting Adjusted Kh.
See “Constants component” on page 408.
12.Select the Overload value (kilo units) - specify the overload:
be programmed into the connected meter (with Prompt, you can enter a
• Enter the value (in the range of 0.0000 to 999999.9999) to be
See “Demand component” on page 411.
10. Tasks

Overload task, or Change Demand Threshold(s) task. For
example, if the Register Multiplier is set to 1000000.0 and you
attempt to change the Overload value to 999999.9999; the
attempt will fail with the error: The calculated Overload (kilo
units): value has too many significant digits.
13.Enter or select the KYZ Output value for pulses:

be programmed into the connected meter (with Prompt, you can enter a
Note: The value used is dependent on your KYZ source settings in
System Preferences. See “Setting programming options” on
• KYZ Divisor - select a value in the range of 1 to 999 (with or without
Prompt); the selected setting will be programmed into the connected
meter (with Prompt, you can enter a different value at run time).
• If KYZ Value is enabled in your System Preferences and the connected A3
ALPHA meter is firmware 3.01 or higher or an A1800 ALPHA meter, you
will see KYZ Value - select a value from the drop list or enter a value in the
range of 0.000001 to 100.000000; the selected setting will be
different value at run time)
Note: The selected KYZ Value cannot be less than the meter’s Factory
Ke. expressed in kilo units and within the range of 0.000001 to
100.000000.
Note: If you enter a number for the KYZ Value, the number will not be
added to the default drop list (see “Setting programming
options” on page 47 for details).
Also see “Change KYZ Output task” on page 106 and “Configuring standard
relay options” on page 460 for additional information.
14.Specify the Service Test component to be programmed into the connected
meter:
• <Do Not Change> - do not change settings currently in the meter (with
Prompt, you can select a different component at run time)
• <Program Value> - default; use the component defined in the program
(with Prompt, you can select a different component at run time)
• Select a Service Test component from drop list - the selected component
will be used to configure the connected meter (with Prompt, you can
select a different component at run time)
Also see “Edit Service Test task” on page 128, “Program task - Component
overrides” on page 352 and “Service Test component” on page 486.
15.Specify the PQM component to be programmed into the connected meter:
• <Do Not Change> [default] - do not change settings currently in the meter
(with Prompt, you can select a different component at run time).
• <No Default> (with Prompt) - at task run time you will be prompted to
specify a setting.
10. Tasks
• <Program Value> - if the program contains a PQM component, use the

component defined in the program (with Prompt, you can select a
different setting at run time).
• Select a PQM component from drop list; the selected component will be
used to configure the connected meter (with Prompt, you can select a
Also see “Replace PQM task” on page 144, “Program task - Component
overrides” on page 352 and “PQM component” on page 443.
16.Specific the Instrumentation Profiling component to be programmed into the
connected meter:
• <Disable> - disable instrumentation profiling in the meter (with Prompt,
you can select a different setting at run time).
• <Program Value> [default] - if the program contains an Instrumentation
Profiling component, use the component defined in the program (with
Prompt, you can select a different setting at run time).
• Select an Instrumentation Profile component; the selected component will
be used to configure the connected meter (with Prompt, you can select a
Also see “Instrumentation Profiling Config component” on page 415 and
“Program task - Component overrides” on page 352.
17.Specific the Remote component to be programmed into the connected
meter:
• <Disable> - disable remote communications in the meter (with Prompt,
you can select a different setting at run time).
• <Do Not Change> - do not change remote communication settings
currently in the meter (with Prompt, you can select a different setting at
run time).
• <No Default> (with Prompt) - at task run time you will be prompted to
specify a setting.
• <Program Value> [default] - if the program contains a remote
component, use the component defined in the program (with Prompt, you
can select a different setting at run time).
• Select a Remote component from the drop list; the selected component
will be used to configure the connected meter (with Prompt, you can
select a different setting at run time).
Also see “Replace Remote task” on page 154, “Program task - Component
overrides” on page 352 and “Remote component” on page 468.
18.Check to have the Device ID for Port 1 Always Master - port 1 of the
connected meter is the master when using a modem sharing unit [checked
by default]
19.Check to have the Device ID for Port 2 Always Master - port 2 of the
connected meter is the master when using a modem sharing unit [checked
by default]
20.Click OK.
Note: When programming a meter with an ACB option board, you will
be prompted for overriding additional parameters.
Programming a meter
See “Programming a device” on page 347 for details on programming a meter.
10. Tasks
See the TM42-2212 MetercatLite User Guide for details on programming meters
from a command line.
Programming an A3 ALPHA meter with EA_NIC

If you are attempting to program an A3 ALPHA meter with EA_NIC firmware
version 4.x or 5.0 and experience repeated communication errors, see
“Programming ALPHA meters with EA_NIC” on page 354 for details on using the
function.
Register Edit task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Register Edit task to a function definition, the function will allow you to
read current billing data from a meter, edit the data, and then write the data back
to the original meter.
A1800 ALPHA meters FW v4.0 and higher can be factory-configured to prevent
the reset of energy registers (that is, energy register locking). When the energy
register is locked, the Register Edit task recognizes the locking of energy registers
and prevents changing them and displays the following message: Task cannot
be executed because the meter’s tariff data is locked.
The Register Edit task will still execute if only the Meter ID and Account field are
changed and not the Billing (Tariff) data.
After the task has executed, the Data Edit flag is set (see “Security tab” on
page 313) and can only be cleared by re-programming the meter.
The Register Edit task allows you to edit only the following values:
• ID 1 and ID 2 (default values – Account and Meter ID)

Note: The Register Multiplier is not applied to the displayed billing
data.
• for Demand-only meters:
• Energy (metered quantity)
• Maximum Demand
• Cumulative Demand
• for TOU meters:
• Energy (metered quantity – Rate A, B, C, and D)
• Maximum Demand (Rate A, B, C, and D)
• Cumulative Demand (Rate A, B, C, D, and Total)
Note: For TOU meters, when Total Cumulative Demand is written to
the meter, it must be equal or larger than the maximum of the
Cumulative Demand for each Rate.
Note: You cannot edit the date of maximum demand, coincident
demand values, and average power factor values.
10. Tasks
Editing register data

To change the data in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Register Edit
task.
— OR —
Register Edit run time dialog for either a Demand meter or a TOU meter.
Figure 10-26. Demand meter
Figure 10-27. TOU meter
4. Edit Account (the meter’s ID 1) as needed.

5. Edit Meter ID (the meter’s ID 2) as needed.
10. Tasks
Note: Changes to ID 2 in a meter displaying the Meter ID: Last 9

Characters display item will result in ST32 being updated and
reported in the History Log. See “Displaying Last Nine
Characters of Meter ID” on page 435 for details.
CAUTION: Masked ID is not used. See “Program task” on page 134 and
“Setting site ID labels” on page 44 for details on using masked
ID.
6. For Demand-only meters:

a. Edit the meter’s Energy value for the current billing period.
b. Edit the meter’s Maximum Demand value.
c. Edit the meter’s Cumulative Demand value.
7. For TOU meters:
a. Edit the meter’s Energy values for Rates A-D.
b. Edit the meter’s Maximum Demand values for Rates A-D.
c. Edit the meter’s Cumulative Demand values for Rates A-D.
8. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Register Edit
the new data values.
Ping LAN Node task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Ping task to a function definition, the function will ping an EnergyAxis
LAN meter (REX, REX2, or A3 ALPHA node).
Pinging a LAN meter

To ping a LAN meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Ping LAN
Node task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter determines the
meter type, Metercat displays the Ping Node Task run time dialog.
4. Enter the Utility ID.
5. Enter the LAN ID.
6. Click OK.
10. Tasks
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Ping LAN Node
Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed) as
well as listing the Utility ID and LAN ID programmed into the pinged meter
and the RSSI.
If the meter fails to respond to the ping command, the completion report
displays “Function failed. An error occurred while processing Ping LAN Node
task. LAN Node did not reply to Ping command.”
PQ Inspector task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a PQ Inspector task to a function definition, the function will read and
display the following:
• phasor diagram
• power relationship diagram
• harmonic content diagram
The data and graph can be read live from the connected meter.
Configuring the PQ Inspector task

To configure the PQ Inspector task:
PQ Inspector task.
— OR —
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the PQ Inspector task.
The PQ Inspector configuration dialog is displayed.
5. Check Read Harmonics to read harmonic data from the connected meter
and view a graph of the channel readings.
6. Click OK.
Running PQ Inspector
To run PQ Inspector:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the PQ Inspector
task.
— OR —
meter type, Metercat displays the PQ Inspector run time dialog.
10. Tasks
4. Click Step Read to view a snap shot of PQ Inspector data from the connected
meter.
— OR —
Click Run to view real time, continuous PQ Inspector data from the
connected meter.
Note: The diagram updates the date and time stamp for each
reading interval.
5. Phasor diagram
6. Power Relationship data
7. Harmonic Content data
Note: PQ Inspector data cannot be saved to a file. However, the
diagnostic and billing read tasks read phasor, power
relationship, and harmonic content data that can be saved to
stored readings.
See Also
“Instrumentation view” on page 254 for details.
Replace PQM task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Replace PQM task to a function definition, the function will update the
PQM component of the meter.
Configuring the Replace PQM task

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Replace PQM
task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To configure the Replace PQM task:
Replace PQM task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Replace PQM task.
The Replace PQM task configuration dialog is displayed.
5. If you check to Clear PQM and Sag Log and Statuses, the execution of the
function will clear PQM and sag logs, counters, and timers.
Note: This setting cannot be changed during function run time.
6. Click OK.
See “Clear PQM Data task” on page 119 for information on clearing the PQM
log and status or the Sag log and status without changing the PQM
component.
See “PQM component” on page 443 for additional information.
10. Tasks
Replacing a PQM component

To replace the PQM component in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Replace
PQM task.
— OR —
meter type, Metercat displays the Replace PQM run time dialog.
4. Select the appropriate PQM Component from the drop list.
Note: The clearing of PQM and Sag logs and statuses is dependent
on the configuration settings of the Replace PQM task. This
setting cannot be changed during task run time. See
“Configuring the Replace PQM task” on page 144 for details.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Replace PQM
the new PQM component and the status of the PQM and Sag logs and
statuses (if cleared).
Replace Program task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

CAUTION: Prior to performing a Replace Program task, Elster recommends

that you perform a Billing Read task to preserve billing data.
By adding a Replace Program task to a function definition, the function will update
the program in the connected meter. The components and their parameters as
defined in the program will be programmed into the meter without allowing you
to override during program execution.
The following settings will not be changed during replacement:
• metered quantities
• constants
• service test
• password set
• meter ID #1 and #2
• time zone
• date
10. Tasks
CAUTION: If the replaced program contains any Log component

configuration changes the meter’s logs, self reads and profile
data (both pulse and instrumentation) will be cleared.
CAUTION: If the replaced program contains any profile data (both pulse
and instrumentation) configuration changes the meter’s profile
data will be cleared).
Note: The time in the meter will be synchronized with the time of the
computer depending on your Time Adjustment Criteria settings
in System Preferences. See “Setting time difference options” on
Note: The Program task will enable DA I/O relay events when the task
is executed on an A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4 or higher.
Note: If the selected program contains a Special Option Board
component, the WIC will be configured with the DA I/O relay
events. To configure DA I/O relays events without
reprogramming the meter, see “Configure Special Option Board
task” on page 121
Configuring the Replace Program task

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Replace
Program task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To configure the Replace Program task:
Replace Program task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Replace Program task.
The Replace Program task configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 10-28. Replace Program task configuration
5. Checking Prompt or Prompt for Override at Run Time allows you to change
the parameters of the task at run time.
6. Select the Effective Date that the old program will be updated.
10. Tasks
Note: If you select a previous date or current date (based on the

meter’s date and time), the updated program will become
effective immediately.
7. Checking Perform a Self Read will cause the meter to perform a self read
when:
• if the Effective Date is a previous or current date, the self read is
performed when the task is executed
• if the Effective Date is in the future, the self read is performed on that
future date when the Display, Demand, and Rates and Special Dates
components are replaced
Note: If the Metering Display component is pending and a power
failure occurs during the pending tables switch a self read/
demand reset may not occur as expected. Therefore Elster
recommends unchecking Perform a Self Read/Perform a
Demand Reset if a Metering Display component will be
changed by executing this task.
8. Checking Perform a Demand Reset will cause the meter to perform a
demand reset when:
• if the Effective Date is a previous or current date, the demand reset is
performed when the task is executed
• if the Effective Date is in the future, the demand reset is performed on that
future date when the Display, Demand, and Rates and Special Dates
components are replaced
9. Click OK.
10. Tasks
Immediate
Can be replaced Cannot be replaced
Demand - with exceptions and Constants1
restrictions: Demand:
• Exponential Response setting1 • Demand Overload
• Interval/Subinterval settings1 Metering:
• Cumulative Demand type1 • Quantities1
Logs - clears the following: Remote
• log data Relay Options:
• self read data • KYZ Output (KYZ divisor/value)
• interval data PQM
Interval Data Config2 - clears interval Special Option Board
data Service Test
Instrumentation Profiling2 - clears
interval data
Metering
• Display - all replaced
• Interval Data Config
Rates
Relay Options - except KYZ divisor/value
Special Dates
Special Features
Properties - Custom Display strings
All Pending components reset to No

data available:
• Demand
• Metering
• Rates
• Special Dates
1. If the value in the replacing component is different from the value in the original
component, the task will fail.
2. If either the Interval Data Config or the Instrumentation Profiling components of the
replacing program are different from those in the existing program, all of the meter’s
interval data (both pulse and instrumentation) are cleared during function execution.
10. Tasks
Update program at a future date

Can be replaced Cannot be replaced
Pending components Current components
Pending Demand Constants
Pending Rates Demand
Pending Special Dates Logs
Metering Instrumentation Profiling Config
• Pending Display - all except the Metering
following: • Quantities
• Display Labels (Annunciators) • Interval Data Configuration
• Display warnings if reverser power PQM
flow Rates
• lock warning on display settings • Switch Times
• Day Types
Relay Options
Remote
Service Test
Special Dates
Special Features
Special Option Board
Replacing a program in an A1800 ALPHA meter

A1800 ALPHA meters FW v4.0 and later can be factory-configured to prevent the
reset of energy registers (that is, energy register locking). When the energy
register is locked, the Replace Program task recognizes the locking of energy
registers and stops executing the function.
The Logs or Special Features configuration in the selected Program does not
match the Logs/Special Features configuration in the meter In this case the task
generates one of the following messages:
• Task cannot be executed because the meter’s tariff data is locked and the
Logs configuration in the Program does not match the meter configuration.
Please change the Logs component so that it matches the configuration in
the meter.
• Task cannot be executed because the meter’s tariff data is locked and the
Special Features configuration in the Program does not match the meter
configuration. Please change the Special Features component so that it
matches the configuration in the meter.
Replacing a program
To replace the program in a meter:

Program task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
Replace Program run time dialog.
Figure 10-29. Replace Program run time
4. If Prompt (for override) is enabled, select the Program that will replace the
existing program.
5. If Prompt (for override) is enabled, select the Effective Date that the old
program will be replaced with the selected program.
6. If Prompt (for override), check Perform a Self Read to cause the meter to
perform a self read on the effective date.
7. If Prompt (for override), check Perform a Demand Reset to cause the meter
to perform a demand reset on the effective date.
8. Click OK.
If Metercat detects a change between the meter’s program and the
replacing program’s settings, Metercat displays a dialog warning you that
logs, self reads and load profile (both pulse and instrumentation) data will
be cleared.
9. Click OK to continue with replacing the program.
— OR —
Click Cancel to cancel the task.
Note: If you are unsure about why you are seeing this warning dialog,
please contact Elster Customer Support.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Replace Program
After executing the task and if the Effective Date is in the future, a reading of the
meter will show the changed information in the following ‘Pending’ views:
• “Demand Pending view” on page 238

• “Display Pending view” on page 245
• “Day Types Pending view” on page 234
• “Special Dates Pending view” on page 298
• “Switch Times Pending view” on page 329
10. Tasks
Replace Rates and Dates Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA, IP AxisLink
By adding a Replace Rates and Dates task to a function definition, the function will
update either the Rates component, the Special Dates component, or both,
without affecting any other component in the meter program. The updating of the
rates, special dates, or both, can occur immediately or be programmed to occur
at a future date.
See “Day Types subcomponent” on page 456, “Switch Times subcomponent” on

page 457, and “Special Dates component” on page 492 for additional
information.
Configuring the Replace Rates and Dates task

To configure the Replace Rates and Dates task:
Replace Rates and Dates task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the Replace Rates and Dates task.
The Replace Rates and Dates task configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 10-30. Replace Rate and Dates task configuration
5. Checking Allow Override allows you to change the parameters of the task at
run time.
6. Select the Effective Date that the old rates or special dates components will
be updated with the new rates or special dates components.
Note: If you select a previous date or the current date, the updated
rates or special dates component will become effective
immediately.
10. Tasks
7. From the drop down list, select the new Rates component that you want to
replace the old Rates component.
Note: If you select <Do Not Change>, the Replace Rates and Dates
function will not modify the current Rates component.
8. From the drop down list, select the new Special Dates component that you
want to replace the old Special Dates component.
function will not modify the current Special Dates component.
Note: If both the Rates and Special Dates are both set to <Do Not
Change>, you must check Allow Override or select a
component for either Rates or Special Dates.
Note: If the new Special Dates component has a different Enforce
maximum days between demand resets value than the old
Special Dates component, the value is not updated if the
effective date is in the future. You can only change the Enforce
maximum days between demand resets value if the updating is
9. Checking Perform a Self Read will cause the meter to perform a self read
when the Replace Rates and Dates task is executed.
10.Checking Perform a Demand Reset will cause the meter to perform a
demand reset when the Replace Rates and Dates task is executed.
Note: The options Perform a Self Read and Perform a Demand Reset
are not applicable to the IP AxisLink router and their selection is
irrelevant when executing the task against this device family.
11. Click OK.
Replacing the Rates and Special Dates components

To replace either the rates or special dates components in a meter:

Rates and Dates task.
— OR —
Replace Rates and Dates run time dialog.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-31. Replace Rates and Dates run time
4. If Allow Override is enabled, select the Effective Date that the old rates or
special dates will be updated with the new rates or special dates.
Note: If you select a previous date or the current date, the updated
rates or special dates component will become effective
immediately.
5. If Allow Override is enabled, select the new Rates component that you want
to replace the old Rates component.
function will not modify the current Rates component. You must
select to replace at least one or the other component.
6. If Allow Override is enabled, select the new Special Dates component that
you want to replace the old Special Dates component.
function will not modify the current Special Dates component.
You must select to replace at least one or the other component.
Note: If the new Special Dates component has a different Enforce
maximum days between demand resets value than the current
Special Dates component, the value is not updated if the
effective date is in the future. You can only change the Enforce
maximum days between demand resets value if the updating is
7. Check Perform a Self Read to cause the meter to perform a self read.
8. Check Perform a Demand Reset to cause the meter to perform a demand
reset.
Note: If both the Rates and Special Dates are both set to <Do Not
Change>, the task will fail.
9. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Replace Rates and
Dates Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
10. Tasks
After executing the task and if the Effective Date is in the future, a reading of the
meter will show the changed information in the following ‘Pending’ views:
• “Demand Pending view” on page 238

• “Special Dates Pending view” on page 298
• “Switch Times Pending view” on page 329
Replace Remote task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Replace Remote task to a function definition, the function will replace
the remote component of a meter’s program without reprogramming the meter.
Note: If the connected meter uses an EA_Gatekeeper option board

and a Replace Remote task is executed, the bit rate of the
option board will be changed to that specified for the modem’s
bit rate. The task completion report will indicate whether the
option board bit rate was changed.
Replacing the Remote component

To replace the Remote component in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Change Remote Definition function or
a function that includes the Replace Remote task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and determines
the meter type. Metercat displays the Replace Remote Task Run Time
Overrides dialog.
Figure 10-32. Replace Remote Run Time Overrides

10. Tasks
Figure 10-33. Replace Remote Run Time Overrides
4. For the Remote component, select one of the following:

• Remote component from the
drop list
• <Disable> to disable the Remote component
5. For Device ID Port 1, enter Device ID to be used for the meter on a modem
sharing unit (1 to 254).
See “Program task” on page 134 for details on programming the Device ID in
the meter.
6. For Device ID Port 2, enter Device ID to be used for the meter on a modem
sharing unit (1 to 254).
See “Program task” on page 134 for details on programming the Device ID in
the meter.
7. For the Call Origination Date & Time Port 1, select the Date and Time for the
call.
Note: This item is enabled based on the Billing Call Schedule setting
defined in the selected Remote component.
8. For the Call Origination Date & Time Port 2, select the Date and Time for the
call.
Note: This item is enabled based on the Billing Call Schedule setting
defined in the selected Remote component.
9. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Replace Remote
See “Remote component” on page 468 for additional information.
REX Activate LAN Factory Minimum Password Level: Optical

Key task Supported Meters: REX2 FW 3.0 or higher
Note: This task may be performed using the optical port connection
only.
10. Tasks
By adding a REX Activate LAN Factory Key task to a function definition, the
function will restore the LAN Factory Default key in the REX2 meter’s EnergyAxis
network interface card (EA_NIC). The LAN Factory Default key is the key
programmed into the meter at manufacture.
Note: This task may only be performed on REX2 meters FW 3.0 or

higher.
Activating the REX LAN Factory Key

To activate the REX LAN Factory Key in a REX2 meter’s EA_NIC:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Activate
LAN Factory Key task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and, if the meter
has a EA_NIC, Metercat resets the LAN Key back to the Factory Key that was
originally programmed into the EA_NIC.
REX Billing Reset task Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX2 FW 3.0 or higher
only.
By adding a REX Billing Reset task to a function definition, the function will perform
a demand reset and increment the demand reset count in the connected REX
meter. This allows notification of the reset to home area network (HAN) devices
associated with the meter.
Note: This task may only be performed on REX2 meters FW 3.0 or

higher.
Performing a billing reset

To perform a billing reset in a REX2 meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Billing
Reset task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and performs the
billing reset.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Billing Reset
REX Change Optical Test Minimum Password Level: Optical

Source task Supported Meters: REX2 FW v3.0 or higher
only.
By adding a REX Change Optical Test Source task to a function definition, the
function will change the pulse source of the optical port LED. This task is intended
for accuracy testing of REX2 meters.
Changing a REX2 meter’s optical source

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Change
Optical Test Source task. See “Building a function” on page 83
for details.
To change the optical test source set in a REX meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Change
Optical Test Source task.
— OR —
REX Change Optical Test Source run time dialog.
The REX Change Optical Test Source dialog indicates the current source for
test pulses: either Wh, VAh or VARh.
4. Select the appropriate New Source for Optical Port Test Pulses:
• Do Not Change
• Wh
• VAh or VARh (depending on the meter configuration of the alternate
energy source.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Change Optical
Test Source Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded
or failed) and the original and the new optical test source.
REX Change Password Minimum Password Level: Optical

task Supported Meters: REX, REX2, gREX
only.
10. Tasks
By adding a REX Change Password task to a function definition, the function will
change the password set in the connected REX meter.
See the REX Meter Technical Manual additional information.
Changing a REX meter’s password set

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Change
Password task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To change the password set in a REX meter:

Password task.
— OR —
REX Change Password run time dialog.
4. Select the appropriate Password Set from the drop list.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Change Password
the new password set.
REX Change Utility ID task Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX2 meter FW 4.0 or higher
only.
By adding a REX Change Utility ID task to a function definition, the function will
change the utility ID programmed in the connected REX meter.
See the REX Meter Technical Manual or the REX2 Meter Technical Manual (PDFs of
the documents are located on the Metercat Installation CD in the
\Documentation\REX folder) for additional information.
Changing a REX meter’s utility ID

You will need to define a function containing the REX Change Utility ID task. See
“Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To change the utility ID set in a REX meter:

Utility ID task.
10. Tasks
— OR —
REX Change Utility ID run time dialog.
4. Select the appropriate Utility ID from the drop list.
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Change Utility ID
the new Utility ID.
REX Clear Data task Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX, REX2, gREX
only.
By adding a REX Clear Data task to a function definition, the function will clear the
following data from the connected REX meter:
• billing data (current and previous)

• rates and rate overrides
• calendar
• node scan responses
• LAN registration and status information
• one way node data
• profile data (pulses)
• radio packet statistics
• registered memory
• kWh DEL and kWh REC lines on the option header
• reset demand threshold relay (if present)
• close disconnect switch (if present)
See the REX Meter Technical Manual (a PDF of the document is located on the
Metercat Installation CD in the \Documentation\REX folder) for additional
information.
Clearing a REX meter’s data

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Clear Data
To clear the data in a REX meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Clear
Data task.
10. Tasks
— OR —
REX Clear Data run time dialog.
Note: This task also resets the demand threshold relay and closes the
disconnect switch (if present).
4. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Clear Data
the new time values.
REX Connect Service task Minimum Password Level: Optical

only.
Some Form 1S, 2S or 12S REX meters come equipped with an optional service
control switch1. The service control switch enables disconnection (open switch)
and reconnection (closed switch) of electrical service.
Since closing the service control switch when load side voltage is present can
result in equipment damage, personal injury, or death, the meter will not allow
the service control switch to close when load side voltage is present.
By adding a REX Connect Service task to a function definition, the function will
close the service control switch restoring electrical service.
charged and no load side voltage is present.
Closing the service control switch on a REX meter

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Connect
To connect the service (that is, close the service control switch) of a REX meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Connect
Service task.
— OR —
1. Specified at time of ordering.

10. Tasks
REX Task Warning run time dialog.
4. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Connect
The REX meter LCD provides the following status codes for the service
control switch:
• F10000: No load side voltage when switch is closed
• F00100: Load side voltage present when switch is open
• F00001: Service control switch open
See the REX Meter with Service Control Switch product guide (PG42-1007) for
detailed information. See the REX2 meter technical manual (TM42-2220 or TM42-
2225) for details on the service control switch in the REX2 meter.
See “REX Disconnect Service task” on page 163 for details on disconnecting
service.
REX Demand Reset task Minimum Password Level: Optical

only.
By adding a REX Demand Reset task to a function definition, the function will:
• set the maximum demand to zero

• clear the status flag indicating the demand threshold was exceeded (if the
flag had been set)
• copy current billing data to the previous billing data area
• increment the demand reset counter
information.
Resetting demand in a REX meter

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Demand
Reset task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To reset demand in a REX meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX
Demand Reset task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Demand Reset
the event performed (demand reset).
REX Diagnostic Read task Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX, REX2 and gREX
only.
By adding a REX Read Data task to a function definition, the function will read the
connected REX, REX2 or gREX meter to obtain the following information:
• current billing
• previous billing
• status
• interval data (pulses)
• demand configuration
• quantities configuration
• interval data configuration
Metercat includes the viewset, REX Data, to display diagnostic reading data.
See the REX Meter Technical Manual, REX2 Meter Technical Manual and the gREX
Meter Technical Manual (PDFs of the documents are located on the Metercat
Installation CD under the \Documentation\ folder) for additional information.
Configuring the REX Diagnostic Read task

To configure the REX Diagnostic Read task:
1. From the Function Management dialog, select the REX Diagnostic Read
function or a function that includes the REX Diagnostic Read task.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the REX Diagnostic Read task.
The REX Diagnostic Read Task dialog is displayed.
5. Select the Storage Mode for the reading file:
• Meter ID:
10. Tasks

• None - no load profile data
will be read.
• All - all load profile data will be read.
8. Click OK.
Reading REX meter data

To read the data from a REX meter:
Diagnostic Read task.
— OR —
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Diagnostic Read
the data read from the meter.
The data read from the REX meter is saved to an MSR file. REX meter
readings can be viewed and managed using stored readings
management. See Chapter 13, “Managing stored readings” for details.
REX Disconnect Service Minimum Password Level: Optical

task Supported Meters: REX, REX2, gREX
only.
Some Form 1S, 2S or 12S REX meters come equipped with an optional service
control switch1. The service control switch enables disconnection and
reconnection of electrical service. Additionally, the REX meter can be
programmed to automatically disconnect power when demand exceeds a
programmed threshold and to restore power a set number of minutes after the
end of the demand interval.
By adding a REX Disconnect Service task to a function definition, the function will
open the service control switch disconnecting electrical service.
charged.
Opening the service control switch in a REX meter

Note: You will need to define a function containing the REX Disconnect
10. Tasks
To disconnect the service (that is, open the service control switch) in a REX meter:
Disconnect Service task.
— OR —
REX Task Warning run time dialog.
4. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Disconnect
The REX meter LCD provides the following status codes for the service
control switch:
• F10000: No load side voltage when switch is closed
• F00100: Load side voltage present when switch is open
• F00001: Service control switch open
See the REX Meter with Service Control Switch product guide (PG42-1007) for
detailed information. See the REX2 meter technical manual (TM42-2220 or TM42-
2225) for details on the service control switch in the REX2 meter.
REX Meter Identification Minimum Password Level: Optical

Info task Supported Meters: REX, REX2, gREX
only.
By adding a REX Meter Identification Info task to a function definition, the function
will read the connected REX meter to obtain and then create an HTML report of
meter information.
information.
Reading REX meter ID information

To read the identification information of a REX meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Meter
Identification Info task.
— OR —
10. Tasks

When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Meter Identification
Info Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed)
and the information read from the meter.
The REX Meter Identification Info Completion Report details the following
information.
Item Description
LAN ID The meter’s unique identifier (is displayed on the meter’s
nameplate).
LAN Utility ID The utility’s unique identifier (appear on the meter’s
nameplate). This identifier ensures that if there are two
different utilities with meters in the same area, the meters
will only talk to those meters with the same utility ID. See
“EnergyAxis Option tab” on page 322 for information on
the Gatekeeper.
Factory Serial Number The meter’s manufacturer’s serial number set at the
factory.
Customer Serial Number The serial number specified by the customer at order
entry for the meter (may be the same number as the Utility
Serial Number of the meter).
Meter Firmware The firmware version/revision of the meter.
Version.Revision Note: Refer to this number when seeking technical
assistance with your meter.
Meter Firmware SSpec Additional manufacturer information on the REX meter.
Radio Firmware The firmware version/revision of the radio in the meter.
Version.Revision Note: Refer to this number when seeking technical
assistance with your meter’s radio.
Radio Firmware SSpec Additional manufacturer information on the REX meter’s
radio.
Manufacturer Order A unique number assigned by the manufacturer
Number (frequently used for special custom orders).
Manufacturer Style Number Style number of meter as originally built by manufacturer.
Meter Options Indicates whether the following if enabled or disabled:
• Demand
• TOU
• Profile
• Voltage Monitoring
• Bidirectional
• Outage Reporting
Meter Time Time in the meter (in 12-hour clock format with AM or PM)
Metered Quantity The REX meter is factory configured to measure one of the
following quantities:
• kWh delivered
• kWh received
• kWh sum (kWh delivered + kWh received)
• kWh net (kWh delivered - kWh received)
10. Tasks
Item Description
Demand Interval The REX meter is factory configured to use one of the
following demand intervals:
• 15 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 60 minutes
Load Profiling Interval The REX meter is factory configured to use one of the
following profile intervals:
• 15 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 60 minutes
Load Profiling Divisor The value used to scale REX meter’s load profiling (Kh
pulses) of the metered quantity.
Load Side Voltage Present Indicates the status of voltage on the load side (that is,
(Yes/No) power is flowing through the meter).
Demand Reset Scheduled Indicates whether the meter has been commanded to
(Yes/No) perform a demand reset at midnight (usually through
remote communications).
Disconnect Relay Open Indicates the status of the disconnect switch (if present). If
(Yes/No) Yes, the service has been turned off (that is, power is not
flowing through the meter).
Program ID The Program identification number for the Metercat
program that provided the TOU schedule for the
connected REX meter. See the EnergyAxis Metering
Automation Server (MAS) documentation for more
information on TOU schedules and REX meters.
REX Set LAN Radio Test Minimum Password Level: Optical

Mode task Supported Meters: REX2
only.
Note: This task only applies to REX2 meters with FW 4.0 or higher or
higher.
By adding a REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode task to a function definition, the function
will force the connected REX meter’s LAN radio into test mode.
Setting the REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode

You will need to define a function containing the REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode
To set the LAN radio test mode in a REX meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the REX Set LAN
Radio Test Mode task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
REX Set LAN Radio Test Mode run time dialog.
4. Select the Duty Cycle (in percent) from the drop list:
a. 10% duty cycle
b. 25% duty cycle
c. 50% duty cycle
d. 100% duty cycle
5. Click OK.
To exit test mode:
• Turn the power off and then on.
• Execute REX Clear Data task (see page 159).
When the function completes, Metercat displays the REX Set LAN Radio Test
Mode Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
REX Test Mode Off Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX2 (FW v4.4 or higher)
If the REX2 meter is in test mode, the meter will automatically exit test mode at the
end of the auto-exit timeout (see REX Test Mode On for more information). The
meter will also automatically exit test mode at midnight and upon restoration
from a power failure.
This task will manually exit test mode and force the meter to resume
accumulating data into its billing registers (that is, the meter will resume updating
energy summations, resume updating demand calculations, and will resume
accumulating interval data).
To manually exit test mode in a meter:

2. From the Function drop list, select a function that includes the REX Test Mode
Off task or press the assigned function shortcut keys.
3. Click Go to perform the function.
When test mode is properly exited, the meter will resume normal mode operation
and restart the display sequence at the beginning of the display list. An event is
also recorded in the REX2 meter’s event log (see “REX2 meter events” on
page 248 for more information).
REX Test Mode On Minimum Password Level: Optical

Supported Meters: REX2 (FW v4.4 or higher)
This task causes the meter to enter test mode. While in test mode, the meter
ceases to accumulate data into its billing registers. The meter does not update
energy summations (total and TOU), does not update demand calculations, nor
10. Tasks
does it accumulate interval data. The only function of the REX2 meter test mode is
to produce optical test pulses on the meter LED and to update the energy
indicators on the meter LCD.
When the task is performed, the user can specify the auto-exit timeout value. At
the end of the auto-exit time, the meter will automatically exit test mode and
resume normal operation. The user can specify the timeout value in minutes from
1 to 255 (the default is 255 minutes).
The REX2 meter will also exit test mode when any of the following events occur:
• The REX Test Mode Off task is performed

• At midnight, regardless of whether or not the auto-exit timeout has expired
• Upon restoration after a power failure
To place the REX2 meter into test mode:

2. From the Function drop list, select a function that includes the REX Test Mode
On task or press the assigned function shortcut keys.
3. Click Go to perform the function. The Auto-exit timeout runtime dialog box is
displayed.
4. Specify the length for the test mode, in minutes, from 1 to 255. The default
time is 255.
5. Click OK.
When the meter enters test mode, the meter will only display TEST on the LCD, and
the energy indicators will blink as normal. An event is also recorded in the REX2
meter’s event log (see “REX2 meter events” on page 248 for more information).
Set DA I/O Relays task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA (FW v4.4 or higher)
Note: The meter must have the DA I/O board installed.

By adding a Set DA I/O Relays task to a function definition, the function will
perform a specific action on the specified relays. Settings DA I/O relays
To set the DA I/O Relay in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select a function that includes the Set DA I/O
Relays task.
— OR —
the meter type. Metercat displays the Set DA I/O Relays run time dialog.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-34. Set DA I/O Relays task runtime
The DA I/O Relays task runtime form indicates the current status and the
date and time the status last changed for the two relays:
• Disconnected
• Connected
• Pulsed
• Disabled
Note: If the relay is configured for Pulse Mode, the runtime options
allowed are: Do not change or Pulse now.
Note: If the relay is configured for Open/Close Mode, the runtime
options allowed are: Do not change, Connect now or
Disconnect now.
The form also indicates the states and the date and time of the last state
change for the four inputs:
• Not activated
• Activated
• Disabled
The form shows the value for the Cold Load Pickup Period (in minutes).
4. From the Relay 1 Activation Mode drop list, select one of the following:
• Do not change
• Connect after cold load pickup period (for Relay 1 only)
• Connect now
• Disconnect now
• Pulse now (only if relay is configured as Pulse Mode)
5. From the Relay 2 Activation Mode drop list, select one of the following:
• Do not change
• Connect now
• Disconnect now
• Pulse now (only if relay is configured as Pulse Mode)
10. Tasks
6. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Set DA I/O Relays
Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or failed) as
well as the states of the relays and inputs.
Set Interposing Control Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Relay task Supported Meters: A1800 ALPHA FW 4.0
By adding a Set Interposing Control Relay task to a function definition, the function
will perform the selected action on the interposing control relay. When a Connect
operation is performed Relay C is pulsed; when a Disconnect operation is
performed Relay D is pulsed.
Armed for connect means that the Relay C is armed and is driven when the
meter’s ALT button on the meter cover is pressed by the user.
Selected actions include the following:
• Do Not Change (the state of the control relay does not change)
• Connect now
• Arm the interposing relay for connect
• Disconnect now
• Clear armed for connect state
See “Relay Options component” on page 460 for details on configuring the
Interposing Control Relay.
Setting the Interposing Control Relay

To set the Interposing Control Relay in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Set Interposing Control Relay function
or a function that includes the Set Interposing Control Relay task.
— OR —
the meter type. Metercat displays the Set Interposing Control Relay run time
dialog.
The Set Interposing Control Relay dialog displays the following information:
Item Description
Relay State Indicates the current state of the relay:
• disconnected
• connected
• armed to connect
4. Select the Relay Activation Mode from the drop list:

• Do Not Change
10. Tasks
• Connect now
• Arm the interposing relay for connect (requires the user to press the
meter’s ALT button to drive Relay C)
• Disconnect now
• Clear armed for connect state
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Set Interposing Control
Relay Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
Set Interrupter Control Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

Relay task Supported Meters: A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA FW 4.0
Note: The meter must have the interrupter control relay option board
installed.
By adding a Set Interrupter Control Relay task to a function definition, the function
will perform the selected action on the control relay at the specified date and
time. Selected actions include the following:
• Do Not Change (the state of the control relay does not change)
• Clear scheduled Connect and Disconnect events (cancels any scheduled
relay connect and disconnect events
• Connect after cold load pickup period
• Connect now
• Disconnect now
• Connect and Disconnect once at specified time
• Connect and Disconnect daily at specified time
See “Relay Options component” on page 460 for details on configuring the
Interrupter Control Relay.
Setting the Interrupter Control Relay

To set the Interrupter Control Relay in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Set Interrupter Control Relay function
or a function that includes the Set Interrupter Control Relay task.
— OR —
3. Click OK to execute the function.
the meter type. Metercat displays the Set Interrupter Control Relay run time
dialog.
10. Tasks
Figure 10-35. Set Interrupter Control Relay run time
The Set Interrupter Control Relay dialog displays the following information:
Item Description
Meter Date/Time Indicates the current date and time in the meter.
Scheduled Relay Connect Indicates the date/time for the next scheduled closing of
Date/Time the relay.
Scheduled Relay Disconnect Indicates the date/time for the next scheduled opening of
Date/Time the relay.
Relay is Connected Indicates the current state of the relay:
• No - relay is open (disconnected)
• Yes - relay is closed (connected)
Actual Cold Load Pickup Indicates the number of minutes configured for the cold
Period (min) load pickup.
4. Select the Relay Activation Mode from the drop list:

• Do Not Change
• Clear scheduled Connect and Disconnect events
• Connect after cold load pickup period
• Connect now
• Disconnect now
• Connect and Disconnect once at specified time
• Connect and Disconnect daily at specified time
5. Select the Relay Connect Date/Time.
6. Select the Relay Disconnect Date/Time.
7. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Set Interrupter Control
Relay Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
10. Tasks
Set LAN Radio Test Mode Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

only.
Note: This task only applies to A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meters with
EA_NIC FW 5.0 or higher.
By adding a Set LAN Radio Test Mode task to a function definition, the function will
force the connected meter’s LAN radio into test mode.
Setting the Set LAN Radio Test Mode

You will need to define a function containing the Set LAN Radio Test Mode task.
See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To set the LAN radio test mode in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Set LAN
Radio Test Mode task.
— OR —
Set LAN Radio Test Mode run time dialog.
4. Select the Duty Cycle (in percent) from the drop list:
a. 10% duty cycle
b. 25% duty cycle
c. 50% duty cycle
d. 100% duty cycle
5. Click OK.
To exit test mode:
• Turn the power off and then on.
• Execute Clear Data task (see page 117).
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Set LAN Radio Test
Mode Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
Test Mode Off task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

only.
By adding a Test Mode Off task to a function definition, the function will force the
connected meter to exit test mode and return to normal mode.
10. Tasks
Note: This function is disabled for Direct, TCP/IP and Modem

connections.
Exiting Test mode

To exit test mode in a meter:
2. From the Function drop-list, select the Turn OFF Test Mode function or the
function that includes the Test Mode Off task.
— OR —
After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter and meter type.
Metercat forces the meter to exit test mode.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Turn OFF Test Mode
Test Mode On task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

only.
By adding a Test Mode On task to a function definition, the function will force the
connected meter to enter test mode.
Note: The configurable parameters appear at run time (that is, task
execution time).
Note: This function is disabled for Direct, TCP/IP and Modem
connections. If it is included as a task in a function (for example,
a Billing Read task followed by a Test Mode On task) executed
by a disabled connection the function will not execute.
Entering Test mode

only.
To enter test mode in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Turn ON Test Mode function or a
function that includes the Test Mode On task.
— OR —
10. Tasks
the meter type. Metercat displays the Test Mode On run time dialog.
4. Depending upon the type of meter, you will have the option to specify which
quantities will be measured by the test and whether the test should be
Standard or Fast.
Note: The pulse source options and energy per pulses at the LED for
Demand (D), Time of Use (T), Reactive (R) and Apparent (K)
meters are dependent on the Form of the connected meter. See
the meter’s technical manual for the values for all meter Forms.
5. You may also set the test mode to Auto-exit after a specified number of
Demand Intervals (in the range of 1 to 255).
6. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Turn ON Test Mode
Note: If you select Meter Default Output, the test mode will exit after
three demand intervals.
Turn PQM ON/OFF task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding a Turn PQM ON/OFF task to a function definition, the function will allow
you to turn PQM testing ON or OFF. You can use this task to change the state of
PQM testing without re-programming the meter with a new PQM component.
Turning PQM testing on or off

Note: You will need to define a function containing the Turn PQM On/
Off task. See “Building a function” on page 83 for details.
To change the time in a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Turn PQM On/Off function or a
function that includes the Turn PQM On/Off task.
— OR —
Turn PQM On/Off run time dialog. Metercat displays a run time dialog that
allows you to select the state of PQM testing.
CAUTION: Executing the Turn PQM ON/OFF task with OFF selected will
prevent any PQM tests from being executed regardless of their
Run the Specified PQM Test settings. See “PQM component” on
page 443 for more information.
4. Select either On or Off depending on the desired state for PQM testing.
10. Tasks
5. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Turn PQM On/Off
the state of the PQM feature.
Note: If the connected meter has the PQM Alpha Key disabled and
you execute a Turn PQM ON/OFF task with ON checked, PQM
tests will not run.
You can also use the PQM component to turn on PQM testing by checking PQM
ON. See “PQM component” on page 443 for details.
Unlock Service task Minimum Password Level: Unrestricted

By adding an Unlock Service task to a function definition, the function will force the
connected meter out of a manually locked service test state.
Once a service is manually locked, you must use this task to clear the locked
service from memory to prepare the meter for use on a new service.
Unlocking the service of a meter

To unlock the service of a meter:

2. From the Function drop-list, select the Unlock Service function or a function
that includes the Unlock Service task.
— OR —
When the function completes, Metercat displays the Unlock Service
the state of the service (unlocked).
At this point the meter is no longer locked on a service. If Smart Autolock is
enabled, the meter will search for and lock on a valid service if possible. In
Smart Autolock, the meter may switch locked services depending on the
results of the service voltage test. If the meter cannot detect a valid service, it
remains locked on the last known valid service and displays the error code,
SEr 555000, on the LCD.
If the meter is configured for Manual Lock, it will search for a valid service. If
a valid service is detected, the phase rotation, voltage magnitude, and
service type displays on the meter’s LCD. You must press the Reset button to
lock on the detected service. If the Reset button is not pressed, the LCD
alternately displays the error code, SYS –––––– and the detected service
information. Once the service is manually locked the service will never
automatically unlock. You must execute the Unlock Service task to unlock the
10. Tasks
service.
If the meter is set for 'None' then the service remains unlocked.
11 MANAGING MACHINE
SETTINGS
The Machine Settings tool allows you to view and manage your computer’s
connection settings (that is, COM ports), including:
• Adding a new connection

• Viewing a connection’s settings
• Changing a connection’s settings
• Deleting a connection
• Configuring for AlphaPlus software
• Establishing communications with a meter
Supported connection Metercat supports meter communications using the following methods:
types • Optical Probe
• Modem
• Direct Connect
• TCP/IP (C12.21)
• TCP/IP C12.22
Optical Probe
Elster’s UNICOM optical probe is used in the meter shop and in the field to
communicate with the meter.
The UNICOM III optical probe is connected from the computer’s USB port to the
meter’s optically coupled port.
Note: You need to have an independent power supply for the serially
connected UNICOM II probe. A small battery pack or a 120 VAC
converter is available.
To use the UNICOM probe, follow the instructions provided with that product.
Note: For successful operation, be sure that the probe is connected

securely at both ends.
To communicate with meters using the optical probe you must add a connection
specifying the correct settings for the probe (see “Adding a new connection” on
page 180 for details).
11. Managing machine settings
Modem
Metercat software may be configured to communicate using a modem with Elster
meters (also equipped with an internal or an external modem).
To connect with such meters, you must:
• add the connection specifying the correct modem init string for the
computer’s modem (see “Adding a new connection” on page 180 for details)
• enter the meter’s phone number in the Phone Book with the correct settings
(see “Adding a new phone book entry” on page 341 for details)
Direct Connect
Metercat software may be configured to communicate directly with A3 ALPHA
and A1800 ALPHA meters through direct connections such as RS-232 and
RS-485. To connect with such meters, you must:
• add the connection specifying the correct packet settings (see “Adding a
new connection” on page 180 for details)
Note: Contact Elster Technical Support for information on configuring
20 mA current loop and 2-wire RS-485 connections.
TCP/IP (C12.21)
Metercat software may be configured to communicate using ANSI C12.21
standard TCP/IP to communicate with A3 ALPHA meters having TCP/IP
transceivers connected by RS-232 or internal C12.21 WAN modules like the ACB
(advanced communication board). To connect with such meters, you must:
• enter the meter’s TCP/IP address in the Phone Book with the correct settings
TCP/IP C12.22
Metercat software may be configured to communicate using ANSI C12.22 secure
TCP/IP to communicate with A3 ALPHA meters equipped with a WAN interface
card (WIC) and with IP AxisLink routers.
Metercat can connect to an IP AxisLink router using the local USB port or using the
WAN interface. In both cases a TCP_IP_C12.22 connection must be used:
• For the USB port: a local connection needs to be created on your computer
using the procedure detailed in Chapter 4 “Creating Local USB Connections”
of TM42-4002A IP AxisiLink router Install and Admin Guide.
Once the connection is established, the router’s IP Address is available in the
PPP Connection details (typically 169.254.1.1).
• For the WAN case the IP address of the device is what has been configured
in the Network component when the device has been programmed
In either case, a TCP/IP_C12.22 Phone Book entry must be created with the
correct IP address and C12.22 APTitle for the specific IP AxisLink router. The AP Title
is available in the Activation file that is sent to the customer by Elster.
If an IP AxisLink router is installed in an EA_MS 8.0 system, then the Phone Book
data (IP address, APTile, etc.) is automatically created by Metercat when Metercat
synchronizes with EA_MS synchronization (see “Synchronizing with EA_MS” on
page 79).
To connect with such meters, you must:
• enter the meter’s TCP/IP address in the Phone Book with the correct settings
Accessing Machine To open the Machine Settings dialog:

Settings 1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
The Machine Settings dialog is displayed.
2. Click Close to close the dialog and return to the Metercat main window.
The following table describes the columns and buttons that appear in the
Machine Settings dialog:
Area or Field Description
Connection Name Displays the name of the existing connections.
Connection Type Displays the type of the connection: Optical Probe, Modem,
Direct Connect, or TCP/IP (C12.21).
Serial Port Displays the COM port number used for the current connection.
Note: TCP/IP does not use this setting.
New Opens the Connection Editor dialog where you can create a
new connection.
Edit Opens the currently selected connection in the Connection
Editor dialog, so you can modify its information.
Delete Removes the currently selected connection from Metercat.
Close Exits the currently opened dialog.
Help Accesses the online help topic that is specific to the currently
opened dialog.
Browse Browses to the location of the Alpha Plus software.
Adding a new To add a new connection source to Metercat, complete the following steps.
connection 1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
2. Click New and select the type of connection to be added:
• Optical Probe
• Modem
• Direct Connect
• TCP/IP (C12.21)
• TCP/IP C12.22
The Edit Connection dialog for the selected Type displays.
3. Enter the Name for the new connection (for example, Modem or Optical
Probe) to be used when establishing a connection.
Note: Contact Elster Technical Support for information on configuring
20 mA current loop and 2-wire RS-485 connections.
4. Continue according to the connection type:
• Optical Probe
• Direct Connect
• Modem
• TCP/IP (C12.21)
• TCP/IP C12.22
CAUTION: Advanced fields are used for troubleshooting communications

and should only be set with the help of Elster Customer Support.
Advanced settings are specific to the channel (Probe/Modem/
Direct Connect/TCP/IP) or the Protocol. The Advanced button at
the top of the form is for channel settings and the button at the
bottom of the form is for protocol settings.
Optical Probe
If you selected Optical Probe:
1. Select the COM Port the connection will be using.

— OR —
If the port number is greater than 4, type in the COM number (for example,
COM6).
Note: To determine the COM port, from the Control Panel select
System. In the System Properties dialog, select Hardware tab
and click Device Manager. In the system explorer select Ports
(COM & LPT) to expand the section to view all configured COM
ports.
2. Select the appropriate Battery Control DTR High or RTS High for the optical
probe.
Note: Elster’s Unicom probe will communicate with ANSI C12.18-
compliant meters using one of the following settings:
• both DTR High and RTS High disabled
• with DTR High or RTS High enabled
See your optical probe’s technical specifications for details on the proper
DTR and RTS settings.
3. Select the Speed (in bits per second) from the drop list.
Note: You should always set the connection speed higher than or
equal to the maximum bit rate configured in the meter's remote
definition to ensure reliable communications (see “Remote
component” on page 468).
4. Enter a value for Packet Size (range of 64 to 8192; default is 1024).
5. Enter a value for Packet Retries (range of 1 to 20; default is 3).
Figure 11-36. Optical Probe
Note: For REX, REX2 and gREX meters, only the Packet Retries
parameter is configurable.
6. Click OK to create the connection.
Direct Connect
If you selected Direct Connect:

— OR —
COM6).
ports.
Figure 11-37. Direct Connection
2. Select the Speed (in bits per second) from the drop list.
Modem
If you selected Modem:

— OR —
COM6).
ports.
Figure 11-38. Modem Connection
2. Enter the Modem Init String for the selected modem.
CAUTION: If you receive communications errors during remote

communication sessions, verify that the computer's modem is
not configured to use v.90 modem standard. See the manual
that came with your modem to find the AT command code to
specify v.22 standard and add it to the Modem Init String.
3. From the Dialing String drop list select either ATDT for tone dialing or ATDP
for pulse dialing.
4. Enter the Auto Answer String if the modem is to receive alarm, restoration,
or billing calls from meters.
Note: The default auto answer string is ATS0=1 sets the modem to
answer after one ring. If you set ATS0=0, the modem will not
answer meter calls.
5. Enter the Dialing Timeout value (10 to 255 seconds; default is 60).
TCP/IP (C12.21)
If you selected TCP/IP:
1. If you wish to receive alarm, restoration or billing calls from meters over the
Ethernet connection enter the Auto Answer Port.
Note: The Auto Answer Port number must equal the port number
configured in the Remote component. See “Configuring
Metercat for automatic call-in” on page 191 for additional
information.
Figure 11-39. TCP/IP Connection

TCP/IP C12.22
If you selected TCP/IP C12.22:
1. If you will be using a PPP Connection to connect to an IP AxisLink router
using the local USB port, enter the PPP Connection Name (that is, the
connection name on the local computer).
See Chapter 4, “Creating local USB connections” in TM42-4002 IP AxisLink
Router Installation and Administration Guide for details.
Note: The PPP Connection Name is not required if you are manually
launching the PPP connection. If the PPP Connection Name is
specified, Metercat will automatically launch the PPP connection
when executing the a Function against the IP AxisLink router.
The PPP connection is also automatically closed when the
Function execution is completed.
Figure 11-40. TCP/IP C12.22 Connection
Note: The Calling AP Title (host) is automatically assigned by Metercat

and should not be changed.
2. Click OK to save your new connection or click Cancel to return to the
Machine Settings dialog without saving the new connection.
Viewing a connection’s To view a connection’s settings:

settings 1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
2. Select a connection from the Connection Name list.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Connection dialog is displayed with the selected connection
information displayed:
4. When you have completed reviewing the selected connection, click Cancel
to close the Edit Connection dialog and return to the Machine Settings
dialog.
Changing a connection’s To change a connection’s definition:

settings 1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Connection dialog is displayed with the selected connection’s
information displayed.
4. Make any necessary changes (for example, packet size or packet retries,
etc.).
5. When you have completed your changes, click OK to save the changed
connection settings or click Cancel to close the Edit Connection dialog and
return to the Machine Settings dialog.
Deleting a connection To delete a connection:

1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the selected connection; click No
to cancel the command.
Configuring for To configure the path to Elster’s AlphaPlus software:

AlphaPlus software 1. From the Tools menu, select Machine Settings.
2. Click Browse.
The Select folder with APLUS.BAT dialog is displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder location where AlphaPlus is installed (for example,
C:\Aplus\).
4. Select APLUS.BAT in the list of files and click Open.
5. Click Close to close the Machine Settings dialog.
Troubleshooting AlphaPlus serial port conflicts

AlphaPlus Rel. 1.3 introduces changes in how the serial communications port is
accessed (Aplus.dll). These changes improve communication reliability for
computers using Windows 2000, XP or Vista.
However, not all AlphaPlus support applications have been changed; therefore,
when an application that uses the DOS port access uses a given port, this port will
be locked from use by any application using the Windows port access (that is,
Aplus.dll) and the port will not be unlocked until the DOS window is closed. Other
DOS applications started in this same DOS window that use DOS port access may
be able to access the port.
The table below shows the different AlphaPlus applications and which port
access method each uses.
Application Name Comm. Port Access Notes

AlphaPlus 1.30 Windows (Aplus.dll) • Port can be shared with Metercat, applications using Aplus.dll, and other
Windows applications. Exception: Other applications will not be able to access
the communication port when AlphaPlus is displaying the To Proceed, press
ENTER prompt.
Application Name Comm. Port Access Notes

Thresholds 1.30 DOS • Thresholds and PQ Inspector use DOS direct port access. Once either of these
applications accesses the port, the DOS window will lock the port and only
applications using DOS direct port access running in the same window can
access the port. The DOS window must be closed to release the port.
Loss Compensation 1.30 Windows (Aplus.dll) • Port can be shared with Metercat, applications using Aplus.dll, and other
Windows applications. Exception: Other applications will not be able to access
the communication port when AlphaPlus is displaying the To Proceed, press
ENTER prompt.
• An early version of Loss Compensation 1.30 uses the Aplus.dll, however the
port sharing is not consistent with AlphaPlus or ALPHA Keys. The port is not
shareable while Loss Compensation is active, but it does not require the user
to close the DOS window to free the port. An improved version of Loss
Compensation (dated 01/10/2004) offers similar port sharing to AlphaPlus.
Power Quality Inspector 1.22 DOS • Thresholds and PQ Inspector use DOS direct port access. Once either of these
applications accesses the port, the DOS window will lock the port and only
applications using DOS direct port access running in the same window can
access the port. The DOS window must be closed to release the port.
Establishing To communicate with a meter you must first define the connection you plan to
communications with a use. See “Adding a new connection” on page 180 for details on defining a
connection.
meter
Note: The meter must be energized before you can establish
communication.
You can communicate with a meter in one of the following ways:
• Optical Probe
• Modem
• Direct Connect
• TCP/IP (C12.21)
• TCP/IP C12.22
Optical Probe
To establish communications with a meter using an optical probe:
1. From the Connections menu, select your optical probe connection.

The connection toolbar is displayed below the Metercat menu.
2. Select the Function to execute from the drop list.
3. Click Go to communicate with the meter (that is, execute a function, see
Chapter 17, “Programming a device” or Chapter 18, “Reading a device” for
details).
Modem
Note: To communicate with a meter on a modem sharing unit, the
meter must be programmed with a Device ID for the port being
used (see “Program task” on page 134 or “Replace Remote task”
on page 154 for details on setting Device IDs).
To establish communications with a meter using a modem:
1. From the Connections menu, select your modem connection.

2. Check Answer Mode to enable Metercat to receive calls from meters.
See “Configuring Metercat for automatic call-in” on page 191 for additional
details.
If desired, select a function containing a Diagnostic Read task to be
executed when Metercat receives a call from a meter for the purposes of
billing, alarm, or restoration.
Metercat logs incoming calls to the incoming call log located in the
\Readings\Incoming calls\ folder.
Note: A single call log file is created for an answer mode session. A
session is started when the Auto Answer mode is enabled in
the connection and the first call is answered. The session
terminates when the Auto Answer mode is unchecked in the
connection. To view the call-in log file, from the File menu, select
Open > Call-in log.
Note: If Answer Mode is enabled, Metercat’s Tools > Stored Readings
Management is the only command available from the Tools
menu.
Note: When Answer Mode is enabled, the Dial button is hidden and
Metercat waits for Incoming calls.
3. Click Dial to open the Select an Installation to Dial dialog.
4. Select the Phone Book entry (see Chapter 16, “Managing the Phone Book”) to
dial (either double-click the entry or click OK).
Metercat attempts to establish a connection with the meter; the Dialing Log
text box shows the connection progress and information as specified in the
Modem Init String.
5. After the connection is established you are ready to execute a function (see
“Executing a function” on page 87).
Direct Connect
Note: To communicate with a meter on a modem sharing unit, the
meter must be programmed with a Device ID for the port being
used (see “Program task” on page 134 or “Replace Remote task”
on page 154 for details on setting Device IDs).
To establish communications with a meter using a direct connection:
1. From the Connections menu, select your direct connection.

The direct connection toolbar is displayed below the Metercat menu.
Enter the Device ID for the meter (for a single meter installation, zero, the default,
indicates the meter; 1-254 is used for multiple meter installations).
Note: To communicate with a single meter regardless of the
programmed Device ID, you can use Device ID = 0 or its
programmed Device ID.
2. After the connection is established you are ready to execute a function (see
Note: Metercat attempts to establish a connection with the meter after

you select a function and press Go.
TCP/IP (C12.21)
To establish communications with a meter using a TCP/IP (C12.21) connection:
1. From the Connections menu, select your TCP/IP connection.
2. Check Answer Mode to enable Metercat to receive call-in communication
from meters.
See “Configuring Metercat for automatic call-in” on page 191 for additional
details.
If desired, select a function containing a Diagnostic Read task to be
executed when Metercat receives a call from a meter for the purposes of
billing, alarm, or restoration.
Metercat logs incoming calls to the incoming call log located in the
\Readings\Incoming calls\ folder.
Note: A single call log file is created for an answer mode session. A
session is started when the Auto Answer mode is enabled in
the connection and the first call is answered. The session
terminates when the Auto Answer mode is unchecked in the
connection. To view the call-in log file, from the File menu, select
Open > Call-in log.
Note: If Answer Mode is enabled, Metercat’s Tools > Stored Readings
Management is the only command available from the Tools
menu.
Note: When Answer Mode is enabled, the Dial button is hidden and
Metercat waits for Incoming calls.
3. Click Address to open the Select an Installation to Dial dialog.
4. Select the appropriate Phone Book entry (see Chapter 16, “Managing the
Phone Book”) to access the meter (either double-click the entry or click OK).
Metercat attempts to establish a connection with the meter.
After the connection is established you are ready to execute a function (see
TCP/IP C12.22
To establish communications with a WIC-enabled meter or an IP AxisLink router
using a TCP/IP C12.22 connection:
1. From the Connections menu, select your TCP/IP C1222 connection.

2. Click Address to open the Select an Installation to Dial dialog.
Figure 11-41. Phone book entries (example after EA_MS synchronization)
3. Select the appropriate TCP/IP C12.22 Phone Book entry (see Chapter 16,
“Managing the Phone Book”) to access the meter (either double-click the
entry or click OK).
Metercat attempts to establish a connection with the meter.
After the connection is established you are ready to execute a function (see
Configuring Metercat for Note: To receive call-in communication from a meter, Auto Answer
automatic call-in must be enabled in the connection toolbar (TCP/IP or Modem).
See “Establishing communications with a meter” on page 188
for details.
When Metercat receives a call-in from a meter, Metercat can be configured to
execute a function containing a Diagnostic Read task. The data received from the
read task will be stored in a MSR file and the file name logged in the call-in log
file. A call-in log file is created for each answering session. A session starts when
Metercat answers the first call from a meter and ends when the Auto Answer
mode is unchecked in the connection bar.
Note: If the call-in is the result of a power outage, Metercat will not
execute a function.
When Metercat receives a call from a meter, a record is added to the call-in log
file, Call-In Log.html. The call-in log file records the following information for each
logged call:
• call date and time of the computer receiving the incoming call
• identification data of the meter that originated the call
• reason for the call: Billing, Alarm, Power Restoration, Outage

• function executed after receiving the call (if any)
• function completion report
• name of the MSR file generated by the function execution (if any)
See “Remote component” on page 468 for details on configuring meters to call in
to Metercat.
12 MANAGING METER
PASSWORDS
Meter passwords are used to provide secure communications between meter

software and meters. Metercat provides greater flexibility and security by
maintaining multiple password sets.
Note: Usually a utility will create a new password set and assign
groups to use the new set. This method maintains the original
Factory Defaults password set in Metercat.
The Meter Password Management tool allows you to view and manage metering
functions including:
• Accessing Meter Passwords Management

• Adding a new password set
• Changing a password set
• Viewing a password set’s history
• Deleting a password set
Note: To manage meter passwords, you must be a member of a
group with Manage Meter Passwords privileges. See
“Privileges tab” on page 54 for details. For details on setting a
group’s meter password level see “Meter Access Level tab” on
page 57.
About meter passwords Elster’s A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters use three levels of meter access
passwords. These passwords provide different access levels that determine
which functions can be performed by any connected software. The table below
details the access levels of the various passwords.
Lowest Level Access Normal Level Access Highest Level Access

Read Only Billing Read Unrestricted
including: used for any task that
• demand reset performs a ‘write’ operation
• time synchronization to the device. For example:
• Program task
• Change tasks
• Clear tasks
• Replace tasks
•
12. Managing meter passwords
The IP AxisLink router uses three levels of device access passwords:
Lowest Level Access Normal Level Access Highest Level Access

Read Only - used by Billing Read [Web Unrestricted used by:
Metercat interface access] used • Metercat (see “Tasks by
by: Password Level” on
• EA_MS for remote page 93
access to web
interface
• web browser access
using the local Mini-B
USB port
Elster recommends that each password level within a password set be different.
The meter compares the transmitted password with its programmed passwords
in sequence: 1) Read Only, 2) Billing, and then 3) Unrestricted. Therefore, if the
executed function requires the Unrestricted password and if this Unrestricted
password were to match the Read Only password stored in the meter, the meter
would grant Read Only access and the task would fail.
Passwords in ANSI C12.19 meters

Elster’s A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters support the ANSI C12.18 security
service over the optical port. A separate, 20 character password is used for each
password access level (that is, Unrestricted, Billing Read, and Read Only). Elster
programs a meter with the password set specified in the customer’s program.
The default value for a password set is all zeros (“00000000000000000000”).
For TCP/IP (C12.21) connections, the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters support
the ANSI C12.21 authentication service. Per ANSI C12.21, this service uses an 8-
byte encryption key when initiating remote communication. A separate
encryption key exists for each password access level (that is, Unrestricted, Billing
Read, and Read Only).
For convenience, when configuring an A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter,

Metercat sets each encryption key used for each remote access password level
equal to the first 8 characters of the 20-character optical password. Thus, to
ensure that remote encryption keys are unique, whenever passwords other than
the factory defaults (all zeros) are used, Elster strongly recommends that you
ensure that the first 8 characters of each level password are unique from each
other.
Figure 12-42. Encryption keys for C12.21 authentication
Password Access Level Password (20 characters)
Unrestricted A4B6C194GDFN9QW87T2P
Billing Read D4E6F194GDFN9QW87T2P
Read Only A4B6C194GDFN9GW87T2Z

Must be unique
from Unrestricted Encryption
and Read Only keys
passwords
encryption keys.
For example, if the Unrestricted password is “A4B6C194GDFN9QW87T2P” then

the encryption key used to gain remote access to the meter with Unrestricted
privileges will be “A4B6C194”. Therefore the Read Only and Billing passwords
should not have this string as the first 8 characters of their passwords.
For TCP/IP connections using the ANSI C12.22 protocol, the communication mode
can be Cleartext with Authentication or Cipertext with Authentication, according
to the ANSI standard. In Cleartext with Authentication mode, the authentication is
guaranteed by a Message Authentication Code (MAC) that is appended to every
packet and is encrypted with a key that is derived from the meter password,
depending on the desired access level. In Ciphertext with Authentication, the
communication is encrypted with a WAN key that is separate from the meter
password (see Chapter 8, “Synchronizing with EA_MS” for details).
REX meter password

Note: Metercat can only communicate with a REX meter through the
optical port.
Elster’s REX meter uses only one 8-digit password (numeric only). This password
allows you to execute the various REX tasks on a connected REX meter. See
Chapter 9, “Managing functions” for REX meter tasks.
Note: If you enter a number of less than 8 digits, zeros will be added
after the last digit until the password is 8 digits.
ALPHA Plus meter passwords

Metercat manages ALPHA Plus meter passwords for use in Alpha Keys software.
These passwords must be up to 8 digits and consist of the following:
• Unrestricted (Full Access)
• Billing Read
• Read Only
• Unrestricted (Full Access - optical)
Note: Alpha Keys uses only the Unrestricted meter password for
communicating with an ALPHA Plus meter and uses the
Unrestricted optical password for a meter programmed with a
non-zero Device ID.
About password sets A password set consists of three passwords: one for each access level (highest–
Unrestricted, normal–Billing Read, and lowest–Read-only). See “About meter
passwords” on page 193 for details on password access levels.
The Meter Passwords Management dialog allows you (if you are an authorized
user) to determine which passwords are available for communicating with
meters.
Note: Password management is restricted by group-level security.

Depending on your group’s Privileges, you may not have access
to manage meter passwords (see “Privileges tab” on page 54
for more details).
When you create or change a password, a new record is added to the Metercat
database. This record becomes part of the password history and includes the
date/time stamp and the logon name of the user that created or changed the
password set.
For security purposes, Metercat does not delete the password set from the
Metercat database. Instead, the password set is removed from the Meter
Password Management dialog.
Password retry options

Metercat has two options to use in the event a current password set fails to
establish communications with a meter:
• Password History Depth

• Try all zeros after other attempts fail
Password History Depth
Password History Depth sets the number of versions (ranging from 1 to 9) of a
password for the selected password set that Metercat will use to try to establish
communications with a meter.
For example, a Programmer group member attempts to program a meter. The

selected password set (see Figure 12-43) has a Password History Depth of 2.
Metercat uses the current (top most in history, password set name.0) password
from the selected password set in an attempt to communicate with the meter.
Note: The specific password level depends on the user’s group’s
meter access level.
If the password fails, Metercat will retrieve password set name.1 from the
database and attempt to communicate with the meter. If this password also fails,
Metercat displays an error message and will not retrieve password set name.2.
Note: If Try all zeros after other attempts fail is checked, Metercat will
try to communicate with the meter using all zeros as the
password.
Figure 12-43. Meter password history depth
Created on Created by Password Set Level

current user ID password set name.0
12/31/2005 user ID password set name.1
Note: Metercat does not attempt to use password sets other than the
password set assigned to the user’s group. See “Meter Access
Level tab” on page 57 for details on groups and meter
passwords.
Try all zeros after other attempts fail
As mentioned earlier, all A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters’ factory default
passwords are set to 20 zeros. If Metercat fails to establish communication with a
meter up to the password set’s specified history depth and Try all zeros after
other attempts fail is checked, Metercat will use a password containing 20 zeros
in an attempt to establish communication with the meter.
Accessing Meter To open the Meter Passwords Management dialog:

Passwords Management 1. From the Tools menu, select Meter Passwords Management.
The Meter Passwords Management dialog is displayed.
Figure 12-44. ANSI C12.19 meters

Note: Depending on your Metercat’s installed supported meters you

may or may not see the REX or the ALPHA Plus tabs. See the
TM42-2206 Metercat Getting Started Guide for details on
installing supported meters.
Figure 12-45. REX meters (including REX2 and gREX meters)
Figure 12-46. ALPHA Plus meters
Note: ALPHA Plus meter passwords are for use with Alpha Keys
software only. Metercat cannot read or program ALPHA Plus
meters.
The following table describes the buttons and columns found on the Meter
Passwords Management dialog:
Item Description
Password History The number of passwords tried within a given Password Set
Depth when communicating with a meter. The minimum value is 1.
(applies globally for all Example: If set to 1, only the current password is tried. If set to 2,
meter families) then the current password is tried and if it fails the most recent
prior password is tried. See “Password History Depth” on
page 196.
Note: When accessing a meter no other access level is
attempted other than the level specified by the user's
group security level.
Try all zeros after other If checked and the current password and the old password (to
attempts fail the depth specified in Password History Depth) do not work,
(applies globally for all Metercat will try using the default meter password of all zeros.
meter families) See “Try all zeros after other attempts fail” on page 197.
New Creates a new password set.
Delete Deletes an existing password set.
Apply Enters any password set changes to the Metercat database but
does not exit the Meter Passwords Management dialog. The
button will be disabled until you change a password in the
password set.
History Opens the Password Set History dialog for the selected
password set.
ANSI C12.19 tab
Name Name assigned to the password set (must be unique). This
name is used to assign a password set to a program (see
“Properties tab” on page 401) and to a user group’s “Meter
Access Level tab” on page 57.
Unrestricted Password used for programming the meter and performing

non-billing read functions. See “Tasks by Password Level” on
For IP AxisLink routers, this password level is used by EA_MS. ??
Billing Password used to perform a billing read, a demand reset, and
synchronize time in the meter. See “Tasks by Password Level” on
For IP AxisLink routers, this password level is used for remote
access to the router’s web interface and for local access using
the Mini-B USB port of the router.
Read Only Password used to read a meter (not for billing purposes). See
“Tasks by Password Level” on page 93 for details.
For IP AxisLink routers, this password level is used
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
_________________________________________________??
REX tab
Password Password used to perform REX meter tasks. See Chapter 9,
“Managing functions” for the list of REX meter tasks.
Item Description
ALPHA Plus tab
(remote) non-billing read functions.
(remote) synchronize time in the meter.
Read Only Password used to read a meter (not for billing purposes).
(remote)
(optical) non-billing read functions via the optical port.
EA_MS Meters tab
Name EA_MS meter serial number (imported from EA_MS).
(remote) non-billing read functions.
(remote) synchronize time in the meter.
Read Only Factory default password.
(remote)
Adding a new password Note: Usually a utility will create a new password set and assign
set groups to use the new set. This method maintains the original
Factory Default password set in Metercat.
To add a new password set:
1. Open the Meter Passwords Management dialog.

2. Click New; a new row is displayed below the existing password sets.
Figure 12-47. Meter Passwords Management
3. Enter a Name for the new password set.

4. Enter the passwords in the appropriate columns:
• For REX meters, enter up to 8 numbers (0 through 9).
• For ANSI C12.19 meters, enter up to 20 ASCII characters; for ALPHA Plus
meters, enter up to 8 numbers (0 through 9) in the appropriate password
columns:
1) Unrestricted - highest level access
2) Billing [IP AxisLink router web interface]- normal level access
3) Read Only - lowest level access
4) Unrestricted Optical - highest level access (for ALPHA Plus meters via
the optical port)
Note: If you change any password from the default value, then, to
maintain meter security all passwords higher than the changed
password’s access level must be changed from the default
values. For example, if you change the password at the Billing
Read level from the default, then the Unrestricted password
must also be changed.
5. For all meters, enter a number for the Password History Depth (range of 1 to
9).
6. For all meters, if needed, check to Try all zeros after other attempts fail.
7. Click Apply to save your addition without closing the Meter Passwords
Management dialog; click OK to save your addition and return to the main
window; or click Cancel to close the Meter Passwords Management dialog
and return to the main window.
Changing a password To change an existing password set:

set 1. Open the Meter Passwords Management dialog.
2. Select the appropriate password set from the Password Set list.
3. Click in the appropriate column to select the password you need to change.
Figure 12-48. Changing meter password set
4. Type in the new password replacing the existing password.
Note: If you change any default password, then, to maintain meter

security, all passwords above the changed password’s access
level must be changed. For example, if you change the
password at the Read Only level from the default, then the
Billing and the Unrestricted passwords must also be changed.
5. To save your changes:
a. Click outside of the changed column to enable the Apply button and click
Apply.
b. Click OK to return to the main window.
See “Change Passwords task” on page 108 for details on changing passwords in
a connected meter using a function.
Viewing passwords for When Metercat is synchronized with EA_MS using Tools > EA_MS Synchronization
EA_MS devices > <server name>, Metercat imports each meter’s unrestricted and billing
passwords. See “Synchronizing with EA_MS” on page 79 for details.
To view imported EA_MS meter passwords:
1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select Meter Password Management.

The Meter Passwords Management dialog is displayed.
2. Select the EA_MS Meters tab.
The Meter Passwords Management displays the meter passwords for
meters imported from EA_MS (including IP AxisLink routers).
Note: For devices imported from EA_MS, password set names use the
device’s manufacturing serial number.
Note: Because EA_MS does not use the Read Only password of a
meter, Metercat stores the factory default password for the
Read Only password.
Figure 12-49. EA_MS imported meter passwords
Metercat identifies each imported meter by its EA_MS meter serial number.
Note: You cannot edit imported meter passwords.
Viewing a password set’s To view a password set’s history:

history 1. Open the Meter Passwords Management dialog.
2. Select a password set from the displayed list.
3. Click History.
The Metercat Password History displays for the selected meter password
set.
Deleting a password set Elster recommends that to ensure meter data accessibility, you not delete any
existing password sets from Metercat.
Note: Password sets are removed from Password Management but

are retained in Metercat’s database.
To delete a password set:
1. Open the Meter Passwords Management dialog.

2. Select a password set from the displayed list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you wish to delete the selected password set; click
No to cancel the command.
Troubleshooting Invalid passwords

password problems Scenario
I created a new set of passwords and programs and proceeded to program an
ANSI C12.19 meter. The meter was programmed successfully. Now I am unable to
perform a billing read due to invalid passwords.
What happened
This problem occurs as the result of a conflict between user management and
program development. Remember that password sets are independently
assigned to both programs (see “Properties tab” on page 401) AND to user
groups (see “Meter Access Level tab” on page 57). The password set assigned to
a program affects only what is downloaded to the meter during a programming
session.
When a Metercat user attempts a communication function (like a billing read) with
an ANSI C12.19 meter, the passwords that are used to communicate with the
meter are whatever has been assigned to the group to which that user belongs
(using Tools > User Management or Tools >Account Information > Meter Access
Level tab).
When you defined and programmed a different password set into the meter, you
forgot to change the assigned password set for the group to which you belong.
To fix this problem, have your Metercat Administrator access Tools > User
Management then edit the group to which you belong. You will find the password
setting under the Meter Access Level tab.
13 MANAGING STORED
READINGS
Note: To manage stored readings your group must have privileges.

See “Privileges tab” on page 54.
Metercat allows you to selectively store billing and diagnostic readings (see
“Billing Read task” on page 99 and “Diagnostic Read task” on page 123). You may
then use the Stored Reading Management command to manage the stored data
in the following ways:
• open stored readings

• import and export stored readings
• delete stored readings
Note: Billing read files are stored in the Metercat\Readings\Billing
folder. Diagnostic read files are stored in the
Metercat\Readings\Diagnostic folder.
Opening stored readings Metercat allows you to view stored readings online. These readings are in
Metercat’s MSR (Metercat stored reading) file format.
To view stored readings:
1. In Windows Explorer, double click on the MSR file.

— OR —
Right click on the MSR file and select Open.
— OR —
Drag the MSR file into Metercat.
— OR —
From the Metercat Tools menu, select Stored Readings Management.
The Stored Readings Management dialog is displayed.
13. Managing stored readings
Figure 13-50. Stored Readings Management - table
2. Select the Viewset from the drop list.

• Double-clicking a reading opens the reading in the viewset.
3. To sort-and-group stored readings:
a. To sort the listing by Read Type, Meter Type, Meter ID, or Date/Time,
double click on the specific column header button.
b. To group, select the column header button you wish to use for sorting and
grouping.
c. Drag-and-drop the column header button up into the gray area reserved
for grouping.
d. The table is sorted and grouped based on the selected column.
e. Repeat for the next column header.
Figure 13-51. Stored Readings Management - grouped
4. Select the desired reading from the displayed list.

5. Click Open to view the reading.
Opening stored readings from Windows Explorer

To open an MSR file from Windows Explorer:
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the appropriate location of the MSR file.

2. Double-click on the MSR file.
— OR —
Right click on the MSR file and select Open.
Metercat opens and, if you are using multi-user mode, the logon screen
displays.
3. Log on to Metercat.
The Stored Reading Management dialog is displayed with the selected
Readings File path and name.
4. Select a Viewset from the drop list.
5. Click Open.
The MSR file opens in the selected viewset.
Exporting stored Stored Readings Management allows you to import or export stored meter
readings readings (MSR formatted files).
You may export a stored reading into one of the following file formats:
• Metercat Stored Readings file (MSR) - This is used to store readings to

another location so that you can import them into another Metercat system.
• Profile HHF for MV-90 - This should be used to convert the file into a format
for use with MV-90 software.
• Interval Data as ASCII text file (load profiling data only) - This is used to
create a text file that can be imported into a spreadsheet for graphing of
your load profile data.
• Instrumentation Profiling Set 1 or 2 (instrumentation profiling data only) - This
is used to create a text file that can be imported into a spreadsheet for
graphing of your instrumentation profile data.
To export stored readings:
1. From the Tools menu, select Stored Readings Management.
Note: You can use the Windows command line to export Metercat
stored readings. See “Exporting stored readings using DOS
command line” on page 214 for details.
2. Select a reading from the table.
Note: To export multiple readings, hold down either the <Ctrl> or the
<Shift> keys and select the readings.
3. Click Export and select one of the following:
a. as Metercat Stored Readings file:
1) Select the location and enter the filename for the new file.
2) Click Save.
b. as PROFILE HHF for MV-90:
1) Select the location and enter the filename for the new file.
2) Click Save.
Note: REX2 meters FW v 4.0 support two sets of interval data with at
least 2 channels per set. When exporting REX2 meter with two
sets of interval data, each set is exported to a separate HHF file.
Note: For A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 1.8 or higher, the
HHF file will be saved in the standard efile format if load profile
data is in engineering units (interval or cumulative). Please see
the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for additional
information.
Note: Depending on how you installed Metercat (for All Users or for
me only), the Reading files will be located at C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Elster\Metercat\Readings
or C:\Documents and Settings\<user logon ID>\Application
Data\Elster\Metercat\Readings.
Note: See “Billing Read task” on page 99 for information on creating
PROFILE HHF automatically.
c. Interval Data as ASCII:
sets of interval data, each set is exported to a separate ASCII
file.
Note: To select multiple readings hold down the <Ctrl> key and click
on each desired reading.
Note: Where the time in the meter has been changed1, missing
intervals are exported as zeros and duplicate intervals are
exported by adding the duplicate values together.
Note: The times in the exported file are given in standard time (that is,
Daylight Saving Time is not used) and represent the end of
interval in meter local time.
1. whether as the result of a power outage or a time synchronization of the meter.

Figure 13-52. Export Interval Data as ASCII
1) Make required selections as described in the table below:

Item Description
Restrict Data by ID Select specific ID for the file:
• All IDs - no restrictions to the report
• Account - restricts the report to only those readings from
the specified Account (ID#1 in System Preferences)
• Meter ID - restricts the report to only those readings from
the specified Meter ID (ID#2 in System Preferences)
Start Date/Time Select beginning date for meter data appearing on the file:
Time (Optional) - range is 00:00 to 23:59
Note: A blank date specifies all data prior to the Stop date will
be reported.
Note: The drop-down arrows open a calendar to allow you to
select a date.
Stop Date/Time Select ending date for meter data appearing on the file:
Time (Optional) - range is 00:00 to 23:59.
Note: If the interval length is 1 minute, to include the last
interval (23:59-24:00) of the day you will need to specify
the next day’s first interval (00:00-00:01).
Note: A blank date specifies all data after the Start date will
be reported.
select a date.
Output Date Format Select dates formats used within the file (possible values are
MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, and YY/MM/DD)
Note: The default value is your system date format.
Item Description
Output File (Required) Specifies the location and filename for the
generated file in format nnnnnnnn.txt.
Note: By default, the report files are saved to the Metercat/
Reports directory.
Output Format Select the structure of the file:
• Interval per Row - Each row contains complete information
for one interval period
• Day per Row - Each row contains information for one
complete day for a single channel of data
• Day per Column - Each column contains information for
one complete day for a single channel of data
Note: Start and Stop Times are disabled for the Day per Row
and Day per Column output formats.
Output Units Specifies what units to use for the output data:
• Demand - computed from the meter pulse data based on
the settings within the meter and the report (Unity or Kilo)
• Energy - computed from the meter pulse data based on the
settings within in the meter and the report (Unity or Kilo)
• Pulses - shows the raw pulses from the meter (disregards
any Transformer Factor and External Multipliers applied)
Note: Pulse data matches pulse data shown in a reading
with the appropriate pulse divisor (Interval Data
Configuration subcomponent) applied.
Field Delimiter Select delimiter used to separate the data fields in the file:
• Comma
• Space
• Tab
Output ID Specify the identifier in the export file (either ID 1 or ID 2).
Use Transformer Factor Determines whether the Transformer Factor is applied to the
energy or demand values. Transformer Factor is the value of
CT*VT as set in the Constants component within in the meter.
Note: This parameter applies to A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA
meters only and has no effect on REX meters data.
Note: Only used for Energy or Demand units.
Use Register Multiplier Determines whether the register multiplier is applied to the
energy or demand values. Register Multiplier is the value set
in the Constants component within in the meter.
Note: This parameter applies to A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA
meters only and has no effect on REX meters data.
Note: Only used for Energy or Demand units.
Use Pulse Divisor Determines whether the pulse divisor is applied to the pulse
count value. The Pulse Divisor is set in the Interval Data
Configuration subcomponent and can be changed using the
Change Pulse Divisor task.
When Use Pulse Divisor is selected, the ASCII reports
contains the pulse count scaled by the pulse divisor, that is, as
it is stored in the meter.
Include Channel Labels Determines whether channel labels are included in the
exported file:
• Interval per Row: a header is added in the same format as
for Instrumentation Profiling.
• Day per Row: a channel label is added after a channel
number for each channel
• Day per Column: a row with channel labels is added next
to a row with channel numbers.
Note: Applies only to interval data exported to ASCII file.
Item Description
Include Header When Include Header is selected, the ASCII report contains a
header that specifies the type and unit of reported quantity.
Two examples of header strings are:
• Units: ENERGY (Kilo), interval
• Units: PULSES, interval
Note: A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 1.8 and
higher can be configured to store Load Profile data in
Engineering units.
Save Options Saves the options you have selected into a parameter file for
future use. The options are saved to a text file (with a CFG
extension) stored in the Metercat\Config folder (by default).
Load Options Loads previously saved options from a parameter file created.
The file can be created using the Save Options selection, or
can be a parameter file created for use on the command-line
(see “Creating a MetercatASC CFG file” on page 217 for details
on creating a parameter file).
See the Metercat\Config\ folder for an example of the
default *.cfg file, MetercatASC.cfg.
Note: The export options CFG file may be shared among several
machines.
d. Instrumentation Data Set 1 (or Set 2) as ASCII:
Note: To select multiple readings hold down the <Ctrl> key and click
on each desired reading.
Note: Where the time in the meter has been changed1, missing
intervals are exported as zeros. For quantities using either the
Average or the End algorithm, the most recent duplicate interval
will be exported; for quantities using the Maximum algorithm,
the interval with the maximum value will be exported; for
quantities using the Minimum algorithm, the interval with the
minimum value will be exported.
Note: The times in the exported file are given in standard time (that is,
Daylight Saving Time is not used) and represent the end of
interval in meter local time.
Note: Duplicate intervals are exported by adding the duplicate values
together.
1. whether as the result of a power outage or a time synchronization of the meter.

Figure 13-53. Export Instrumentation as ASCII
1) Make required selections as described in the table below:

Item Description
Restrict Data by ID used to select specific ID for the report:
• All IDs - no restrictions to the report
• Account - restricts the report to only those readings from the
specified Account (ID#1 in System Preferences)
• Meter ID - restricts the report to only those readings from the
specified Meter ID (ID#2 in System Preferences)
Start Date/Time Date - beginning date for meter data appearing on the report;
Time (Optional) - range is 00:00 to 23:59
Note: A blank date specifies all data prior to the Stop date will
be reported.
select a date.
Stop Date/Time Date - ending date for meter data appearing on the report;
Time (Optional) - range is 00:00 to 23:59.
Note: If the interval length is 1 minute, to include the last interval
(23:59-24:00) of the day you will need to specify the next
day’s first interval (00:00-00:01).
Note: A blank date specifies all data after the Start date will be
reported.
select a date.
Output Date Format used to format dates used within the report (possible values are
MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, and YY/MM/DD)
Note: The default value is your system date format.
Item Description
Output File (Required) specifies the location and filename for the generated
report
Note: By default, the report files are saved to the Metercat/
Reports directory.
Output Format structure of the report:
• Interval per Row - Each row contains complete information
for one interval period
Field Delimiter delimiter used to separate the data fields in the report.
Choices are:
• Comma
• Space
• Tab
Output ID used to specify the identifier in the export file (either ID 1 or ID 2)
Save Options Saves the options you have selected into a parameter file for
future use. The options are saved to a text file (with a CFG
extension) stored in the Metercat\Config folder (by default).
Load Options Loads previously saved options from a parameter file created.
The file can be created using the Save Options selection, or
can be a parameter file created for use on the command-line
(see “Creating a MetercatASC CFG file” on page 217 for details
on creating a parameter file).
See the Metercat\Config\ folder for an example of the default
*.cfg file, MetercatASC.cfg.
Convert to Primary (as Metercat multiplies instrumentation data by the appropriate CT
applicable) or VT value depending on the unit of measure before exporting
the data.
Note: The export options CFG file may be shared among several
machines.
2) Click Export to create the report.
• If successful, the file is stored to the Output file location specified.
• If unsuccessful, errors are reported to a log file in the Metercat directory
(Elster\Metercat\Reports\MetercatASC.log)
Metercat displays a dialog giving the status of the export.
Exporting REX2 voltage profiling

sets of interval data, each set is exported to a separate HHF file.
To export REX2 voltage profile data:

2. Select a reading from the table.
Note: To export multiple readings, hold down either the <Ctrl> or the
3. Click Export and select Interval Data to ASCII.
4. Select Output Units as Pulses.
5. Select other output options as needed.
6. Click Export.
• If successful, the file is stored to the Output file location specified.

Note: By default, ASCII export files are exported to the Reports folder.
• If unsuccessful, errors are reported to a log file in the Metercat directory
(Elster\Metercat\Reports\MetercatASC.log)
Metercat displays a dialog giving the status of the export.
Exporting stored readings using DOS command line

An ASCII file of load profile or instrumentation profile data from a stored reading
can be created from the Windows command prompt.
To create an ASCII report from the command prompt:
1. From the Start menu, select Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
A Command Prompt window displays.
2. Navigate to the location of the MetercatASC.exe file (the default location is
C:\Program Files\Elster\Metercat).
3. Type MetercatASC using the appropriate parameters.
Note: For syntax help, type: MetercatASC /?.
a. The following parameters must be passed to the executable for

successful completion:
Syntax Description
SRC= Specifies the source of the data (that is, LP - load
SRC=LP profile or IP1 or IP2 - instrumentation profile set 1
or set 2):
• LP (default)
• IP1
• IP2
Note: If SRC is omitted from the command, LP is
used.
<Format> Specified the output format:
• INT_PER_ROW (Interval per Row)
• DAY_PER_ROW (Day per Row)
• DAY_PER_COL (Day per Column)
Note: DAY_PER_ROW and DAY_PER_COL
formats are not supported when
exporting instrumentation data (that is,
SRC=IP1 or SRC=IP2).
OUTPUT=”<path + filename>” Specifies the output file location (must be
OUTPUT=”C:\Temp\REPORT1” enclosed in quotation marks).
Note: If no path is specified, the report will be

generated in the \Metercat\Reports
directory
READING=”<path + filename>” Specifies the reading file location (must be
READING=”Billing\A3R*.msr” enclosed in quotation marks).
Readings are stored by Metercat in one of the
following directories:
• .\Metercat\Readings\Billing\
• .\Metercat\Readings\Diagnostic\
To specify one or more readings files use
wildcards (* or ?).
Note: If more than one reading file is
encountered for an ID, the report will
generate only the most recent reading for
the ID.
Example of a command using just required parameters:

MetercatASC SRC=LP DAY_PER_ROW OUTPUT="C:\Temp\REPORT1"
READING="Billing\A3R*.msr"
This command will export all profile data for Metercat stored reading files
that begin with A3R.
b. The following parameters are optional:
Syntax Description
DF=<format> Specifies the Date Format for the report (default is
DF=MM/DD/YY the machine’s system Date/Time properties).
Date Format options are:
• MM/DD/YY
• DD/MM/YY
• YY/MM/DD
Note: The DF specified can also be used for the
Start and Stop parameters.
Syntax Description
ID1=”<id1>” • represents the ID #1 setting from System
ID1=999888777666 Preferences > Site ID Labels tab (default value
ID1=”My Account” is Account)
• restricts the readings specified to only include
readings from this ID #1
encountered for the specified ID, the report
will generate only the most recent reading
for the ID.
Note: If the ID includes spaces, the ID must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
ID2=<id2> • represents the ID #2 setting from System
ID2=987654 Preferences > Site ID Labels tab (default value
ID2=”DL 987654321” is Meter ID)
• restricts the readings specified to only include
readings from this ID #2
encountered for the specified ID, the report
will generate only the most recent reading
for the ID.
Note: If the ID includes spaces, the ID must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
START=<start-date [,start-time]> Specifies a start date and time for the report using
START=12/15/01,14:30 the data format specified by the DF option.
Time is an optional part of this parameter and
uses the format: hh:mm, in the range of 00:00 to
23:59.
Note: If the readings specified with this
parameter contain no data from the start
time specified, no output will be
generated.
STOP=<stop-date[,stop-time]> Specifies a stop date and time for the report using
STOP=12/15/01,14:30 the data format specified by the DF option.
Time is an optional part of this parameter and
uses the format: hh:mm, in the range of 00:00 to
23:59.
Note: If the interval length is 1 minute, to include
the last interval (23:59-24:00) of the day
you will need to specify the next day’s first
interval (00:00-00:01).
DELIMITER=<delimiter> Specifies the delimiter used in the report file
DELIMITER=COMMA (default is SPACE).
Options for delimiter are:
• SPACE
• COMMA
• TAB
Note: UOM, TF, and EXTMULT parameters are ignored when exporting Instrumentation
data (that is, when SRC=IP1 or IP2).
UOM=<uom> This option specifies the unit of measure (UOM)
UOM=PULSES for the report (default is DEMAND).
Values for UOM are:

• DEMAND
• ENERGY
• PULSES
Syntax Description
TF=<YES or NO> This option determines whether the transformer
TF=YES factor is applied to the Energy or Demand data in
the report (see “Exporting stored readings” on
page 207 for description of transformer factor).
By default, the value for this parameter is YES.

EXTMULT=<YES or NO> This option determines whether the external
EXTMULT=NO multiplier is applied to the Energy or Demand
data in the report (see “Exporting stored
readings” on page 207 for description of external
multiplier).
By default, the value for this parameter is NO.

OUTID=<1 or 2> Used to specify the identifier in the export file
OUTID=2 [default, Meter ID] (either ID 1 or ID 2).
OUTIDLBL=<ID Label> This option is used to specify the Site ID label to be
OUTIDLBL=”Meter ID” used for the column header row for the OUTID
parameter.
Example with DF and delimiter parameters defined:

MetercatASC SRC=LP DAY_PER_ROW OUTPUT="C:\Temp\REPORT1"
READING="Billing\A3R*.msr" DF=MM/DD/YY delimiter=TAB
Example with all optional parameters defined:
MetercatASC SRC=IP2 INT_PER_ROW OUTPUT="C:\Temp\REPORT1"
READING="Billing\A3R*.msr" DF=DD/MM/YY ID2=987654321 START=06/
01/04,00:00 STOP=06/02/04,00:00 delimiter=TAB OUTID=2
OUTIDLBL=”Meter ID”
c. Alternatively, you can create a parameter file that defines all the
parameters and call the file using the following syntax:
MetercatASC @”MetercatASC.cfg”
Syntax Description
@”<path+parameter-filename>” This option allows you to specify a parameter file
@”C:\Program containing the options you wish to specify. Path
Files\Elster\Metercat\Config\param and filename must be enclosed in quotation
eters.cfg” marks.
4. Press Enter.
5. Type Exit to close the Command Prompt window.
Creating a MetercatASC CFG file

Using a text editor such as Notepad, you can create a parameter file that
specifies the desired parameters. To create a parameter file using a text editor,
you must use the following restrictions:
• each entry must be on a separate line

• all parameters can be specified in the file or the options can be set using a
combination of the command-line and the parameter file
• the parameter file created can also be used to load settings into the user
interface using the Load options button (see “Exporting stored readings” on
page 207)
Alternatively, you can create a parameter file using Metercat.
To create a parameter file using Metercat:
1. From Stored Readings Management, select a Reading file.

2. Click Export > Interval Data as ASCII.
3. In the Interval Data ASCII-Export Options dialog set the parameters as
needed.
4. Click Save Options.
5. Navigate to a location for the parameter file (default is Metercat\Config\).
6. Save the file with the desired filename and using either the CFG extension or
a TXT extension.
7. To just create a parameter file, click Cancel to cancel the export.
— OR —
To continue with the export click Export to create the export file.
Example CFG file

The following text is an example of a parameter file for a command line
execution:
MetercatASC SRC=LP INT_PER_ROW OUTPUT="C:\Program
Files\Elster\Metercat\Reports\6 4 04 Billing Reset File.txt"
READING="Billing\A3K 123456789 20040607142103.msr" DF=MM/DD/YY
START=06/04/04,00:00 STOP=06/05/04,00:00 delimiter=TAB
UOM=DEMAND TF=YES EXTMULT=NO OUTID=2 OUTIDLBL=”Meter ID”
*********************************************************
INT_PER_ROW
OUTPUT=C:\Program Files\Elster\Metercat\Reports\6 4 04 Billing
Reset File.txt
READING=Billing\A3K 123456789 20040607142103.msr
DF=MM/DD/YY
UOM=DEMAND
START=06/04/04,00:00
STOP=06/05/04,00:00
DELIMITER=TAB
TF=YES
EXTMULT=NO
OUTID=2
SRC=LP
OUTIDLBL=Meter ID
*********************************************************
Importing stored You may import one or more Metercat MSR reading files using Stored Readings
readings Management.
To import an MSR file of stored readings:
1. Click Import.
The Select Metercat Stored Reading to Import dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the location of the reading files to be imported and select one or
more files.
Note: To import multiple readings, hold down either the <Ctrl> or the
3. Click Open.
Metercat imports the selected file.
Note: Imported files appear in bold text in the list. When you close
Stored Readings Management and re-open Stored Readings
Management the imported readings will no longer appear in
bold text.
Figure 13-54.
Note: See “Setting stored readings options” on page 51 for details on

specifying filename format.
4. Click Close to close the Stored Readings Management dialog and return to
the main window.
Note: You must have Export and/or Import privileges to export or
import meter readings. You must have Delete privileges to
delete any meter readings. See “Entering group information” on
Deleting a stored reading Note: In System Preferences (see “Setting stored readings options” on
page 51), you can set a stored readings option that sends
deleted readings to the Recycle Bin rather than deleting them
immediately from the machine.
To delete a file of stored readings:

2. From the table, select the reading to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
Metercat prompts you to confirm that you do wish to delete the selected
reading file.
4. Click Yes to delete the file or click No to cancel the deletion and return to the
Stored Readings Management dialog.
14 MANAGING VIEWSETS
Note: To manage viewsets your group must have privileges. See

“Privileges tab” on page 54.
The Viewset Management tool allows you to view and manage viewset
information, including:
• Accessing Viewset Management
• Creating a new viewset
• Sample viewsets
• Available views
• Viewing a viewset’s properties
• Changing a viewset
• Deleting a viewset
• Creating a Viewset Report
• Opening a report
What is a viewset? Metercat uses views to organize data read from devices (meters and IP AxisLink
routers). Using Viewset Management, you can combine one or more views into a
viewset so that only the desired data displays. You may select a viewset during
the following activities:
• when opening a stored reading (MSR) file (using Tools > Stored Readings
Management)
• when executing a Diagnostic or Billing Read function (in connection bar)
Note: You must be a member of a group with create/edit privileges in
Viewset Management to create or edit a viewset. See “Adding a
Accessing Viewset To open the Viewset Management dialog:

Management 1. From the Tools menu, select Viewset Management.
The Viewset Management dialog is displayed.
14. Managing viewsets
Figure 14-55. Viewset Management
2. Select the appropriate view from the Viewsets list; the Included Views list
changes to display those views that compose the selected view.
• Clicking New or Edit opens the Viewset Builder dialog. See “Using the
Viewset Builder” on page 222 for details.
3. Click Close to close the dialog and return to the main window.
The following table describes the boxes and buttons that appear in the
Viewset Management dialog.
Item Description
Viewsets Displays a list of all the viewsets defined in Metercat.
Included Views Displays a list of all the views included in the currently selected
viewset.
New Opens the Viewset Builder dialog where you can create a new
viewset.
Edit Opens the currently selected viewset in the Viewset Builder
dialog for editing or reviewing.
Delete Removes the currently selected viewset from Metercat.
Close Closes the Viewset Management dialog.
Help Opens the online help topic on viewset management.
Using the Viewset Builder The Viewset Builder contains two tabs:
• Viewset Definition tab
• Access Control tab
Viewset Definition tab

The Viewset Definition tab allows you to perform the following functions:
• determine which views are included in a particular viewset

• add views to a particular viewset
• remove views from a particular viewset
Figure 14-56. Viewset Builder - viewset definition
The table below describes the boxes and buttons on the Viewset Definition tab.
Field/Button Description
Viewset Name Displays the name of the currently selected viewset. When
creating a new viewset, you type a unique name in this field.
Available Views Displays a list of all the views that can be added to the current
viewset.
Included Views Displays a list of all the views that are included in the current
viewset.
Movement Buttons See “Using movement buttons” on page 24 for details on using
(Add, All, Remove, Up the movement buttons.
and Down)
Access Control tab

Note: The Access Control tab is only visible if Metercat is configured as
a multi-user system. See “Configuring the user environment” on
page 38.
The Access Control tab allows you to perform the following functions:
• view groups that have access to a particular viewset

• add groups to the Enabled Groups list (that is, give them privileges to the
viewset)
• remove groups from the Enabled Groups list (that is, revoke privileges to the
viewset)
Figure 14-57. Viewset Builder - access control
The table below describes the boxes and buttons on the Access Control tab.
Field/Button Description
Disallowed Groups Displays a list of groups that do not have access to the
selected viewset.
Enabled Groups Displays a list of groups that have access to the selected
viewset.
Movement Buttons (Add, See “Using movement buttons” on page 24 for details on
All, and Remove) using the movement buttons.
Creating a new viewset Clicking New or Edit while in the Viewset Management dialog displays the
Viewset Builder dialog. The Viewset Builder allows you to add or remove views
from a viewset (the Viewset Definition tab) and to add or remove group access
privileges to the viewset (the Access Control tab).
Note: To create a viewset, you must belong to a group that has

Create/Edit privileges to Viewsets Management (see “Entering
group information” on page 53).
To create a new viewset:
1. From the Tools menu, select Viewset Management.

2. Click New.
The Viewset Builder dialog is displayed.
3. Type a name for your new viewset in the Viewset Name box.
4. Select a view in the Available Views list and click Add to move the view to the
Selected Views list; repeat for each additional view you want to include in
the viewset.
5. To change the order of the views in the viewset, select a view in the Selected
Views list and click either Up or Down to move the selected view in the
desired direction.
6. Select the Access Control tab.
Note: The group you are currently logged on under is automatically
granted access to the new viewset.
7. Select a group in the Disallowed Groups list.
8. Click Add to move the selected group to the Enabled Groups list; repeat for
each additional group.
9. After you have entered all of the relevant information regarding the new
viewset, click OK to complete the definition.
Viewing a viewset’s Sometimes you may need to refresh your memory about a viewset’s properties
properties (that is, included views, permissions, etc.).
To display a viewset’s settings:

2. From the Viewsets list, select the viewset you want to view.
3. Click Edit to open the Viewset Builder dialog.
4. Select the appropriate tab for the information you wish to view.
5. When you have reviewed all of the information regarding the selected
viewset, click Cancel to close the Viewset Builder and return to the Viewset
Management dialog.
Changing a viewset To change the included views or the access privileges for a particular viewset:

2. From the Viewsets list, select the viewset you want to change.
3. Click Edit to open the Viewset Builder dialog.
4. If you want to add or remove views from a viewset, select the Viewset
Definition tab.
a. To add a view, select a view from the Available Views list and click Add to
move the view to the Included Views list.
b. To remove a view, select a view from the Included Views list and click
Remove to move the view to the Available Views list.
5. If you want to change the access privileges for the viewset, select the Access
Control tab.
a. To give a group access to a viewset, select a group in the Disallowed
Groups list and click Add to move the group to the Enabled Groups list.
b. To remove a group’s access to a viewset, select a group in the Enabled
Groups list and click Remove to move the group to the Disallowed Groups
list.
6. Click OK to save your changes or click Cancel to close the Viewset Builder
without saving your changes.
Deleting a viewset To completely remove a viewset from Metercat:

2. Select the viewset you want to delete from the Viewsets list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel and return to the Viewset
Management dialog.
Creating a Viewset Before you can create a viewset report you must:
Report • read a meter (with a viewset selected) as described in “Reading a meter” on
page 359
— OR —
• open a stored reading as described in “Opening stored readings” on
page 205
To create a viewset report:
1. With the viewset displayed, from the File menu, select New > Report.
If the viewset contains Interval Data (Pulses) and/or Interval Data
(Instrumentation) the Report Configuration Options dialog is displayed.
Figure 14-58. Viewset Report configuration
2. Select the appropriate range of data for each available view:

a. Only Currently Expanded Days [default] – select the Interval Data (Load
Profile) view or the Interval Data (Instrumentation) view in the displayed
viewset and expand those dates whose interval data you wish to be
included in the report (that is, one day, several days, or all days).
b. Start Date – Stop Date – will include only the interval data in the Interval
Data (Load Profile) view or the Interval Data (Instrumentation) view that
falls within the date range.
c. All Data – will include all data in the Interval Data (Load Profile) view or the
Interval Data (Instrumentation) view in the report.
3. Click OK.
Metercat displays an HTML file of the viewset data.
Note: If the viewset includes the Instrumentation view, Metercat
creates, in the Reports folder, a new folder with a name based
on the file name of the report. Metercat stores a JPEG file of the
phasor diagram image in this new folder.
4. To save the report, from the File menu, select Save As.
Opening a report Metercat saves reports as HTML files.
To open a saved report:
1. From the File menu, select Open > Report.

The Select a Report for Viewing dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the location of saved reports.
3. Select the report you wish to open from the list.
4. Click Open.
The selected report displays.
See Chapter 22, “Using the Program Editor” for details on information contained
in the views.
Sample viewsets Metercat installs with the following sample viewsets:
Long Diagnostic includes all views
Meter Data includes:

• Constants view • Self Reads view
• Current Billing view • Status view
• Previous Billing view • Interval Data (Load Profile)
• Previous Season view view
• Special Relay Status view • Event Log Data view
Program Configuration includes all views except:
• Current Billing view • PQM view
• Day Types Pending view • PQM/Sag Log Data view
• Event Log Data view • PQM/Sag Status view
• History Log Data view • Previous Season view
• Instrumentation view • Self Reads view
• Instrumentation Profiling • Special Dates Pending view
Config view • Special Option Board view
• Interval Data (Load Profile) • Switch Times Pending view
view
• Previous Billing view
Short Diagnostic includes:
• Status view • Interval Data (Load Profile)
• Current Billing view view
• Quantities view • Event Log Data view
REX Data includes:
• Current Billing view • Quantities view
• Demand view • Status view
• Interval Data Configuration • Interval Data (Load Profile)
view view
• Previous Billing view
IP AxisLink Diagnostic includes:
Read
• ACL (Access Control List) • Status view
view • Security Event Log Data view
• Binary IO view • Event Notifications view
• Day Types view • Network view
• Day Types Pending view • Special Dates view
• DNP view • Special Dates Pending view
• Event Log Data view • Switch Times view
• Logs Configuration view • Switch Times Pending view
IP AxisLink Program includes:
Configuration
• ACL (Access Control List) • Event Notifications view
view • Network view
• Binary IO view • Remote view
• DNP view • Day Types view
• Logs Configuration view • Switch Times view
• Special Dates view
15 VIEWS
Available views A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters support the following views (organized by
type of data):
Meter data Log data

• Constants view • Event Log Data view
• Current Billing view • History Log Data view
• Previous Billing view • PQM/Sag Log Data view
• Previous Season view • PQM/Sag Status view
• Interval Data (Load Profile) view • Self Reads view
• Status view
• Special Relay Status view
Pending data Instrumentation data
• Demand Pending view • Instrumentation view
• Display Pending view • Interval Data (Instrumentation) view
• Special Dates Pending view
• Switch Times Pending view
• Day Types Pending view
Program data
• Demand view • Remote view
• Display view • Service Test view
• Quantities view • Special Dates view
• Interval Data Configuration view • Special Features view
• Instrumentation Profiling Config view • Special Option Board view
• Logs view • Switch Times view
• PQM view • Day Types view
• Relay Options view
REX, REX2 and gREX meters support the following views:
REX Data
• Current Billing view • Interval Data (Load Profile) view
• Demand view • Previous Billing view
• Display view • Quantities view
• Event Log Data view • Status view
• Interval Data Configuration view • Interval Data (Load Profile) view
15. Views
IP AxisLink routers support the following router-specific views:
IP AxisLink router-specific views

• ACL (Access Control List) view • Event Notifications view
• Binary IO view • Network view
• DNP view • Security Event Log Data view
• Logs Configuration view
Supported views
• Day Types view • Status view
• Day Types Pending view • Switch Times view
• Special Dates view • Switch Times Pending view
• Special Dates Pending view
Meter views The meters support the following views:
• Constants view • PQM view

• Current Billing view • PQM/Sag Log Data view
• Day Types Pending view • PQM/Sag Status view
• Day Types view • Previous Billing view
• Demand Pending view • Previous Season view
• Demand view • Quantities view
• Display Pending view • Relay Options view
• Display view • Remote view
• Event Log Data view • Self Reads view
• History Log Data view • Service Test view
• Instrumentation Profiling • Special Dates Pending
Config view view
• Instrumentation view • Special Dates view
• Interval Data • Special Features view
(Instrumentation) view • Special Option Board view
• Interval Data (Load Profile) • Special Relay Status view
view • Status view
• Interval Data • Switch Times Pending
Configuration view view
• Logs view • Switch Times view
Note: The IP AxisLink router supports some of these views for

example, Special Dates, Day Types, and Switch Times.See “IP
AxisLink router views” on page 330 for details on views specific
to the router.
Constants view
The Constants view displays the connected meter’s constants settings. See
“Constants component” on page 408 for details.
15. Views
Figure 15-59. Constants view - ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the Constants view.
Item Description
Metering Application Indicates whether the meter is performing one of
the following:
• Secondary metering
• Primary metering
Register Multiplier The external multiplier that must be applied to all
billing values.
CT Ratio Current transformer ratio.
VT Ratio Voltage transformer ratio.
CT × VT Indicates the meter’s transformer factor.
Adjusted Kh Indicates the watthour constant that is used to
convert energy pulses to watthours.
Adjusted Ke Indicates the value used by the meter to convert
pulses to energy.
Adjusted Kd Indicates the demand constant (represents watts
per pulse).
Current Billing view

The Current Billing view displays the billing data for the current period.
15. Views
Figure 15-60. Current Billing - A3 ALPHA meter
Note: For –Net quantities the maximum demand column will contain
delivered demand values. For example, for kWh–Net the
maximum demand values will be kW–Del.
15. Views
Figure 15-61. Current Billing - REX2 meter
The table below details the information provided by the Current Billing view
Item Description
Total Indicates the total energy, that is, the sum of all rates (first
column) and the peak demand for all rates (second column).
Rates Indicates the value for the configured metered quantities (for
example, kWh-Del, kVARh(Q2+Q3), PF kWh-Del, Coincident
values, etc.) as well as the values for Maximum Demand and
Cumulative Demand. See “Quantities view” on page 284 for
details on the meter’s configured quantities.
Note: Some rows may have values of 0.000000 and have no
date/time values. This indicates that the particular rate
is not used or the rate is used but a value has not been
recorded by the meter.
Date/Time Indicates the date and time the metered quantity value was
recorded.
Day Types view

The Day Types view displays the day types (by season) defined in the meter’s
program. See “Day Types subcomponent” on page 456 for details on configuring
day types. Seasons shown are configured in System Preferences (see
“Configuring seasons” on page 46 for details).
Note: If the connected meter is not configured to collect time-of-use
(TOU) data, you will see the following message, “TOU is not
enabled in this meter.”
15. Views
Figure 15-62. Day Types view - ALPHA meters and IP AxisLink router
The table below details the information provided by the Day Types view:
Item Description
Season Lists all of the seasons (default = 4) defined in System
Preferences (see “Configuring seasons” on page 46).
Day of Week Defines the day type for a particular day of the week
(Sunday through saturday) and holidays for each defined
season.
Day Types Pending view

The Day Types Pending view displays the day type configuration changes that will
take affect on the indicated Effective Date after the execution of a Replace Rates
and Dates task that specifies the replacement of the Rates component (see
“Replace Rates and Dates task” on page 151). Seasons shown are configured in
System Preferences, (see “Configuring seasons” on page 46 for details).

15. Views
Figure 15-63. Day Types Pending view - ALPHA meters and IP AxisLink routers
The table below details the information provided by the Day Types Pending view.
Item Description
Season Lists all of the seasons (default = 4) defined in
System Preferences (see “Configuring seasons” on
page 46).
Day of Week Defines the day type for a particular day of the
week (Sunday through saturday) and holidays for
each defined season.
Perform a Self Read indicates whether the meter will perform a self
read on the effective date that the new day type
settings go into effect
Perform a Demand Reset indicates whether the meter will perform a
demand reset on the effective date that the new
day type settings go into effect
Effective Date the date the new day type settings take effect
Demand view
The Demand view displays the demand configuration for the meter’s program.
See “Demand component” on page 411 for details.
15. Views
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters Demand view
Figure 15-64. Demand view - ALPHA meters
The table below details the information provided by the ALPHA meter’s Demand
view.
Item Description
Exponential Response If checked, the meter allows Exponential
Response (default values in Normal mode:
Interval = 15 min. and Subinterval = 15 min.;
default values in Test mode: Interval = 1 min.
and Subinterval = 1 min.).
Interval Demand Interval (minutes).
Subinterval Demand Subinterval (minutes)
Overload In demand metering, the Overload threshold
above which a warning is triggered in the
meter.
Rate Thresholds Indicates the meter’s programmed thresholds
Cumulative Demand Type Indicates the cumulative demand
configuration:
• At Reset
• Continuous
Test Interval Test mode demand interval (minutes)
Test Subinterval Test mode demand subinterval (minutes)
15. Views
Item Description
Demand Forgiveness Time Indicates the time span (in minutes) during
which maximum demand is not calculated
following an outage.
Demand Forgiveness Outage Time Indicates the minimum time span (in minutes)
for a power outage required to initiate a
demand forgiveness period.
REX meter Demand view
Figure 15-65. Demand view - REX meter
The table below details the information provided by the REX, REX2 and gREX
meter’s Demand view.
Item Description
Interval (minutes) Indicates the demand interval supported by the
connected meter. The REX2 meter supports a
demand interval specified as either 15 minutes,
30 minutes, or 60 minutes.
Subinterval (minutes) Note: REX2 meter does not currently support
subinterval demand calculation.
Threshold (kilo units) Indicates the demand threshold programmed
into the connected meter. The REX2 meter
supports a threshold between 0.000 kW
(disabled) and 999.999 kW.
Demand Forgiveness Time (minutes) The time during which demand is not
calculated or stored after a power restoration.
The demand forgiveness may be set between
zero (demand forgiveness is disabled) and 255
minutes.
15. Views
Demand Pending view

The Demand Pending view, like the Demand view, displays the Demand
configuration changes that will take affect on the indicated Effective Date after the
execution of a Replace Program task that specifies the replacement of the
Demand component (see “Replace Program task” on page 145). See “Demand
view” on page 235 for details on items in the Demand Pending view.
Figure 15-66. Demand Pending view
Display view
The Display view displays the meter’s LCD display configuration. See “Display
subcomponent” on page 427 for details.
15. Views
Control tab
Figure 15-67. Display, Control - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
Figure 15-68. Display, Control - A1800 ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the Control subtab:
Item Description
Hold Time Indicates the length of time that an item
remains visible on the meter’s LCD display.
Demand & Energy Format Options Indicates the format options for the meter’s
display:
• Decimal Location - maximum of four
digits
• Display Digits - three to six digits
• Display Units - Unity, Kilo, Mega
Display Labels (Annunciators) on Display Indicates whether display labels appear on
Lists the meter’s LCD during the following modes:
• Normal
• Alternate
• Test
Show One Cycle of Alternate Display List Indicates the display power up setting
at Power Up (disabled or enabled). To change this setting,
select Tools > System Preferences >
Programming Options (see “Setting
programming options” on page 47 for
details).
Show Leading Zeros on Metered Indicates whether displayed values contain
Quantities leading zeros (enabled/disabled)
15. Views
Item Description
Display Previous Billing Data Indicates how the meter displays previous
billing data:
• Always
• Only if present
Display Previous Season Data Indicates how the meter displays previous
(TOU meters only) season data:
• Always
• Only if present
Date Format Indicates the format used to display dates
(TOU meters only) on the meter’s LCD:
• Day-Month-Year
• Month-Day-Year
• Year-Month-Day
Self Read Annunciator Numbering Indicates the type of numbering for LCD
(A1800 ALPHA meters only) displayed self reads:
• Annual - labels the self read with the
number of the month (01-12)
• Rolling - labels the self read with the
number of months in the past (for
example, 01 means last month, 06
means six months past, etc.)
Idle Timeout Indicates the number of minutes the
(A1800 ALPHA meters only) A1800 ALPHA meter must be idle before it
exits Read without Power mode.
Configure ALL Instrumentation Quantities Indicates whether all instrumentation
as Primary quantities are multiplied by the transformer
(A1800 ALPHA meters only) ratios (that is, voltage quantities will be
multiplied by the voltage transformer (VT)
ratio; current quantities will be multiplied by
the current transformer (CT) ratio; and power
quantities will be multiplied by the
transformer factor).
Number of Self Reads to loop through Indicates the number of self reads that will
(A1800 ALPHA meters only) be scrolled on the meter’s LCD when in
Display mode (range of 0 to 35).
15. Views
Warnings tab
Figure 15-69. Display, Warnings - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
The table below details the information provided by the Warnings subtab.
Item Description
Locking warnings on the display using Indicates that all warnings will lock the meter’s
defined codes display.
Reverse Power detection warning Indicates whether the meter is programmed to
detect reverse power.
Warnings selected to lock display as Indicates those warnings that the meter will
error Er3 300000 display as Error Er3 300000
See Appendix E, “Meter Events, Errors & Warnings” and the A3 ALPHA Meter
Technical Manual (TM42-2190) and the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual
(TM42-2410) for details on event, errors and warnings.
REX Display view

The Display view for the REX meter details the current configuration for the LCD.
15. Views
Figure 15-71. Display view - REX, REX2, and gREX meters
LCD Display Items

The Normal, Alternate and Test tabs display the configuration settings for the
meter’s LCD display list. See “Grouping display items” on page 436 for a list of
available display items of the A3 ALPHA meter.
• the Normal tab lists the meter’s normal mode display items and their IDs
15. Views
Figure 15-72. Display view
• the Alternate tab lists the meter’s alternate mode display items and their IDs
The Alternate tab looks like the Normal tab in appearance.
• the Test tab lists the meter’s test mode display items and their IDs
The Test tab looks like the Normal tab in appearance.
Display Pending view

The Display Pending view, like the Display view, displays the Display configuration
changes that will take affect on the indicated Effective Date after the execution of
a Replace Program task that specifies the replacement of the Display component
(see “Replace Program task” on page 145). See “Display view” on page 238 for
details on items displayed in the Display Pending view.
15. Views
Figure 15-73. Display Pending view
Event Log Data view

The Event Log Data view displays the list of events that the device has been
programmed to record. Events can include things such as power failures,
demand resets, and operation of the test mode.
Event log entries consist of the following:
• the sequence number

• the date and time of the event
• a description indicating the type of event
• the source ID that triggered the event (may be meter firmware dependent)
• any data that is associated with the event (for example, the instantaneous
demand value at the time of a voltage event)
The Event Log view varies depending on the device being read and the specific
firmware version. See the following sections for more information about each
event log type:
• A3 ALPHA meter events

• DA I/O option board events
• REX2 meter events
• IP AxisLink router events
15. Views
A3 ALPHA meter events
Figure 15-74. Event log data view - A3 ALPHA meter
All A3 ALPHA meters support the event log; however, demand only meters only
record a sequence of events without logging the date or time. See the A3 ALPHA
meter technical manual for a complete listing of the events that can be recorded
in the event log.
After the maximum number of entries has been recorded, the all meters will
begin overwriting the oldest entries. See “Logs component” on page 418 for
information on configuring your meter’s event log.
The UserId column indicates the source of the event, as described in Table 15-2
Table 15-2. A3 ALPHA meter UserID description

UserID Description
0 The meter itself initiated the event.
1 The event was manually initiated.
2 Metercat administrator
3 to 9999 Assigned Metercat programmer ID
10000 EnergyAxis head-end
25000 EA_Tools (for example, upgrading the gatekeeper module)
57344 Elster ACB option board
15. Views
Table 15-2. A3 ALPHA meter UserID description

UserID Description
60000 Itron 50ESS ERT
60100 Amron option board
60200 Sensus option board
60300 Silver Spring Networks option board
61000 Metrum option board
62000 Trilliant Networks (NERTEC) option board
63000 Itron SmartSynch option board
64044 Aclara option board
65000 EKA Systems option board
DA I/O option board events

A3 ALPHA meters with firmware version 4.4 or later support the DA I/O option
board. The option board has 2 output and 4 input relays.
See the A3 ALPHA meter technical manual for a complete listing of the DA I/O
events that can be recorded in the A3 ALPHA meter technical manual.
REX2 meter events
Figure 15-75. Event log data view - REX2 meter (FW 3.0)
15. Views
Figure 15-76. Event log data view - REX2 meter (FW 4.0)
Beginning with REX2 meters with firmware version 3.0 or later, the meter can be
configured to record only specific events and their associated time stamps in
interval data. When programmed to record only events, the REX2 meter excludes
billing-related data. REX2 meters record the date and time based on the time
received from the LAN. If the REX2 meter has not yet received the date and time
from the network, the event log records the event using the meter’s relative time.
See the REX2 meter technical manual for a complete listing of the events that can
be recorded in interval data.
Beginning with meter firmware version 4.0, the REX2 stores additional
information, such as the source of the event and any additional data that the
meter has captured at the time of the event. The source of the event is listed in the
User ID column (see Table 15-3).
Table 15-3. REX2 meter (FW v4.0 or higher) event sources

Source (User ID) Description
0 Meter (or other end device)
1 Manual Operation (push button, tamper switch, etc.)
2 Direct-connect Serial Port (for example, and option board)
3 Optical Serial Port
4 LAN (or other network-type connection)
15. Views
Table 15-4 shows those events that may contain additional information in the
Event Argument column. If the event is not listed in the table, then there is no
additional information reported.
Table 15-4. REX2 meter events with event arguments

Description Argument
Reset List Pointers List ID
Configuration Table Write Table Number
Voltage Monitoring: Minimum Voltage Threshold (PhA) Voltage value1
Voltage Monitoring: Minimum Voltage Threshold (PhC)2 Voltage value3
Voltage Monitoring: Maximum Voltage Threshold (PhA) Voltage value3
Voltage Monitoring: Maximum Voltage Threshold (PhC)2 Voltage value3
Voltage Monitoring: Voltage Returned to Normal (PhA) Voltage value3
Voltage Monitoring: Voltage Returned to Normal (PhC)2 Voltage value3
Coincidental Values: Voltage (PhA) Voltage value3
Coincidental Values: Voltage (PhC)2 Voltage value3
Coincidental Values: Demand (PhA) Energy value2
Coincidental Values: Demand (PhC)2 Energy value4
1. Voltage values are logged with a resolution of 0.1V. For example, a value of
2326 should be interpreted as 232.6V.
2. Demand values are logged with a resolution of 10 units. Example: 1025 =
10,250 W/VA/VAR.
IP AxisLink router events

The IP AxisLink router supports event logging.
15. Views
Figure 15-77. Event Log Data view - IP AxisLink router
IP AxisLink routers (2.0 and higher) support the following events:

No Event Clock Change by Web
Device Power Down1 Device Reboot Occurred
Device Power Up1 Device Firmware Updated
Time Changed (Old Time) Diagnostic Test Event
Time Changed (New Time) Primary Power Down1
Procedure Invoked Primary Power Up1
Configuration Change EEPROM Memory Initialized
Event Log Cleared Nonvolatile Memory Initialized
Daylight Savings Time On Digital Input 1 Transitioned High
Daylight Savings Time Off Digital Input 1 Transitioned Low
Pending Table Activation Digital Input 2 Transitioned High
Pending Table Clear Digital Input 2 Transitioned Low
Configuration Error Detected Digital Input 3 Transitioned High
Rom Failure Detected Digital Input 3 Transitioned Low
Nonvolatile Memory Failure Detected Digital Input 4 Transitioned High
Clock Error Detected Digital Input 4 Transitioned Low
Security Log Entry Made Digital Output 1 Driven High
Clock Change by C12.19 Digital Output 1 Driven Low
Clock Change by DNP3.0 Digital Output 2 Driven High
Clock Change by SNTP Digital Output 2 Driven Low
1. Requires a backup power supply.

15. Views
See “Event Logs Configuration component” on page 515 for details.
History Log Data view

The History Log Data view displays a sequential list of all events which altered the
meter programming, their date/time of occurrence, and the Userid (Meter
Programmer’s ID, see “General tab” on page 62) of the individual triggering such
events. See “Logs component” on page 418 for configuration details.
History Events
The occurrence of the following events are stored in the History Log:
No Event Daylight Savings Time On

Primary Power Down Daylight Savings Time Off
Primary Power Up Season Change
Time Changed (old time) Rate Change
Time Changed (new time) Special Schedule Activation
End Device Accessed for Read Tier Switch Change
End Device Accessed for Write Pending Table Activation
Procedure Invoked Pending Table Clear
Table Written To Metering mode started
End Device Programmed Meter shop mode started
Communication Terminated Normally Meter shop mode stopped
Communication Terminated Abnormally Configuration error detected
Reset List Pointers Self check error detected
Metering mode stopped Ram failure detected
Test mode started Rom failure detected
Test mode stopped Non volatile memory failure detected
Update List Pointers Clock error detected
History Log Cleared Measurement error detected
History Log Pointers Updated Low battery detected
Event Log Cleared Low loss potential detected
Event Log Pointers Updated Demand overload detected
Demand Reset Occurred Power failure detected
Self Read Occurred Tamper detect detected
Reverse rotation detected
Note: Some meters may not support recording all history log events.
See the meter’s technical manual for the logging capabilities of
a particular meter.
15. Views
Figure 15-78. History Log Data view
Instrumentation Profiling Config view

The Instrumentation Profiling Config view displays the instrumentation profiling
configuration of the meter’s program. See “Instrumentation Profiling Config
component” on page 415 for details.

Note: If the connected meter is not configured to collect
instrumentation profiling data, you will see the following
message, “Instrumentation Profiling is not enabled in this
meter.”
15. Views
Figure 15-79. Instrumentation Profiling Config view
Note: If Days of Storage is set to Maximize, the meter will be

programmed with a calculated Number of Days of storage (see
“Memory Allocation tab” on page 404) and this value displays
in the view.
Instrumentation view
The Instrumentation view displays the instrumentation profiling data and Power
Relationship and may include Harmonic Content data collected by the meter.
Note: To view Harmonic Content data, you must perform a reading of

a meter using a Billing Read or Diagnostic Read task configures
to read All Harmonic Content Data.
15. Views
Phasor diagram
Figure 15-80. Instrumentation view - phasor diagram
The table below details the information provided by the Instrumentation Phasor
Diagram view.
Item Description
Voltage Indicates the meter’s voltages by phase
Voltage Phase Angle Indicates the meter’s voltage phase angles by
phase
Current Indicates the meter’s current by phase
Current Phase Angle Indicates the meter’s current phase angles by
phase
Power Factor Indicates the meter’s current power factor
Power Factor Angle Indicates the meter’s current power factor angle
kW Indicates the meter’s current kW per phase.
kVAR Indicates the meter’s current kVAR per phase.
kVA Indicates the meter’s current kVA per phase.
Line Frequency Indicates the meter’s current line frequency.
15. Views
Item Description
Phasor diagram Provides a graphical representation of the phase
rotations and angles of the current as read by the
meter.
Note: This diagram is not updated in real time.
The phasor diagram is primarily used to verify correct installation of the meter
(ensuring that all the expected currents and voltages are present and in the
appropriate relative positions).
Figure 15-81. Phasor diagram
The following table details the phasor diagram:
Item Description
curved arrow in the lower Indicates the phase rotation direction of lagging current.
right-hand corner of the The default direction of rotation displayed is counter-
diagram clockwise.
voltage, current and Displayed in the appropriate colors for the matching
phase angles identifiers: blue for voltage, green for current, and red for
lag or lead of current vs. voltage.
The arrows on the graph do not represent magnitude of
current or voltage.
text in upper left-hand Voltage rating of the meter and other relevant meter
corner of the diagram information (such as the wiring, number of phases, etc.)
lower left-hand corner of Date and time of the reading.
the diagram
You can view the phasor data and graph either as a single read (using the
Instrumentation view) or in continuous read mode (using the PQ Inspector task).
See “PQ Inspector task” on page 143 for details on viewing the phasor diagram in
continuous refresh mode.
15. Views
Power Relationship
Figure 15-82. Instrumentation - Power Relationship view
If the connected meter has Power Quality Monitoring (PQM) ENABLED and PQM is
ON (using the Turn PQM ON/OFF task), then the Instrumentation viewset will
display the Power Relationship data. The table details the following per phase
measurements:
• Voltage
• Current
• Power Factor Angle
• kW
• kVA
The power relationship diagram displays the power vector for each phase and
for the system (total) in a 4-quadrant graph.
Additionally, another table displays total system power measurements (both

arithmetic and vectorial) for the following:
• kW
• kVAR
• kVA
• PF
15. Views
This data is shown in a graph on the System subtab of Power Relationship.
Figure 15-83. Instrumentation - Power Relationship view
• Sa: Service power (3-phase) vector, arithmetic calculation

• Sv: Service power (3-phase) vector, vectorial calculation
You can view the power relationship data and graph either as a single read
(using the Instrumentation view) or in continuous read mode (using the PQ
Inspector task). See “PQ Inspector task” on page 143 for details on viewing power
relationship data in continuous refresh mode.
Harmonic Content
Note: To read harmonic data you must read the meter with a read
task that includes Harmonic Content Data. If the read task does
not include harmonic data, the Harmonic Content tab will
display a message that “No Data is available.”
15. Views
Figure 15-84. Instrumentation - Harmonic Content view
If the connected meter has Power Quality Monitoring ENABLED and PQM is ON
(using the Turn PQM ON/OFF task) and the reading task included Harmonic
Content Data, then the Instrumentation viewset will display harmonic graph and
data:
• for each phase (A, B, C), two columns displaying the harmonic content (% of
fundamental) of voltage and current up to the 15 harmonics
• a bar chart (% vs. harmonics) of the values measured
• per phase (A, B, C) measures of the root mean squared (RMS) of voltage and
current
• per phase (A, B, C) measures of the total harmonic distortion (THD) values of
voltage and current
Note: Harmonic Content data is dated and time stamped on the bar
chart.
You can view the harmonic data and graph either as a single read (using the
Instrumentation view) or in continuous read mode (using the PQ Inspector task).
See “PQ Inspector task” on page 143 for details on viewing harmonic data in
continuous refresh mode.
15. Views
Zooming in to the harmonic bar chart

In the upper right corner of the Harmonic Content bar chart is a square button
with a ‘+’ sign. This button allows you to zoom in to the bar chart up to 100% to
10%.
Interval Data (Instrumentation) view

The Interval Data (Instrumentation) view displays the meter’s instrumentation data
by date and interval stop time for all recorded channels. Additionally, the view
shows individual channel and interval status information.

Note: If the connected meter is not configured to collect
instrumentation profiling data, you will see the following
message, “Instrumentation Profiling is not enabled in this
meter.”
Figure 15-85. Interval Data (Instrumentation) view
Note: Clicking on a button for a particular date shows the interval

data for only that day.
15. Views
Note: The time indicated is the meter’s local time and not GMT or
computer local time.
Note: The viewset report (File > New > Report) will allow you to select
the data included in the report (that is, all data, a date range or
expanded dates only). See “Creating a Viewset Report” on
15. Views
The following table explains the button functions found on the Interval Data
(Instrumentation) tab.
Item Description
Collapse All Days - displays only the dates for the interval data in the
meter reading. Clicking on one date, shows the meter interval data
collected on that date.
Expand All Days - displays the interval data for every date contained in
the meter reading.
Note: You must click this button to have all interval data appear on a
report (File > New > Report).
Hide Status Columns - hides the status information column (that is, only
date and pulse data displays).
Show Status Columns - shows the status information columns in addition

to the date and pulse data.
Interval Status
Interval data uses two types of statuses: Interval Status and Channel Status (for
the specified interval).
15. Views
Note: All status values are set by the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA
meter except for the Current Interval status value which is set by
Metercat.
Interval Status values are:
• Dst - Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) is in effect during interval

• Pwr - Power failure or restoration occurred during interval
• ClkF - meter clock was reset forward during interval
• ClkB - meter clock was reset backward during interval
• Cur - this is the current interval
Note: The Interval Status column may have a value Dst Pwr ClkF ClkB
Cur, however due to limitations in the allowable width of the
column, not all values may be visible; you may generate a
report (File > New > Report) to view all values.
Channel Status
Note: More than one Channel Status event may occur in an interval;
however, due to ANSI C12.19 limitations only one value will be
displayed according to the A3 ALPHA meter status priorities
detailed below.
Because the ANSI C12.19 standard allows for only one channel code to be set in
an interval, the channel status will be displayed in the following priority (highest to
lowest):
1. Test - Interval contains test mode data. The meter entered or exited test
mode during the marked interval.
2. Overflow - Channel overflow. The data accumulated during the interval
exceeded the data format chosen for the interval.
3. Skipped - Skipped interval. There was no data available for the channel
during the interval.
4. Long - Long interval. The interval length was longer than its configured
length.
5. Partial - Partial interval. The interval length was shorter than its configured
length.
6. Blank - Nothing extraordinary occurred during the interval.
Interval Data (Load Profile) view

The Interval Data (Load Profile) view displays the meter’s interval data in pulses by
date and interval stop time for all recorded channels. Additionally, the view
shows individual channel and interval status information. A3 ALPHA and A1800
ALPHA meters and the REX2 meter support interval data recording.

15. Views
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters
Figure 15-88. Interval Data - A3 ALPHA meter
Note: Clicking on a button for a particular date shows the interval

data for only that day.
REX2 meter
Note: REX2 meter FW v 4.0 supports two sets of interval data (must be
specified at time of order) with each set having up to two
channels. Additionally, the second set in supports voltage
profiling (see PB42-2004, REX2/gREX meter programming form
for details). By default, set 1 is always enabled; set 2 is optional.
The energy divisor for set 2 applies only when the configured
quantity is an energy quantity, not voltage.
15. Views
Figure 15-89. Interval Data - REX2 meter - Set 1
Figure 15-90. Interval Data - REX2 meter - Set 2

15. Views
Interval data mode

A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 1.8 or higher, allow for selecting load
profile mode:
• Pulses
• Engineering units (Interval)
• Engineering units (Cumulative)
Note: If the data is Pulses, checking the Display scaled pulse count
option displays the pulse count scaled by the Pulse Divisor, that
is, the pulse count as stored in the meter.
15. Views
Note: The time indicated is the meter’s local time and not GMT or
computer local time.
Note: The viewset report (File > New > Report) will allow you to select
the data included in the report (that is, all data, a date range or
expanded dates only). See “Creating a Viewset Report” on
The following table explains the button functions found on the Interval Data (Load
Profile) tab.
Item Description
Collapse All Days - displays only the dates for the interval data in the
meter reading. Clicking on one date, shows the meter interval data
collected on that date.
Expand All Days - displays the interval data for every date contained in
the meter reading.
Note: You must click this button to have all interval data appear on a
report (File > New > Report).
Hide Status Columns - hides the status information column (that is, only
date and pulse data displays).
15. Views
Item Description
Show Status Columns - shows the status information columns in addition
to the date and pulse data.
Interval Status
Interval data uses two types of statuses: Interval Status and Channel Status (for
the specified interval).
Note: All status values are set by the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA
meter except for the Current Interval status value which is set by
Metercat.
Interval Status values are:
• Dst - Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) is in effect during interval

• Pwr - Power failure or restoration occurred during interval
• ClkF - meter clock was reset forward during interval
• ClkB - meter clock was reset backward during interval
• Cur - this is the current interval
Note: The Interval Status column may have a value Dst Pwr ClkF ClkB
Cur, however due to limitations in the allowable width of the
column, not all values may be visible; you may generate a
report (File > New > Report) to view all values.
Channel Status
Note: More than one Channel Status event may occur in an interval;
however, due to ANSI C12.19 limitations only one value will be
displayed according to the A3 ALPHA meter status priorities
detailed below.
Because the ANSI C12.19 standard allows for only one channel code to be set in
an interval, the channel status will be displayed in the following priority (highest to
lowest):
1. Test - Interval contains test mode data. The meter entered or exited test
mode during the marked interval.
2. Overflow - Channel overflow. The data accumulated during the interval
exceeded the data format chosen for the interval. A pulse divisor may be
necessary (see “Interval Data Configuration subcomponent” on page 441).
3. Skipped - Skipped interval. There was no data available for the channel
during the interval.
4. Long - Long interval. The interval length was longer than its configured
length.
5. Partial - Partial interval. The interval length was shorter than its configured
length.
6. Blank - Nothing extraordinary occurred during the interval.
Interval Data Configuration view

The Interval Data Configuration view displays the interval data configuration of
the meter’s program. See “Interval Data Configuration subcomponent” on
15. Views

A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter
Figure 15-93. Interval Data Config - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
Figure 15-94. Interval Data Config - A1800 ALPHA meter
The table below details the Information provided by the Interval Data
Configuration view for the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters.
Item Description
Days of Storage Indicates the number of days the meter is
programmed to store interval pulse data.
Note: If Days of Storage is set to Maximize, the
meter will be programmed with a
calculated Number of Days of storage
(see “Memory Allocation tab” on
page 404) and this value displays in the
view.
Interval length Indicate’s the meter’s programmed interval pulse
length.
Pulse Divisor Indicates the meter’s programmed Pulse Divisor.
Quantities Recorded Indicates the measurement quantities being
recording in each channel.
15. Views
REX2 meter
Note: REX2 meter FW v 4.0 supports two sets of interval data (must be
specified at time of order) with each set having up to two
channels. Additionally, the second set in supports voltage
profiling (see PB42-2004, REX2/gREX meter programming form
for details). By default, set 1 is always enabled; set 2 is optional.
The energy divisor for set 2 applies only when the configured
quantity is an energy quantity, not voltage.
Figure 15-95. Interval Data Config - REX2 meter - Set 1

15. Views
Figure 15-96. Interval Data Config - REX2 meter - Set 2
The table below details the information provided by the Interval Data
Configuration view for the REX2 meter.
Item Description
Interval Length (minutes) Indicate’s the meter’s programmed interval pulse
length.
Pulse Divisor Indicates the meter’s programmed Pulse Divisor.
Quantities to record Indicates the measurement quantities being
recording in each channel.
Logs view
The Logs view displays the logs settings of the meter’s program. See “Logs
15. Views
Figure 15-97. Logs view - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
Figure 15-98. Logs view - A1800 ALPHA meter
The Logs view includes the following information:
Item Description
Event Log Entries Indicates the number of event entries per log
stored in the meter.
History Log Entries Indicates the number of history entries per log
Sag Log Entries Indicates the number of sag event entries per log
PQM Log Entries Indicates the number of PQM event entries per log
Self Reads Indicates the number of self reads the meter is
programmed to store (value from 0 to 15 for the A3
ALPHA meter and 0 to 35 for the A1800 ALPHA
meter).
Contents of Event Logs Indicates the events stored by the meter in the
event log.
Note: In addition to the events supported by the A3 ALPHA meter, the

A1800 ALPHA meter also supports the following: Terminal Cover
Removal Detection, Main Cover Opening Detection and Phase
Outage. See “Logs component” on page 418 for details on these
A1800 ALPHA meter events.
15. Views
PQM view
The PQM view displays the PQM configuration for the connected meter. See “PQM
component” on page 443 for details on PQM configuration.
Note: The Set Version and PQM Version are displayed to the right of
the PQM Set drop list.
If the connected meter does not support PQM (that is, the PQM Alpha Key is
disabled), the upper left corner of the PQM view will state PQM is not enabled in
the meter. However, the PQM component can be configured in the meter
regardless of the PQM Alpha Key setting, therefore, the PQM view will show the
configured PQM test settings. See “PQM component” on page 443.
Note: If the connected meter is not configured to perform PQM (that is,
PQM key is disabled), you will see the following message, “PQM
is not enabled in this meter.”
Figure 15-99. PQM view - A1800 ALPHA meter
Unrecognized test set

If the connected meter is programmed with an unrecognized test set, the PQM
Set will display as Unknown (the Set Version and PQM Version will be shown) and
the enumerated Test Names (1–12) will display as Test 1, Test 2, Test 3, etc. instead
of Service Voltage Test, Low Voltage Test, High Voltage Test, etc.
15. Views
PQM/Sag Log Data view

The PQM/Sag Log Data view displays the log data for PQM tests (PQM log tab)
and for voltage sag event (Sag log tab) for the current billing period.
If the connected meter does not support PQM (that is, the PQM Alpha Key is
disabled), or the Read task PQM Logs setting was None, the respective tabs will
state “No data available.”
Figure 15-100. PQM/Sag Log Data view - A3 ALPHA meter
The PQM Log tab displays the following information:
Item Description
Seq. No. Indicates the order in which the PQM test failure
occurred.
Date/Time Indicates the date and time the specific PQM test
Note: This applies to TOU meters exceeded both the set thresholds and the
only. qualification time (see “PQM component” on
page 443).
Note: The date/time of the PQM test failure may be
different from the date/time that is displayed
on the PQM Status tab because the Status tab
indicates the date/time the thresholds were
exceeded but does not include the
qualification time.
Test No. Indicates the number of the PQM test.
15. Views
Item Description
Test Name Indicates the name of the test. See “PQM tests” on
page 446.
Status Indicates whether the specific event was one of the
following:
• Start - testing exceeds test thresholds and
qualification time
• Stop - testing falls within test thresholds
1. Service Voltage Test No value shown.

2. Low Voltage Test Indicates the voltage at the time the qualification
time is exceeded for Phase A (even if it is phase B or
C that actually caused the test to fail).
3. High Voltage Test Same as Low Voltage Test.
4. Reverse Power Test & PF No value shown.
5. Low Current Test No value shown.
6. Power Factor Test No value shown.
7. Second Harmonic Current Test Indicates second harmonic current magnitude for
Phase A (even if it is phase B or C that actually
caused the test to fail).
8. Total Harmonic Distortion Indicates current % Total Harmonic Distortion for
Current Test Phase A (even if it is phase B or C that actually
caused test to fail).
9. Total Harmonic Distortion Indicates phase A voltage % Total Harmonic
Voltage Test Distortion for Phase A (even if it is phase B or C that
actually caused test to fail).
10. Voltage Imbalance Test No value shown.
11. Current Imbalance Test No value shown.
12. Total Demand Distortion Test Indicates phase A % Total Demand Distortion (even if
it is phase B or C that actually caused test to fail).
13. IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test
13. Low Voltage Phase A Test
14. Low Voltage Phase B Test
15. Low Voltage Phase C Test
16. High Voltage Phase A Test
17. High Voltage Phase B Test
18. High Voltage Phase C Test
19. Low Voltage with High Current
Phase A Test
Phase B Test
Phase C Test
22. Current Missing Phase A Test
23. Current Missing Phase B Test
24. Current Missing Phase C Test
15. Views
Item Description
1. Voltage Interruptions Test
2. Rapid Voltage Changes Test
3. Frequency Changes 1
5. Service Voltage Test No value shown.
6. Total Harmonic Distortion Indicates current % Total Harmonic Distortion for
Current (%) Phase A (even if it is phase B or C that actually
caused test to fail).
7. Total Harmonic Distortion Indicates phase A voltage % Total Harmonic
Voltage (%) Distortion for Phase A (even if it is phase B or C that
actually caused test to fail).
Figure 15-101. PQM/Sag Log Data view - A3 ALPHA meter
The Sag Log tab displays the following information:
Item Description
Seq. No. Indicates the order in which the sag events occurred.
Date/Time Indicates the date and time the sag event occurred.
Note: This applies to TOU meters only.
Event Indicates the details of the sag event.
15. Views
PQM/Sag Status view

The PQM/Sag Status view displays the status data for PQM tests (PQM Status tab)
and for voltage sags (Sag Status tab) for the current billing period.
Note: If the connected meter does not support PQM, the respective
tabs will state “No data available.”
Figure 15-102. PQM/Sag Status view - A3 ALPHA meter
The PQM Status tab displays the following information:
Item Description
Test No. Indicates the number of the test (1–12).
Test Name Indicates the name of the test. See “PQM tests” on
page 446.
Cumulative Count Indicates the total number of times the specific PQM test
failed.
Cumulative Failure Time Indicates the total amount of time that the specific PQM test
failed.
Note: Cumulative Failure Time does not include the time
for an event that is currently in progress.
15. Views
Item Description
In Progress Note: This item applies only to test thresholds.
Qualification time are not a factor.
Indicates one of the following:
• For both demand and TOU meters: No if the test is
currently within set thresholds
• For demand-only meters: Yes (test thresholds are
currently exceeded)
• For TOU meters: the date/time the specific test
thresholds were first exceeded.
Note: The date/time of the PQM test failure will be different
from the date/time that is displayed on the PQM Log
tab because the Log tab indicates the date/time that
both the thresholds and the qualification time were
exceeded.
Note: A test event can be In Progress but the event will not
be logged until the qualification time has been
exceeded.
Figure 15-103. PQM/Sag Status view - A3 ALPHA meter
The Sag Status tab displays the following information:
Item Description
Cumulative Voltage Sag Indicates the total number of times there was a qualifying
Count sag event for each phase
Cumulative Voltage Sag Indicates the total amount of time there was a qualifying
Duration (sec) sag event for each phase
15. Views
Item Description
Events with duration less Indicates the total number of times there was a sag event
than minimum sag time that lasted less than the configured minimum sag
duration
Events with duration greater Indicates the total number of times there was a sag event
than maximum sag time that lasted longer than the configured maximum sag
duration
Note: The two Events with duration items only appear for A3 ALPHA
and A1800 ALPHA meters with FW v3.0 and higher.
Previous Billing view

The Previous Billing view displays the billing data for the previous billing period for
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA and REX2 meters. The view also indicates the date
and time of the last demand reset.
Figure 15-104. Previous Billing - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
Figure 15-105. Previous Billing - REX2 meter
The table below details the information provided by the Previous Billing view
Item Description
Date/Time of the Last The date and time of the last demand reset.
Demand Reset
Note: Some rows may have values of 0.000000 and have
no date/time values. This indicates that the particular
rate is not used or the rate is used but a value has not
been recorded by the meter.
recorded.
Previous Season view

The Previous Season view displays the meter’s energy quantity measurements for
the previous season. The view also indicates the date and time of the last season
change.
15. Views

Figure 15-106. Previous Season view
The table below details the information provided by the Previous Season view
Item Description
Date/Time of the Last The date and time of the last season change.
Season Change
column) and the peak demand for all rates (second
column).
Rates Indicates the value for the configured metered quantities
(for example, kWh-Del, kVARh(Q2+Q3), PF kWh-Del,
Coincident values, etc.) as well as the values for Maximum
Demand and Cumulative Demand. See “Quantities view”
on page 284 for details on the meter’s configured
quantities.
Note: Some rows may have values of 0.000000 and have
no date/time values. This indicates that the
particular rate is not used or the rate is used but a
value has not been recorded by the meter.
recorded.
15. Views
Quantities view
The Quantities view displays the meter’s quantities configuration. See “Quantities
subcomponent” on page 423 for details.
Figure 15-107. Quantities - A3 ALPHA meter

15. Views
The table below details the information provided by the Quantities view for A3
ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters:
Item Description
Metering Quantities selected Indicates the quantities the meter is
programmed to collect.
Configure for the Advanced Metering Indicates the meter is configured for additional
Option metering quantities, power factors, and
coincident measurements.
Note: Advanced metering (-A) is only available
for meters with this capability.
Apply Load Control and Overload Indicates whether the meter is programmed to
Thresholds apply load control or overload thresholds to the
indicated quantity (enabled/disabled).
Power Factor calculation settings Indicates those quantities the meter uses to
calculate average power factor.
Coincident measurement settings Indicates those quantities the meter uses to
collect coincident quantity values.
15. Views
Figure 15-109. Quantities - REX, REX2 and gREX meter
The table below details the information provided by the Quantities view for the
REX2 meter:
Item Description
Metering Quantities Indicates the quantities the meter is
programmed to collect.
Demand Trigger Quantity Quantity used for demand threshold.
Relay Options view

The Relay Options view displays the meter’s relay configuration. See “Relay
Options component” on page 460 for details.
Note: Depending on your System Preferences and the connected

meter’s firmware version (3.x or higher), you will see either KYZ
Divisor or KYZ Value in the Relay Options view.
Note: If the connected meter is an A3 ALPHA meter with an internal
polyphase service control switch the Relay option board cannot
be installed.
15. Views
Figure 15-110. Relay Options view
The table below details the information provided by the Relay Options view for
relays A through F.
Item Description
Relay Driver Indicates the source for the meter’s relay output.
KYZ Source Indicates the source for the relay activation (kWh
Del or Rec, kVAh Del or Rec, kVARh Del or Rec,
kVARh Q1, Q2, Q3 or Q4 depending on meter
type).
KYZ Divisor / KYZ Value Indicates either the:
Note: The KYZ Value is enabled in • KYZ Output Divisor (KYZ Divisor) (integer in the
System Preferences. See range of 1 to 999)
“Setting programming • KYZ Value (number in the range of 0.000001
options” on page 47 for to 100.000000)
details.
Wiring Diagrams Displays diagrams of the various relay wiring
configurations.
Inhibit KYZ Outputs During Test Mode Indicates whether the KYZ output is inhibited
during test mode (enabled/disabled).
KYZ Relay Activation Type Indicates whether the meter’s KYZ relay
transition is activated by a toggle or pulse and
the pulse width (in milliseconds; range of 1 to
255).
15. Views
Remote view
The Remote view displays the meter’s remote communication configuration. See
“Remote component” on page 468 for details.
Figure 15-111. Remote view - A3 ALPHA meter
The Remote view is composed of the following tabs:
• Modem tab
• Answer tab
• Billing tab
• Alarms tab
• Restoration tab
• Outage Modem tab
• DCPM tab
Modem tab
If Metercat supports A1800 ALPHA meter (see “Setting supported meters” on
page 44), the Modem tab displays the Port Protocol (ANSI, DLMS, ANSI+DLMS, or
DCPM) in addition to the Port Usage. Also, if the Port Protocol = DCPM then a
separate subtab displays the DCPM configuration and status information read
from the meter.
15. Views
The table below details the information provided by the Modem tab.
Item Description
Modem Init String Indicates the modem’s currently programmed
modem initialization string (default is
&F&C0E0Q0).
Call Window settings Indicates the modem’s currently programmed
call windows settings (date/time).
Security Call Back setting Indicates whether the modem is programmed
to perform security call backs (enabled/
disabled).
Intrusion Detection setting Indicates whether the modem is programmed
to it attempts to dial out, can detect when the
phone line is busy or, during a communication
session, can detect when someone (or
another device) picks up an extension. The
modem will hang up to free the telephone line
(enabled/disabled).
Line Sharing setting Indicates whether the modem is programmed
to share the communication line with other
devices (such as the Gatekeeper module).
Initial Dialing Delay setting Indicates the modem’s currently programmed
dialing delay (within the range of 0 to 255
minutes; default is 10 minutes).
Retry Delay settings (min and max) Indicates the minimum and maximum times
the modem is permitted to retry dialing.
Dialing mode Indicates dialing mode:
• tone
• pulse
Modem Bit Rates (min and max) • Minimum bit rate for initializing the modem
• Maximum bit rate for the serial port to
which the modem is attached.
Inactivity Timeout settings Indicates whether the modem is programmed
to timeout when it is inactive:
• Never Timeout
• Timeout value (within the range of 1 to 255
minutes; default is 10 minutes)
Advanced settings: Indicates whether the modem can or cannot
perform:
• Enable Large Timeouts
• Sportster Delay
• Turnaround Delay setting (in seconds)
• Charge Up Delay setting (in seconds)
• Escape Sequence Inter-character Delay (in
seconds)
Answer tab
The table below details the information provided by the Answer tab.
Item Description
Enable Answering Indicates whether the modem is allowed to
answer telephone calls (enabled/disabled).
Answer window settings (Answer Indicates the times of day that the modem is
anytime, start and stop times) programmed to answer the phone.
15. Views
Item Description
Number of rings before answering Indicates the number of rings the modem is
programmed to wait before picking up.
Billing tab
The table below details the information provided by the Billing tab.
Item Description
Enable Billing Calling Indicates whether the modem is configured to
make billing telephone calls (enabled/disabled).
Billing phone number Indicates the telephone number or IP address the
modem uses to make billing telephone calls. The
Ethernet ACB Special Option Board accepts IP
addresses using the following format:
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000
Where Port is in the range of 0-65535.
Note: The internal modem only accepts the
following characters: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, A, B, C, D, ‘;’, ’/’, ‘#’, ‘*’, and ‘,’. All other
characters are removed from the phone
number during meter programming.
Billing Call Schedule Indicates whether the modem uses a call schedule
(enabled/disabled).
Call Schedule settings If the meter uses a call schedule, indicates the
modem’s schedule for making the billing
telephone calls.
Enable call origination windows Indicates whether the modem is configured to use
call windows.
Number of retries Indicates the number of times the modem is
allowed to attempt billing telephone calls.
Alarms tab
The table below details the information provided by the Alarms tab.
Item Description
Enable Alarm Calling Indicates whether the modem is configured to
make alarm telephone calls (enabled/disabled).
Alarm phone number Indicates the telephone number or IP address the
modem uses to make alarm telephone calls. The
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000
Errors, Warnings, Events trigger Indicates those errors, warnings, or events that
settings will trigger an alarm telephone call. See Appendix
E, “Meter Events, Errors & Warnings” for details.
call windows.
15. Views
Item Description
allowed to attempt alarm telephone calls.
Restoration tab
The table below details the information provided by the Restoration tab.
Item Description
Enable Restoration Calling Indicates whether the modem is configured to
make power restoration telephone calls (enabled/
disabled).
Restoration phone number Indicates the telephone number or IP address the
modem uses to make restoration telephone calls.
The Ethernet ACB Special Option Board accepts IP
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000

call windows.
allowed to attempt power restoration telephone
calls.
Outage Modem tab

The table below details the information provided by the Outage Modem tab.
Item Description
Enable Outage Calling Indicates whether the modem is configured to
make power outage telephone calls (enabled/
disabled).
Outage phone number Indicates the telephone number or IP address the
modem uses to make outage telephone calls. The
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000

15. Views
Item Description
Outage call Settings (in sec):
• Max. off hook wait time - the number of
seconds the modem is configured to wait for
the call to be answered
• Min. time to trigger call - the minimum number
of seconds the modem is configured to wait
prior to initiating the outage call; any outage
exceeding this time causes a call to be placed.
• Min. time to reset Outage Detection
• Outage call bit rate (bps)
• Max. dialing delay - maximum number of
seconds the modem is configured to wait prior
to initiating an outage call (charge up delay)
• Min. retry interval - minimum number of
seconds the modem is configured to wait
between redialing attempts
allowed to attempt power outage telephone calls.
DCPM tab
A1800 ALPHA meters with FW v 4.0 or higher support DL/T 645 version and the
DCPM protocol. See “DCPM tab” on page 485 for details.
Self Reads view

The Self Reads view displays data for up to 15 of the A3 ALPHA meter’s last self
reads or up to 35 of the A1800 ALPHA meter’s last self reads. The readings are
displayed sequentially with the most recent self read first. See “Logs component”
on page 418 for details.
15. Views
Figure 15-112. Self Reads view
The table below details the information provided by the Self Read viewset:
Item Description
Season Indicates the season that was active when the self read
occurred.
Date/Time of Self Read Indicates the date and time the self read occurred.
Note: Some rows may have values of 0.000000 and have no
date/time values. This indicates that the particular rate
is not used or the rate is used but a value has not been
recorded by the meter.
Date/Time Indicates the date and time the values was recorded.
Service Test view

The Service Test view displays the meter’s service test configuration. See “Service
Test component” on page 486 for details.
15. Views
The Service Test view includes the following tabs:
• Basic Settings tab

• Advanced Settings - Current tab
• Advanced Settings - Voltage tab
Basic Settings tab
Figure 15-113. Service Test - Basic Settings view
The table below details the information provided by the Basic Settings tab.
Item Description
Portable ALPHA application Indicates if this is a portable ALPHA meter
service test.
Phase Indicator Threshold Indicates the meter’s current threshold as a
percentage of the nominal.
Service Voltage Tolerance Indicates the meter’s current tolerance settings
as a percentage of the nominal.
Rotation Test Indicates the rotation tests the meter performs:
• Both
• ABC only
• CBA only
15. Views
Item Description
Service Test Mode Lock Indicates the method the meter uses to lock
service:
• Smart Auto Lock
• Manual
• None
Current Test after Powerup Voltage Indicates whether the meter is set to run a
Test current test after powerup voltage test
(enabled/disabled).
Advanced Settings - Current tab
Figure 15-114. Service Test - Advanced Settings - Current view
Note: In the case of CBA rotation, the thresholds are reversed, that is,
the min Lagging PF value is used as the threshold for leading
power factors and the min Leading PF is used as the threshold
for lagging power factors.
The table below details the information provided by the Advanced Settings –
Current tab.
Item Description
Meter Configuration Indicates the meter’s configuration.
Service information Details the services defined for the selected meter
configuration.
15. Views
Item Description
Current settings for selected Indicates whether the meter uses the default
configuration values set on the Basic Settings subtab. If the meter
is not using the default values, values other that
default are specified.
Trigger Warning settings Indicates conditions and phases that will trigger
warnings.
Advanced Settings - Voltage tab
Figure 15-115. Service Test - Advanced Settings - Voltage view
The table below details the information provided by the Advanced Settings –
Voltage tab.
Item Description
Phase Voltage percentages Indicates the expected Phase Voltage

Percentages (for ABC rotation) based on the
selected Service
Voltage Phase Angles Indicates the expected Voltage Phase Angles (for
ABC rotation) based on the selected Service
Recognized Nominal Service Voltage Indicates the nominal voltages recognized by the
settings meter.
15. Views
Special Dates view

The Special Dates view displays the meter’s or the IP AxisLink router’s special
dates settings. See “Special Dates component” on page 492 for details.
A check in the Self Read or the Demand Reset columns indicates that on that
particular date the meter will perform a self read or a demand reset.

Figure 15-116. Special Dates - recurring view
The table below details the information provided by the Special Dates – Recurring
Dates and Nonrecurring Dates tabs:
Item Description
Enforce minimum of days between Indicates whether the meter is forced to perform
demand resets a demand reset if <x> days have elapsed
without a demand reset.
15. Views
Item Description
End of calendar warning Indicates whether the meter generates a
warning <x> days before the end of the
Nonrecurring dates calendar (up to a maximum
of 999) before the last nonrecurring date defined
in the special dates list.
Month/Day Indicates the date of action.
Date
Calendar Action Indicates one of the following calendar events:
holiday, season change or begin or end daylight
saving time.
When Indicates when in relation to the date that the
action occurs.
Self Read Indicates whether the meter performs a self read
on this date.
Demand Reset Indicates whether the meter performs a demand
reset on this date.
Figure 15-117. Special Dates - nonrecurring view
Special Dates Pending view

The Special Dates Pending view displays special dates configuration changes
that will take affect on the indicated Effective Date after the execution of a Replace
Rates and Dates task that replaced the Special Dates component (see “Replace
15. Views
Rates and Dates task” on page 151).

meter (A3D), you will see the following message, “Feature is not
supported for this meter type.”
Figure 15-118. Special Dates Pending view
The table below details the information provided by the Special Dates Pending
view.
Item Description
End of calendar warning Indicates whether the meter generates a warning
<x> days before the end of the Nonrecurring dates
calendar (up to a maximum of 999) before the last
nonrecurring date defined in the special dates list.
Perform a Self Read indicates whether the meter will perform a self
read on the effective date that the new special
dates settings go into effect
Perform a Demand Reset indicates whether the meter will perform a
demand reset on the effective date that the new
special dates settings go into effect
Effective Date the date the new special dates setting takes effect
15. Views
Item Description
Recurring Dates lists all recurring dates programmed into the
meter.
Nonrecurring Dates lists all nonrecurring dates programmed into the
meter.
Figure 15-119. Special Dates Pending view
Special Features view

The Special Features view displays the meter’s special features settings. See
“Special Features component” on page 499 for details.
15. Views
Figure 15-120. Special Features view
The Special Features view includes the following settings:
• Demand Reset Lockout Time - indicates the meter will not allow a demand
reset to occur within the specified time range (0 to 255 minutes) after a
demand reset has already been performed.
• Perform a Self Reads on Demand Reset - indicates the meter will perform a
self read when it performs a demand reset
Special Option Board view

• The Special Option Board view displays the meter’s special option board’s
configuration information including manufacturer-specific information.
See “Special Option Board component” on page 500 for information about the
configuration of the communication option boards supported by A3 ALPHA and
A1800 ALPHA meters.
Special Relay Status view

The Special Relay Status view displays the status of the DA I/O board, the
Interrupter Control Board or the Interposing Control Board. Additionally, this view
indicates the state of the service disconnect relay depending on the special relay
configuration. See “Configuring special relay options” on page 464 for additional
information.
15. Views
The view also indicates the date and time of the last change in state for the relays
and inputs. The value for the cold load pickup period (in minutes) for relay 1 is also
displayed.
Figure 15-121. Special Relay Status view
Status view
The Status view contains the following subtabs:
General details the meter’s manufacturer, type, hardware/firmware

version, option boards, etc.
Identification details the meter’s serial number, account, program ID, etc.
Conditions details the meter’s current mode (whether alternate, test, or

normal), any Events, Warnings, and Errors recorded, etc.
Security details the date/time of the last table write for each port, outage
information, and reset information.
Time details the date/times of the reading, in the meter, daylight

savings time status, current tier, current season, etc.
Factory Codes details factory default data - for example, Ke, Kh, P/R and the
factory-entered serial number.
15. Views
EnergyAxis Option details settings for A3 ALPHA meters with either the
EA_Gatekeeper or the EA_NIC option board
Read Without details settings for A1800 ALPHA meters that have been read
Power without power to the meter.
General tab
Figure 15-122. Status > General - A3 ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the General tab.
Item Description
Manufacturer The manufacturer of the meter.
Model First group of characters of the meter type that
define the basic measurement (for example, A3D,
A1800D, etc.).
Original Style No. (from meter Style number of meter as originally built by
manufacturing) manufacturer.
Note: This style number will not reflect any
hardware changes (for example, added
option boards) or Alpha key changes made
subsequent to the original manufacture
date.
15. Views
Item Description
Main EEPROM Memory (kB) The amount of memory (in KB) available for
“shared memory” in the meter; all A3 ALPHA and
A1800 ALPHA meters are equipped with EEPROM
on the main meter board (64 K [standard] or 128 K
[optional1]).
Note: A small amount of memory is reserved by
the meter to store main billing data and
configuration data. The remainder
contributes to shared memory. This value
may vary slightly among different firmware
versions.
Extended Memory (kB) If an extended memory option board is present in
the meter, the amount of memory (in KB).
Reading Reason Manual; indicates that the current reading was
obtained using an optical probe and Metercat.
Option Boards (description and Listing of installed option boards.
ver.)
Hardware Version The hardware version and revision of the meter.
Firmware Version The firmware version/revision of the meter.
Note: Refer to this number when seeking technical
assistance with your meter.
Firmware S-Spec. Additional manufacturer information that defines
the product family.
DSP Version Meter chip revision code.
SM Version Factory code indicating the version/revision of the
measurement sources.
PQM Version Factory code indicating the version/revision of the
PQM configuration.
Option Boards Indicates the option boards installed in the
connected meter.
Alpha Keys settings Indicates the status of all Alpha Keys:
(Basic Load Profiling, • Enabled - meter functionality has been
Instrumentation Profiling, PQM, unlocked and is accessible
Advanced Metering, Time • Disabled - this function has not been purchased
Keeping, Time of Use, Loss
Compensation)
Date of Last Key Change Indicates the date and time the meter was
upgraded using Alpha Keys
Reader Notes Includes comments entered by the user during the
execution of the reading task.
1. EEPROM must be specified at time of original manufacture.

15. Views
Figure 15-123. Status > General - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-124. Status > General - IP AxisLink router

15. Views
Identification tab
Figure 15-125. Status > Identification - A3 ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the Identification tab.
Item Description
ID #2 User programmed value for ID #2 in the
meter (usually Meter ID)
ID #1 User programmed value for ID #1 in the meter
(usually Account)
Utility Serial No. Utility-specified identifier configured at the
time of meter manufacture; if no special
requests were made at the time of
manufacture, this number will be equal to the
manufacturer serial number.
Device IDs (ports 1 and 2) The remote device ID number for each port;
should be “1” for all applications where the
com port has a dedicated communications
link; greater than “1” only in applications
where multiple meters share a common
communications link (for example, a modem
sharing unit).
Program No. The ID number of the program currently active
in the meter
15. Views
Item Description
Programmer No. Metercat ID number for the person who
programmed the meter.
Program Function Displays DEMAND or TOU, indicating the
program type in the meter.
Custom Display Strings 1 & 2 User configured strings (of up to 6 characters).
See “Properties tab” on page 401.
UDT Configuration Identifies the factory set configuration values
for the user defined tables (UDT)
C12.19 Rev. Version of ANSI C12.19 “Utility Industry End
Device Data Tables” supported by the meter.
Figure 15-126. Status > Identification - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-127. Status > Identification - IP AxisLink router

15. Views
Conditions tab
Figure 15-128. Status > Conditions - A3 ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the Conditions tab.
Item Description
Mode Either Normal, Alternate or Test; the current
operating mode of the meter.
Service Indicates the service on which the meter is
locked; the valid service of the meter; value
reads as follows: “unlocked” or “locked, xxxV
1P” (for single phase service) or "locked, xxxV
yW zzzz (for polyphase service) where xxx is
a number indicating nominal service voltage,
y is either 3 or 4 indicating the service
definition (number of wires), and zzzz is
either Delta or Wye.
Line Frequency Rated line frequency (Hz) for this meter.
1
Avg. PQM Update The average time (in seconds) it takes to
make a complete loop through the PQM
present values.
Avg. Present Value Update1 The average time (in seconds) it takes to
make a complete loop through the PQM
present values.
15. Views
Item Description
Display locked by warning Indicates whether the meter’s display is
currently locked by a warning (Yes or No).
Modem Initialized Indicates whether a modem has been
initialized for remote communication
IP Set 1 Avg. Samples/Interval1 Interval length for the data set (in seconds)
divided by the Present Value Update rate.
IP Set 2 Avg Samples/Interval1 Interval length for the data set (in seconds)
divided by the Present Value Update rate.
Activated Event Flags: Indicates events, warnings, and errors
• Events currently active in the meter or that have
• Warnings occurred sometime in the past (preceded by
• Errors historical). See Appendix E, “Meter Events,
Errors & Warnings” for details.
Pending Replacements Indicates components/modules schedule to
be replaced at a future date. See “Replace
Program task” on page 145.
1. Applies to A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters firmware version 3 or greater.
Figure 15-129. Status > Conditions - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-130. Status > Conditions - IP AxisLink router

15. Views
Security tab
Figure 15-131. Status > Security - A3 ALPHA meter
Note: Date/time items apply only to meters with timekeeping

capabilities.
The table below details the information provided by the Security tab.
Item Description
Port 1 (modem only) / Port 2 (optical port and/or modem)
Note: Port 2 values also include values for the optical port.
Program Change Date Date and time of the last table write on using
indicated port.
Invalid Password Number of invalid password attempts since the last
manual (using push button or communication)
demand reset.
Sessions with Write Number of communication sessions on indicated
port that involved at least one table write.
Total No. of Resets Total number of demand resets performed by push
button or by execution of a Reset Demand task or by
a calendar event (Special Dates component). This
value is reset to zero by executing a Clear Data task
task.
15. Views
Item Description
Last Reset Trigger Cause of the last demand reset:
• None - No reset has occurred
• Button press - Last demand reset was triggered
by a push of the reset button.
• Communication - Last demand reset was
triggered by a communication procedure (either
optically or using one of the remote COM ports)
• Calendar - Last demand reset was triggered by a
scheduled entry in the meter calendar.
• Max days since last reset - Last demand reset
was triggered because the days since a demand
reset exceeded the user configured maximum
days between demand reset as specified in the
Special Dates component.
Days Since Last Reset Number of days (midnight transitions) since the last
demand reset
Date of Last Reset Date when demand was last reset by push button,
by the use of Reset Demand task or by a calendar
event (Special Dates component). Date is cleared by
Clear Data task.
Days Since Last Pulse Number of days (midnight transitions) since the last
kilowatt-hour pulse
Date of Last Programming Date and time the meter’s program was changed
using one of the following:
• Program task
• Replace PQM task
• Replace Program task
• Replace Rates and Dates task
• Replace Remote task
Note: For non-timekeeping meters programmed
with earlier releases of Metercat, the date/
time entry may not indicate the correct date/
time.
Last Outage Start (date/time) Lists the date and time of the beginning of the last
power outage.
Last Outage End (date/time) Lists the date and the time of the end of the last
power outage.
Number of Power Outages Total number of power outages since programming
or since Clear Data task task was performed.
Power Outage Time Cumulative power outage time. Serves as a TOU
battery log
Note: This field is not reset when the meter is
programmed. This field is only cleared by the
Clear Battery Log task task.
Data Edited Indicates whether the meter’s register has been
edited (Yes) or not (No) using the Register Edit task
task.
Note: This flag can only be cleared by
reprogramming the meter.
15. Views
Figure 15-132. Status > Security - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-133. Status > Security - IP AxisLink router

15. Views
Time tab
Figure 15-134. Status > Time - A3 ALPHA meter
Note: Date/time items apply only to meters with timekeeping

capabilities.
The table below details the information provided by the Time tab.
Item Description
Date/Time of Reading The Metercat PC’s local date/time
Meter Date/Time The meter’s local date/time
Day of the Week The meter’s current day of the week. (Not for
demand only meters.)
Holiday Indicates whether current day is considered a
holiday by the meter: Yes or No. (Not for
demand only meters.)
DST Status (On/Off) Indicates whether the meter is currently in
Daylight Saving Time.
Rate (Energy) The TOU Rate (A, B, C, or D) currently in use for
energy. (Not for demand only meters.)
Rate (Demand) The TOU Rate (A, B, C, or D) currently in use. for
demand. (Not for demand only meters.)
Season The meter’s current season (Not for demand
only meters)
15. Views
Item Description
Meter Time when Time Change Meter date/time before the most recent time
Requested change.
Meter Time after Time Change Meter date/time after the most recent time
Requested change.
Clock Source The timing source for the meter:
• Line - (default) meter will use the line
frequency for timekeeping
• Crystal - meter will use internal crystal for
timekeeping
Future Replace Date Indicates the date and time that a new Rate
and/or Dates component takes effect in the
meter (see “Replace Rates and Dates task” on
page 151)
Figure 15-135. Status > Time - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-136. Status > Time - IP AxisLink router

15. Views
Factory Codes tab
Figure 15-137. Status > Factory Codes - A3 ALPHA meter
The table below details the information provided by the Factory Codes tab.
Item Description
Ke Factory default watt-hours per meter pulse.
Kh Factory default watt-hours per equivalent meter disk
revolution.
P/R Factory default pulses per equivalent disk revolution.
Serial No. Manufacturer’s factory serial number
Factory Codes: Note: If you experience problems with a meter you
Configuration errors may be asked to report these codes to Elster
Customer Support.
CRC errors Note: If you experience problems with a meter you
may be asked to report these codes to Elster
Customer Support.
15. Views
Figure 15-138. Status > Factory Codes - REX2 meter

15. Views
Figure 15-139. Status > Factory Codes - IP AxisLink router
EnergyAxis Option tab

The EnergyAxis® Option tab displays the information from an Gatekeeper in an
A3 ALPHA meter [with the EA_Gatekeeper or an A3 ALPHA meter node [with the
EA_NIC option board].
15. Views
Figure 15-140. Status > EnergyAxis Option - Gatekeeper
Gatekeeper Status
The table below describes the gatekeeper information detailed by the EnergyAxis
Option tab. See “Node Status” on page 325 for details on the node status
information.
Item Description
LAN Controller Status
Hardware Version Identifies the hardware version of the EA_Gatekeeper.
LAN ID The complete LAN ID of the gatekeeper; the last five
digits of the ID also appear on the meter nameplate.
Firmware Version Indicates the firmware version in the EA_Gatekeeper.
Utility ID The identifier used within the LAN to ensure that if
there are two different utilities with meters in the same
area the meters will only talk to those meters with the
same utility ID.
Firmware S-Spec Additional manufacturer information that defines the
product family.
Used Shared Memory Indicates the EA_Gatekeeper memory space that has
been used to control the LAN activity, including
reading of the nodes, LAN errors, events, etc.
15. Views
Item Description
LAN Node Type Indicates whether the meter is functioning as one of
the following:
• RF Gatekeeper - always true for a gatekeeper
• RF Node - see “Node Status” on page 325
Available Shared Memory Indicates the total memory space available on the
EA_Gatekeeper board. This memory is used solely to
control the LAN activity, including reading of the
nodes, LAN errors, events, etc.
Errors Lists the errors that occurred on the EA_Gatekeeper
option board. See “A3 ALPHA Meter with
EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC Errors” on page 565 for
details on error messages associated with the
EA_Gatekeeper.
LAN Status
Registered Nodes Indicates the number of meters that are registered to
the gatekeeper.
Repeaters Indicates the number of meters functioning as
repeaters (that is, data relay points) registered to the
gatekeeper.
Event List Lists those events that can occur on the LAN. All the
possible events are listed with their start time and stop
time (if applicable):
• Meter Read - the last date and time that the
gatekeeper read its registered REX meters
• Profile Read - the last date and time that the
gatekeeper read profile data from its registered
REX meters
• Time Broadcast - the last date and time that the
gatekeeper broadcast the time to the LAN
• Node Scan - the last date and time that the
gatekeeper performed a full node scan; full node
scans are performed at gatekeeper startup and on
a scheduled basis (default, 1:00 and every 4 hours
afterward)
• Partial Node Scan - the last date and time that the
gatekeeper performed a partial node scan; partial
node scans are performed on demand when the
gatekeeper hears a time request from an
unregistered node or a node scan request from a
registered node that heard an unregistered node
while it is not currently doing a node scan
Event List • Brute Force Node Read - the date and time of the
last brute force node read; executed every hour
and looks for meters with read times older then a
certain value (default 12 hours) and forces a read
with an increased number of immediate retries for
those meters
• Clear All Nodes Status - the last date and time the
Clear All Nodes Status function was executed by
EnergyAxis Metering Automation Server to reset
communications statistics for all meters in the LAN
(clears the total read attempts and total read
successes from a node)
Note: Event times are precise to the minute.
15. Views
Figure 15-141. Status > EnergyAxis Option - A3 ALPHA meter/node
Node Status
The table below describes the node information detailed by the EnergyAxis
Option tab. See “Gatekeeper Status” on page 323 for details on the gatekeeper
status information.
Item Description
Hardware Version Identifies the hardware version of the EA_NIC.
LAN ID The complete LAN ID of the node; the last five digits of
the ID also appear on the meter nameplate.
Firmware Version Indicates the firmware version in the EA_NIC.
same utility ID.
Firmware S-Spec Additional manufacturer information that defines the
product family.
Used Shared Memory Indicates the EA_NIC memory space that has been
used to control the LAN activity, including reading of
the nodes, LAN errors, events, etc.
15. Views
Item Description
LAN Node Type Indicates whether the meter is functioning as one of
the following:
• RF Node - always true for a node
• RF Gatekeeper - see “Gatekeeper Status” on
page 323
Available Shared Memory Indicates the total memory space available on the
EA_NIC board. This memory is used solely to control
the LAN activity, including reading of the nodes, LAN
errors, events, etc.
Errors Lists the errors that occurred on the EA_NIC option
board. See “A3 ALPHA Meter with EA_Gatekeeper or
EA_NIC Errors” on page 565 for details on error
messages associated with the EA_NIC.
Figure 15-142. Status > EnergyAxis Option - REX2 meter
REX Status
The table below describes the node information detailed by the EnergyAxis
Option tab.
Item Description
Radio Firmware Version Indicates the firmware version in the radio.
Radio Firmware S-Spec Additional manufacturer information that defines the
product family.
15. Views
Item Description
LAN ID The complete LAN ID of the meter; the last five digits of
the ID also appear on the meter nameplate.
same utility ID.
Gatekeeper ID Indicates the LAN ID of the meter’s registered
gatekeeper.
Read without Power tab - A1800 ALPHA meter

Note: Read without Power is not available on A3 ALPHA meters. Read
without Power is only available for A1800 ALPHA meters with
firmware 3.0 or higher and requires a special Read without
Power battery.
The table below describes the information detailed by the Read Without Power
tab.
Item Description
Status Indicates the status of the Read Without Power mode:
• On - indicates the meter was in Read without
Power mode when it was read
• Off - indicates the meter was not in Read without
Power mode when it was read
Battery Status Indicates the status of the Read without Power battery:
• Normal
• Discharged
Battery Voltage Indicates the voltage of the Read without Power
battery.
Total Active Time Indicates the total duration of time (in seconds) that the
meter has been in Read Without Power mode.
Total Use Count Indicates the number of times the meter has been in
Read Without Power mode.
15. Views
Figure 15-143. Status view - Read Without Power view
See the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for details on
operating the meter in Read without Power mode.
Switch Times view

The Switch Times view displays the meter’s or the IP AxisLink router’s rates switch
times configuration and a counter for the number of switch times configured in
the meter. See “Switch Times subcomponent” on page 457 for details.
Note: A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 2.0
or later will include the Default Rate setting in the Switch Times
view.
15. Views
Figure 15-144. Switch Times view
Switch Times Pending view

The Switch Times Pending view displays the switch time configuration changes
that will take affect on the indicated Effective Date after the execution of a Replace
Rates and Dates task that replaced the Rates component (see “Replace Rates and
Dates task” on page 151).

See “Switch Times view” on page 328 for additional details.
15. Views
Figure 15-145. Switch Times Pending view
The table below details the information provided by the Switch Times Pending
view.
Item Description
Perform a Self Read indicates whether the meter will perform a self read on
the effective date that the new switch times settings take
effect
Perform a Demand Reset indicates whether the meter will perform a demand
reset on the effective date that the new switch times
settings take effect
Effective Date the date the new switch times settings take effect
IP AxisLink router views The IP AxisLink router supports the following router-specific views:
IP AxisLink router-specific views

• ACL (Access Control List) view • Event Notifications view
• Binary IO view • Network view
• DNP view • Security Event Log Data view
• Logs Configuration view
15. Views
In addition to the router-specific views, the following views are also supported by
the router:
Supported views
• Day Types view • Switch Times view
• Day Types Pending view • Switch Times Pending view
• Special Dates view • Relay Options view
• Special Dates Pending view • Remote view
• Status view
ACL (Access Control List) view

The ACL view displays the both the WAN IP and MAC ACLs for the connected IP
AxisLink router.
Figure 15-146. ACL (Access Control List) view - IP AxisLink router
See “ACL (Access Control List) component” on page 506 for details.
Binary IO view
The Binary IO view displays the settings for the connected IP AxisLink router’s
discrete binary inputs and outputs including the statuses and the input counters.
15. Views
Figure 15-147. Binary IO view - IP AxisLink router
See “Binary IO component” on page 508 for details.

15. Views
DNP view
The DNP view displays the DNP configuration for the connected IP AxisLink router.
See “DNP component” on page 509 for details.
Logs Configuration view

The Logs Configuration view displays the event logging configuration for the
connected IP AxisLink router.
15. Views
Figure 15-148. Logs Configuration view - IP AxisLink router
See “Event Logs Configuration component” on page 515 for details.
Event Notifications view

The Event Notifications view displays the event notification settings for the
connected IP AxisLink router.
15. Views
Figure 15-149. Event Notifications view - IP AxisLink router
See “Event Notifications component” on page 516 for details.
Network view
The Network view displays the Ethernet WAN and DTLS tunnel configuration
settings for the connected IP AxisLink router.
15. Views
Figure 15-150. Network view - IP AxisLink router
See “Network component” on page 517 for details.
Security Event Log Data view

The Security Event Log Data view displays the security events logged for the
IP AxisLink router.
15. Views
Figure 15-151. Security Event Log Data view
The IP AxisLink router supports the following security events:
Code Event
0 Security configuration change
1 MSG receivedd does not meet security requirements
2 MSG rec'd not unique
3 Failed to authenticate/decrypt rec'd MSG
4 Promotion of pending seed to active
5 Copy of active seed to pending
6 Re-seed action occurred
7 Set Factory Seed action
8 Activate Factory Seed action
9 Access Control List was modified
10 Program flash update occurred
11 Table write operation occurred
12 POST request from web interface
13 Web access authentication failure
15. Views
For each event the following information displays:
Column Description
Status • Operation Successful
• Operation Failed
Source Code • Local Port (USB)
• WAN Port (Wired/Wireless)
• Edge Port
• LAN Device
• Self Operation
• Web Page
• AGI
• LANOB
• WWAN
• Tunnel
Destination Code • AGI
• LANOB
• WWAN
• tunnel
Event Data 1 and 2 This fields contain optional data only for certain event
codes:
Event Codes = 1, 3, 4, 5
• Host device IP address
• Host device Port
Event Code = 11
• Table ID
Event Code = 12
• Page ID
16 MANAGING THE PHONE
BOOK
This chapter provides information on:
• Viewing the phone book

• Sorting the phone book
• Adding a new phone book entry
• Changing a phone book entry
• Deleting a phone book entry
Note: To manage the phone book your group must have privileges.
See “Privileges tab” on page 54.
Viewing the phone book Note: Groups with the View the Phone Book privilege can also
communicate with EA_MS meters provided that they also the
group has the Allow EA_MS Synchronization privilege and has
access to at least one function to select in the Connection bar.
The communication is allowed in both Cleartext with
Authentication and Ciphertext with Authentication depending
on the configuration of the meter.
A user belonging to a group without the Allow EA_MS

Synchronization privilege can at most communicate to meters
that are configured for Cleartext with Authentication access, that
is, cannot communicate with meters configured for Ciphertext
with Authentication access. An attempt to communicate to a
meter configured for Ciphertext with Authentication access will
result an error message when executing the function.
Metercat allows you to manage the various phone numbers and IP addresses for
meters and IP AxisLink routers communicating using modems or wireless radios
in a Phone Book.
To view the Phone Book:

1. From the Tools menu, select Phone Book.
Metercat displays the Phone Book dialog.
The table below describes the various fields and buttons on the Phone Book
dialog:
Item Description
New allows you to create a new phone book entry
Edit allows you to change an existing phone book entry
16. Managing the Phone Book
Item Description
Delete allows you to delete an existing phone book entry
Create Report allows you to print a report of the phone book contents.
Close closes the Phone Book management dialog and returns
you to the main window
Help displays context sensitive Help
Customizing the phone book

Metercat allows you to move and group data columns in the phone book table.
Moving a column
To move a column:
1. Select the desired column header.

2. Drag-and-drop the column header to the desired location in the table.
Note: Green arrows appear to show you where the column will be
inserted.
Figure 16-152. Viewing phone book by group
Grouping phone book entries

To group the phone book table by a data column:
1. Select the desired column header you wish to group (for example, by
Group).
2. Drag–and–drop the selected header to the reserved area above the table.
3. Click to expand the grouping to view the entries.
Figure 16-153. Phone book entries by group - with devices received using EA_MS synchronization
Phone book entries imported from EA_MS using Tools > EA_MS Synchronization
> <server name> can be viewed by groups. See “Synchronizing with EA_MS” on
page 79. EA_MS meters are grouped in the phone book by the Metercat server
name and Utility ID (IUID). Metercat identifies each imported meter using the
EA_MS Meter Name and its serial number. The phone entry includes the meter’s
IP address and port number.
Sorting the phone book To sort the phone book table by a data column:
• Click the desired column header you wish to sort the table by.
The system sorts the table based upon the selected column.
• Click the column header a second time to reverse the displayed order.
Adding a new phone To add a new phone book entry:

book entry 1. From the Tools menu, select Phone Book.
Metercat displays the Phone Book dialog
2. Click New > select the connection type:
• Modem
• TCP/IP (C12.21)
• TCP/IP C12.22
Note: To communicate with WIC-enabled meters and IP AxisLink

routers, you must use connection type: TCP/IP C12.22.
Metercat displays the Edit New Installation dialog.
Modem
If you selected Modem:
1. Enter the Name (30 characters maximum) you wish to use for the phone
book entry.
2. Check if this is a Multiple Meter Installation (MM) (default is unchecked).
Note: If Multiple Meter Installation is checked, you must enter the
Device ID at communications time. See “Program task” on
page 134 or “Replace Remote task” on page 154 for details on
setting the Device ID.
3. To permit sorting phone book entries by group, select the appropriate Group
or type in a new Group name (may be left blank).
Figure 16-154. New modem installation
4. Enter the Phone Number.

5. Check to override the Modem Init String: enter the new modem init string.
6. Check to override the Dialing String: select the appropriate string from the
drop list ATDT for tone or ATDP for pulse dialing.
7. Check to override the Dialing Timeout (range of10 to 255 seconds).
8. Check to override Speed; select the speed from the drop list (300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, or 115200).
9. Enter the Packet Size (default is 1024).
10.Enter the Packet Retries (default is 3.
11. Click OK to add the entry to the phone book.
TCP/IP (C12.21)
book entry.
2. Check if this is a Multiple Meter Installation (MM) (default is unchecked).
Note: If Multiple Meter Installation is checked, you must enter the
Device ID at communications time. See “Program task” on
page 134 or “Replace Remote task” on page 154 for details on
setting the Device ID.
Figure 16-155. New TCP/IP (C12.21) installation
4. Enter the IP Address for the device.
5. Enter the IP Port number.
6. Enter the Packet Size (range of 64 to 8192; default is 1024).
7. Enter the Packet Retries (range of 1 to 20; default is 3).
8. Click OK to add the entry to the phone book.
TCP/IP C12.22
book entry.
Figure 16-156. New TCP/IP C12.22 installation
3. Enter the IP Address for the device.

4. Enter the IP Port number.
5. From the Security mode drop list select one of the following:
• Cleartext With Authentication is the only selectable mode for manually
created TCP/IP C12.22 Phone Book entries.
• Ciphertext With Authentication communication is only available for TCP/IP
C12.22 Phone Book entries created by EA_MS synchronization operation.
See Chapter 8, “Synchronizing with EA_MS” for details.
6. Enter the Called AP Title (meter) for the device.
Note: The device AP Title is contained in the Activation file sent by
Elster when a device is shipped.
7. If you are configuring for a W-WIC meter:
a. Click Advanced to display the advanced parameters entry list.
The system expands the Phone Book Installation Details dialog to show
override parameters. These settings will override the settings specified in
the connection definition (see “Adding a new connection” on page 180 for
details).
b. Press <Insert>.
c. From the Parameter Name drop list, select Response Timeout.
d. In the Parameter Value box, enter 180.
e. Press <Insert>.
f. From the Parameter Name drop list, select SessionIdleTimeout.
g. In the Parameter Value box, enter 180.
Figure 16-157. Phone entry Advanced settings - for W-WIC
8. Click OK to save the new entry and return to the Phone Book dialog or click
Cancel to return to the Phone Book dialog without saving the new entry.
Changing a phone book To change an existing phone book entry:

entry 1. From the Tools menu, select Phone Book.
Metercat displays the Phone Book dialog
2. Select the appropriate entry from the displayed list.
3. Click Edit.
Metercat displays the Phone Book Installation Details dialog with the
settings of the selected entry.
4. Change the appropriate parameters.
Note: For meters imported from EA_MS,
5. Click Advanced to override the current settings as needed.
6. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Phone Book dialog or click
Cancel to return to the Phone Book dialog without saving your changes.
Printing the phone book To create and print a report of the phone book contents:
contents 1. From the Tools menu, select Phone Book.
2. Click Create Report.
Metercat creates and displays a report of the phone book contents.
3. To print the report, from the File menu, select Print.
When you close the report the Phone Book dialog also closes.
Deleting a phone book Note: Phone book groups cannot be deleted.

entry To delete an existing phone book entry:
1. From the Tools menu, select Phone Book.
2. Select the appropriate entry from the displayed list.
Note: Only individual entries can be deleted. Groups cannot be
deleted.
3. Click Delete.
The system prompts you to confirm that you wish to delete the selected
entry.
4. Click Yes to delete the selected entry or click No to cancel the command.
17 PROGRAMMING A DEVICE
Programming a meter or an IP AxisLink router involves the execution of a function

that includes a Program task on a connected device.
Before you begin Before you can program a meter you must:
1. Create a program as described in “Creating a new meter program” on

page 384.
2. Create a function with a Program task as an Included Task and configured to
use the program created in step 1 as described in “Building a function” on
page 83.
Note: You can assign a function shortcut to the function as described
in “Assigning function shortcuts” on page 29.
3. Define a connection as described in “Adding a new connection” on
page 180.
5. Execute the created function as described in “Programming a meter” on
page 347.
Programming a meter MetercatLite is a command line interface tool that allows you to program
using MetercatLite A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA meters and IP AxisLink routers. See the TM42-2212
MetercatLite User Guide for details on programming devices from a command
line.
Programming an A1800 A1800 ALPHA meters FW v4.0 and later can be factory-configured to prevent the
ALPHA meter reset of energy registers (that is, energy register locking). When the energy
register is locked, the Program task recognizes the locking and stops executing
the function and reports the following message: Task cannot be executed
because the meter’s tariff data is locked.
Programming a meter Note: For details on programming an IP AxisLink router, see

“Programming an IP AxisLInk router” on page 355.
A program is developed for a family and type of meter (A3 ALPHA or
A1800 ALPHA meters) and can contain variables, features, or functions that do
not apply to a given meter within the family or type.
When you send a program to a meter, only those variables, features and
functions that apply to that specific meter will be downloaded. For example, if you
attempt to send a program that contains load profile-specific instructions to a
17. Programming a device
meter that is not capable of handling load profile data, the meter will accept the
program, but the Function Completion Report will inform you that the load profile
programming was omitted.
If however, you attempt to access advanced metering capabilities in the program

that the connected meter does not support, the program will not be accepted.
Note: Your group must have privileges and have the appropriate
password access level to execute the function. See “Functions
tab” on page 56 for details on setting function privileges and
“Meter Access Level tab” on page 57 for details on setting
password access level.
Note: When programming an A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter with
Itron’s 50ESS ERT, the special option board configuration will
take effect either after the ERT polls the meter for changes (that
is, once every 5 minutes) or immediately after removing/
restoring power to the meter.
Note: If you are attempting to program an A3 ALPHA meter with
EA_NIC firmware version 4.x or 5.0 and experience repeated
communication errors, see “Programming ALPHA meters with
EA_NIC” on page 354 for details on programming the meter
To program a connected ALPHA meter:

The connection toolbar displays with the Function and Viewsets drop lists.
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Program
task.
— OR —
Program Description’ for example, A3T - 002 - TOU, LP
Program.
3. If the selected function contains a Billing or Diagnostic Read task, select the
Viewset from the drop list.
After clicking Go, the button changes to Cancel.
Clicking Cancel during function execution stops all meter communication;
the progress indicator displays ‘canceling’ message while the command is
processed.
5. After clicking Go, Metercat identifies the connected meter.
The area on the far right of the connection toolbar indicates the progress of
the tasks and any errors that occur during the execution.
6. After the meter is identified and if the Program task settings include Prompt,
a dialog is displayed for you to enter run time settings.
Note: The meter family (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA) and type (D/T/Q/
K/R) of the connected meter is used to filter the list of programs
displayed in the Program ID drop list. Furthermore, the list is
filtered to display programs that are available to the user’s
logged on group.
Note: A dialog will appear for each task in the function.
See “Overriding program values using the Program task” on page 351 for
information on overriding the various optional components.
For those program task parameters which are specified in the program
task as Prompt (see “Program task” on page 134) you may change the
following:
• Program ID • Service Test component

• ID #1 (Account:) • PQM component
• ID #2 (Meter ID:) • Instrumentation Profiling component
• Time Zone • Remote component
• Constants (Metering Application, • Disable Remote Communication
Register Multiplier or Adjusted Kh) • Device IDs for Ports 1 and/or 2
• Overload • Call Origination Date & Time (for
• KYZ Divisor or KYZ Value1 device ID)
• DLMS Physical Address2
• DLMS Password3
1. Depending on your System Preference settings. See “Setting programming

options” on page 47 for more information.
2. A1800 ALPHA meters.
3. A1800 ALPHA meters.; maximum of 40 HEX characters.
Figure 17-158. Program task run time overrides - default values
Note: If KYZ Value is enabled (System Preferences > Programming

Options) and the connected meter is firmware 3.01 or later, you
will see the KYZ Value drop list in place of KYZ Divisor.
Note: If Adjusted Kh is enabled (System Preferences > Programming

Options), you will set Adjusted Kh (and not Register Multiplier).
Note: Leaving Account and Meter ID (ID 1 and ID 2) empty will clear the
existing Account and Meter ID in the meter. Use the Register Edit
task to update the Account and Meter ID.
Note: Call Origination Date & Times are enabled only if the Remote
component > Billing is configured to Specify a Single Date and
time at Program Time. Enter the date (in MM/DD/YYYY format)
and time (in 24-hour HH:mm format).
7. After you have entered all run time data, the tasks are processed in their
execution order (see “Changing the task execution order” on page 87).
Note: A progress indicator is displayed to the right of the Viewset
drop-list on the connection toolbar.
After the function has completed, the Program Completion Report displays.
Note: If you have selected to use Adjusted Kh (System Preferences >
Programming Options), the Program Completion Report will
display the specified Adjusted Kh and the calculated Register
Multiplier values.
Sample program completion report

"Program" Completion Report
User: Administrator
System Time: 4/13/2005 5:09:18 PM
System Time Zone: (GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
Account: 9876543210
Meter ID: , <Factory Serial Num>
Program Task
Task succeeded.
Program ID: A3K - 888 - TOU, LP
Meter Time Zone: (GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada),
<System Setting>
Custom Display String 1: 123456
Custom Display String 2: 654321
Factory Ke: 0.075
Adjusted Ke: 0.1
Metering Application: Secondary
CT: 1.0000
VT: 1.0000
Register Multiplier: 0.75
Adjusted Kh: 2.4
Special Dates: Expired nonrecurring dates are not programmed.
Special Dates: 73 nonrecurring dates programmed. Last date
programmed is: 4/2/2029
KYZ Divisor: 1
Service Test Component: <Program Value>
PQM Component: <Do Not Change>
Instrumentation Profiling Component: <Program Value>
Remote Component: <Program Value>
Pulse interval data recording: ENABLED, configured to record 0
days
Instrumentation set 1 interval data recording: ENABLED,
configured to record 0 days
Instrumentation set 2 interval data recording: ENABLED,

configured to record 0 days
Power Quality Monitoring: ENABLED, feature is OFF
Loss Compensation: disabled, parameters are not configured

task are not executed. See “Changing the task execution order”
on page 87 for details. If the error occurs after the meter is
identified, the error message is logged to the Program
Completion Report.
Overriding program values using the Program task

At task execution, Metercat displays the Program Task Run Time Overrides dialog.
This dialog provides you an opportunity to override default task parameters (such
as, Program, Account, Meter ID, Adjusted Kh, etc.). The parameters shown will not
be enabled until a program is selected. Only parameters that are configured in
the Program task with Prompt will be editable.
The following table indicates the status of the register multiplier and the Adjusted
Kh items.
System Program task

User Actions at Program task
Preferences Register
Adjusted Kh execution
Adjusted Kh Multiplier
Disabled prompt Disabled You will be prompted to enter the
register multiplier.
program value Disabled The register multiplier value
specified in the Program task will be
programmed into the meter.
program value Disabled You will be prompted to enter the
& prompt register multiplier otherwise the
program value will be programmed
into the meter.
Enabled Disabled Enabled You must select the Adjusted Kh
value.
Note: You must enter the Adjusted
Kh values in System
Preferences > Programming
Options before you can
select a value during
Program task execution.
CAUTION: Leaving Account and Meter ID (ID 1 and ID 2) empty will clear the
existing Account and Meter ID in the meter. You can use the
Register Edit task to update the Account and Meter ID as
necessary.
Note: If you are configured to use Adjusted Kh in your System

Preferences, Metercat will require you to enter the Adjusted Kh
regardless of your settings for this parameter.
Note: Depending on your System Preferences (see “Setting

programming options” on page 47) and the connected meter’s
firmware version (3.01 or higher), you will see either KYZ Divisor
or KYZ Value in the run time override form.
Note: Depending on your System Preferences (see “Setting
programming options” on page 47), you may set Adjusted Kh in
the run time override form. If you use Adjusted Kh, the Program
Completion Report will display the Adjusted Kh and the
calculated Register Multiplier.
The table below explains the effects of overriding the various parameters of the
Program task based on the task settings and the selected program’s
configuration:
Program task - Component overrides
Program Task Program Configuration Meter Configuration

Component Task Setting Does it contain the component? After executing the Program task
Service Test Do Not Change This component is always included in a Service Test settings are not changed.
program.
Program Value The meter is configured with the
Service Test component contained in
the program.
Service Test component The meter is configured with the
selected selected Service Test component
settings.
Remote Do Not Change Yes or No Remote settings are not changed.
Program Value No Remote settings are not changed.
Yes The meter is configured with the
selected Remote component settings.
Remote component Yes or No The meter is configured with the
selected selected Remote component settings.
Disable Yes or No Remote component is disabled.
PQM Do Not Change Yes or No PQM settings are not changed.
Program Value No PQM settings are not changed.
selected PQM component settings.
PQM component selected Yes or No The meter is configured with the
selected PQM component settings.
Instrumentation Disable Yes or No The meter’s Instrumentation Profiling
Profiling is cleared.
Program Value No The meter’s Instrumentation Profiling
is cleared.
selected Instrumentation Profiling
settings.
Instrumentation Profiling Yes or No The meter is configured with the
Config component selected selected Instrumentation Profiling
Config component settings.
Optional components
Program Task Program Configuration Meter Configuration

Component Task Setting Does it contain the component? After executing the Program task
Relay Options Override Not Available No Relay Options are not changed.
selected Relay Options component.
Special Dates Override Not Available No The meter is not configured with a
Special Dates component. Any
existing Special Dates are cleared
from the meter’s calendar.
selected Special Dates component.
Special Option Board Override Not Available No Special Option Board settings are not
changed.
selected Special Option Board
component.
Troubleshooting Program ID Not Available

programming a meter If the program task is configured with Enter Now for the Program ID and that
Program ID is not available when the runtime form displays, an error message is
logged to the Function Completion Report and the function is canceled.
If the program task is configured with Enter at Runtime for the Program ID and the
selected Program ID is not available when the runtime form displays, no Program
ID is selected. The user must select one, or click Cancel.
See “Function Completion Report” on page 91 for details on the programming

completion report.
Access Denied to Program ID

You need to be careful when setting up functions, programs, viewsets and
groups. For example, a function Set-up Substation A3 is defined with a Program
task calling program A3K-001, and the group Programmers is defined with
permission to perform function Set-up Substation A3 but is denied access to
Program A3K-001. The table below illustrates this situation.
Access Control
Item
Enabled Groups
Administrators
Set-up Substation A3 Programmers
Administrators
A3K-001 Programmers
Administrators
A3K-001
Whenever user John in group Programmers tries to execute Set-up Substation A3

against an A3K meter, the function will fail stating that he cannot access program
A3K-001 even though his group is permitted to access the function and the task
within the function.
To ensure that this situation does not occur, you need to verify a group’s privileges
using the following commands:
• Tools > Function Management > Access Control (by group)

• Tools > User Management > Group > Programs and Functions
• File > Open > Program > Properties > Access Control
Setting or changing To change or set the Meter ID or Account in a meter you must:
Meter ID or Account 1. Create a program as described in “Creating a new meter program” on
page 384.
2. Create a function with a Program task specifying the Meter ID or Account set
to Enter Now or Enter at Run time as described in “Building a function” on
page 83.
page 347.
Setting Device IDs To set the Device IDs in a meter on a modem sharing unit (MSU) or RS-232 you
must:
1. Create a program with a Remote component and the appropriate settings

as described in “Creating a new meter program” on page 384.
2. Create a function with a Program task specifying the Remote component set
to Enter Now or Enter at Run time as described in “Building a function” on
page 83.
page 347.
4. If the Program task is configured with Port 1 Device ID Always Master
unchecked, enter the Device ID number.
— OR —
If the Program task is configured with Port 2 Device ID Always Master
unchecked, enter the Device ID number.
Programming ALPHA If you experience repeated communication errors when programming A3 ALPHA
meters with EA_NIC or A1800 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW ver. 4.x or 5.0:
1. Use the Function Builder to create a new function containing the following
tasks in the specified order:
a. Disable Node Communication task
b. Program task
c. Enable Node Communication task
2. Save the function using a meaningful Function Name, for example, Program
EA Node.

4. Execute the created function.
Programming an IP To program an IP AxisLink router:

AxisLInk router 1. Create a program as described in “Creating an IP AxisLink router program”
on page 386.
2. Create a function with the IP AxisLink Program task as an Included Task and
configured to use the program created in step 1 as described in “Building a
function” on page 83.
3. Define a TCP/IP C12.22 connection as described in “Adding a new
connection” on page 180.
4. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the IP AxisLink
Program task.
— OR —
The IP AxisLink Program task run time form displays.
Figure 17-159. IP AxisLink Program task run time
6. If Prompt for override is enabled in the function’s task configuration for router
elements, select the appropriate items from the drop list.
7. Click OK.
The function begins executing and the Program Parameters Overrides
dialog is displayed.
Figure 17-160. Program overrides - WAN parameters
8. Check Do not change C12.22 WAN Configuration if you wish to keep the
existing WAN settings.
— OR —
Enter any changed WAN configuration settings:
• C12.22 WAN IP Address
• C12.22 WAN Ssubnet Mask
• C12.22 WAN Default Gateway
9. If the selected IP AxisLink program includes the DNP component, the
Program Parameters Overrides dialog is displayed.
Figure 17-161. Program overrides - WAN and DNP parameters
10.Check Do not change C12.22 WAN Configuration if you wish to keep the
existing WAN settings.
— OR —
Enter any changed WAN configuration settings:
• C12.22 WAN IP Address
• C12.22 WAN Ssubnet Mask
• C12.22 WAN Default Gateway
• DNP Source Address
• DNP Destination Address
11. Click OK.

Note: If the IP AxisLink router functions as a gatekeeper (IPGKR) in
EA_MS, the IP AxisLink Program task always configures the
Network component’s Clock Source Configuration to C12.19
Procedure regardless of the setting in the Network component
(see “Network component” on page 517 for additional
information). If the clock source is changed by the IP AxisLink
Program task, the following message is reported in the
completion report: “Network component Clock Source Selector
is changed to C12.19 Procedure for IPGKR support.”
Note: The IP AxisLink Program task changes date and time in the
router only if the Clock Source Configuration is C12.19
Procedure. If the Clock Source Configuration is not C12.19
Procedure, the router’s date and time are not changed and the
task completion report displays the following message: “Time is
not synchronized because Clock Source Selector is not
configured as C12.19.”
When the function completes, Metercat displays the IP AxisLink Program
the programmed values.
18 READING A DEVICE
Reading a meter or an IP AxisLink router involves the execution of a function that

includes a Read task on a connected device.
Before you begin Before you can read a meter you must:
12.Create a function with a Read task as an Included Task as described in

“Building a function” on page 83:
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters IP AxisLink routers
Billing Read task IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task
Diagnostic Read task
REX, REX2 and gREX meters
REX Diagnostic Read task

13.Define a connection as described in “Adding a new connection” on
page 180.
14.Establish a connection with the meter as described in “Establishing
15.Execute the created Read function as described in “Reading a meter” on
page 359.
Note: Your user group must have Function and Viewsets privileges
and have the appropriate password access level to execute the
function. See “Privileges tab” on page 54 for details on group
privileges and see “Viewsets tab” on page 55, “Functions tab”
on page 56 and “Meter Access Level tab” on page 57 for details
on setting a group’s access.
Note: To view the read data, your user group must have privileges
and access to the appropriate viewsets. See “Viewsets tab” on
page 55.
Reading WIC-enabled To read a meter equipped with either a W-WIC or an E-WIC, you must have the
meters over WAN machine settings configured correctly for TCP/IP C12.22 (see “Adding a new
Additionally, you must define a Phone Book entry for the WIC-enabled device. See
“Adding a new phone book entry” on page 341 for details on creating a TCP/IP
C12.22 phone book entry for a W-WIC or an E-WIC.
18. Reading a device
Note: If you imported the meter communication information using

Tools > EA_MS Synchronization > <server name>, you do not
need to create the phone book entry. See “Synchronizing with
EA_MS” on page 79 and “Grouping phone book entries” on
Reading a meter Note: If you experience problems when reading a meter, ensure that
for assistance.
See “Reading an IP AxisLink router” on page 361 for details on reading an
IP AxisLink router.
To read a connected A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter:

The connection toolbar displays with the Function and Viewsets drop-lists.
2. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the Billing Read
task or the Diagnostic Read task.
— OR —
3. From the Viewset list, select a viewset.
Note: By default, Metercat displays the last used viewset. Select a
different viewset as needed.
Read Task Configuration run time dialog.
Note: Changes to reading configuration settings cannot be entered at
run time; to change reading configuration settings, you must
edit the appropriate task as described in “Changing a function”
on page 86. See “Billing Read task” on page 99 and “Diagnostic
Read task” on page 123 for details on task parameters.
Note: Reading Gatekeeper/Node Data only applies for A3 ALPHA
meters with EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC option boards. Reading
gatekeeper or node data is restricted by the following:
Status if the connected meter has an EA_Gatekeeper Read Only, Billing or
or an EA_NIC option board only LAN status data Unrestricted
will be read
All all LAN status and LAN read data will be read Unrestricted
All Except LP all status and LAN read data except load profile Unrestricted
will be read
Note: If you attempt to read gatekeeper/node data and your group

does not have access to the appropriate level password, the
Reading Completion Report will state “Metercat Internal Error”
and the reading file will not be stored.
5. Enter Reader Notes that describe relevant information regarding the
reading.
Note: These notes may be viewed in the Function Completion Report
or in the Status > General view (see “General tab” on page 303).
Note: If you have specified time adjustment criteria in System
Preferences (see “Setting time difference options” on page 49),
time synchronization will occur on timekeeping meters.
6. Click OK to begin the reading.
Note: The area on the far right of the connection toolbar indicates the
progress of the execution and any errors that occur during the
execution.
7. Tasks are processed in the order that they occur in the Function Builder
Included Tasks listing. See “Function Definition tab” on page 84 for
instructions on using the Up and Down buttons to change the task execution
order of a function.
task are not executed.
Note: Billing read files are stored in the \Metercat\Readings\Billing
folder; diagnostic read files are stored in the
Metercat\Readings\Diagnostic folder; and HHF read files are
stored in the Metercat\Readings\HHF folder.
The reading filenames are based on the selected reading filename ID and
are stored in the appropriate \Metercat\Readings\ subfolder. See “Exporting
stored readings” on page 207 for more information on exporting files.
Function Completion Report

A function completion report is composed at the end of function execution. This
report summarizes all task activity performed by the function and states whether
the tasks completed successfully or unsuccessfully. The report is presented in an
HTML viewer and can be either saved or printed.
Appendix B, “Report Samples”contains samples of reports created by Metercat.

Errors are also reported in the completion report (except for errors involving the
HTML file itself which are reported by a message dialog). Common errors include:
communications errors, data content errors, file errors, and database errors.
Troubleshooting reading a meter

Reading of Internal LAN Node Current Billing data failed
If the EA_NIC option board of the meter contains no data when the meter is read
(that is, no data yet has been stored in the option board or data has been recently
cleared), the task will succeed but a message will appear in the function
completion report “Reading of Internal LAN Node Current Billing data failed.”
Communication Error - 0x09 Renegotiate (RNO) received

Occasionally when you attempt to read a meter with an option board you may
received the following message:
Communication Error.
0x09 Renegotiate (RNO) received from meter in Negotiate in
StartSession
Possible reason: The meter is busy with option board
communications. Attempt the function again in 1 minute.
Meter identification failed.
This event occurs when the meter is busy communicating with the option board.
Retry reading the meter.
Reading an IP AxisLink To perform a diagnostic read of an IP AxisLink router:

router 1. Create a function with an IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task as an Included
Task as described in “Building a function” on page 83.
2. Define a TCP/IP C12.22 connection as described in “Adding a new
Note: If you are connecting to the device using the local USB port,
create a PPP connection as descrbied in Chapter 4 “Creating
local USB connections” of TM42-4002 IP AxisLInk Router
Installation and Administration Guide.
3. Establish a connection with the router as described in “Establishing
4. From the Function drop-list, select the function that includes the IP AxisLink
Diagnostic Read task.
— OR —
The IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task run time form displays.
Figure 18-162. IP AxisLink Diagnostic Read task run time
6. Enter any Reader Notes, as appropriate.

7. Click OK.
When the function completes, Metercat displays the IP AxisLink Diagnostic
Read Completion Report indicating the status of the task (succeeded or
failed).
19 EXPORTING A PROGRAM
OR COMPONENT
Note: To export programs your group must have Export Meter

Program privileges. See “Privileges tab” on page 54.
Metercat allows you to export a program or component to a *.PED or *.PCD file,
respectively.
CAUTION: With Metercat 3.0 and higher, the program and component
schema has changed. You cannot export programs or
components from Metercat 3.0 and higher and then import
them into an earlier release of Metercat. You can import
programs and components from earlier releases of Metercat.
Programs and components that have been exported from Metercat Rel. 1.5 or
higher can be imported into Metercat (see Chapter 20, “Importing a program or
component” for details).
Note: Your group must have the Export Meter Program privilege to
export programs or components. Use Tools > User
Management > Group Information > Privileges to set the
appropriate access privileges.
Exporting a program To export a program:
1. From the Tools menu, select Export/Import Program.

The Export/Import Program dialog is displayed.
19. Exporting a program or component
Figure 19-163. Export/Import Program - select program
Export/Import Program dialog:
List Displays a list of programs by name.
Details Displays the details of the displayed programs:

• Program Name
• Program Type
• Creation On
• Creation By
• Modified On
• Modified By
Export Exports the selected program to a PED (program exchange
document) or XML text file.
Import Opens a dialog that allows you to select a PED file for importing.
See “Importing a program” on page 369.
opened dialog.

More/Less Shows the components for the selected program [disappears
when Less is clicked].
Program Name Displays the name of the program you wish to open.
Meters and Types Displays programs by meter family and type.
Components of Lists the components used by the selected program.
selected program
2. Select the Program ID from the listing.

• To select a program for a specific meter type click the Meters and Types
drop list and select the appropriate item.
• To view the components for a selected Program ID, click More and scroll
down the Components listing.
3. Click Export.
The Save Exported Program dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the appropriate File name.
5. Select the appropriate Save as type from the drop list:
a. .PED file extension (program exchange document)
b. .XML file extension
6. Click Save.
Exporting a component To export a component:
1. From the Tools menu, select Export/Import Component.

The Export/Import Component dialog is displayed.
Figure 19-164. Export/Import Component dialog
Export/Import Component dialog:
Components of type Displays components by type (for example, Logs, Constants,
etc.).
List Displays a list of components by name.
Details Displays the details of the displayed components:

• Component Type
• Meter Family
• Meter Type
• Program Type
• Creation On
• Creation By
• Modified On
• Modified By
Export Exports the selected component to a PCD ((program component
document) or XML text file.
Import Opens a dialog that allows you to select a PCD file for
importing. See “Importing a component” on page 372.
opened dialog.
More/Less Shows the programs that use the selected component
[disappears when Less is clicked].

Component Name Displays the name of the component you wish to export.
Programs using Lists the programs that use the selected component.
selected component
2. Select the Component from the listing.

• To select a component for a specific meter type click the Meters and Types
drop list and select the appropriate item.
• To view the programs that use the selected component, click More and
scroll down the Programs listing.
3. Click Export.
The Save Exported Component dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the appropriate File name.
5. Select the appropriate Save as type from the drop list:
a. .PCD file extension (program component document)
b. .XML file extension
6. Click Save.
20 IMPORTING A PROGRAM
OR COMPONENT
Note: To import programs your group must have the Import Meter
Program privilege. See “Privileges tab” on page 54.
You can import programs (*.PED or *.XML) or components (*.PCD or *.XML) that
have been exported from another Metercat installation (Release 1.5 or higher).
CAUTION: Beginning Metercat 3.0, the program and component schema

has changed. You cannot export programs or components
from Metercat 3.0 and higher and then import them into an
earlier release of Metercat. You can import programs and
components from earlier releases of Metercat.
This feature allows you to share programs or components between multiple

installations of Metercat.
Note: This feature only works with programs or components exported

from Metercat Release 1.5 or higher. See Chapter 19, “Exporting
a program or component” for details.
Note: Your group must have Import Meter Program privilege to import
programs or components. Use Tools > User Management >
Group Information > Privileges to set the appropriate access
privileges.
Important note on importing programs and password

sets
During the importation of a program, the password set associated with the
program is also imported. If the password set being imported already exists on
the destination system and the passwords in the imported set are different from
the passwords in the destination system, the password set on the system will be
changed to the imported passwords. This may cause communication errors with
A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA meters and IP AxisLink routers, depending on the
group’s password set and the Password History Depth setting of the set (see
“About password sets” on page 196 for details).
For example, if the imported program uses a password set (My Password Set)
that already exists in the destination Metercat database but the passwords in the
imported set are different (My Password Set.0 (b) compared with My Password
Set.0 (a)), the different passwords are imported and added to the existing
password set and the password set’s history counter will be incremented (see
Figure 20-165).
20. Importing a program or component
Figure 20-165. Importing a program and password sets
Imported Program
current user ID My Password Set.0 (b)
IMPORTED on 6/22/2006
Existing Metercat
current user ID My Password Set.0 (a)
12/31/2005 user ID My Password Set.1
Result after Import

current user ID My Password Set.0 (was b)
6/22/2006 user ID My Password Set.1 (was a)
After the importation, if the Password History Depth is set to 1 (that is, only use the
current password–My Password Set.0 that was (b)) and you attempt to
communicate with a meter that was programmed with the earlier password set
(for example, My Password Set.0 (a) in the figure), communications will fail.
See Chapter 12, “Managing meter passwords” for detailed information about
meter passwords and password sets.
Importing a program Note: Your user group must have Import Meter Programs privileges
before you can import a program or a component. See
“Privileges tab” on page 54 for more details.
Note: If you are using network storage of programs,
To import a program PED or XML file:
1. From the Tools menu, select Export/Import Program.

The Export/Import Program dialog is displayed.
Figure 20-166. Export/Import Program dialog
Export/Import Program dialog:
Item Description

• Program Name
• Program Type
• Creation On
• Creation By
• Modified On
• Modified By
Export Exports the selected program to a PED (program exchange
document) or XML text file. See “Exporting a program” on
page 363.
Import Opens a dialog that allows you to select a PED file for
importing.
opened dialog.
More/Less Shows the components for the selected program [disappears
when Less is clicked].
Components of Lists the components used by the selected program.
selected program
2. Click Import.
The Select PED file to Import dialog is displayed.
3. Navigate to the location of the PED or XML file you want to import.
Note: To see the XML files, select XML file (*.xml) from the Files of type
drop list.
4. Select the PED or XML file to import.
Note: Importing a program that contains new components will also
add the components.
5. Click Open.
Metercat displays a dialog listing the components that will be replaced.
Note: If you are importing an Instrumentation Profiling component
from a release earlier than Metercat 1.9 and the component is
shared between programs for both A3 ALPHA and A1800
ALPHA meters, the component will be imported for the meter
type specified in the program. If Metercat supports only one or
the other meter type, the component will be imported for the
supported meter type.
6. Click OK to acknowledge the dialog.
The selected PED or XML file is imported into Metercat.
Note: If the System Preferences settings of the exporting computer are
different from the settings of the importing computer you will
see a warning message. See “Warning Messages about
System Preferences” on page 375 for details.
8. Click More to see a list of the components associated with the imported
program.
Figure 20-167. Export/Import Program - selected import
9. Click Close to return to Metercat’s main window.

Metercat displays a report of the Import Program action.
See “Import Completion Report” on page 375 for more information.
Note: The logon ID you used while performing the import operation
will be associated with the imported program (Created By
column). If you have imported a duplicate, the logon ID is shown
in the Modified By column.
Importing a component Note: Your user group must have Import Meter Programs privileges
before you can import a program or a component. See
“Privileges tab” on page 54 for more details.
To import a component PCD or XML file:
1. From the Tools menu, select Export/Import Component.
The Export/Import Component dialog is displayed.
2. Click Import.
The Select PCD file to Import dialog is displayed.
3. Navigate to the location of the PCD or the XML file you want to import.
4. Select the PCD or XML file to import.
Note: To see the XML files, select XML file (*.xml) from the Files of type
drop list.
5. Click Open.
Note: If you are importing an Instrumentation Profiling component
from a release earlier than Metercat 1.9 and Metercat supports
both A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters, the component will
be imported for both meter types. If Metercat supports only one
or the other meter type, the component will be imported for the
supported meter type.
Metercat displays a dialog listing the filename and component that was
imported.
The selected PCD or XML file is imported into Metercat and is displayed
highlighted in the Export/Import Component dialog.
7. Click More to see a list of the programs that use the imported component.
Figure 20-168. Export/Import Component - selected component
8. Click Close to return to Metercat’s main window.

Metercat displays an import completion report that details any errors or
warnings that occurred during the importation.
See “Import Completion Report” on page 375 for more information.
Note: The logon ID you used while performing the import operation
will be associated with the imported component (Created By
column). If you have imported a duplicate, the logon ID is shown
in the Modified By column.
Importing duplicate If you are importing a program or component that already exists on your
components or computer, Metercat may prompt you if you will be overwriting an existing
program or component.
programs
• Click Cancel if you do not want to overwrite the duplicate items; click OK to
overwrite the duplicate items.
Renumbering a program
If a program import failed because of a special duplicate program IDs situation,
Metercat asks you to renumber your existing program and then retry the import.
To renumber a program prior to importing another, your group must have the
following group privileges (see “Privileges tab” on page 54):
• Create/Edit privileges for Meter Programs

• Delete Meter Programs access
To renumber a duplicate program:
1. From the File menu, select New > Program as Copy.

2. Select the existing program (not the one you want to import).
3. Enter a New Program ID Number that is not a duplicate and click Open.
4. Save the copied program.
5. To grant access to the renumbered program:
a. Log on using an ID in the Administrators group.
b. From the Tools menu, select User Management.
c. Edit the user groups as needed to grant access to the renumbered
program.
If function configuration changes are needed, your group must have Create/Edit
privileges for Functions.
If the Program task of any functions were configured to use the old program (that
is, the one with the duplicate Program ID), change those functions that use the old
program:

2. Edit the functions that include the Program task to use the renumbered
program.
Once the user groups and functions have been updated, delete the old program:
1. From the File menu, select Delete > Program and delete the old program
(that is, the one with the duplicate Program ID).
2. Retry the import.
Renaming a component
If a component import failed because of a special duplicate component name
situation, Metercat asks you to rename your existing component and then retry
the import.
To rename a component prior to importing, your group must have the following
group privileges (see “Privileges tab” on page 54):
• Create/Edit privilege for Meter Programs

• Delete Meter Programs access
To rename a duplicate component:
1. From the File menu, select New > Component as Copy.

2. Select the existing component (not the one you want to import).
3. Click More and note any programs that use the selected component.
4. Enter a New Component Name that is not a duplicate then click Open.
5. Save the copied component.
6. Edit each of the programs noted earlier to use the renamed component.
If function configuration changes are needed, your group must have Create/Edit
privileges for Functions.
If any tasks of any functions are configured to use the conflicting component,

2. Edit the functions to use the renamed component.
Once the functions have been updated, delete the old component:
1. From the File menu, select Delete > Component. and delete the old
component (that is, the one with the duplicate name).
Renaming a password set

If a program import failed because of a special duplicate password set situation,
Metercat asks you to rename your existing password set and then retry the
import. Your group must have Manage Meter Passwords access (see “Privileges
tab” on page 54).
To rename a password set:
1. From the Tools menu, select Meter Passwords Management.

2. Select the name of the password set that is a duplicate.
3. Enter a new password set name that will not conflict with an existing
password set and then click OK.
Import Completion When you have complete importing all of the programs or components and you
Report click Close to return to Metercat’s main window, Metercat displays a completion
report of your import actions. This report indicates which programs and
components were imported and the status of the import (successful or failed).
Troubleshooting Warning Messages about System Preferences

If you import a program from another Metercat installation that uses different
system preference settings for Show One Cycle of Alternate Display List at Power
Up, Use KYZ Value Method or Use Adjusted Kh Value to Configure Meter
Constants, you will see one or both of the warning messages:
Explanation
Exported programs include the Show One Cycle of Alternate Display List at Power
Up, Use KYZ Value Method, and Use Adjusted Kh Value to Configure Meter
Constants settings (either enabled or disabled) of the exporting Metercat
computer (Tools > System Preferences > Programming Options).
The imported program will use the setting on the importing Metercat computer
even though it is different from the setting of the imported file. To keep the setting
of the imported file you need to change your System Preferences setting
accordingly (see“Setting programming options” on page 47 for details.
Importing Errors
If you experience errors while importing a program or component, the import will
be unsuccessful. These errors are usually the result of one of the following
conditions:
• corrupt files
• editing of a PED, PCD, or XML file outside Metercat
• importing a later Metercat release PED, PCD, or XML file into an earlier
Metercat release
To correct the problem, re-export the program or component from the original
Metercat installation and then retry importing the program or component into the
proper Metercat installation.
Editing an imported See “Opening an existing program” on page 390 and Chapter 24, “Components”
program or component for details on opening and editing an imported program or component.
Creating a Program See “Creating a Program Report” on page 392 for details on creating a report of
Report after importing an imported program.
21 ABOUT PROGRAMS
Metercat allows you to create programs for the following Elster device families:
• A3 ALPHA
• A1800 ALPHA
• IP AxisLink routers
This chapter explains some of the basic concepts and terms needed to develop a
meter or router program.
Note: Your logon group must have Create/Edit privileges in order to

develop meter programs. For details on group privileges see
Chapter 6, “Managing users.”
Program identification Programs are uniquely identified by the following items:
• Program name
• Program ID
• Meter family
• Meter type
Program name
The Meter Type, Program ID and the Program Description combine to compose
the Program Name. It looks like A3K - 001 - TOU, LP in the Open > Program
dialog.
Program ID
Elster’s Metercat software uses a unique three-digit number (stored in the meter)
as a reference (in the range of 000 - 999).
Meter family
Metercat supports Elster’s A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA meters (ANSI C12-compliant)
and the IP AxisLink router. See “Setting supported meters” on page 44 for
information on configuring Metercat to support or not support certain meter
families.
The IP AxisLink router requires the EnergyAxis Management System (EA_MS) and,
if used for distribution automation (DA), it requires the IP AxisLink Secure Tunnel
Server (or IP AxisLink server). The IP AxisLink router may function as a gatekeeper
(IPGKR) within EA_MS or, in conjunction with the IP AxisLink server, it functions as a
gateway (IPGWR) to DA devices such as reclosers, capacity bank controllers, and
voltage regulators.
21. About programs
Meter type
Metercat allows the programming of the following A3 ALPHA meter types:
• D (Demand) or T (Time of Use)

• K (Apparent power)
• R (Reactive power)
• Q (Q-hour power)
Metercat allows the programming o the following A1800 ALPHA meter types:

• K (Apparent power)
• R (Reactive power)
Audit information Audit information is maintained for programs and individual components. You
can view this information by using the File > Open dialog. Audit information
includes:
• Created On date
• Created By user
• Modified On date
• Modified By user
These actions are described in more detail in Chapter 22, “Using the Program
Editor.”
Create information
The creation audit information is updated when you create a program or
component by using the following commands:
• File > New > Program

• File > New > Component
• File > New > Program as Copy
• File > New > Component as Copy
• File > Save As
Modified information
The modified audit information is updated when you perform:
• File > Save
About programs and To make it easier to develop a meter program, a program is composed of one of
components each type of component. The figure below illustrates the component types and
how they fit into a program.
21. About programs
Figure 21-169. Component types and programs
A component may be used in one or more defined programs (provided that the
component’s meter and program types are compatible with the program’s meter
and program types). For example, it would be easier and ensure consistency to
program meters with the same Special Dates component but, because of
differences in storage requirements for metering quantities, more than one Logs
or Metering component may need to be defined.
CAUTION: A change to an existing component affects any programs that

use that component.
The following components are independent of ALPHA meter type or program

type:
• Constants
• Demand (Single Rate Demand or TOU)
• Logs
• PQM
• Remote
21. About programs
• Service Test
• Special Features
• Special Option Board
Some components are meter type and program type specific. The following table
details components and their dependencies and some recommended naming
conventions.
Table 21-5. A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter components

Program Type dependent Meter Type and Program Type
Meter Type dependent
(TOU only) dependent
• Relays • Instrumentation Profiling • Metering (Quantities, Display,
• Rates (Switch Times and Day and Interval Data
Types) Configuration)
• Special Dates
Component naming convention recommendations
include meter type (example, include program type include meter type, program
A3K Relay, A3R Relay, etc.) (example, Demand Rates or type, and quantities (example,
TOU Rates) A3R TOU, LP Metering)
Note: Elster recommends that, if you vary your independent

components based on meter or program type, you include both
the meter type and program type in the component name
(example, A3D Constants, A3TKRQ Logs, etc.).
Metercat provides IP AxisLink router-specific components as well as using Rates
and Special Dates components.
Table 21-6. IP AxisLink router components

ALPHA components
IP AxisLink-specific components
shared with IP AxisLink routers
• Rates (Switch Times and Day Types)1 • ACL (Access Control List)
• Special Dates1 • Binary IO
• DNP
• Event Logs Configuration
• Event Notification
• Network
1. Required for IP AxisLink routers functioning as gatekeepers (IPGKR) in EA_MS.
Components may be used across multiple programs as long as the meter type
and program type dependencies are maintained.
21. About programs
Figure 21-170. Available components and defined programs
About TOU metering Elster’s electronic meters are capable of collecting and storing energy and
demand data in up to four separate rates: A, B, C, and D. You can specify in a
meter program that demand and energy information collected by a meter be
stored in any one of these four rates.
For a meter to collect and store information by rate, you must first define the day
types, switch times, and special dates that you want as part of your program
definition. Each of these components interacts closely with the others:
21. About programs
• Day Types subcomponent - used to assign a day type to each day of the
week and holidays within each season
• Switch Times subcomponent - used to define the times of day (for each day
type and season) during which TOU data will be allocated to a specific rate
category
• Special Dates component - used to define:
• recurring - dates that occur on a the same date every year or in a
repeatable pattern (for example, New Year’s Day)
• nonrecurring - dates that do not occur on the same date every year or in
a repeatable pattern (for example, Easter)
Additional resources Please see the following:
• A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2190)

• A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410)
• REX Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2210)
• REX2 Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2220)
• gREX Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2420)
• IP AxisLink Secure Tunnel Server Installation and Administration Guide
(TM42-4001)
• IP AxisLink Router Installation and Administration Guide (TM42-4002)
Elster also provides product guides for specific applications and option boards
(for example, E-WIC, W-WIC, 50ESS ERT, modems, etc.). Contact your Elster
representative for a list of available product guides.
22 USING THE PROGRAM
EDITOR
If your logon group does not have Create/Edit privileges for Meter Programs the
menu commands will be disabled. See Chapter 6, “Managing users” for details.
Program Editor help To view context sensitive help for a specific component in the Program Editor you
must:
5. Click the insertion point in a text box or select a drop list on the tab to
activate the tab.
6. Press the F1 key to display context sensitive help for the tab.
Starting the Program You can start the Program Editor by:
Editor • Creating a new meter program [using File > New > Program - to start the
New Program Wizard]
• Creating an IP AxisLink router program [using File > New > Program]
• Creating a copy of a program [using File > New > Program as Copy]
• Opening an existing program [using File > Open > Program]
CAUTION: Plan your data collection strategy carefully before creating a

meter program.
Creating a new program To create a new program:
1. From the File menu, select New > Program.

The New Program Wizard displays and guides you through the program
development process.
2. Select the device type from the Meter Family selection dialog:
• A1800 ALPHA
To create a program for an A1800 ALPHA meter, see “Creating a new
meter program” on page 384.
• A3 ALPHA
To create a program for an A3 ALPHA meter, see “Creating a new meter
program” on page 384.
• IP AxisLink
To create a program for an IP AxisLink router, see “Creating an IP AxisLink
router program” on page 386.
22. Using the Program Editor
Creating a new meter program

To create a new A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter program:

2. Select the appropriate Meter Family for the new program.
Metercat supports programs for the A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA meter families
and the IP AxisLink router.
Note: Depending in options selected during Metercat installation, the
displayed meter families are determined by your System
Preferences. See “Setting supported meters” on page 44 for
details.
3. Click Next.
Note: You can use the Back button to return to prior questions in the
Wizard. Use this button to review or change your answers.
The Meter Type selection dialog is displayed.
Note: The displayed meter types are determined by your System
details.
4. Select the appropriate Meter Type:
• K (Apparent Power)
• Q (Q-hour Power - A3 ALPHA meters only)
• R (Reactive Power)
5. Click Next.
The Program Type dialog is displayed.
6. Select the appropriate Program Type:
• Single Rate Demand (No Timekeeping)
Note: Single rate demand does not support load profile,
instrumentation profiling, switch times, and special dates.
• Time of Use
7. Click Next.
The Program ID Number selection dialog is displayed.
8. Select a Program ID Number from the drop list.
This unique number is stored in the meter and is used to identify the
program used by the meter or router.
Note: You cannot change this number after the program has been
saved. See “Renumbering a program” on page 374 for
directions on renumbering an existing program.
9. Click Next.
The options selection dialog is displayed.
10.Select the options to include in the program:
• Instrumentation Profiling (TOU metering only)
• PQM
• Relay Options
• Remote
• Special Dates (TOU metering only)

• Special Option Board
Note: Options listed are determined by selected Meter Type and
Program Type.
11. You can click Finish and all choices up to this point are used to configure the
Program Editor with new components
— OR —
Click Next to select one or more existing components (see “About programs
and components” on page 378 for details on programs and components).
Note: A change to an existing component affects any programs that
use that component.
If you clicked Next, the component selection dialog is displayed.
Note: Use the scroll bar on the right of the dialog to view the entire set
of components or you can resize the dialog to view the entire
contents.
Note: The available components will have a selection for <new>
components as well as a listing of existing components.
12.Select the components to be included in the new program from the various
drop lists (see Chapter 24, “Components” for detailed information on each
component type).
— OR —
If you wish to create a new component select <new> from the list; you will
be prompted for a name when you save the program.
13.Click Finish to complete development of the new program.
The Program Editor window displays for the new program.
Figure 22-171. Metercat program editor - meter program
14.Set the appropriate component parameters according to the procedures

described in Chapter 24, “Components.”
15.After setting the various program parameters, save the new program by
selecting Save from the File menu.
16.Save any new or changed components using a standard naming
convention.
See “About programs and components” on page 378 for recommended
naming conventions.
Creating an IP AxisLink router program

To create an IP AxisLink router program:

2. Select the IP AxisLink for the new program.
Metercat supports programs for the A3 ALPHA, A1800 ALPHA meter families
and the IP AxisLink router.
Note: Depending in options selected during Metercat installation, the
displayed meter families are determined by your System
details.
3. Click Next.
Note: You can use the Back button to return to prior questions in the
Wizard. Use this button to review or change your answers.
The Program ID Number selection dialog is displayed.
4. Select a Program ID Number from the drop list.
This unique number is stored in the meter and is used to identify the
program used by the meter or router.
5. Click Next.
The option selection dialog is displayed.
6. Select the IP AxisLink options for the router:
• ACL (Access Control List)
• DNP
• Rates [required for routers functioning a gatekeepers in EA_MS]
• Special Dates [required for routers functioning a gatekeepers in EA_MS]
Note: For IP AxisLink routers functioning as gatekeepers(IPGKR) within
EA_MS, the device program must be exported from Metercat
and imported into EA_MS.
7. You can click Finish and all choices up to this point are used to configure the
Program Editor with new components.
— OR —
Click Next to select one or more existing components (see “About programs
and components” on page 378 for details on programs and components).
use that component.
If you clicked Next, the component selection dialog is displayed.
8. Select the components to be included in the new program from the various
drop lists (see Chapter 24, “Components” for detailed information on each
component type):
• Event Notifications
• Network
• Binary IO
• Event Logs Configuration
• Special Dates
• Rates
Note: The IP AxisLink router (functioning as a gatekeeper [IPGKR])
supports DST switch times and special schedules using the
Rates and Special Dates components. You may may use the
same Rates and Special Dates components created for
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters.
• DNP
• ACLs (Access Control List)
— OR —
9. Click Finish to complete development of the new program.
The Program Editor window displays for the new program.
Figure 22-172. Program Editor window - IP AxisLink router
Note: Use the scroll bar on the right of the dialog to view the entire set
of components or you can resize the dialog to view the entire
contents.
Note: The available components will have a selection for <new>
components as well as a listing of existing components.
10.Set the appropriate component parameters according to the procedures
described in Chapter 24, “Components.”
11. After setting the various program parameters, save the new program by
selecting Save from the File menu.
12.Save any new or changed components using a standard naming
convention.
naming conventions.
Creating a copy of a Note: A new copy of a program can only copy a program of the same
program Meter Family (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA), Program and Meter
Type (that is, a program for an A3 ALPHA meter R Meter Type
with TOU Program Type can only be copied for an A3 ALPHA
meter R TOU program).
To create a new program from an existing program:
1. From the File menu, select New > Program as Copy.

The New Program as Copy dialog opens.
Figure 22-173. New program as copy
2. Click More to view component information on a selected program.
Figure 22-174. New program as copy - more details
3. Select the Program Name you wish to copy for the new program.
4. Select the New Program ID Number from the drop list.
5. Click Open to create the new component and display the Program Editor.
Note: The Program Description is Copy of <Program Name>.
6. Edit the new program as needed.
Opening an existing To open an existing program in order to change or review its settings:
program 1. From the File menu, select Open > Program.
Metercat displays the Open Program dialog.
2. Select the program from the list and click Open.
3. Click More to view component information on a selected program.
Note: Use the List, Details, and More buttons to help you find the
program you wish to open.
The following table describes the various items on the Open Program dialog:
Item Description

• Program Name
• Program Type
• Creation On
• Creation By
• Modified On
• Modified By
Open Opens the selected program in the Program Editor window.
Cancel Closes the dialog and returns to the main Metercat window.
Help Opens online help for this function.
More/Less Shows/Hides the components for the selected program [is
displayed when Less is clicked].
Using the Program Editor After completing the New Program Wizard, you must set the program’s
parameters using the Program Editor window.
Note: Depending on meter and program types selected during

program creation, different tabs and different parameters may
be displayed.
An example of a Program Editor window is displayed in the figure below.
Figure 22-175. About the program editor
component tabs
component
definition
status bar
The Program Editor consists of the following elements:
Item Description
component tabs Tabbed pages that allow you to selectively view or change
components within a program.
component definition Displays the selected component’s parameters or
settings.
status bar Displays information messages. In the Program Editor,
the status bar displays the meter family and type,
program description, etc.
Saving a program To save a new or changed program:
• From the File menu, select Save.

Note: You will be prompted to save and name any new or changed
components.
Note: Replacing a component does not constitute a modified
component, only if some data element of the component is
changed from the saved version of the component is it labelled
modified.
Creating a Program To generate a report of an open program’s configuration:

Report • From the File menu, select New > Report.
Metercat displays an HTML report containing the open program’s
configuration.
You can save this report in HTML format by selecting Save from the File menu.
Deleting a program To delete an existing program:

1. From the File menu, select Delete > Program.
The Delete Program dialog is displayed.
2. Click More to view those components used in the selected program.
3. Select the Program Name from the listing.
4. Click Delete.
The Confirm Program Delete dialog is displayed.
5. Click Yes to continue with the deletion; click No to cancel and return to the
Delete Program dialog.
Note: Program components are not deleted. You must use File >
Delete > Components to delete individual components.
Closing the Program To close the Program Editor:

Editor 1. From the File menu, select Close or click the Close button in the top right
corner of the Program Editor window.
Metercat prompts you to save any changed components.
2. Click Yes to save any changed components; click No to close the Program
Editor without saving any changed components; or click Cancel to return to
the Program Editor.
23 USING THE COMPONENT
EDITOR
The Component Editor works like the Program Editor only it allows you to work on
one component at a time.
Component Editor help To view context sensitive help for a specific tab in the Component Editor you must
activate the tab by:
3. Clicking the insertion point in a text box or select a drop list on the tab.
4. Pressing the F1 key to display context sensitive help for the tab.
Starting the Component You can start the Component Editor by:
Editor • Creating a new component [using File > New > Component]
• Creating a copy of a component [using File > New > Component as Copy]
• Opening an existing component (using File > Open > Component]
Creating a new To create a new component:

component 1. From the File menu, select New > Component.
Metercat displays the New Component dialog.
2. Select the appropriate component type from the displayed list (see Chapter
24, “Components” for detailed information on each component type).
• If a Logs component is selected, an additional series of dialogs will
appear asking you to select:
• the Meter Family for the component (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA)
• If a Metering component is selected, an additional series of dialogs will
appear asking you to select:
• the Meter Type for the component (D or T, K, R. or Q1)
• the Program Type for the component (Single Rate Demand or Time Of
Use)
• If a Relay component is selected, an additional dialog will appear asking
you to select the Meter Type for the component (D or T, K, R, or Q1).
1. A3 ALPHA meters only.

23. Using the Component Editor
• If an Instrumentation Profiling component is selected, an additional

dialog will appear asking you to select:
3. Click Open.
Metercat displays the Component Editor.
4. Select the Meter Family:
a. A1800 ALPHA
b. A3 ALPHA
5. For components other than Metering or Relay, select the Meter Type:
a. D (Demand) or T (Time of Use)
b. K (Apparent Power)
c. Q (Q-hour Power) [A3 ALPHA meters only]
d. R (Reactive Power)
6. For components other than Metering, select the Program Type:
a. Single Rate Demand (No Timekeeping)
b. Time of Use
The component entry tab will change to conform to your selections.
7. Enter the settings for the new component as described in Chapter 24,
“Components.”
8. Save the new component using a standard naming convention.
naming conventions.
Creating a copy of a To create a copy of a component:

component 1. From the File menu, select New > Component as Copy.
Metercat displays the New Component as Copy dialog.
Figure 23-176. New Component as Copy
2. Click More to view program information on a selected component.
Figure 23-177. New Component as Copy - programs

3. Select the Component you wish to use to create the new component.
Note: For Metering or Logs component, you can only copy for the
same Meter Family (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA) as the existing
component.
Note: For Metering components, you can only create a copy for the
same Meter Type and Program Type as the existing component.
Note: For Relay components, you can only create a copy for the same
Meter Type as the existing component.
4. Enter the New Component Name (or you can wait until you save the new
component).
naming conventions.
Note: The default Component Name is Copy of <Component Name>.
5. Click Open to create the new component and display the Component Editor.
6. Configure the new component as described in Chapter 24, “Components.”
Opening an existing To open an existing component (in order to either change or view the
component component’s settings):
1. From the File menu, select Open > Component.

Metercat displays the Open Component dialog.
Note: Changing an existing component will affect any program using
that component. To avoid problems, save a changed
component with a different name using File > Save As.
2. Use the List or Detail buttons or click the Meter Family or Components of
Type drop-list button to narrow the displayed listing of components.
3. Select the component you want from the list.
4. Click More to display a list of programs that use the selected component.
Figure 23-178. Open component - programs
The following table describes the various items on the Open Component
dialog:
Item Description
List Displays a list of components by name.
Details Displays the details of the displayed components:

• Component Name
• Component Type
• Creation On
• Creation By
• Modified On
• Modified By
Open Opens the selected component in the Component Editor
window.
Cancel Closes the dialog and returns to the main Metercat window.
Help Opens online help for this function.
More/Less Shows/hides the list of programs the selected component is
associated with.
Component Name Displays the name of the component you wish to open.
Meter Family Displays the list of supported meter families allowing you to
narrow the list of components. See “Setting supported meters”
on page 44 for details on supported meter families.
Item Description
Components of Type Displays components by component type.
The list of component types is shown in “Opening an existing
5. Select the appropriate component from the list and click Open.
Metercat displays the selected component in the Component Editor.
Saving a changed To save changes to an existing component:

component • From the File menu, select Save.
use that component. You may save a changed component to
another name (using File > Save As) so that programs using
that component are not affected.
Creating a Component To generate a report of an open component’s configuration:

Report • With the component open in Metercat, from the File menu, select New >
Report.
Metercat displays an HTML report containing detailed information on the
open component’s configuration.
You can save this report in HTML format by selecting Save from the File menu.
Deleting a component To delete an existing component:
1. From the File menu, select Delete > Component.

The Delete Component dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Component from the listing.
Note: You cannot delete components that are associated with existing
programs. You must first change or delete the relevant program
to enable the Delete button.
3. Click Delete.
The Confirm Component Delete dialog is displayed.
4. Click Yes to continue with the deletion; click No to cancel and return to the
Delete Component dialog.
Closing the Component To close the Component Editor:

Editor 1. From the File menu, select Close or click the Close button in the top right
corner of the Component Editor window.
Metercat will prompt you to save a changed component.
2. Click Yes to save the changed component; click No to close the Component
Editor without saving the changed component; or click Cancel to return to
the Component Editor.
24 COMPONENTS
See Chapter 22, “Using the Program Editor” for details on using the Program
Editor and the Program Development Wizard to create and edit meter
configuration programs.
See Chapter 23, “Using the Component Editor” for details on using the
Component Editor to create and edit program components.
CAUTION: Plan your data collection strategy carefully before creating a

meter program.
Available components The component-based tabs of the Program Editor allow you to change existing
components or create new components for a meter program.
You can create the following types of components using File > New >
Component:
Supported by Component
All programs • Properties tab
A3 ALPHA • Constants component
A1800 ALPHA • Demand component
• Demand component - single rate demand meter
• Demand component - time of use meter
• Instrumentation Profiling Config component
• Logs component
• Metering component
• Quantities subcomponent
• Display subcomponent
• Interval Data Configuration subcomponent
• PQM component
• Relay Options component
• Remote component
• Service Test component
• Special Features component
• Special Option Board component
A3 ALPHA • Rates component
A1800 ALPHA • Switch Times subcomponent
IP AxisLink • Day Types subcomponent
• Special Dates component
24. Components
Supported by Component
IP AxisLink • ACL (Access Control List) component
• Binary IO component
• DNP component
• Event Logs Configuration component
• Event Notifications component
• Network component
Note: Depending on the meter and program type of the open meter
program, you may not see all of the above tabs.
Properties tab The Properties tab of the Program Editor is used for setting the following
parameters for all Metercat programs:
• Program Description
• Password Set
• Custom Display Strings 1 & 2
• Effective Date (only for meters with TOU capabilities)
• Program Options (for example, using special dates)
• Access Control for groups (only in multi-user Metercat configurations)
Note: The Program ID number cannot be changed.
The Properties component also provides memory allocation information (see
“Memory Allocation tab” on page 404).
24. Components
Figure 24-179. Program properties - meter program options

24. Components
Figure 24-180. Program properties - IP AxisLink program options
To set the program’s properties:
1. Type a descriptive name in the Program Description box (30 character

maximum length).
Note: Metercat uses the Meter Type, Program ID number and the
Program Description to identify unique programs, for example,
A3K-002-TOU Program.
2. From the drop list, select the Password Set to be programmed into meters.
3. For meters, enter Custom Display Strings 1 and 2 (for example, a reading
cycle name) composed of up to 6 characters that can be programmed to
appear on the meter’s LCD (see “Display subcomponent” on page 427 for
details on adding display items and to Appendix C, “Displayable
Characters” for a listing of displayable characters).
4. For meters, if the Program Function is Time of Use (see the status bar), enter
or select the Effective Date (that is, the date the program will take affect). The
date is overridden if you use the Replace Rates and Dates task to download
a program. This field is ignored if you use the Program task to download a
program.
Note: The Effective Date is not currently used by Metercat.
5. (Optional) In the Program Notes text box, add or edit any information (up to
2000 characters) you want stored with the program in Metercat.
Note: Program Notes are not programmed into the meter.
24. Components
Note: Program Notes are included in program reports and are

exported and imported with programs.
6. Select the Program Options tab and check any additional options such as
special dates.
Note: The Access Control tab is only available in multi-user
configurations of Metercat. See Chapter 4, “Configuring the
system.”
7. Select the Access Control tab and use the Add button to move any
Disallowed Groups to the Enabled Groups list as described in “Using
movement buttons” on page 24.
Note: Access to a particular program can also be controlled by User
Management (see “Programs tab” on page 56).
Figure 24-181. Program properties - access control
8. Ffor meters, select the Memory Allocation tab to view the number of days of
storage for each possible meter memory configuration (see “Memory
Allocation tab” on page 404 for details on how memory is allocated based
on program configuration settings).
Memory Allocation tab

Note: For the A3 ALPHA meter, the memory allocation storage
estimates are based on firmware version 3.01. For the A1800
ALPHA meter, the memory allocation storage estimates are
based on firmware version 1.00. Contact your Elster sales
representative for more information.
24. Components
The Memory Allocation tab displays the number of days of storage for common
meter memory configuration for the following:
• interval data (pulse) (Interval Data Configuration subcomponent)

• interval data (instrumentation) Instrumentation Profiling Config component)
The following component settings also use shared memory and affect the
amount of shared memory that is available for storing profile data:
• log entries (Logs component) - event, history, sag, and PQM

• number of self reads (Logs component)
• number of quantities defined (Quantities subcomponent) - the more
quantities defined, the more memory required for self reads
Figure 24-182. Program properties - memory allocation
The information shown is automatically updated if you make changes to any

parameters in the program that affect memory allocation, such as the number of
load profile days, the number of self reads, the number of channels of interval
data (instrumentation), etc.
Note: Meter memory configuration is determined by the amount of

memory on the meter’s main circuit board and the amount of
expanded memory available on any option boards.
24. Components
The following rules are enforced during Program task execution time when
allocating memory:
1. Metercat does not change the memory allocated to self reads and logs.
2. If Interval Data (Pulse), Instrumentation Profiling Set 1 and Instrumentation
Profiling Set 2 Days of Storage are set to Maximize, Metercat allocates
memory so that the same number of days are provided for each data set.
3. If Interval Data (Pulse), Instrumentation Profiling Set 1 and Instrumentation
Profiling Set 2 are all set to a specified number of days, Metercat allocates
memory in the following order: Interval Data (Pulse), Instrumentation
Profiling Set 1 and Instrumentation Profiling Set 2.
4. If one or more data sets are configured for a specified number of days and
one or more are configured to Maximize:
a. Metercat allocates memory for the specified number of days using the
following priority: Interval Data (Pulse), Instrumentation Profiling Set 1 and
Instrumentation Profiling Set 2.
b. Metercat allocates the remainder of available memory equally to the
data sets configured to Maximize (that is, they all are set to store data the
same number of days).
Examples of memory allocation

Note: The number of days of storage listed may very depending on
the meter type and the firmware version of the meter. The
indicated values are for A3 ALPHA meters firmware 3.01 or later.
The following table provides an example of memory allocation (in days)
assuming that the following conditions are true:
• instrumentation profiling is disabled

• load profile interval length is 15 minutes
• one quantity is measured
The first number assumes all data logs and self reads are configured to record
the maximum number of events - 255 for logs and 15 self reads (see “Logs
The second number assumes minimum logs1 (0 log entries and 40 PQM log
entries) and no self reads leaving all memory for load profile data storage.
Available Number of channels of standard load profiling

Memory 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main Board 64K 89/127 47/68 36/52 26/38 22/32 18/26 16/23 14/20
128K 288/326 153/174 117/132 86/98 73/83 60/68 53/60 46/52
Extended Memory Board 1 MB 3177 1696 1294 954 812 664 592 509
The following table provides an example of memory allocation (in days)

assuming that the following conditions are true:
• one quantity is measured

• interval data (pulse) is set for 15-minute intervals
1. In the factory the PQM log is set to minimally record 40 entries. This ensures that if
PQM is enabled at a later date there will be no consequent loss of load profile or
instrumentation profile data.
24. Components
• instrumentation profiling is enabled and configured for the following:

• instrumentation profiling set 1 is set for 6 channels at 5-minute intervals
• instrumentation profiling set 2 is set for 16 channels at 30-minute intervals
• data storage is configured for an equal number of days across all profile
channels
The first number assumes all data logs and self reads are configured to record
the maximum number of events - 255 for logs and 15 self reads (see “Logs
The second number assumes minimum logs1 (0 log entries and 40 PQM log
entries) and no self reads leaving all memory for profile data storage.
Available Number of channels of standard load profiling

Memory 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main Board 64K 4/6 4/5 3/5 3/5 3/5 3/5 3/4 3/4
128K 13/15 13/14 12/14 12/13 11/13 11/13 11/12 10/12
Extended Memory Board 64K 149 143 140 134 131 127 124 120
1 MB
128K 157 157 140 134 131 127 124 120
ALPHA meter Programs for the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter use the following
components components:
• Constants component
• Demand component
• Instrumentation Profiling Config component
• Logs component
• Metering component
• PQM component
• Relay Options component
• Remote component
• Service Test component
• Special Features component
• Special Option Board component
Note: Some meter configurations may not require all listed
components.
1. In the factory the PQM log is set to minimally record 40 entries. This ensures that if
PQM is enabled at a later date there will be no consequent loss of load profile or
instrumentation profile data.
24. Components
Constants component
The Constants component allows you to set the values Metercat will program into
the meter for calculating the adjusted Ke, adjusted Kh, and Kd.
You may override the constants stored in the program at Program task execution
time (if Prompt is selected). A brief explanation of this feature is found in Chapter
9, “Managing functions.”
Metering application
Elster sets Factory Ke in all ALPHA meters. This value is the amount of energy per
pulse generated by the ALPHA meter engine.
The Factory Ke value is dependent on meter form and class rating (see your
meter’s technical manual for details). Factory Ke is calculated:
Factory Kh
Factory K e = ------------------------------------
Nameplate P/R
Energy and demand measurements stored in the meter must be adjusted to

account for current transformer (CT) ratio and voltage transformer (VT) ratio and/
or when an external multiplier is used.
At program time, Metercat uses the Factory Ke to calculate the Adjusted Ke and
this value is then used to calculate energy usage (that is, convert pulse counts into
display values).
Primary metering
When you select primary metering, Metercat calculates the Adjusted Ke value as
follows:
Factory K e  CT  VT
Adjusted K e = -------------------------------------------------------
Register Multiplier
In primary metering, the current transformer (CT) ratio and the voltage
transformer (VT) ratio are entered and stored in the meter. Metercat allows you to
enter and store the Register Multiplier but this value is not used for storing or
displaying energy and demand values.
Metercat uses these values to calculate the Adjusted Ke that the meter then uses
for energy calculations.
Note: A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters always use Adjusted Ke in
calculations.
Secondary metering
When you select secondary metering (default), Metercat computes Adjusted Ke:
Factory K e
Adjusted K e = ---------------------------------------------
Register Multiplier
In secondary metering, the current transformer (CT) ratio and the voltage
transformer (VT) ratio may be entered and stored in the meter, but they are not
used by the meter in energy calculations. Metercat allows you to enter and store
the Register Multiplier but this value is not used for storing or displaying energy
and demand values.
24. Components
Adjusted constants
Adjusted Kd
As part of the Constants view (see “Constants view” on page 230), Metercat
calculates and displays Adjusted Kd as follows:
Adjusted K = Adjusted K  Number of Demand Intervals per Hour
d e
Adjusted Kh
Instead of setting the register multiplier, Metercat allows you to enter Adjusted Kh
to calculate the register multiplier as follows:
Factory K h
Register Multiplier = ------------------------------
Adjusted K
h
To specify whether to use Adjusted Kh to calculate the register multiplier see

“Setting programming options” on page 47. To set the Adjusted Kh, you must
program the meter with the appropriate Adjusted Kh value (see “Overriding
program values using the Program task” on page 351).
Note: The Constants component displays the Adjusted Kh as

undefined. To view the meter’s programmed Adjusted Kh value,
read the meter and select Constants view.
Register Multiplier
Normally, the register multiplier is left at 1.0 (default). Metercat uses the register
multiplier to calculate Adjusted Kh as follows:
Factory K h
Adjusted K = ---------------------------------------------
h Register Multiplier
Alternatively, using Metercat you can set the Adjusted Kh so that the meter
calculates the register multiplier. See “Overriding program values using the
Program task” on page 351 for details on setting the Adjusted Kh.
However, in certain situations a different value may be needed. If you program

the meter with a register multiplier other than the default, the energy and
demand values stored and displayed on the meter must be multiplied by the
register multiplier in order to yield the actual energy and demand values.
Note: The meter does not use the register multiplier for storing or
displaying energy and demand values.
Transformer Factor
Metercat can program the CT and VT ratios that are stored and displayed by the
meter. From these values, Metercat computes the transformer factor (shown in
Metercat for information purposes only). If the selected metering application is
primary metering, the CT and VT values programmed into the meter are used to
calculate Adjusted Ke; secondary metering does not use the stored CT or VT
values to calculate Adjusted Ke.
Setting Constants
Note: Adjusted Ke, Kh and Kd values are undefined until a meter has
been programmed with the Constants component. The Ke, Kh
and Kd values are displayed in the Constants view after the
meter has been read (see “Constants view” on page 230).
24. Components
To set meter constant parameters:
1. Select an existing Constants component from the drop list

— OR —
Figure 24-183. Constants - A3 ALPHA meter
2. Select the appropriate Metering Application:

a. Secondary Metering - default
b. Primary Metering
Note: To use Direct Metering, select Primary Metering with a Register
Multiplier of 1.0.
3. Select the appropriate register multiplier (possible values are 0.1, 1, 10, 100,
1000, 10000, 100000, 1000000).

24. Components
4. Type the CT Ratio in the box (range of 1 to 9999.99).

5. Type the VT Ratio in the box (range of 1 to 9999.99).
Note: Metercat automatically calculates and displays the transformer
factor (CT x VT).
Note: Adjusted Ke and Kd are calculated in the meter (see “Primary
metering” on page 408 and “Adjusted Kd” on page 409). Values
for these two constants are displayed in the Constants view.
Note: The Constants component displays the Adjusted Kh as
undefined. To view the meter’s programmed Adjusted Kh value,
read the meter and select Constants view.
Note: Depending on your System Preferences, Adjusted Kh is
configured during Program task execution.
6. Save the component.
Demand component
The Demand component allows you to configure interval and threshold
information. The Demand component settings vary depending upon the meter
type:

Demand component - single rate demand meter

The single rate demand meter performs no timekeeping therefore rate thresholds
are not necessary.
To set single rate demand parameters:
1. Select an existing Demand component from the drop list.

— OR —
24. Components
Figure 24-184. Demand - single rate
2. Check to allow Exponential Response (default values in Normal mode:

Interval = 15 min. and Subinterval = 15 min.; default values in Test mode:
Interval = 1 min. and Subinterval = 1 min.).
3. Select an Interval (minutes) (possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15
[default], 20, 30, 60).
4. If needed, select a Subinterval (minutes) (values displayed depend upon the
selected Interval value).
5. Type the value for the Overload (range 0.0000 to 999999.9999).
Note: To disable Overload, uncheck the Apply Load Control and
Overload Threshold check boxes in the Quantities
subcomponent.
If you choose not to uncheck Apply Overload Threshold and still

wish to disable Overload, enter a value of 999999.9999 for the
Overload threshold. However, if the Display subcomponent is
configured with Demand Values having a Display Units value of
Unity, ensure that the Overload value entered conforms to the
Display Digits and Decimal Location settings (see “Display
subcomponent” on page 427). If you fail to do this, the meter’s
LCD will display an overflow message.
24. Components

6. Type the value for the Threshold (range 0.0000 to 999999.9999).

Note: If you specify an overload and/or threshold values that are too
precise (that is too many digits to the right of the decimal) and
specify a register multiplier other than 1.0, you risk truncating the
entered values.
7. Select the Test Interval (minutes) (possible values are 1, 2, 3 [default], 4, 5, 6,
10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60).
8. If needed, select the Test Subinterval (minutes) (values displayed depend
upon the selected Interval value).
9. Type in the Demand Forgiveness Time (minutes) (maximum of 255; default
of 0).
10.Select the Cumulative Demand Type:
a. At Reset - the peak demand for the billing period is added to the
cumulative kW value at demand reset time.
b. Continuous - the increment of the new peak is added to the cumulative
kW value as the peak occurs.
Demand component - time of use meter

The time of use meter performs timekeeping therefore rate thresholds are
necessary.
To set TOU demand parameters:
1. Select an existing Demand component from the drop list.

— OR —
24. Components
Figure 24-185. Demand - TOU
2. Check to allow Exponential Response (default values in Normal mode:

Interval = 15 min. and Subinterval = 15 min.; default values in Test mode:
Interval = 1 min. and Subinterval = 1 min.).
3. Select an Interval (minutes) (possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15
[default], 20, 30, 60).
Note: Block interval demand is calculated only if the subinterval size
equals the interval size.
4. If needed, select a Subinterval (minutes) (values displayed depend upon the
selected Interval value).
5. Type the value for the Overload (range 0.0000 to 999999.9999).
Note: The number of digits to the right of the decimal point must
match the number of decimal places specified in the Display >
Control tab - A3 ALPHA meter. If you do not want a kW overload
flag, enter all zeros (for example, 000000, 00000.0, or 0000.00).
6. For each rate (A, B, C, and D), type in the Rate Threshold (range 0.0000 to
999999.9999).
7. Select the Test Interval (minutes) (possible values are 1, 2, 3 [default], 4, 5, 6,
10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60).
8. If needed, select the Test Subinterval (minutes) (values displayed depend
upon the selected Interval value).
Note: Block interval demand is calculated only if the subinterval size
equals the interval size.
24. Components
9. Type in the Demand Forgiveness Time (minutes) (maximum of 255; default

of 0).
10.Type in the Demand Forgiveness Outage Time (minutes) (maximum of 255).
A value of zero minutes disables this function.
11. Select the Cumulative Demand Type:
a. At Reset - the peak demand for the billing period is added to the kW value
at demand reset time.
b. Continuous - the increment of the new peak is added to the cumulative
kW value as the peak occurs.
12.Save the component.
Instrumentation Profiling Config component

Note: This feature is supported only by TOU meters.
The Instrumentation Profiling Configuration component allows you to configure
two sets of Instrumentation Profiling quantities. A3 ALPHA (A3T/A3K/A3R) and
A1800 ALPHA reactive meters can record up to 16 channels of instrumentation
data per set. Each set of instrumentation profiling has its own interval length that
is configured independently from the demand or pulse data interval length.
For reactive A1800 ALPHA meters (firmware version 1.5 or later), Instrumentation
Profiling Configuration additionally allows you to specify one or more measured
quantities (for example kWh-Del, kVARh-Q1, etc.) in addition to the
instrumentation data.
Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for additional details on instrumentation
profiling.
information on overriding this component during Program task execution.
24. Components
Figure 24-186. Instrumentation profiling - A3 ALPHA meter
To configure instrumentation profiling:
1. Select the Instrumentation Profiling Configuration component.

2. Select one of the following Days of Storage settings:
Note: The number of days of Instrumentation Profile data that can be
stored in the meter is affected by the metered quantities,
interval data configuration, and the Log component settings.
See “Memory Allocation tab” on page 404 for the effect of Days
of Storage settings on memory allocation.
a. Maximize to retain recorded interval data for the maximum number of
days (determined by the meter when the program is loaded).
b. Number of days and then type the number of days that interval data is
stored in the meter (range of 0 to 999).
Note: If you set Number of days to zero (0) or define no channels,
instrumentation profiling data is not recorded.
Note: The Program function completion report will state the number of
days that were programmed into the meter based on the
memory available at the time of programming.
3. Select the Interval length (in minutes) (values - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15
[default], 20, 30, 60).
Note: You can specify different interval lengths for set 1 and set 2. See
“Memory Allocation tab” on page 404 for the effect of interval
length on memory allocation.
24. Components
4. To configure an instrumentation set:

a. To add a channel, click Add.
— OR —
Press <Insert> to add a new row above the currently selected row.
b. Select None in the Quantity column.
A drop list button is displayed listing the available instrumentation
quantities.

per phase voltage per phase voltage % THD1
per phase current per phase current % THD1
per phase kW per phase TDD1
per phase kVAR system kW
per phase kVA system kVAR - vectorial
per phase voltage angle system kVAR - arithmetic
per phase current angle system kVA - vectorial
per phase PF1 system kVA - arithmetic
per phase PF angle1 system PF - vectorial1
per phase fundamental current system PF - arithmetic1
per phase 2nd harmonic current system PF angle - vectorial1
per phase harmonic current (2nd – 15th) system PF angle - arithmetic1
per phase 2nd harmonic current magnitude line frequency
per phase fundamental voltage
per phase 2nd harmonic voltage magnitude
per phase 2nd harmonic voltage %1
1. This measurement cannot be recorded using the Average algorithm.
A1800 ALPHA reactive meters

(uses End algorithm only)
kWh-Del KVAh-(Q1-Q4)
kWh-Rec KVAh-(Q2-Q3)
kWh-Sum KVAh-(Q3-Q2)
kWh-Net kVARh-Q1
kVAh-Del kVARh-Q2
kVAh-Rec kVARh-Q3
kVAh-Sum kVARh-Q4
kVARh-Del kVARh-(Q1+Q4)
kVARh-Rec kVARh-(Q2+Q3)
kVARh-Sum KVARh-(Q1-Q4)
kVARh-Net KVARh-(Q2-Q3)
kVAh-Q1 KVARh-(Q3-Q2)
kVAh-Q2
kVAh-Q3
kVAh-Q4
c. Select a Quantity from the listing.

d. By default the Algorithm is set to End, click in the Algorithm column to
select a different algorithm:
Item Description
Minimum The meter samples the selected instrumentation quantity over
the interval. The minimum value of all the samples is
recorded.
The following measurements cannot be measured using this
setting:
• pulse1 quantities
24. Components
Item Description
Maximum The meter samples the selected instrumentation quantity over
the interval. The maximum value of all the samples is
recorded.
setting:
Average The meter samples the selected instrumentation quantity over
the interval. The average value of all the samples is recorded.
setting:
• per phase current % THD
• per phase voltage % THD
• per phase 2nd harmonic voltage %
• per phase PF angle
• per phase TDD
• system PF - vectorial
• system PF - arithmetic
• system PF angle - vectorial
• system PF angle - arithmetic
End The meter samples the selected instrumentation or pulse1
[default] quantity over the interval. The last value of all the samples is
recorded.
1. A1800 ALPHA reactive meters only.
e. Repeat for each additional channel.

5. To remove a channel, select the channel from the listing and click Remove.
— OR —
Press <Ctrl> + <Del> to remove the currently selected row.
6. Repeat the process for Instrumentation Profiling Set 2.
Logs component
The Logs component allows you to configure the following logs recorded by the
meter:
• event log
• history log
• self read
• Sag log
• PQM log
Note: The sag log and PQM log are only available on meters with
Power Quality Monitoring (PQM) enabled.
See the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for details on the logs available in the
A3 ALPHA meter.
See the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for details on the logs available in
the A1800 ALPHA meter.
For A3 ALPHA meters FW v4.4 or higher, the Logs component includes the
following additional options:
24. Components
• Enable or disable phase outage (loss and restoration)

• configuring phase loss time (range of 0 to 545 seconds)
• configuring phase restoration time (range of 0 to 545 seconds)
• logs the following events:
• Phase A Voltage Not Active
• Phase A Voltage Active
• Phase B Voltage Not Active
• Phase B Voltage Active
• Phase C Voltage Not Active
• Phase C Voltage Active
24. Components
Figure 24-187. Logs - A3 ALPHA meter

24. Components
Figure 24-188. Logs - A1800 ALPHA meter
To set log file parameters:
1. Select an existing Logs component from the drop list.

— OR —
2. For each log, type or select the maximum number of entries for each log:
a. Event Log (value range of 0-255) - see “Event Log Data view” on page 246
Note: If Event Log is equal to zero (0) Event Log Contents will appear
disabled (that is, uneditable).
b. History Log (value range of 0-255) - see “History Log Data view” on
page 252
Note: Some meters may not support recording all history log events.
See the meter’s technical manual for the logging capabilities of
a particular meter.
c. Sag Log (value range of 0-255) - see “PQM/Sag Log Data view” on
page 276
d. PQM Log (value range of 40-255) - see “PQM/Sag Log Data view” on
page 276
24. Components
CAUTION: Load profile storage capacity may be reduced by 1 or more

days as a result of the log settings since log information and
data sets share the meter’s memory.
Note: A value of 0 disables the logging.

Note: After the maximum number of log entries have been stored, the
meter will begin overwriting the oldest entries.
3. Type in the number of Self Reads to be collected (from 0 to 15 for the A3
ALPHA meter and 0 to 35 for the A1800 ALPHA meter). See “Self Reads view”
on page 292.
Note: When the maximum number of self reads has been stored, the
meter will begin overwriting the oldest self read entries.
4. Check to enable the events to be recorded in the Event Log Contents:
a. Demand Reset
b. Power Fail (before and after)
c. Time Change (before and after)
d. Test Mode (start and stop)
5. For A3 ALPHA meters FW v4.4 or higher:
a. Check to enable logging of Phase Outage (Loss and Restoration).
b. Enter the number of seconds for the Phase Loss Time (range 0 - 545) to
set the length of time the phase is missing before it is logged.
c. Enter the number of seconds for the Phase Restoration Time (range of 0 -
545) to set the length of time the phase is restored before it is logged.
6. For the A1800 ALPHA meter, the checking following additional events allows
the events to be recorded in the event log and generates a Warning (see
“Status view” on page 302):
a. Phase Outage (loss and restoration)
• If enabled, enter the Phase Loss Time (the time a phase must be
missing before the phase loss event is logged in the event log (0-545
seconds)).
• If enabled, enter the Phase Restoration Time (the time a phase must be
restored before the phase restoration event is logged in the event log
(0-545 seconds)).
b. Terminal Cover Removal Detection
• If enabled, enter the Terminal Cover Tamper Exclusion time (the time
that must elapse before the event is logged as a possible tamper event
(0-255 minutes)).
c. Main Cover Opening Detection
• If enabled, enter the Main Cover Opening Tamper Exclusion - the time
that must elapse before the event is logged as a possible tamper event
(0-255 minutes).
Metering component
The Metering component is composed of the following:
24. Components
Quantities subcomponent
The Quantities component allows you to set metering quantities for a
programmed meter.
A3 ALPHA meter
Note: The A3 ALPHA meter with Advanced Metering enabled can
support up to 6 metered quantities and 2 power factor
calculations.

24. Components
To set metering quantities parameters in an A3 ALPHA meter:
1. Select the appropriate Metering Quantities for the meter type.

D or T R K Q1
select one of the following: select up to two2 of the select up to two2 of select up to two2
kWh–Del (delivered (Del)) following: the following: of the following:
kWh–Rec (received (Rec)) kWh-Del kWh-Del kWh-Del
kWh-Sum kWh-Rec kWh-Rec kWh-Rec
kWh–Net kWh-Sum kWh-Sum kWh-Sum
kWh-Net kWh-Net kWh-Net
kVARh-Del kVAh-Del kQh-Del
kVARh-Rec kVAh-Rec kQh-Rec
kVARh-Sum kVAh-Sum kQh-Sum
kVARh-Net kVAh-Net
kVAh-Del
kVAh-Rec four quadrant
kVAh-Sum metering
kVARh-Q1+Q4
four quadrant metering kVARh-Q2+Q3
kVARh-Q1
kVARh-Q2
kVARh-Q3
kVARh-Q4
kVARh-Q1+Q4
kVARh-Q2+Q3
kVAh-Q1
kVAh-Q2
kVAh-Q3
kVAh-Q4
1. Q metering is supported by the A3 ALPHA meter only.

2. For the Advanced Metering option, up to six quantities may be selected.
2. Check to specify which quantities will be used for Load Control and
Overload Thresholds triggers.
3. Check Configure for the ‘Advanced Metering’ option to configure for
additional metering quantities, power factors, and Coincident
measurements.
Note: Advanced metering is only available for meters with this
capability. If an attempt is made to program a meter that has
advanced metering disabled with a Quantities component with
Advanced Metering enabled, the Program function will fail.
4. If needed, select the source for average power factor calculations (if
metered quantities include one of the following quantity sets: kWh and kVAh
or kWh and kVARh) (maximum of two values).
Any of the following combinations of metering quantities can be used to
calculate average power factor:
kWh-Del and kVAh-Del kWh-Sum and kVAh-Sum

kWh-Rec and kVARh-(Q2+Q3) kWh-Del and kVARh-Del
kWh-Del and kVARh-Q1 kWh-Del and kVARh-Q4
kWh-Del and kVAh-Q1 kWh-Del and kVAh-Q4
kWh-Sum and kVARh-Sum kWh-Rec and kVAh-Rec
kWh-Del and kVARh-(Q1+Q4) kWh-Rec and kVARh-Rec
kWh-Rec and kVARh-Q2 kWh-Rec and kVARh-Q3
kWh-Rec and kVAh-Q2 kWh-Rec and kVAh-Q3
Note: Average Power Factor is not supported by Q power meters.

24. Components
5. If needed, select to measure Coincident value at the time of maximum

quantity (for example, kW-Del at the time of maximum kVAR-Del) (maximum
of four values).
A1800 ALPHA meter

Note: The A1800 ALPHA meter with Advanced Metering enabled can
support up to 8 metered quantities.
To set metering quantities parameters in an A1800 ALPHA meter:

1. Check Configure for the ‘Advanced Metering’ option to configure for
additional metering quantities, power factors, and Coincident
measurements.
Note: Advanced metering is only available for meters with this
capability. If an attempt is made to program a meter that has
advanced metering disabled with a Quantities component with
Advanced Metering enabled, the Program function will fail.
24. Components
2. Drag and drop the appropriate Summations for the meter type:.
D or T R K
select one of the following: select up to three2 of the select up to three2 of
kWh–Del (delivered (Del)) following: the following:
kWh–Rec (received (Rec)) kWh-Del kWh-Del
kWh-Sum kWh-Rec kWh-Rec
kWh–Net kWh-Sum kWh-Sum
kWh-Net kWh-Net
kVARh-Del kVAh-Del
kVARh-Rec kVAh-Rec
kVARh-Sum kVAh-Sum
kVARh-Net kVAh-Net
kVAh-Del
kVAh-Rec four quadrant metering
kVAh-Sum kVARh-Q1+Q4
kVARh-Q2+Q3
four quadrant metering
kVARh-Q1+Q4
kVARh-Q2+Q3
kVARh-Q1
kVARh-Q2
kVARh-Q3
kVARh-Q4
kVAh-Q1
kVAh-Q2
kVAh-Q3
kVAh-Q4
kVARh-(Q1-Q4)1
kVARh-(Q2-Q3)1
kVARh-(Q3-Q2)1
1. Quantity does not have a corresponding demand.

2. For the Advanced Metering option, up to eight quantities may be selected.
Note: The Demand quantities are automatically determined by the

selected summations.
3. Check to specify which demand quantities will be used for Load Control and
Overload Thresholds triggers.
4. If needed, select the drag and drop the power factor quantities.
Note: The summation quantities required for a Power Factor (PF)
calculation need to be added before the Power Factor quantity
can de added. For example KWh-Del and KVA-Del must be
added in the 'Summations and Power Factor' pane before the
PF quantity 'KW-Del and kVA-Del' can be added.
24. Components
Any of the following combinations of metering quantities can be used to

calculate power factor based on meter type:
R K
kW-Del and kVA-Del kW-Del and kVA-Del
kW-Del and kVA-Q1 kW-Del and kVAR-(Q1+Q4)
kW-Del and kVAR-Q1 kW-Rec and kVAR-(Q2+Q3)
kW-Del and kVA-Q4 kW-Rec and kVA-Rec
kW-Del and kVAR-(Q1+Q4) kW-Sum and kVA-Sum
kW-Del and kVAR-Del
kW-Rec and kVAR-(Q2+Q3)
kW-Sum and kVAR-Sum
kW-Rec and kVAR-Q2
kW-Rec and kVA-Q2
kW-Sum and kVA-Sum
kW-Del and kVAR-Q4
kW-Rec and kVA-Rec
kW-Rec and kVAR-Rec
kW-Rec and kVAR-Q3
kW-Rec and kVA-Q3
5. If needed, drag and drop the selected demand quantities from the
Demands pane to the appropriate place in the Coincidents pane to
measure the coincident value at the time of the maximum quantity (for
example, kW-Del at the time of maximum kVAR-Del) (maximum of four
values).
Display subcomponent
The Display component allows you to configure the display items for a meter’s
LCD (see “Grouping display items” on page 436 for a listing of available display
items for the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters). Display options include the
hold time, warnings, sequence of quantity IDs and data values. Metercat allows
you to configure up to a total of 64 display items on a meter’s LCD for the normal,
alternate and test modes of the meter’s operation.
To configure the Display subcomponent for Wireless WIC status information, see
“Adding the W-WIC display item” on page 584.
Control tab - A3 ALPHA meter

The Control tab allows you to configure the format of the meter’s display of data
and dates on the LCD. Also see “Control tab - A1800 ALPHA meter” on page 429.
24. Components
Figure 24-191. Display, Control tab - A3 ALPHA meter
To set Control tab parameters:
1. Type a Hold Time value in the range of 1 to 15 seconds.

2. For Demand Values, set the following format options for the meter’s LCD:
a. Decimal Location - maximum of 4 digits to the right of the decimal; default
=2
b. Display Digits - 3 to 6 digits; default = 5
c. Display Units - Unity (ones), Kilo (thousands), Mega (hundred thousands)
(default = Kilo)
3. For Energy Values, set the following format options for the meter’s LCD:
a. Decimal Location - maximum of 4 digits to the right of the decimal (default
= 0)
b. Display Digits - 3 to 6 digits (default = 5)
Note: If you are collecting Net quantities and expect negative values,
you should set Display Digits to 5 or less digits.
c. Display Units - Unity (ones), Kilo (thousands), Mega (millions) (default =
Kilo)
4. For Display Labels (Annunciators) check to show display labels (for example,
the A3 ALPHA meter power/energy unit identifier and display identifiers) on
the meter’s LCD during the following modes:
a. Normal List
b. Alternate List
24. Components
c. Test List
Note: See “A3 ALPHA Meter” on page 554 for details on the meter
LCD.
5. Check Show Leading Zeros on Metered Quantities to show leading zeroes
on display quantities.
6. For Display Previous Billing Data select one of the following:
a. Only if present - quantity will not display until a demand reset occurs at
which time the previous billing data will display
b. Always - quantity will display as zero until a demand reset occurs at
Note: This setting is valid only if a previous billing quantity is included
in the display list.
7. For Display Previous Season Data select one of the following:
a. Only if present - quantity will not display until a demand reset occurs at
b. Always - quantity will display as zero until a demand reset occurs at
Note: This setting is valid only if a previous season quantity is included
8. For Date Format select one of the following:
a. Day-Month-Year - (dd.MM.yy)
b. Month-Day-Year - (MM.dd.yy)
c. Year-Month-Day - (yy.MM.dd)
Control tab - A1800 ALPHA meter

The Control tab allows you to configure the format of the meter’s display of data
and dates on the LCD. Also see “Control tab - A3 ALPHA meter” on page 427.
24. Components
Figure 24-192. Display, Control tab - A1800 ALPHA meter
To set Control tab parameters:
1. Type a Hold Time value in the range of 1 to 15 seconds.

2. For Demand Values, set the following format options for the metered
quantities on the LCD:
= 2)
b. Display Digits - 3 to 8 digits; (default = 5)
Kilo)
3. For Energy Values, set the following format options for the meter’s LCD:
= 0)
b. Display Digits - 3 to 8 digits (default = 5)
Note: If you are collecting Net quantities and expect negative values,
you should set Display Digits to 6 or less digits.
Kilo)
24. Components
4. For Display Labels (Annunciators) check to show display labels (for example,
the A1800 ALPHA meter power/energy unit identifier and display identifiers)
on the meter’s LCD during the following modes:
a. Normal List
b. Alternate List
c. Test List
Note: See “A1800 ALPHA Meter” on page 555 for details on the meter
LCD.
5. Select the Read without Power Idle Timeout (range of - to 255 minutes; 0
disables Read without Power; default is 0 minutes).
Note: Idle Timeout will only be programmed into an A1800 ALPHA
meter with firmware version 3.0 or higher and with Read
without Power functionality (including the internal Read without
Power battery).
6. Check to Configure ALL Instrumentation Quantities as Primary to display all
instrumentation quantities multiplied by the transformer ratios (that is,
voltage quantities will be multiplied by the voltage transformer (VT) ratio;
current quantities will be multiplied by the current transformer (CT) ratio; and
power quantities will be multiplied by the transformer factor).
7. Select the Number of self reads to loop through on the meter’s LCD when in
Display mode (range of 0 to 35).
8. Check Show Leading Zeros on Metered Quantities to show leading zeroes
on display quantities.
9. For Display Previous Billing Data select one of the following:
a. Always - quantity will display as zero until a demand reset occurs at
b. Only if present - quantity will not display until a demand reset occurs at
Note: This setting is valid only if a previous billing quantity is included
10.For Display Previous Season Data select one of the following:
a. Always - quantity will display as zero until a demand reset occurs at
b. Only if present - quantity will not display until a demand reset occurs at
Note: This setting is valid only if a previous season quantity is included
11. For Date Format select one of the following:
a. Day-Month-Year - (dd.MM.yy)
b. Month-Day-Year - (MM.dd.yy)
c. Year-Month-Day - (yy.MM.dd)
12.Select the type of Self Read Annunciator Numbering:
a. Annual - labels the self read with the number of the month (01-12)
b. Rolling -labels the self read with the number of months in the past (for
example, 01 means last month, 06 means six months past, etc.)
Note: Demand only A1800 ALPHA meters only use Rolling numbering
for self reads.
24. Components
Warnings tab
The Warnings tab allows you to set the meter’s liquid crystal display (LCD) to
display selected warnings. See Appendix E, “Meter Events, Errors & Warnings” for
details on the events, errors, and warning reported by Metercat and see the A3
ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2190) and the A1800 ALPHA Meter
Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for details on the events, errors, and warnings
reported by the meter.
Unless specified otherwise, A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter warnings are
appended to the display list and are cleared when the condition no longer exists.
Metercat allows you to configure the meter so that all warnings are locked on the
display or appear on the display as Er3 30000 errors. This provides an
immediate visual cue that an abnormal condition occurred with the meter. You
can also specify that only specific warning conditions lock the display.

24. Components
To set warnings parameters:
1. Select the Warnings tab.

2. Check to Lock all warnings on the display using defined warning codes to
have all warning codes lock on the meter’s LCD.
3. Check to have the meter Display warning if reverse power flow detected.
4. Select which Warnings should lock the display as error Er3 300000 to
provide an LCD alert to possible problems that may affect meter operation:
• Click Check All to enable all warnings to be displayed on the meter’s LCD;
or, click Uncheck All to have no warnings display on the meter’s LCD.
• Check those warnings you wish displayed.
5. For A1800 ALPHA meters, select the following warnings if appropriate:
• Read Without Power Mode Active warning
• Read Without Power Battery Discharged warning
Note: Read without Power warnings will only be programmed into an
A1800 ALPHA meter with firmware version 3.0 or higher and
with Read without Power functionality (including the internal
Read without Power battery).
24. Components
Selecting Display Items

The Normal tab, Alternate tab, and Test tab allow you to configure those items
which will display on the meter’s LCD during the corresponding display modes
(Normal, Alternate, and Test, respectively).
Displaying Extended Display Items

The A3 ALPHA meter’s display quantity can display up to 6 characters at one time;
the A1800 ALPHA meter’s display quantity can display up to 8 characters. See
Appendix C, “Displayable Characters” for details.
Certain display items (such as, Account, Meter ID, and REX LAN ID) can exceed the
character limit of the display. To display these items on the LCD you must include
all of the multiple display items (selected from the Displayable Items listing) as
part of the display list. Meter ID and Account ID have four display list items and
REX LAN ID has two display list items.
For example, the Meter ID can be up to 20 characters long (for example,

21654321654321654321). To show the full 20 characters on the meter’s LCD, you
would need to select the following display items in this order:
Meter ID segment A3 ALPHA A1800 ALPHA

Account ID segment (# characters) (# characters)
#1 2 4
#2 6 8
#3 6 8
#4 6 N/A
24. Components
Figure 24-195. Metercat > Display list
Displaying Last Nine Characters of Meter ID

Some utilities may prefer to display the last nine characters of the Meter ID (Site ID
#2). Including Meter ID:Last 9 Characters in the Display List will cause the meter
LCD to display the meter ID on the LCD in both the display quantity and quantity
identifier fields as illustrated in the figure below.
Note: You cannot specify a Display ID for Meter ID:Last 9 Characters.
Displaying EnergyAxis errors and statuses

To display EA_Gatekeeper errors and status messages on the A3 ALPHA meter
LCD (see Appendix E, “Meter Events, Errors & Warnings”) you must include the
EnergyAxis items EA_Gatekeeper/EA_NIC Errors and EA_Gatekeeper/EA_NIC
Status in the display list. The 3 digit Display ID you enter as part of the display item
will appear on the LCD’s quantity identifier region (for example, iii-000001 for
Clock Error where iii is the Display ID).
Displaying special display items

To allow meters to display the status of third party option boards, Metercat users
can include one or more of the Special Display Item (1-5) in the display list and
enter an appropriate Display ID. You can enter the following characters in the
Display ID:
A1800 ALPHA meter A3 ALPHA meter

any alphanumeric or special character any numeric character
24. Components

maximum of 7 characters maximum of 3 characters
decimals cannot appear in the first or the last no decimals
position
will appear right justified and in all capital will appear right justified
letters
Grouping display items

To help you select display items for the LCD, you can drag-and-drop column
header buttons up into the gray area above the table. Using this technique, you
can view displayable items by category and subcategory as shown in the
following table.
Category Subcategory/Item
Current Billing Metered quantity measurements (includes Total, Maximum,
Maximum Date, Maximum Time, Cumulative) for:
• Total
• Rate A
• Rate B
• Rate C
• Rate D
• Present Interval
• Previous Interval
Identification Account (3 or 4 entries depending on meter family)
Meter ID (3 or 4 entries depending on meter family)
Meter Family
Firmware Product, Version, Revision
Hardware Version, Revision
DSP Code, Revision
Custom Display Strings 1 and 2
Meter Programmer ID
Complete LCD Test
Meter ID:Last 9 Characters
Instrumentation quantities on the A1800 ALPHA meter LCD will appear as follows: for
secondary metering, units will be Kilo (thousands) with a nnn.nnn format; for primary
metering, units will be Mega (millions) with a nnnn.nnnn format.
Note: If secondary metering, voltage and current will be Unity (ones) with a nnn.n
format; if primary metering, voltage and current will be Kilo (thousands) with a
nnn.nnn format.
Note: Metercat does not multiply instrumentation profiling values by transformer ratios
for displaying, reporting, or exporting purposes.
24. Components
Instrumentation System kW
System VA (arithmetic)
System PF (arithmetic)
System PF Angle (arithmetic)
System VAR (arithmetic)
System VA (vectorial)
System PF (vectorial)
System PF Angle (vectorial)
System VAR (vectorial)
Line Frequency
Service Voltage Test
Service Current Test
System Service Type
per phase (A, B, C) measurements for the following:
• Voltage
• Current
• Power Factor
• Power Factor Angle
• Voltage Phase Angle
• Current Phase Angle
• kW
• kVAR
• kVA
• Voltage% THD
• Current % THD
• TDD
• Fundamental Voltage
• Fundamental Current
• 2nd Harm. Voltage Mag.
• 2nd Harm. Current Mag.
• 2nd Harm. Voltage %
• Harm. Current (2nd-15th)
Self Read Metered quantity measurements (includes Total, Maximum,
• Total
• Rate A
• Rate B
• Rate C
• Rate D
Meter Configuration Program ID
Pulse Ratio
VT Ratio
CT Ratio
Demand Interval - Normal Mode
Demand Interval - Test Mode
Wh per pulse
Meter Kh
Transformer Factor
External Multiplier
Demand Overload Value
Previous Billing Metered quantity measurements (includes Total, Maximum,
• Total
• Rate A
• Rate B
• Rate C
• Rate D
24. Components
Previous Season Metered quantity measurements (includes Total, Maximum,
• Total
• Rate A
• Rate B
• Rate C
• Rate D
EnergyAxis Items ILC/ILN Errors
(A3 ALPHA meter only) ILC/ILN Status
LAN ID (2 entries)
EnergyAxis Utility ID
ILC Number of Nodes
ILC Number of Repeaters
LAN Registration Information
Status Comm Session Count-Port 1
Comm Session Count-Port 2/Optical
Days since reset
Days since input pulse
Demand Resets (Manual)
Demand Resets (All)
Power Outage Count
ALPHA initial Remote Baud Port 1
ALPHA initial Remote Baud Port 2
Transformer Loss Comp(ensation) Status
PQM Status (On/Off)
Outage Log
Program Change Date-Port 1
Program Change Date-Port 2/Optical
Last Elster Configuration Change Date
Demand Reset Date
Configuration change date
End Power out date
End Power out time
Start Power out date
Start Power out time
Present date
Present time
Date of last pending table activation
Errors? ((Yes/No) (A3 ALPHA meter only)
Warnings? (Yes/No) (A3 ALPHA meter only)
Time Left Interval
Present Day of Week
Present season
Pulse count for quantity (VA, Wh, etc.)-Del
Pulse count for quantity (VA, Wh, etc.)-Rec
Self Read Date
Effective Date for Rates/Special Dates
Number of Write Sessions-Port 1
Number of Write Sessions-Port 2/Optical
Special Display Items (1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
24. Components
Figure 24-196. Display items - grouped
• Clicking on the + button will expand the view so that you can easily select
the display item to add to the Display List.
Selecting display items

To set display mode parameters for Normal, Alternate and Test modes:
1. To add an item to the meter display:

a. Select a display item from the Displayable Items list.
Note: Comm Session Count-Port 2/Optical, Program Change Date-
Port 2/Optical, Number of Write Sessions-Port 2/Optical values
include both port 2 and optical port activity.
Note: Demand Resets (Manual) includes both button press and
communication-initiated demand resets; Demand Resets (All)
includes the manual demand resets plus any meter-initiated
calendar demand resets.
b. Click Add to move the selected item to the Display List (those items
selected to display on the meter’s LCD.
Note: The counter in the lower right of the window increments with
each added display item.
24. Components
Figure 24-197. Display - item selected
2. To remove an item from the meter display:

a. Select a display item from the Display List.
b. Click Remove to remove the item.
3. To edit an item’s Display ID, double click in the text box and type the number
(the value will appear in the quantity identifier on the meter’s LCD to indicate
which display item is currently displayed).
Depending on the meter family, the quantity identifier (Display ID) and
display quantity will appear as follows:
quantity identifier (Display ID)
any alphanumeric or special character any numeric character
maximum of 7 characters maximum of 3 characters
decimals cannot appear in the first or the last no decimals
position
will appear right justified will appear right justified
• 5 alphanumeric characters plus decimals
(for self read items)
• 7 alphanumeric characters plus decimals
(for non-self read items)
display quantity
up to 8 alphanumeric characters up to 6 alphanumeric characters
24. Components
See Appendix C, “Displayable Characters” for details on usable characters.

Note: You can use the Meter IDs, Account IDs, and Custom Display
Strings 1 and 2 (1 item each) to display alphanumeric strings
(Display ID) in the display quantity on the meter LCD. See “Setting
site ID labels” on page 44 for details on redefining Meter ID and
Account labels.
See “Program task” on page 134 for details on setting Meter ID and Account
values and “Properties tab” on page 401 for details on setting custom
display string values.
4. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move selected items up or
down in the display list; the list specifies the order that items will appear on
the meter’s display.
A set of counters next to the Display List indicates the number of display list
items by mode and the total of display items and the available number of
display items.
Interval Data Configuration subcomponent

The Interval Data Configuration component allows you to configure pulse data in
the meter.
Figure 24-198. Internal Data Configuration subcomponent

24. Components
To configure interval data:
1. Select the Interval Data Configuration component.

2. For A1800 ALPHA meters with firmware version 1.8 or higher, select the Load
Profile Mode:
• Pulses
• Engineering Units (kWh)
• Cumulative Engineering Units (kWh)
Note: If you select Cumulative Engineering Units, the list of selectable
quantities is dependent on the configured metering quantities.
See “Quantities subcomponent” on page 423 for details.
3. Select one of the following Days of Storage settings:
Note: The number of days of Load Profile data that can be stored in
the meter is affected by all of the following settings: number of
channels of Load Profile (quantities to record), number of self
reads that can be stored in the meter, and the other Log
component settings (see the “Logs component” on page 418).
a. Maximize to retain recorded interval data for the maximum number of
days (determined by the meter when the program is loaded). The function
completion report will state the number of days that were actually
programmed into the meter based on the available memory at the time
of programming.
b. Number of days and then type the number of days that interval data is
stored in the meter (range of 0 to 999).
Note: If you set Number of days to zero (0), pulse data is not recorded.
4. Select the Interval length (in minutes) (values - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15
[default], 20, 30, 60).
Note: Interval length and the pulse divisor are also used for the A1800
ALPHA meter’s two test light emitting diodes (LEDs) for active
and reactive energy.
5. Type in the value for the Pulse Divisor (range of 1 [default] to 255).
24. Components
6. Select the Quantities to record from the drop list. Repeat for all needed
quantities.
A3T A3R A3K A3Q
kWh–Del (delivered (Del)) kWh-Del kWh-Del kWh-Del
kWh–Rec (received (Rec)) kWh-Rec kWh-Rec kWh-Rec
kWh-Sum kWh-Sum kWh-Sum kWh-Sum
kWh–Net kWh-Net kWh-Net kWh-Net
kVARh-Del, kVAh-Del kQh-Del
kVARh-Rec, kVAh-Rec kQh-Rec
kVARh-Sum kVAh-Sum kQh-Sum
kVARh-Net kVAh-Net
kVAh-Del
kVAh-Rec four quadrant
kVAh-Sum metering
kVARh-Q1+Q4
four quadrant metering kVARh-Q2+Q3
kVARh-Q1
kVARh-Q2
kVARh-Q3
kVARh-Q4
kVARh-Q1+Q4
kVARh-Q2+Q3
kVAh-Q1
kVAh-Q2
kVAh-Q3
kVAh-Q4
PQM component
The PQM component allows you to set parameters and thresholds for the voltage
sag test as well as configure parameters for each of the enumerated PQM tests
contained in the selected PQM test set. Metercat supports the following test sets:
Supported meter family

Test set name Test No.
A3 ALPHA A1800 ALPHA
Default Elster PQM Test Set Tests 0 - 12 Y Y
Enhanced PQM1/TRueQ2 Test Set Tests 0 - 24 N Y
EN 50160 PQM1/TRueQ2 Test Set Tests 0 - 7 N Y3
IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test Set Tests 0 - 13 Y4 N
1. English (ANSI)
2. English (IEC)
3. A1800 ALPHA meters FW 4.0 or higher.
4. A3 ALPHA meters FW 4.0 or higher.
An additional test set for A3 ALPHA meters FW 4.0 and higher, IEEE Voltage
Imbalance, adds an additional test, Test 13, that measure voltage imbalance
based on the IEEE standard.
Depending on the Language1 selected for Metercat, the Enhanced TRueQ Test Set
[Help > Language > English (IEC)] may be seen as the Enhanced PQM Test Set
[Help > Language > English (ANSI)].
1. Metercat’s Language support must be installed.

24. Components
Note: If your meter installation supports both A3 ALPHA and

A1800 ALPHA meters, you can create a PQM component for the
A3 ALPHA meter using an A1800 ALPHA meter test set.
However, when you attempt to program the meter with the
PQM component, the task will fail with the following message:
‘An error occurred while processing the task. PQM Set ‘Test Set
name’ supports only A1800 ALPHA meters.’
Note: The PQM component can be configured in a meter regardless
of the Alpha Key PQM setting.
information on overriding this component and “Edit PQM Thresholds task” on
page 126 for information on changing PQM test settings.
To run PQM tests the meter must meet the following requirements:
1. Power Quality Monitoring Alpha Key: ENABLED, (see the “Status view” on
page 302).
2. PQM ON is checked on the PQM component.
— OR —
PQM is turned ON by executing the Turn PQM ON/OFF task (see “Turn PQM
ON/OFF task” on page 175).
3. The meter’s service is locked.
The table below shows the effect of executing a Turn PQM ON/OFF task on a
meter with the indicated PQM component PQM ON and PQM Alpha Key
settings.
PQM PQM component PQM ON/OFF task
Result
Alpha Key PQM ON executed
ENABLED ON (checked) ON Specified PQM tests will run.
OFF (unchecked) ON Specified PQM tests will run.
ON OFF Specified PQM tests will not run.
OFF OFF Specified PQM tests will not run.
disabled ON ON Specified PQM tests will not run.
OFF ON Specified PQM tests will not run.
ON OFF Specified PQM tests will not run.
OFF OFF Specified PQM tests will not run.
Note: The PQM component of a meter can be configured regardless

of the status of the PQM Alpha Key. For a meter with PQM Alpha
Key disabled, configured PQM tests will not run.
The Set Version and PQM Version are displayed to the right of the PQM Set drop
list (for example, Set Version 03.0 PQM Version 03.0 for IEEE Voltage Imbalance
Test Set).
24. Components
Please use one of the following sample PQM components to create the
appropriate PQM component using File > New > Component as Copy:
Sample PQM - Transformer-Rated (for transformer-rated meters)
Sample PQM - Self-Contained (for self-contained meters)
These sample components are identical except for test 7. Second Harmonic
Current Test which can be configured for either a transformer-rated or a self-
contained meter.
On a meter that has the PQM Alpha Key ENABLED, to configure PQM testing:
• Check PQM ON to configure the meter to test power quality.

Note: If PQM ON is not checked none of the enumerated tests will run
(regardless of the Run the Specified PQM Test setting). You can
also use the Turn PQM ON/OFF task to turn PQM testing on or
off. See “Turn PQM ON/OFF task” on page 175 for details.
Note: PQM ON status does not affect the Voltage Sag Test. This test is
always running.
PQM testing in the meter

When a meter runs the PQM tests, the tests are continuously executed in
sequence (1, 2, 3, etc.). The frequency of the test cycle depends on the number of
enumerated tests that are enabled (that is, Run the Specified PQM Test is
checked). On meters with PQM, the Voltage Sag Test is always enabled and runs
every 2 line cycles on each phase.
When the test fails, the following information is recorded in the PQM log:
• instrumentation value of the phase at the moment of occurrence

• instrumentation value of the phase at the moment of recovery
The PQM Status view records the following information for each PQM test failure:
• total number of the events

• accumulated duration of the events
Note: Some of the PQM tests take longer to run than other tests.
PQM and Sag Logs and statuses

For meters with PQM enabled, the Voltage Sag Test is always enabled and
running regardless of the PQM ON/OFF setting and the voltage sag log and
status information will always be available (see “PQM/Sag Log Data view” on
page 276 and “PQM/Sag Status view” on page 279).
For each enumerated PQM test, an event occurring on one phase or across
multiple phases is counted as a single event. The voltage sag test records
counters and timers for each phase.
The PQM log displays all PQM events only if Record Test Failures in PQM Log is
checked for the enumerated test. Meters with TOU capability will also record the
date and time of any PQM failures.
See “Clear PQM Data task” on page 119 and “Replace PQM task” on page 144 for
details on clearing the PQM log and statuses and the Sag log and statuses.
24. Components
PQM tests
See the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2190 or TM42-2195 [Canada])
or the A1800 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2410, TM42-2411,[ADWEA] or
TM42-2415 [MENA]) for more information on PQM and TRueQ tests.
Note: Metercat supports one PQM Test Set, Default Elster PQM Test Set,
for the A3 ALPHA meter. Metercat supports two PQM Test Sets,
Default Elster PQM Test Set and the Enhanced TRueQ Test Set, for
the A1800 ALPHA meter.
Note: Metercat attempts to set PQM thresholds to those values you
enter but because of the meter’s data formatting Metercat may
need to round (either up or down) the thresholds to the nearest
value entered. Therefore, when you read a meter, the threshold
values may be slightly different from those values you entered
in the program.
The default PQM test set consists of the following tests:
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA A3 ALPHA meter A1800 ALPHA meter A1800 ALPHA meter1
meters
Default Elster PQM Test Set IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test Set Enhanced TRueQ Test Set EN 50160 PQM Test Set
Voltage Sag Test Voltage Sag Test Voltage Sag Test Voltage Sag Test
1. Service Voltage Test 1. Service Voltage Test 1. Service Voltage Test 1. Voltage Interruptions Test
2. Low Voltage Test 2. Low Voltage Test 2. Low Voltage Test 2. Rapid Voltage Changes Test
3. High Voltage Test 3. High Voltage Test 3. High Voltage Test 3. Frequency Changes 1
4. Reverse Power Test & PF 4. Reverse Power Test & PF 4. Reverse Power Test & PF 4. Frequency Changes 2
5. Low Current Test 5. Low Current Test 5. Low Current Test 5. Service Voltage Test
6. Power Factor Test 6. Power Factor Test 6. Power Factor Test 6. Total Harmonic Distortion
Current (%)
7. Second Harmonic Current Test 7. Second Harmonic Current 7. Second Harmonic Current 7. Total Harmonic Distortion
Test Test Voltage (%)
8. Total Harmonic Distortion 8. Total Harmonic Distortion 8. Total Harmonic Distortion
Current Test Current Test Current Test
9. Total Harmonic Distortion 9. Total Harmonic Distortion 9. Total Harmonic Distortion
Voltage Test Voltage Test Voltage Test
10. Voltage Imbalance Test 10. Voltage Imbalance Test 10. Voltage Imbalance Test
11. Current Imbalance Test 11. Current Imbalance Test 11. Current Imbalance Test
12. Total Demand Distortion Test 12. Total Demand Distortion Test 12. Total Demand Distortion
Test
13. IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test 13. Low Voltage Phase A Test
19. Low Voltage with High
Current Phase A Test
Current Phase B Test
24. Components
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA A3 ALPHA meter A1800 ALPHA meter A1800 ALPHA meter1
meters
Default Elster PQM Test Set IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test Set Enhanced TRueQ Test Set EN 50160 PQM Test Set
Current Phase C Test
22. Current Missing Phase A
Test
23. Current Missing Phase B
Test
24. Current Missing Phase C
Test
1. A1800 ALPHA meter FW 4.0 or higher.
Configuring PQM testing

Note: PQM testing can be configured in the meter even though the
PQM Alpha Key is disabled but the PQM tests will not run.
For each of the enumerated tests, you can specify the following test options:
Run the Specified PQM Test • If checked, the PQM test will run.
Note: If PQM ON is not checked, the specified test
will not run even though Run the Specified
PQM Test is checked.
Record Test Failures in PQM Log • If checked, PQM test failures will be logged to the
PQM Log.
• If unchecked, test does not store values in the PQM
log.
Trigger PQM Warning • If checked, the PQM test failure will cause the
meter’s LCD to display the warning code F2
020000.
• If unchecked, the PQM test failure
Note: To enable alarm calls for PQM test failure, you
must check Trigger PQM Warning. See “Alarms
tab” on page 480 for details on enabling
alarm calls.
Qualification Time Enter a time (in minutes and seconds from 00:00 to
60:00). If the test failure lasts longer than this time:
• and PQM logging is checked, the test failure is
logged (see “PQM/Sag Log Data view” on
page 276)
• the cumulative counter will increase by one and
the cumulative failure timer is activated and will
run for as long as the event is detected (see “PQM/
Sag Status view” on page 279).
Voltage Sag Test

When the Phase Indicator Threshold is exceeded, the phase indicators on the
meter’s LCD will blink (for all affected phases) and, if alarm calling is enabled, a
call will be initiated.
Note: For meters with the PQM Alpha Key ENABLED, the Voltage Sag
Test is always ON regardless of the PQM ON/OFF setting.
24. Components
Note: The Phase Indicator Threshold used for the Voltage Sag Test is
configured in the Service Test component > Basic Settings tab.
See “Service Test component” on page 486 for details.
Note: Metercat adjusts the values entered for minimum and
maximum duration to the meter’s resolution (that is, to the
nearest multiple of 8.33 msec). For example, if you enter 35
msec for a duration, Metercat would round the value to 33
msec.
To configure the voltage sag test durations:
• enter the Minimum Duration (in milliseconds between 17 to 1500)

• enter the Maximum Duration (in milliseconds between 17 to 60000)
Note: Maximum Duration must be greater than or equal to the value
set for Minimum Duration.
Figure 24-199. PQM component
Note: When a voltage sag occurs on one or more phases, the

affected potential indicators on the meter’s LCD will blink but no
error message is shown.
1. Service Voltage Test

This test continually monitors service voltage. Voltage fluctuations outside the
programmed limits are detected and can indicate one of the following:
• improper voltage transformer operation

24. Components
• inappropriate transformer tap settings

• equipment failure
Note: Voltage thresholds used for the Service Voltage Test are
configured in the Service Test component. See “Service Test
All voltage magnitudes and phase angles must fall within the thresholds for the
locked service.
2. Low Voltage Test

This test checks the per phase voltages for values that fall below a specified
threshold (% of nominal). Each phase threshold can be set individually and can be
set at a value higher or lower than the limits selected for the service voltage test.
This test allows a more thorough study of the voltage changes.
The threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected per phase nominal

voltage and recommended to be in the range of 60% to 99.9%. The test fails if any
phase voltage drops below the threshold.
To configure the Low Voltage Test, for each phase enter a number that represents
a percentage of nominal (from 0.0 to 99.9).
3. High Voltage Test

This test checks the per phase voltages for values that exceed a specific threshold
(% of nominal). The threshold values can be set at a value higher or lower than
the limits selected for the service voltage test. This test allows a more thorough
study of the voltage changes. Thresholds are defined as a percentage of the
expected per phase nominal voltage. The test fails if any phase voltage exceeds
the threshold.
To configure the High Voltage Test, for each phase enter a number that
represents a percentage of nominal (from 100.1 to 200.0).
4. Reverse Power Test & PF

This test recognizes any condition where the current transformer may be wired
incorrectly or where meter tampering may have occurred. The power factor (PF)
threshold in this test is typically set to a very low value to detect only abnormal
conditions.
Note: All thresholds used for the Reverse Power Test & PF are
configured in the Service Test component. See “Service Test
Using the service current test definition permits independent PF settings to be set
for each service type (ABC rotation order). Each service type can have individual
leading and lagging thresholds. Testing for reverse power can only be enabled or
disabled for all phases simultaneously.
5. Low Current Test

This test checks the service current for values that fall below a specified threshold.
The test will check for erroneous operation or failure of a current transformer and
can detect signs of meter tampering. If all phase currents fall below the limit on
an initial no–load or test condition, then no warning or indication will be provided.
A warning will be issued when one or more phase currents fall below the
threshold value for the qualification time while the remaining phase currents stay
above the limits.
24. Components
Note: All thresholds used for the Low Current Test are configured in
the Service Test component. See “Service Test component” on
The threshold is defined as a percentage of the A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter
Class ampere rating from the system service test definition. This percentage is
applied on a per phase basis.
6. Power Factor Test

This test checks the power factor for any deviation beyond the programmed
threshold. This monitor may be used alone to monitor rate–based conditions or in
conjunction with the reverse power test and PF (see “4. Reverse Power Test & PF”
on page 449) monitor to provide a more thorough analysis of power factor
fluctuations.
The leading and lagging thresholds are individually defined for each phase (ABC
phase rotation order). These settings may be different than those defined in the
service current configuration (see “Service Test component” on page 486).
Note: In the case of CBA rotation order, the thresholds are reversed,
that is, the min Lagging PF value is used as the threshold for
leading power factors and the min Leading PF is used as the
threshold for lagging power factors.
To configure the Power Factor Test, for each phase enter a minimum leading (0.00
to 1.00) and lagging (0.00 to 1.00) power factor value.
Note: Input values for the Power Factor test should be based on ABC
phase rotation order. The meter will automatically adjust the
values if the service is in CBA phase rotation order.
7. Second Harmonic Current Test

This test checks for the presence of second harmonic current. The second
harmonic may be created by equipment on the line or may indicate the presence
of DC currents on the system. The threshold is defined as values in AC amperes
according to the meter class.
Please use one of the following sample PQM components to create the
appropriate PQM component using File > New > Component as Copy:
Sample PQM - Transformer-rated (for transformer-rated meters)
Sample PQM - Self-contained (for self-contained meters)
These sample components are identical except for the 7. Second Harmonic
Current Test which can be configured for either a transformer-rated or a self-
contained meter.
The table below shows suggested threshold values for different meter classes.
The test fails if any phase exceeds the threshold.
Meter Suggested threshold

class (as percentage of Class amps)
320 1.25% (4 amps)
200 1.25% (2.5 amps)
20 2.5% (0.5 amps)
24. Components
Meter Suggested threshold

class (as percentage of Class amps)
6 2.5% (0.15 amps)
2 2.5% (0.05 amps)
To prevent the monitor from creating a false alarm from legitimate second
harmonic current sources, the recommended qualification time is 15 minutes.
The default values (0.00 to 100.00) for the Second Harmonic Current Test are for a
transformer-rated meter.
8. Total Harmonic Distortion Current Test

As the load on electrical systems becomes more saturated with electronic control
devices (such as computers and communications systems), there is a growing
concern with the harmonics that these devices can contribute to the electrical
system. Total harmonic distortion (THD), expressed as a percentage of the
fundamental, is a measurement of the power quality of the circuit under these
conditions.
The total harmonic distortion current test measures per phase THD current and
can alert the utility to conditions that may be harmful or dangerous to the system
or other equipment. The threshold is defined as a percentage of the fundamental.
The test fails if any phase exceeds the threshold.
Note: Current thresholds used for the Total Harmonic Distortion

Current Test are configured in the Service Test component. See
“Service Test component” on page 486 for details.
To configure the Total Harmonic Distortion Current Test, for each phase enter a
high threshold that is a percentage of fundamental current (from 00.0 to 99.9).
9. Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage Test

As the load on electrical systems becomes more saturated with electronic control
devices (such as computers and communications systems), there is a growing
concern with the harmonics that these devices can contribute to the electrical
system. Total harmonic distortion, expressed as a percentage of the
fundamental, is a measurement of the power quality of the circuit under these
conditions.
The total harmonic distortion voltage monitor measures per phase THD voltage
and can alert the utility to conditions that may be harmful or dangerous to the
system or other equipment. The threshold is defined as a percentage of the
fundamental. The test fails if any phase exceeds the threshold.
Valid thresholds for each phase are a percentage of fundamental voltage (from
00.0 to 99.9)
10. Voltage Imbalance Test

This test checks for an imbalance between phase voltages. The test first
measures and normalizes each per phase voltage. The voltages are normalized
to account for different per phase nominal voltages as specified by the locked
service. To qualify as a failure, both of the following conditions must be exist
• the highest normalized per phase voltage must be greater than the
minimum voltage threshold
 V orV orV   minimum voltage threshold
a b c
24. Components
• the ratio of the lowest normalized per phase voltage to the highest (low/
high) must be less than the imbalance threshold
lowest per phase voltage
------------------------------------------------------------  imbalance threshold
highest per phase voltage
To configure the Voltage Imbalance Test, enter the minimum voltage threshold as
a percentage of nominal (0.00 to 100.00) and the imbalance threshold
percentage (0.00 to 100.00).
11. Current Imbalance Test

This test checks for an imbalance between phase currents. To qualify as a failure,
both of the following conditions must exist:
• the highest per phase current must be greater than the minimum current
threshold
 I a or I b or I c   minimum current threshold
• the ratio of the lowest per phase current to the highest (low/high) must be
less than the imbalance threshold
lowest per phase current
------------------------------------------------------------  imbalance threshold
highest per phase current
To configure the Current Imbalance Test, enter the minimum current threshold as
a percentage of class amps (0.00 to 100.00) and the imbalance threshold
percentage (0.00 to 100.00).
12. Total Demand Distortion Test

This test checks the per phase total demand distortion (TDD) and makes sure that
the TDD is less than the threshold. TDD measures the harmonic current distortion
on each phase in percentage of the maximum demand load current (class
amps).
Valid thresholds for each phase are a percentage of class amps (from 00.0 to
99.9).
13. IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test

Included in the IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test Set, this test checks for an imbalance
implementation according to IEEE 519-1192 standard. The voltage imbalance is
the ratio of the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage component to the
magnitude of the positive sequence voltage component, expressed in
percentage. The test fails if the imbalance value exceeds the specified threshold.
Note: IEEE voltage imbalance may only be calculated in polyphase

meters in which all three line-to-line voltages are available to
the voltage sensing blades.
To configure the IEEE Voltage Imbalance Test, enter the Imbalance Threshold
percentage range 0.00 % to 100.00 %, default 5.00 %).
13. Low Voltage Phase A Test

This test checks the voltage on the specified phase and generates a failure if the
voltage drops below the configured threshold for a duration longer than the
Qualification Time.
24. Components
The threshold is defined as a percentage of the nominal voltage and is in the

range of 0% to 99.9% (default 60%). A Qualification Time of 00:00 will record every
failure as an event.

Qualification Time.
The threshold is defined as a percentage of the nominal voltage and is in the

range of 0% to 99.9% (default 60%). A Qualification Time of 00:00 will record every
failure as an event.

Qualification Time. The threshold is defined as a percentage of the nominal
voltage and is in the range of 0% to 99.9% (default 60%). A Qualification Time of
00:00 will record every failure as an event.

voltage exceeds the configured threshold for a duration longer than the
Qualification Time.
The threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase nominal voltage

and is in the range of 100.1 % to 200.0% (default 115%).

Qualification Time.


Qualification Time.

19. Low Voltage with High Current Phase A Test

This test checks the voltage and current on the specified phase and generates a
failure if the voltage is below the configured voltage threshold and the current is
above the configured threshold and the duration of the event exceeds the
Qualification Time.
The voltage threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase nominal

voltage and can be in the range of 0.0 % to 99.9% (default 78%). The current
threshold is defined as an absolute value (in Amps) and in the range of 0.0003 A
and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A).
24. Components
20. Low Voltage with High Current Phase B Test

Qualification Time.

and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A).
21. Low Voltage with High Current Phase C Test

Qualification Time.

and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A).
22. Current Missing Phase A Test

This test checks all phase voltages and generates a failure if the following
situations occur:
• one of the phase voltages exceeds the configured phase voltage presence
threshold,
• the current on phase A drops below the configured current threshold
• the current on phases B or C exceeds the configured current threshold
• the duration of the event exceeds the Qualification Time
The voltage presence threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected
phase nominal voltage and can be in the range of 5.0 % to 100.0% (default 60%).
The Low Current Threshold is defined as an absolute value (in Amps) in the range
of 0.001 A and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A). A Qualification Time of 00:00 will
record every failure as an event.
23. Current Missing Phase B Test

situations occur:
threshold,
• the current on phase B drops below the configured current threshold
• the current on phases A or C exceeds the configured current threshold
of 0.001 A and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A).
Note: A Qualification Time of 00:00 will record every failure as an

event.
24. Components
24. Current Missing Phase C Test

situations occur:
threshold,
• the current on phase C drops below the configured current threshold
• the current on phases A or B exceeds the configured current threshold
of 0.001 A and 1000.0 A (default 0.0015 A).
Note: A Qualification Time of 00:00 will record every failure as an

event.
1. Voltage Interruptions Test

This test checks the voltage and generates a failure if the voltage drops below the
configured threshold for a duration longer than the Qualification Time.

and is in the range of 1.0 % to 90.0% (default 1 %).
2. Rapid Voltage Changes Test

This test checks the voltage and generates a failure if the voltage drops below the
configured low threshold for a duration longer than the Qualification Time or the
voltage exceeds the configured high threshold for a duration longer than the
Qualification Time.
The low threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase nominal

voltage and is in the range of 80.0 % to 99.9 % (default 95 %).
The high threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase nominal

voltage and is in the range of 100.0 % to 120.0 % (default 105.0 %).
This test checks the frequency and generates a failure if the frequency drops
below the configured low frequency threshold for a duration longer than the
Qualification Time or the frequency exceeds the configured high frequency
threshold for a duration longer than the Qualification Time.
The low frequency threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase

nominal frequency and is in the range of 85.00 % to 99.99 % (default 99.00 %).
The high frequency threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase

The Qualification time is in the range of 0 sec to 60 sec (default 0 sec).
This test checks the frequency and generates a failure if the frequency drops
below the configured low frequency threshold for a duration longer than the
Qualification Time or the frequency exceeds the configured high frequency
threshold for a duration longer than the Qualification Time.
24. Components
The low frequency threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase

The high frequency threshold is defined as a percentage of the expected phase

The Qualification time is in the range of 0 sec to 60 sec (default 0 sec).
5. Service Voltage Test

This test is the same test as the Default Elster PQM Test Set. See “1. Service Voltage
Test” on page 448 for details.
6. Total Harmonic Distortion Current (%)

This test is the same test as the Default Elster PQM Test Set. See “8. Total Harmonic
Distortion Current Test” on page 451 for details.
7. Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage (%)

This test is the same test as the Default Elster PQM Test Set. See “9. Total Harmonic
Distortion Voltage Test” on page 451 for details.
Rates component
The Rates component is composed of the following:
• Day Types subcomponent

• Switch Times subcomponent
Day Types subcomponent

The Day Types component allows you to assign day types to each day of the
week and holidays within each season. Day types have associated rate switch
times that are defined by configuring the Switch Times subcomponent.

24. Components
Figure 24-200. Day Types subcomponent
To set the day types supported by the meter:
1. Click in the appropriate table cell for the desired Season/Day Type
combination.
Note: The number and names for seasons shown are based on
settings in System Preferences (see “Configuring seasons” on
2. Select the correct Day Type (Weekday, Weekend, Holiday, or Special) from
the drop list.
By default, Monday-Friday are set as Weekdays; Saturday and Sunday are
set to Weekend; and a Holiday is set to Holiday.
Switch Times subcomponent

The Switch Times component allows you to define up to 80 (A3 ALPHA meter) or
132 (A1800 ALPHA meter) switch times for the rates that the meter will support.
The number of switch times you can configure depends on the following settings:
1. Meter family (A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA)

2. Number of Seasons:
24. Components
• defined in System Preference > Dates and Rates (“Configuring seasons”

on page 46)
• defined in the Rates > Switch Times component
3. Automatically Generate Midnight Switches settings:
• defined in System Preference > Dates and Rates > Automatically
Generate Midnight Switches for All Rates Components setting
(“Configuring seasons” on page 46)
• defined in the Switch Times component
For A3 ALPHA meters with firmware version 3.0 or higher, in the event that the
meter’s battery fails during a power outage and power is restored, the meter will
use Rate C (this value is programmed into the meter by Elster manufacturing) for
storing data.
For A3 ALPHA meters with firmware version of 3.0 or higher and all firmware
versions of the A1800 ALPHA meter, in the event that the meter’s battery fails
during a power outage and power is restored, the meter will use the Default Rate
specified in the Switch Times component for storing data.
However, If you execute the Replace Rates and Dates task with an Effective Date
that is in the future and change the Default Rate to a different value, the Power
Fail Default Rate is not changed (but the Switch Times Default Rate is changed).
The Power Fail Default Rate value can be changed only when the meter is
reprogrammed or a Replace Rates and Dates task is executed with an Effective
Date of today (that is immediately replaced).
Figure 24-201. Switch Times subcomponent

24. Components
To set the switch times in the meter:
1. Select an existing Rates component from the drop list.

— OR —
2. Select the Default Rate that will go into effect every night at midnight (A, B, C
or D).
Note: If Metercat is configured to automatically generate midnight
switch times (see “Configuring seasons” on page 46), all
season/day type combinations will use the Default Rate at
midnight unless a switch time with a different rate is specified
for a given season and day type.
3. To add a new switch time (or override the default switch time), click Add or to
change an existing switch time click in the specific table cell; select the
specific information for when the switch time should occur:
a. Select the Season from the drop list.
Note: See “Configuring seasons” on page 46 for details on setting
Season names.
Note: A switch time for a particular season is only valid if you specify
Season change to <season> in the Special Dates component.
b. Select the Day Type (Weekday, Weekend, Holiday, or Special) from the
drop list.
Note: A switch time for a particular day type is only valid if you specify
the Day Type in the Day Types subcomponent.
c. Enter the Start Time in hh:mm format (24-hour clock) and on a 5 minute
boundary (that is, mm is evenly divisible by 5).
Note: Use 00:00 for 12 AM and 12:00 for 12 PM.
d. Select the Rate (A, B, C, or D) from the drop list.
e. Select the Switch Type from the drop list:
• Energy Only
• Demand Only
• Energy and Demand - default
Note: The A3 ALPHA meter allows a maximum of 80 switch times.
However, Elster Manufacturing predefines 16 midnight switch
times (four seasons × four day types) which define the meter’s
default rate at midnight. Therefore, unless you explicitly define
the 16 midnight switch times, you can only define a maximum of
64 switch times.
Additionally, if you define more than four seasons and have

Metercat configured to automatically generate midnight switch
times (Chapter 5, “Setting system preferences”), the number of
generated switch times will be greater than 16 (number of
seasons × four day types).
4. To remove a switch time, select the row from the switch time list and click
Remove.
A set of counters next to the switch times list indicates the number of
switches created by the user, number of generated, and the total of
switches and the available number of switches (by meter family).
24. Components
Relay Options component

The Relay Options component allows you to configure the parameters for relay
option boards that may be installed on an A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter. The
standard Relay Option board supports up to six relay outputs that are supported
by 3 Wire Form C (relays A-D) and 2 Wire Form A (relays E and F).
In addition to the standard Relay Option board, special relay option boards can
be installed in A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters. The related parameters are
configured in the Special Relays tab. See “Configuring special relay options” on
page 464 for details on configuring special relays option boards.
Note: Metercat allows relay configuration in a meter even though a

relay option board is not installed.
See “Overriding program values using the Program task” on page 351 or
“Change KYZ Output task” on page 106 for information on changing values in this
component.
Configuring standard relay options

To configure relay options:
1. Select an existing Relay Options component from the drop list.

— OR —
2. Select the appropriate relay to configure (one of the sub-tabs).
3. Select the appropriate relay driver:
a. Disabled - the relay will not activate.
b. KYZ Output - the relay will activate during the selected source (kWh Del or
Rec, kVAh Del or Rec, kVARh Del or Rec, kVARh Q1, Q2, Q3 or Q4
depending on meter type).
24. Components
Figure 24-202. Relay - KYZ Output
Note: If you wish to use the KYZ Value method, you must enable KYZ
Value in System Preferences. See “Setting programming
options” on page 47 for details.
If you have selected KYZ Output as the relay driver, enter the proper
Global KYZ Relay Settings:
1) Enter the KYZ Output Divisor (KYZ Divisor) (integer in the range of 1 to
999). See “Change KYZ Output task” on page 106 for details on
changing the divisor without reprogramming the meter.
— OR —
Enter the KYZ Value or select a value from the drop list (number in the
range of 0.000001 to 100.000000).
See “KYZ pulse output relays” on page 558 for details on KYZ Divisor
and KYZ Value.
Note: If you enter a number for the KYZ Value, the number will not be
added to the default drop list (see “Setting programming
options” on page 47 for details).
2) Check to Inhibit KYZ Output During Test Mode (default is unchecked).
3) Select the Activation Type (either Toggle [default] or Pulse).
4) If you select Pulse, select the Width of the Pulse in milliseconds (in the
range of 1 - 255 milliseconds with an accuracy of 1 msec; default is 10
msec).
24. Components
Note: You will only see the KYZ Value drop list if you have enabled it in
your System Preferences. See “Setting programming options” on
c. Demand Threshold - the relay will activate when the demand exceeds
the configured threshold (see “Demand component” on page 411 for
details) and will remain activated until a full, new interval completes
without exceeding the threshold.
d. End of Interval - the relay will activate for the first five seconds following
the end of each demand subinterval.
e. Cold Load Pickup - the relay will activate while Demand Forgiveness (see
“Demand component” on page 411 for details) is in effect.
f. PQM Failure Indication - specify one or more PQM tests that will trigger
the relay - the relay will activate when any one of the specified tests fails.
Note: When a PQM failure condition is no long present, the warning
code will automatically clear and any relays will open.
Note: Metercat allows you to specify PQM tests 1 – 32 for relay
activation, however, you can only configure and turn ON PQM
tests 1 - 12. See “PQM component” on page 443 for details.
Figure 24-203. Relay - PQM Failure Indication
g. Alarm Indication - select the Errors, Warnings, and Events that will trigger
the relay.
Note: Certain alarms require manual intervention to reset the meter.
24. Components
Figure 24-204. Relay - Alarm Indication
h. Rate Indication: select the Rate that will trigger the relay (either A [default],
B, C, or D) - the relay will activate during each of the selected TOU rates
(see “Day Types subcomponent” on page 456 and “Switch Times
subcomponent” on page 457 for details).
Note: This relay will never activate for single-rate demand only
meters.
24. Components
Figure 24-205. Relay - Rate Indication
4. Click Wiring diagrams to view the wiring diagram for the associated relay.
Configuring special relay options

To configure special relay option boards like the Distribution Automation Input/
Output (DA I/O) option board, the Interrupter or Interposing1 Control option
boards:
1. Select the Special Relays tab.

2. From the Special Relay drop list, select the configuration of the special relay
option board:
• Disabled
• Interrupter Control Relay
• Interposing Control Relay
• DA I/O
1. Only for A1800 ALPHA meters.

24. Components
DA I/O
If you selected DA I/O option board:
1. For Relay 1 and Relay 2, select one of the following:
• Disabled
• Open/Close Mode
• Pulse Mode
Figure 24-206. DA I/O option board
Note: Support for the Distribution Automation Input/Output (DA I/O)

should only be enabled for meters equipped with a DA I/O
option board. A standard relay option board will not operate
with this option enabled. Only DA I/O option board relay 1
supports cold load pickup. The default relay state is used by
both output relays.
Note: The DA I/O option selection in the Special Relays tab requires a
DA I/O board installed in the meter. The DA I/O option board
has two relays and four binary inputs
2. If you selected Pulse Mode for either Relay 1 and Relay 2, specify the Width
(in milliseconds) to configure the duration of the driving pulse (default is 500;
range of 500 to 30000 msec).
3. For Relay 1, specify the Cold Load Pickup Period (in the range of 0 to 30
minutes; default is 0 minutes).
4. Select the Cold Load Pickup Period (range of 0 to 30 minutes; default is 0
minutes).
24. Components
5. Check Randomize Cold Load Pickup Period to allow Metercat to randomize

the length of time for the cold load pickup period to a random time before
the Cold Load Pickup Period.
6. Select the relays’ Default Relay State:
• Current State
• Disconnected
• Connected
7. To Enable Inputs (depending on your application requirements), select one
or more of the following: Input 1, Input 2, Input 3, or Input 4.
Interrupter Control Relay

If you selected Interrupter Control Relay:
1. Enter the Cold Load Pickup Period (range of 0 - 30 minutes; default 0).
Figure 24-207. Special Relays - Interrupter Control Relay
Note: The Interrupter Control Board applies to A3 ALPHA meters with

firmware version 4.0 or higher and A1800 ALPHA meters with
firmware version 4.0 or higher that are equipped with the
Interrupter Control board. The Interrupter Control Relay Board
has one relay; two binary inputs are also available in the new
24. Components
version of this board. See “Set Interrupter Control Relay task” on

page 171 for details on connecting or disconnection the
Interrupter Control Relay.
Note: Support for the Interrupter Control Relay should only be enabled
for meters equipped with an Interrupter Control Relay option
board. A standard relay option board will not operate with this
option enabled.
2. Check Randomize Cold Load Pickup Period to allow Metercat to randomize
the length of time for the cold load pickup period to a random time before
the Cold Load Pickup Period.
3. Select the relays’ Default Relay State:
• Current State
• Disconnected
• Connected
Note: If you are using EnergyAxis Management System (EA_MS) with
A3 ALPHA meters containing the Interrupter Control Board,
Elster recommends configuring the board with the Default Relay
State = Connected.
4. To Enable Inputs (depending on your application requirements), select one
or more of the following: Input 1 or Input 2.
Note: The new version of the Interrupter Control Relay option board
contains two Inputs; Inputs 1 and 2; configuration of Inputs 3
and 4 is irrelevant for the new Interrupter Control Board relay.
Interposing Control Relay

Note: Available only on A1800 ALPHA meters.
If you selected Interposing Control Relay, when the Interposing Control Relay is
selected, Relays C ad D are dedicated to controlling an external interposing relay
device and are therefore unavailable for other functions regardless of the Relay C
and Relay D configurations specified in the Relay C and Relay D tabs.
24. Components
Figure 24-208. Special Relays - Interposing Control Relay

Note: The Interposing Control Board applies to A1800 ALPHA meters
with firmware version 4.0 or higher. See “Set Interposing Control
Relay task” on page 170 for details on connecting or
disconnection the Interposing Control Relay.
Remote component
The Remote component allows you to configure the communication ports of a
meter with a remote communications option board installed. The A3 ALPHA and
A1800 ALPHA meters with communications capability can be programmed to
answer incoming calls and make outgoing calls.
Configuring COM option boards

The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters support up to two option boards. For the
various meter option board communication options, the table below details the
various port and line sharing settings by purpose and option board. Position 1
24. Components
refers to the option board connected directly to the main meter board; Position 2
refers to an option board installed on top of the Position 1 option board. See the
specific option board product guide for a detailed illustration.
Enable
Installed options Remote component
Comm Type/Purpose Line
Position 1 / Position 2 Port 1 / Port 2
Sharing1
internal telephone modem ITM3 / none Internal Modem / Disabled No
modem interface board / Disabled / Internal Modem

ITM2
internal telephone modem and relays ITM3 / Relays Internal Modem / Disabled No
internal telephone modem and RS-485 for ITM3 / RS-485 Internal Modem (device ID=1) / Yes
modem sharing unit support Disabled
internal telephone modem and other external ITM3 / RS-485 or RS-232 Internal Modem (device ID=1) / No2
devices connected via RS-485|RS-232 Direct Connect
A3 ALPHA meter with Gatekeeper module ITM3 Internal Modem / Yes

/ Gatekeeper module Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
advanced communication option ACB 2.x | E-WIC | Direct Connect (bps = 28800) / No
board: WIC-serial / none Disabled
• ACB v2.x
• ACB v3.x/Wired WIC (Ethernet WIC)
• WIC-serial
[A3 ALPHA3 and A1800 ALPHA4 meters]
advanced communication option ACB 2.x |E-WIC | Direct Connect (bps = 28800) / No
board: WIC-serial / Gatekeeper Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
• ACB v2.x module
• ACB v3.x/Wired WIC (Ethernet WIC)
[A3 ALPHA meter with Gatekeeper module]
advanced communication option ACB 2.x / none External Modem (bps = 28800) / No
board: Disabled
• ACB v2.x – Ethernet version with Alarms
reporting
[A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters]
advanced communication option ACB 2.x / Gatekeeper External Modem (bps = 28800) / No
board: ACB v2.x – Ethernet version with Alarms module Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
reporting
[A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters with
Gatekeeper module]
Wireless WIC W-WIC / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
[A3 ALPHA5 and A1800 ALPHA6 meters] Disabled
Wireless WIC: W-WIC / Gatekeeper Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No

• WIC Wireless 1.0-1.2 module Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
• WIC Wireless 1.4
[A3 ALPHA meters and Gatekeeper module]
RS-232 RS-232 / Gatekeeper Direct Connect / No
[A3 ALPHA meter with Gatekeeper module] module Direct Connect (bps = 9600)7
Node internal interface board / Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
[A3 ALPHA meters only] EA_NIC Disabled
(RF communications)
24. Components
Enable
Installed options Remote component
Comm Type/Purpose Line
Position 1 / Position 2 Port 1 / Port 2
Sharing1
Node and relays Relay option board / Disabled / No
[A3 ALPHA meters only] EA_NIC Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
(RF communications)
MSU support for meters connected via RS-485 RS-232 or RS-485 /none External Modem (device ID=1) / N/A
to external modem: Disabled
Master meter with RS485 connected to an
RS-485 / none Direct Connect / N/A
external modem
Disabled
Slave meters with RS-485
1. Applies only when Port 1 is set to Internal Modem.

2. The meter can communicate simultaneously on both Port 1 (via ITM3) and Port 2 (via RS-232 or RS-485).
3. A3 ALPHA meters with Firmware ver. 3.4 or later.
4. A1800 ALPHA meters with Firmware ver. 1.6 and later.
5. A3 ALPHA meters with Firmware ver. 3.4 or later.
6. A1800 ALPHA meters with Firmware ver. 1.6 and later.
7. Uncheck Large Timeouts and do not enter a Turnaround Delay greater than zero for Port 2.
Note: An option board’s physical location does not always correlate to

the logical COM Port number. For example, an ITM2 option
board may be located in Position 2 and be logically connected
to Remote Port 1.
To configure the ACB v3.x as a Special Option Board, see “Special Option Board
To configure the Wireless WIC, see “Configuring the Remote component” on
page 586.
The A3 ALPHA meter can also be configured to use an external modem interface
to initiate calls. See the external modem manufacturer’s for compatibility and
configuration instructions for the external modem.
A1800 ALPHA meter port options

The following port assignments are recommended combinations for A1800
ALPHA meter Remote component:
Remote Port 1 Remote Port 2

Disabled Disabled
Direct Connect • Disabled
• Direct Connect
• External Modem
Internal Modem • Disabled
• Direct Connect
• External Modem
External Modem • Disabled
• Direct Connect
• External Modem
24. Components
Enable
Remote component
Comm Type/Purpose Installed options Line
Port 1 / Port 2
Sharing1
Node EA_NIC Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / N/A
[nA18102 ALPHA meters only] Disabled
(RF communications)
Node and relays EA_NIC Direct Connect (bps = 9600) N/A
[nA1830 ALPHA meters only] Direct Connect (bps = 9600)
(RF communications)
1. Applies only when Port 1 is set to Internal Modem.

2. See the meter nameplate for proper designation of meter model.
While Metercat will allow the following port assignments for A1800 ALPHA
meters, Elster does not recommend using them because using them may have
unexpected results:
Remote Port 1 Remote Port 2

Disabled • Direct Connect
• Internal Modem
• External Modem
Direct Connect Internal Modem
External Modem Internal Modem
Third party communications options
Installed options Remote Port Enable Line

Option Board
Position 1 / Position 2 Port 1 / Port 2 Sharing
Itron 50ESS ERT® 50ESS ERT / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
Disabled
SmartSynch SmartSynch / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
Disabled
AMRON M5™ CIB CIB / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
(communications interface board) Disabled
Aclara TWACS UMT-C for A3 ALPHA UMT-C-A3 / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
meter Disabled
Sensus FlexNet RF Flexnet / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
Disabled
Silver Springs Network NIC / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
Disabled
Landis+Gyr (Cellnet) Gridstream / none Direct Connect (bps = 9600) / No
Disabled
information on overriding this component.
24. Components
Sample Remote components

See the following sample Remote components (available on the Metercat
installation CD) for examples of particular Remote components:
• Sample Gatekeeper Remote component provides an example of

configuring an A3 ALPHA meter with Gatekeeper module
• Sample 50ESS Remote component provides an example of configuring an
A3 ALPHA meter that has the 50ESS ERT special option board
• Sample ICM Remote component provides an example of configuring a
meter with an internal cellular modem option board
Configuring remote communication

To configure remote communication:
1. Open an existing Remote component.

— OR —
Create a new component; you will be prompted for a name when you save
the program.
2. Select the Optical Port Protocol from the drop list (ANSI or DLMS and ANSI).
3. Select one of the following Port Usage types for Ports 1 and 2 of the meter as
recommended in “Configuring COM option boards” on page 468.
a. Disabled - no remote communication
b. Direct Connect - see “Configuring for Direct Connect” on page 472
c. Internal Modem - see “Configuring for Modem” on page 473
d. External Modem - see “Configuring for Modem” on page 473
Configuring for Direct Connect

1. From the Port Usage drop list, select Direct Connect:
a. Check Port Permits Read Services Only to permit only meter reading
through this port.
If left unchecked, both reading and writing are permitted through the port.
This restriction applies even if the connecting device or system has a valid
meter password.
b. Select the appropriate Bit Rate from the drop list (range of 300, 1200,
2400 (default), 4800, 9600 [50ESS ERT, AMRON CIB, SmartSynch,
Gatekeeper] 14400, 19200, and 28,800 bps).
Note: If the connected meter uses an Gatekeeper module and a
Replace Remote task is executed, the bit rate of the option
board will be changed to that specified for the modem’s bit rate.
The task completion report will indicate whether the option
board bit rate was changed. Be sure that the bit rate is kept at
9600.
c. Click Advanced to view other parameters:
1) Enter Turnaround Delay - range of 0 to 25 seconds.
2) Check to Enable Large Timeouts (default is disabled).
24. Components
Figure 24-209. Remote - Direct Connect
2. Save the Direct Connect component.
Configuring for Modem

1. From the Port Usage drop list, select Internal Modem or External Modem.
Internal modem-based communications options include telephone
modems (ITM2 or ITM3 option boards). See “Configuring COM option
boards” on page 468 for details.
Note: The ITM2 modem does not support outage calls on the
A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meters.
Note: The ITM3 modem cannot make outage calls unless the
A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter has an outage battery
installed.
External Modem includes meters connected to an external modem device
(for example, a modem sharing unit (MSU) or a device that emulates an
external modem and accepts Hayes AT commands. This usage is also used
with RS-232 and RS-485 option boards. See “Configuring COM option
boards” on page 468 for details.
Note: The external modem does not support outage calling.
2. For Internal or External Modems, enter the Alarm Trigger Period (applies to
both ports and accepts values in the range of 1 to 24 hours, inclusively;
default is 24 hours).
3. For A3 ALPHA meters, select ANSI from the Protocol Type drop list.
4. For A1800 ALPHA meters, select the Protocol Type:
24. Components
a. (ANSI
b. DLMS
c. DLMS and ANSI
d. DCPM
Note: Metercat must be configured to support A1800 ALPHA meters to
see the various Protocol Types. See “Setting supported meters”
on page 44.
Note: DLMS is only available for A1800 ALPHA meters with FW v2.0 or
higher.
Note: DCPM is only available for A1800 ALPHA meters with FW v4.0 or
higher. See “DCPM tab” on page 485 for details on configuring
DCPM.
5. Configure Internal and external modems using the following tabs:
• Modem tab
• Answer tab
• Billing tab
• Alarms tab
• Restoration tab
• Outage Modem tab - only for internal telephone modems on Port 1
• DCPM tab - only for A1800 ALPHA meters using DCPM protocol
Modem tab
The Remote component allows you to configure a meter equipped with an
Internal (ITM3) or External Modem or an ACB for Ethernet board to automatically
call-in to Metercat for the following purposes:
• billing
• alarm
• outage (requires ITM3 only)
• restoration
See “Configuring COM option boards” on page 468 for details on configuring the
Remote component for modems and the ACB. See “Configuring Metercat for
automatic call-in” on page 191 for details on configuring Metercat for receiving
calls from meters.
24. Components
To enter modem settings for internal or external modems:
1. Select the Modem tab.
Figure 24-210. Remote - Modem > Port 1
2. Enter the Modem Init String (up to 32 ASCII characters; default is

&F&C0E0Q0).
Note: See the modem manufacturer’s documentation for details on
setting the modem init string.
3. Select the Dialing mode (applies for each phone number on each enabled
remote port) to either Tone or Pulse (default is Tone).
4. Check Call Anytime (default) if you wish the meter to call in at anytime.
— OR —
If you wish to specify call windows for Billing, Alarm, and Restoration calls,
uncheck Call Anytime and enter the Start and Stop times [meter local time]
(in HH:MM format for a 24 hour day) for both windows. If the start and stop
times match, the call window will be closed (0 minutes in duration.)
Note: Setting both windows to closed (from 00:00 to 00:00) prevents
calls from being placed within call windows.
Note: For single rate demand A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meters (that
is, a relative timekeeping meter), Elster recommends using the
Call Anytime setting because single rate demand meters use
relative time therefore call windows are not valid.
5. Select the proper Bit Rate range:
24. Components
a. Minimum:
• Internal Modem - range of 300, 1200, 2400 bps; default is 1200 bps
• External Modem - range of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400,
19200, and 28,800 bps; default is 1200 bps
b. Maximum:
• Internal Modem - range of 300, 1200, 2400 bps; default is 2400 bps
• External Modem - range of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400,
19200, and 28,800 bps; default is 2400 bps
CAUTION: If the meter is acting as a collector, the EA_Gatekeeper is

configured as direct connected with a Modem Bit Rate of 9600
bps and the ITM3 is configured as an internal modem with line
sharing enabled.
6. Check to enable Security Call Back (default is disabled).

7. Check to Enable Intrusion Detection (default is enabled); disabling intrusion
detection prohibits the modem from hanging up during an active
communication session.
8. Check to Enable Line Sharing (default is disabled).
9. Enter the Initial Dialing Delay (within the range of 0 to 255 minutes; default is
10 minutes).
Note: The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter will delay dialing for a
random number of minutes in the range of 0 to the Initial
Dialing Delay value.
10.Enter the Minimum Retry Delay (in the range of 1 to 255 minutes, default
value is 5 minutes).
Note: The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter will delay redialing for a
random number of minutes between this value and the
Maximum Retry Delay. Setting the Minimum and Maximum
Retry Delays to the same number will specify a fixed retry
interval.
11. Enter the Maximum Retry Delay (in the range of 1 to 255 minutes, default
value is 5 minutes).
Note: The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter will delay redialing for a
random number of minutes between the Minimum Retry Delay
and the Maximum Retry Delay. Setting the Minimum and
Maximum Retry Delays to the same number will specify a fixed
retry interval.
12.To set Inactivity Timeout, perform one of the following:
a. Check Never Timeout.
b. Enter a Timeout value (within the range of 1 to 255 minutes; default is 10
minutes).
Note: The modem may have its own settings (set by the modem init
string) to determine how long to wait for a connection to be
established. See the modem manufacturer’s documentation for
details on configuring the modem init string for a larger timeout
value.
13.Click Advanced to set additional delays:
24. Components
a. Check to Enable Large Timeouts (default is disabled).

Note: This setting tells the Metercat software how long to wait for a
response from the modem. However, the modem may have its
own settings to determine how long to wait for a connection to
be established.
b. If the host computer is using a US Robotics Sportster modem, check to
enable the Sportster Delay (default is disabled).
Note: The Sportster delay is only needed if the meter is using an
internal modem.
c. Enter the Turnaround Delay (within the range of 0 to 25 seconds in tenths
of a second; default is 0 seconds).
d. Enter the Charge Up Delay (within the range of 0 to 255 seconds in tenths
of a second; default is 0 seconds).
e. Enter the Escape Sequence Inter-character Delay (within the range of 0 to
2 seconds in tenths of a second; default is 0 seconds).
Answer tab
If answering is enabled, the A3 ALPHA meter will answer calls during its answer
windows (after the specified number of rings). If Security Call Back is enabled (see
“Modem tab” on page 474), the meter will immediately call back once the current
call is disconnected.
To enter modem answer settings:
1. Select the Answer tab.
Figure 24-211. Remote - Modem > Answer

24. Components
2. Check Enable Answering to enable the modem to answer incoming calls

(for example, if Security Call Back is enabled).
3. Specify Answer Windows options:
a. If you wish the modem to answer calls at anytime, check Answer Anytime
(default).
Note: For single rate demand A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters
(that is, a relative timekeeping meter), Elster recommends using
the Answer Anytime setting because single rate demand
meters use relative time therefore call windows are not valid.
b. If you wish to specify answer windows, uncheck Answer Anytime and
enter the Start and Stop times [meter local time] (in HH:MM format for a
24 hour day) for both windows.
CAUTION: If the Start and Stop Answer Windows times are equal (for
example, 00:00 to 00:00), the window open time is set to zero
and the meter will not answer calls.
Note: Times entered can cross a date boundary (00:00). For example,
23:00 start time to 03:00 end time would include the four hours
beginning at 11:00 PM through 3:00 AM of the next day.
4. Enter the Number of Rings Before Answering (in the range of 1 to 39,
inclusively; default is 1 ring).
Billing tab
If billing calling is enabled, the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter periodically
check to see if a billing call is scheduled. If the call windows on the Modem tab
are defined or Call Anytime is enabled, the Billing Call Schedule is used to initiate
a billing call. If you have checked to place billing calls within call windows and
then specify a schedule time that does not fall within either call window, the call
will be made within the first call window after the scheduled time.
24. Components
To enter modem billing settings:
1. Select the Billing tab.
Figure 24-212. Remote - Modem > Billing
2. Check Enable Billing Calling to allow the meter to dial out to transmit billing
data.
3. Check Place Billing Calls only Within Call Origination Windows (set on the
Modem tab) to only allow the meter to use the call windows.
(that is, a relative timekeeping meter), Elster recommends
unchecking Place Billing Calls only Within Call Origination
Windows because single rate demand meters use relative time
therefore call windows are not valid.
4. Enter the Phone Number or IP Address [example,
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000] (up to 60 ASCII characters) of the host
computer the meter is to dial to transmit the billing data.
Note: This number can be different from the number dialed for
outage, restoration or alarm calls.
5. Enter the Number of Retries the meter is to attempt to dial out (default is 5) or
check Unlimited.
Note: If you have checked to place billing calls within call windows
and then specify a schedule time that does not fall within either
call window, the call will be made within the first call window
after the scheduled time.
24. Components
6. To configure a billing call schedule, select one of the following options:

a. Specify a Single Date and time at Program Time. If this option is selected,
at meter programming time the Program task’s Component tab will
prompt you to enter the Call Origination Date & Time see “Program task”
on page 134.
b. Specify Call Schedule. If this option is selected, select the Repeat type:
1) Periodically (minutes) - specify Start Date, Time of Day (meter local),
and Repeat Period (in minutes).
2) Monthly - specify Time of Day (meter local) and Day of Month (in the
range of 1 to 28; default is 1).
3) Weekly - specify Time of Day (meter local) and Day of Week (default is
Sunday).
4) Periodically (days) - specify Start Date, Time of Day (meter local), and
Repeat Period (in the range of 1 to 64 days; default is 1).
Note: For A3 ALPHA meters with firmware version 1.05 or less, the
scheduled Time of Day setting will be automatically set to
midnight (00:00:00) at Program task execution.
Alarms tab
If alarm calling is enabled, the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter will place an
alarm call for specified alarm events.
(that is a relative timekeeping meter), the meter will report meter
times that are relative to their last power restoration.
24. Components
To enter modem alarm settings:
1. Select the Alarms tab.
Figure 24-213. Remote - Modem > Alarms
Note: In order to receive Low Outage Battery alarms calls, outage

calling must be enabled.
2. Check to Enable Alarm Calling.
3. Check to Place Alarm Calls only Within Call Origination Windows (see
“Modem tab” on page 474) to only allow the meter to use the call windows.
unchecking Place Alarm Calls only Within Call Origination
4. Enter Phone Number or IP Address or IP Address [example,
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000] (up to 60 ASCII characters).
outage, restoration or billing calls.
5. Enter the Number of Retries (default is 5) the meter is to attempt to dial out or
check Unlimited.
24. Components
6. Select the Errors, Warnings, and Events that will act as an Alarm Trigger:
The following errors shall be enabled or The following warnings shall be enabled or
disabled for triggering alarm call- disabled for triggering alarm call-origination
origination, with default values of disabled:· with default values of disabled:
• General Configuration • Low Battery
• Carryover • Reverse Energy Flow
• Power fail data save • Demand Overload
• Clock • Possible Tamper
• EEPROM Access • Improper Meter Engine Operation
• Internal Communication (I2C) • Service Voltage Test Failure
• Crystal Oscillator • Service Current Test Failure
• Table CRC • Demand Threshold Exceeded
• Low Outage Battery
• Potential Indicator
• Phase A, B, or C Sag
• Phase A, B, or C Outage
• End Of Calendar
• PQM Test Failure
The following events shall be enabled or disabled for triggering alarm call-origination with
default values of disabled:
• Calendar Demand reset
• Button Press Demand reset
• Profile 1 Wrap
• Profile 2 Wrap
• Pulse Profiling Wrap
See Appendix E, “Meter Events, Errors & Warnings” for details on errors,
warnings, and events.
Note: Each alarm is only able to trigger an alarm call once every
Alarm Trigger Period. The following alarms are exceptions, they
trigger an alarm every occurrence: qualified power fail warning
and power fail warning (every power fail).
Restoration tab
If restoration calling is enabled, the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter will place
a call when power is restored after an outage.
(that is, a relative timekeeping meter), the meter will report
meter times that are relative to their last power restoration.
Note: For single rate demand A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters, all
outages are qualified and will result in a restoration call.
24. Components
To enter modem power restoration settings:
1. Select the Restoration tab.
Figure 24-214. Remote - Modem > Restoration
2. Check to Enable Power Restoration Calling.

3. Check to Place Restoration Calls only Within Call Origination Windows (set in
the “Modem tab” on page 474) to only allow the meter to use the call
windows.
unchecking Place Restoration Calls only Within Call Origination
4. Enter Phone Number or IP Address [example,
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000] (up to 60 ASCII characters).
outage, alarm or billing calls.
5. Enter the Number of Retries (default is 5) or check Unlimited.
Outage Modem tab

Note: This tab only applies to Port 1.
Note: For single rate demand meters, all outages are qualified and
will result in a restoration call.
24. Components
Note: For single rate demand meters (that is, a relative timekeeping
meter), the meter will report meter times that are relative to their
last power restoration.
If outage calling is enabled, the modem will report power failure events to the
specified phone number (for example, a distribution management system).
To enter outage settings:
1. Select the Outage Modem tab.

Note: ITM2 and ITM3 modems cannot make outage calls unless the
meter has an outage battery installed.
Figure 24-215. Remote - Modem > Outage Modem
2. Check to Enable Outage Calling to allow the modem to report power failure
events.
3. Enter Phone Number (up to 32 ASCII characters).
Note: This phone number can be different from the number dialed for
restoration, alarm or billing calls.
4. Enter the Number of Retries (in the range 1 to 255, inclusively; default is 10);
the modem will attempt to complete the call until the number of retries is
exhausted at which time the modem will not attempt an outage call until a
new outage event.
Note: The retries shall be 0 if outage calling is disabled.
5. Enter the Maximum Off Hook Wait Time (in the range of 1 to 120 seconds,
inclusively; default is 45 seconds).
24. Components
6. Enter the Minimum Outage Time to Trigger Call (in the range of 0 to 255
seconds, inclusively; default is 30 seconds).
7. Enter the Minimum Time to Reset Outage Detection (in the range 0 to 255
seconds, inclusively; default is 60 seconds).
Note: A value of zero (0) causes the modem to make an outage call
for every outage.
8. Select Outage Call Bit Rate (either 300, 1200, or 2400 bps; default is 2400
bps).
Note: The modem bit rate for an outage call can be different from the
bit rate used for billing, alarm, and restoration calls.
9. Enter Maximum Dialing Delay (in the range 0 to 510 seconds; default is 120
seconds).
10.Enter Minimum Retry Interval (in the range 0 to 1275 seconds, inclusively;
default is 60 seconds).
Note: The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter only recognizes 5
second increments. That is, if you set the Minimum Retry Interval
to 14 seconds and program the meter with the Remote
component and then read the meter’s configuration, the
Remote component > Outage Modem tab will show the
Minimum Retry Interval set to 10 seconds; if you set the
Minimum Retry Interval to 16 seconds the interval will be set to
15 seconds.
DCPM tab
For A1800 ALPHA meters with FW v4.0 or higher, you can specify using the DCPM
protocol. To configure the A1800 ALPHA meter to use DCPM:
1. Select DCPM for either port Protocol.

The DCPM tab displays.
2. From the DCPM Protocol drop list select the version used, DLT 645 Version
1.x.
3. for each port, configure the Remote Port Parameters for ports 1 and 2:
a. Parity - Even (default), Odd, None
b. Data Bits - 7 or 8 (default) bits
c. Stop Bits - 1 (default) or 2 bits
4. For each port, configure Port 1 DL/T 645 specific parameters:
a. DL/T 645 Version - 1997 or 2007
b. Device Address
c. Response Delay Time (ms) - 50 default, range 0 to 2550
d. Interframe Timeout (ms) - 500 (default), range 0 to 2550
e. DL/T 645 Intercharacter Timeout (ms) - 500 (default), range 0 to 2550
5. For each port, configure DL/T 645 Authorization Rights:
a. Read Data Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 - Level 9, N/A
b. Write Data Password Level - No Password, Level 0 (default) - Level 9, N/A
c. Set Broadcast Time Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 -
Level 9, N/A
d. Clear Data Password Level - No Password, Level 0 (default) - Level 9, N/A
e. Write Device Address Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 -
Level 9, N/A
24. Components
f. Change Baud Rate Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 - Level

9, N/A
g. Change Password Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 - Level
9, N/A
h. Demand Reset Password Level - No Password, Level 0 - Level 2 (default),
Level 3 - Level 9, N/A
i. Read Device Address Password Level - No Password (default), Level 0 -
Level 9, N/A
j. Clear Event Log Data - No Password, Level 0 - Level 2 (default), Level 3 -
Level 9, N/A
6. For each port and level (Level 0 - Level 9), enter the Local Port Password.
7. For each port, configure DL/T 645 TOU Schedule:
a. Number of Tariffs - default = 3, range 1 - 4
b. Number of Seasons - default = 1, range of 1 - 4
c. Number of Tariff Schedules - default =1, range of 1 - 8
d. Number of Tariff Switches - default = 5, range of 1 - 10
e. Number of Holidays - default = 0, range of 0 - 10
f. Season 1 Start Date (MM-DD) -
g. Season 1 Tariff Schedule Number - default = 1
8. For each tariff switch, configure Switch Points:
a. For each switch point, configure Switch Point Time (hh:mm).
b. Enter the Switch Point New Tariff number (range of 1 - 4).
9. For each holiday:
a. Enter the Holiday Date (YYYY-MM-DD).
b. Enter the Holiday Tariff Schedule Number.
10.Enter the Weekend Tariff Schedule (default = 1).
Service Test component

The Service Test component allows you to define the basic and advanced settings
for the service test component the meter will use to determine the type of service
currently in use.
Some electronic meters (for example, Elster’s A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter)
are capable of measuring each phase voltage and angle to match
measurements of a stored list of valid services.
You can specify the parameters for each service (up to ten) for a meter
configuration within one component and then use that one component in all
defined programs.
Available services
The services available for each of the indicated meter configurations are:
1 Element Portable
24. Components
• 1 EL Single Phase • 3 EL 4-wire Wye

• 3 EL 4-wire Delta
2 Elements
• 3 EL Single Phase
• 2 EL Single Phase • 3 EL 4-wire Delta High Leg on Phase A
• 2 EL 3-wire Single Phase • 3 EL 4-wire Delta High Leg on Phase B
• 2 EL 3-wire Delta • 2 EL Single Phase
• 2 EL 3-wire Wye (Network) • 2 EL 3-wire Single Phase
• 2 EL 4-wire Delta • 2 EL 3-wire Delta
• 2 EL Dual Single Phase “Star” • 2 EL 3-wire Wye (Network)
2 ½ Elements • 2 EL 4-wire Delta High Leg on Phase A
• 2 ½ EL 4-wire Wye • 1 EL Single Phase
• 2 ½ EL Single Phase Note: You can only list up to ten services for
the Portable meter configuration.
3 Elements
• 3 EL 4-wire Wye
• 3 EL Single Phase
• 3 EL 4-wire Delta High Leg on Phase A
• 3 EL 4-wire Delta High Leg on Phase B
Note: If you wish to create a new component select <new> Service

Test from the Service Test drop list; you will be prompted for a
name when you save the program.
Setting Basic Service test parameters

The Basic Settings tab allows you to set default values for the selected meter
service (see “Setting Advanced Service test parameters” on page 489).
24. Components
Figure 24-216. Service Test - Basic
To set basic service test parameters:
1. Select a Service Test Mode:

a. Smart Auto Lock - automatically locks, or accepts, the service found; if no
valid service is found the last locked service is kept.
b. Manual - a technician must press the demand reset button to manually
accept the service found
c. None - turns Service Test off
2. Select a Rotation Test (that is, the phase rotation that will be validated by the
meter):
a. Both - service test validates either phase rotation
b. ABC only - service test validates ABC phase rotation only
c. CBA only - service test validates CBA phase rotation only
Note: If an incorrect rotation is detected, an error message will be
displayed on the meter's LCD. See the A3 ALPHA Meter
Technical Manual (TM42-2190) and the A1800 ALPHA Meter
Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for details.
3. Check to Run Current Test after Powerup Voltage Test if you wish to run the
test.
4. Type a value (percentage of nominal) in the Phase Indicator Threshold box
(range of 0.00 - 100.00).
24. Components
Note: The Phase Indicator Threshold is also used in the Voltage Sag
Test of PQM (see “Voltage Sag Test” on page 447).
5. Type in values for each of the Service Voltage Tolerances: the acceptable
voltage range for the system service test (both values are a percentage of
the nominal voltage).
a. Minimum (percentage of nominal) - range of 0.00 - 100.00
b. Maximum (percentage of nominal) - range of 100.00 - 199.99
6. Type in values for the Default Current Test Thresholds:
a. Zero Current - range 0.00 % - 39.99 %
b. Over Current - range 100.00 % - 199.95 %
c. Low Current - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 % - 39.99 %
d. Min Lagging PF (ABC order1) - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 -
1.00
e. Min Leading PF (ABC order1) - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 -
1.00
for lagging power factors. See also “6. Power Factor Test” on
page 450.
page 449).
Setting Advanced Service test parameters

The Advanced Settings tab allows you to configure thresholds, warning triggers,
and recognized nominal voltages.
To set advanced service test current parameters:

1. Select one of the following Meter Configurations:
Note: The selected Meter Configuration determines the Services
available for testing. You can add up to ten Services per meter
configuration.
a. 2 Elements
b. 1 Element
c. 3 Elements
d. 2 1/2 Elements
e. Portable
Note: Service Test settings are configured to only detect 4-wire Delta
services when the High Leg is connected to Phase C. To detect
other High Leg phases you must add a new Service.
1. Indicates the phase rotation is in ABC order.

24. Components
2. To add a new Service (up to ten), select a row with <None> specified and
select a new Service from the drop list.
3. For each service defined for the selected configuration, select the Currents
tab.
Figure 24-217. Service Test - Advanced > Currents
4. For each service defined for the selected configuration, uncheck if you are
not Using Default Thresholds (that is you wish to override the default values
set on the Basic Settings tab).
Note: This setting applies only to the selected service.
5. For each service defined for the selected configuration, if you are NOT using
defaults, type in values for the Current Test Thresholds:
a. Zero Current - range 0.00 % - 39.99 %
b. Over Current - range 100.00 % - 199.95 %
c. Low Current - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 % - 39.99 %
d. Min Lagging PF (ABC order1) - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 -
1.00
e. Min Leading PF (ABC order2) - A phase, B phase, C phase - range 0.00 -
1.00

24. Components
for lagging power factors. See also “6. Power Factor Test” on
page 450.
page 449).
6. For each service defined for the selected configuration, select which
individual phases will Trigger Warnings for the specified thresholds:
a. Zero Current - A phase, B phase, C phase
b. Low Current - A phase, B phase, C phase
c. Over Current - A phase, B phase, C phase
d. Reverse Power - A phase, B phase, C phase
e. Power Factor - A phase, B phase, C phase
Note: See the meter’s technical manual for details on warning codes.
7. For each service defined for the selected configuration, select the Voltages
tab.
Note: Phase Voltage Percentage represents the voltage expected for
that phase in relation to the nominal service voltage for the
selected service.
24. Components
Figure 24-218. Service Test - Advanced > Voltages
Note: The Voltages tab shows the expected Phase Voltage

Percentages and Voltage Phase Angles (for ABC rotation)
based on the selected Service.
8. For each service defined for the selected configuration, type in values for
Recognized Nominal Service Voltages (5 maximum with a range of 0 -
6553.5).
Special Dates component

Special Dates are the collection of dates that use different switch times than
would normally be used or dates upon which special events occur. You may
assign only one Special Dates component to a program definition when creating
or modifying a program.
The Special Dates component allows you to configure recurring and nonrecurring
dates in the meter.
Note: Metercat and the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters allow
multiple special dates that fall on the same date (such as could
occur by combining Recurring and Nonrecurring dates).
Metercat does not check to ensure the events for these entries
do not conflict (for example, simultaneous DST-Start and DST-
End events) and to ensure that DST-Start and DST-End events are
24. Components
paired (that is, for each DST-Start there must be a DST-End). See
“Troubleshooting special dates” on page 499 for ways to
prevent special date conflicts.
To configure special dates:
1. Select an existing Special Dates component from the drop list.

— OR —
2. Select any Global Options:
a. Check to have the meter Perform Demand Reset on every Season
Change; the reset will occur at midnight on the day of each scheduled
season change.
Note: By checking Perform Demand Reset on every Season Change,
a demand reset will be performed on every season change.
You do not have to select demand reset for any season change
event in the Recurring Dates tab because the demand reset will
occur automatically.
Note: See the A3 ALPHA Meter with Itron 50ESS ERT Product Guide
(PG42-1002A) for details on configuring special dates for an A3
ALPHA meter with 50ESS ERT.
b. Check to Enforce a maximum of <x> days between demand resets
[checking this option forces the meter to perform a demand reset if <x>
days have elapsed between demand resets].
c. Check to have the meter issue an End of calendar warning <x> days
before the end of the Nonrecurring dates calendar [checking this option
causes the meter to generate a warning <x> days (up to a maximum of
999) before the last nonrecurring date defined in the special dates list].
d. For A1800 ALPHA meters FW v 4.0 or later, enter the Demand Reset Time
(that is, the time when the meter will perform a demand reset).
Note: Demand Reset Time is only available for Metercat if
A1800 ALPHA meter support is installed and A1800 ALPHA
meters are enabled in System Preferences. See “Setting
supported meters” on page 44 for details.
Note: For A3 ALPHA meters, the default demand reset time is
midnight on the date the demand reset is scheduled.
Note: Self reads are performed at midnight on the date that read is
scheduled.
3. Select the Recurring Dates tab to enter special dates that occur on the same
date every year or in a repeatable pattern (for example, New Year’s Day) as
described in “Adding a recurring date” on page 495.
24. Components
Figure 24-219. Special Dates - A3 ALPHA meter

24. Components
Figure 24-220. Special Dates - A1800 ALPHA meter
Note: A maximum of 35 recurring dates can be accepted by the

4. Select the Nonrecurring Dates tab to enter special dates that do not occur on
the same date every year or in a repeatable pattern (for example, Easter) as
described in “Adding a nonrecurring date” on page 498.
The Summary button on the Nonrecurring Dates tab displays:
• the expiration date for meters programmed using the selected special
dates component
• the number of remaining nonrecurring special dates that can be
defined in the selected special dates component
Note: A maximum of 255 nonrecurring dates can be accepted by the
Note: Depending on your settings in System Preferences, certain
special dates may appear already defined. See “Setting holiday
options” on page 45.
Adding a recurring date

To add a recurring date that occurs on a regular date (for example, New Year’s
Day):
1. Select the Recurring Dates tab.

2. Click Add.
24. Components
The Recurring Date Configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 24-221. Add recurring date
3. If the event that you are adding is a calendar event, then you must check
Calendar Action. This will allow you to select one of the following calendar
events: holiday, season change or begin or end daylight saving time.
Note: Season change choices are determined by your System
Preference settings. See “Configuring seasons” on page 46 for
details.
4. Check Self Read if the meter should perform a self read on this date.
5. Check Demand Reset if the meter should perform a demand reset on this
date.
Note: When programming A3 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC FW v. 5.5 or
higher, the EA_NIC may be configured to enable or disable
using the demand resets programmed in the meter. If this
parameter is disabled, the meter will use the demand reset
setting for season changes but will not use demand resets
defined in the special dates calendar. The EA_NIC configuration
is performed at time of manufacture and is not configurable by
Metercat.
24. Components
Note: When programming A3 ALPHA meters (FW 2.0 or later) with

EA_NIC, demand resets are disabled except when performed
at season changes. For A3 ALPHA meters (FW 1.0) with EA_NIC,
all demand resets are disabled even those performed at
season change. The EnergyAxis System triggers demand resets
in A3 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC.
6. Recurring dates can be defined to occur once a year, once a month, once a
week, or every N number of days:
Once a Year if the recurring date is to occur on a specific date (January 1st) or occurrence of a
date (first Sunday in April), enter the Month and Day in the Use Date parameter
and select one of the following:
1 Always on this date regardless of the day of the week.
2 On the first <day of week> on or after this date.
3 Special Rules:
• if Sunday - postpone to Monday
• if Sunday - advance to Friday
• if Saturday - postpone to Monday
• if Saturday - advance to Friday
• if Sunday or Saturday - postpone to Monday
• if Sunday or Saturday - advance to Friday
• if Sun. postpone to Monday; if Sat. advance to Friday
Examples:
• first Sunday in April: Month=April; Day=1; on the first Sunday on or after this
date
• last Sunday in October: Month=October; Day=25; on the first Sunday on or
after this date
Once a Month if the recurring date is to occur on the same day every month, enter Every for the
Month and a Day in the Use Date parameter and select one of the following:
1 Always on this date regardless of the day of the week.
2 On the first <day of week> on or after this date.
3 Special rules:
• if Sunday - postpone to Monday
• if Sunday - advance to Friday
• if Saturday - postpone to Monday
• if Saturday - advance to Friday
• if Sunday or Saturday - postpone to Monday
• if Sunday or Saturday - advance to Friday
• if Sunday postpone to Monday; if Saturday advance to Friday
Examples:
• first Monday in each month: Month=Every; Day=1; on the first Monday on or
after this date
• last Sunday in each month: Month=Every; Day=25; on the first Sunday on or
after this date
Once a Week if the recurring date occurs on the same day every week, select Every week on
<day of week>.
Every N days if the recurring data occurs every <n> number of days, select Every N days,
starting <date> and specify the frequency of days and the date of the first
event.
7. Click OK to complete the definition or click Cancel to return to Metercat

without saving the recurring date.
24. Components
Adding a nonrecurring date

Note: Metercat will generate Easter, Good Friday, or Monday after
Easter dates if specified in System Preferences (see “Setting
holiday options” on page 45).
To add a nonrecurring date that occurs on an irregular date (for example, Easter):
1. Select the Nonrecurring Dates tab.

2. Click Add.
The Nonrecurring Date Configuration dialog is displayed.
Figure 24-222. Add nonrecurring date
3. Select or enter the Date for the nonrecurring date.

4. Check Calendar Action if the new nonrecurring date is a holiday, season
change, or involves Daylight Saving Time.
a. Holiday - applies holiday rates to the specified date.
b. Season Change - select the season that should begin on the specified
date.
Note: Season change choices are determined by your System
Preference settings. See “Configuring seasons” on page 46 for
details.
c. Start Daylight Saving Time - the meter will advance the clock one hour on
the specified date.
CAUTION: Each Start Daylight Saving Time event should have a

corresponding End Daylight Saving Time event.
24. Components
d. End Daylight Saving Time - the meter will move the clock back one hour
on the specified date.
5. Check Self Read if you wish the meter to perform a self read on this date.
6. Check Demand Reset if you wish the meter to perform a demand reset on
this date.
Note: When programming A3 ALPHA meters (FW 2.0 or later) with
EA_NIC, demand resets are disabled except when performed
at season changes. For A3 ALPHA meters (FW 1.0) with EA_NIC,
all demand resets are disabled even those performed at
season change. The EnergyAxis System triggers demand resets
in A3 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC.
7. Click OK to complete the definition or click Cancel to return to Metercat
without saving the nonrecurring date.
Note: The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters accept up to 255
nonrecurring dates. The Program Completion Report indicates
the maximum number of nonrecurring dates that the meter has
accepted and the last nonrecurring date programmed into the
meter.
Troubleshooting special dates

Metercat and the A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters allow multiple special
dates that fall on the same date (such as could occur by combining Recurring and
Nonrecurring dates). Additionally, Metercat does not check to ensure that Daylight
Saving Time events are paired (that is, each Start has a corresponding End).
To avoid troublesome date configurations:
• review the Recurring dates and the Nonrecurring dates to ensure that a date
does not appear more than once in a list
• ensure that each Start Daylight Saving Time has a corresponding End
Daylight Saving Time
Special Features component

The Special Features component allows you to configure special features.
24. Components
Figure 24-223. Special Features component
To configure special features:
1. Select an existing Special Features component from the drop list.

— OR —
2. Type a time for the Demand Reset Lockout Time (range of 0 to 255 minutes).
3. Check to enable the meter to Perform Self Read on Every Demand Reset.
Note: Check to have demand only meters perform self reads.
Special Option Board component

The Special Option Board component allows you to configure communication
option boards conforming to Elster design specifications. Special option boards
include Itron’s 50ESS ERT, Elster’s WAN interface boards (WICs) and Elster’s
Advanced Communication Board (ACB).
24. Components
Figure 24-224. Special Option Board component
To configure a special option board:
1. Select an existing Special Option Board component from the drop list.
— OR —
2. Select the Special Option Board Format from the drop list:
• Itron 50ESS ERT
• Elster’s communication boards
Meters
Special Option board A3 ALPHA meter A1800 ALPHA meter
firmware firmware
ACB version 1.2 and 1.31 3.4 and higher 1.7 and higher
1
ACB version 2.x 3.4 and higher 1.7 and higher
ACB version 3.x /Wired-WIC 4.0 and higher 4.0 and higher
ACB version 3.7 (DNP)2 4.0 and higher 4.0 and higher
Wireless WIC version 1.0 - 1.23 4.0 and higher 4.0 and higher
Wireless WIC version 1.4 4.0 and higher 4.0 and higher
1. Ethernet or Serial.
2. Serial only.
3. CDMA
24. Components
Note: The ACB Versions 3.x / Wired WIC or Wireless WIC is supported
by A3 ALPHA meters equipped with EA_Gatekeeper modules
FW version 6.0 and higher.
3. Select the desired configuration options.
Note: For the 50ESS ERT option board, the Special Option Board view
will only display the first 16 characters of the Special Option
Board component name (that is, Metercat Component ID).
Note: See the HTML files located in the C:\Program
Files\Elster\Metercat\SpOBDefs folder (where C: is the drive
where Metercat is installed) for information on specific special
option boards and their configuration.
Configuring the Ethernet WIC special option board

To configure the ACB 3.x Ethernet WIC, see Appendix F, “Configuring the E-WIC.”
Configuring the Wireless WIC special option board

See Appendix G, “Configuring the W-WIC.”
Configuring the ACB version 3.7 (DNP)

See Appendix H, “Configuring ACB version 3.7 (DNP).”
24. Components
Configuring the ACB version (1.2 & 1.3) or 2.x

To configure the ACB versions 1.2 & 1.3 or 2.x:
1. From the Special Option Board Format drop list, select ACB version 1.2 & 1.3
or ACB version 2.x.
Figure 24-225. Special Option - ACB v 2.x - C12.21
2. For ACB Port Parameters, select the Protocol from the drop list:
• C12.21
• Modbus
• DNP 3.0
• DL/T 645
a. For each Host Access Control List (1 - 8), enter:
1) Check to Enable Source Checking.
2) For each Allowed Host, enter the IP Address.
3) Enter the Allowed Host Mask.
3. For C12.21 protocol, select:
a. Select the Port Baud rate from the drop list (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600. 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600).
b. Select the Parity from the drop list (None, Even, Odd).
c. Select the number of Data Bits from the drop list (7 bits or 8 bits).
d. Select the number of Stop Bits from the drop list (1 bit or 2 bits).
24. Components
e. For C12.21 Specific Parameters, enter:

1) Check to Obtain and IP Address Using DHCP.
2) Enter the DHCP Lease Time Requested (in seconds) (range of 300 -
31536000, in increments of 60).
3) Enter the C12.21 Port Number.
4) Enter the Telnet Port Number.
5) Check to Enable EA_Gatekeeper Routing.
6) Enter the Transmit Accumulate Time (in milliseconds) (range 0 - 2550,
in increments of 10).
7) Enter the Connection Activity Time (in seconds) (range
4. For Modbus protocol, select:
9600. 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600).
e. For Modbus specific Parameters, enter:
1) Select the Mode (ASCII or RTU).
2) Select the Slave Address (range 0 - 255).
3) Enter the Modbus Intercharacter Timeout (in milliseconds) (range 0 -
2550 in increments of 10).
4) Enter the Response Delay Timeout (in milliseconds) (range 0 - 2550 in
increments of 10).
5. For DNP protocol, select:
9600. 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600).
a. For DNP specific Parameters, enter:
1) Select the Auto Time Set Request (No Time Request, Request on DNP 0).
2) Enter the Transmit Delay (in milliseconds) (range of 0 - 5000).
3) Enter the Source Address.
4) Enter the Destination Address.
5) Select the Source Address Validation (Checked or Not Checked).
6) Select the Data Link Confirmation Mode (Never, Multiframe, Always).
7) Enter the Data Link Confirmation Timeout (in milliseconds) (range 100 -
20000).
8) Enter the Data Link Retries (range 0 - 255).
9) Select the Application Layer Confirmation Mode (Event Only, Event/
Multifrag).
10)Select the Application Layer Fragment Size (256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280,
1536, 1792, 2048 bytes).
11) Enter the Application Layer Confirmation Timeout (in milliseconds)
(range 500 - 60000).
12)Check to Enable Unsolicited Responses.
24. Components
6. For DL/T 645 protocol, select:

9600. 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600).
e. For DL/T Specific Parameters enter:
1) Enter the Device Address.
2) Enter the Response Delay Time (in milliseconds).
3) Enter the Interframe Timeout (in milliseconds).
4) Enter the DL/T 645 Intercharacter Timeout (in milliseconds).
5) Select the Read Data Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels 0-9).
6) Select the Continue Read Data Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
7) Select the Re-read Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels 0-9).
8) Select the Write Data Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels 0-9).
9) Select the Broadcast Time Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels
0-9).
10)Select the Clear Data Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels 0-9).
11) Select the Write Device Address Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
12)Select the Change Baud Rate Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
13)Select the Change Password Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
14)Select the Demand Reset Password Level (No Password, N/A, Levels 0-
9).
15)Select the Read Data with Offset Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
16)Select the Write Data with Offset Password Level (No Password, N/A,
Levels 0-9).
17)For Levels - through 9, set the Local Port Passwords.
18)Set the Number of Tariffs (range of 1 - 4).
19)Set the Number of Seasons (range of 1-4).
20)Set the Number of Tariff Schedules (range of 1-8).
21)Set the Number of Tariff Switches (range of 1-10).
22)Set the Number of Holidays (range of 0-10).
23)Enter the Season 1 Start Date (MM-DD format).
24)Enter the Season 1 Tariff Schedule Number.
25)For each Tariff Schedule (1 through 5) enter the following:
26)Switch Point Time (hh:mm format).
27)Switch Point New Tariff.
28)Enter the Weekend Tariff Schedule.
24. Components
IP AxisLink components Programs for the IP AxisLink router use the following components:
• ACL (Access Control List) component

• Binary IO component
• DNP component
• Event Logs Configuration component
• Event Notifications component
• Network component
See TM42-4002 IP AxisLink Router Installation and Administration Guide for
details on configuring the IP AxisLink Router.
ACL (Access Control List) component

The ACL (Access Control List) component allows you to configure IP addresses
and MAC address (up to 8) that will be accepted by the IP AxisLink router when a
client attempts to communicate using the WAN port.
Note: MAC filtering may be enabled but only applies to a local subnet
attached to the device. Typically all communication traffic will
come from a gateway or modem, and there would only be a
single MAC address to configure.
additional details.
To configure the ACL (Access Control List) component:
1. Open an existing ACL (Access Control List) component.

— OR —
24. Components
Figure 24-226. ACL component - WAN ACL
2. Check Enable Source Checking to enable IP WAN ACL,

3. For each Allowed Host (range of 1 - 8):
a. Enter the IP Address.
b. Enter the Subnet Mask.
24. Components
Figure 24-227. ACL component - MAC ACL
4. Check Enable Source Checking to enable MAC WAN ACL.

5. For each MAC Address (range of 1 - 8), enter the MAC Address.
Binary IO component
The IP AxisLink router includes four discrete binary inputs (I) and two discrete
binary outputs (O).

details on the binary I/O connections and configuration.
To configure the Binary IO component of the IP AxisLink router:
1. Open an existing Binary IO component.

— OR —
24. Components
Figure 24-228. Binary IO component
2. Enter the Input Debounce Period (ms) (range of 0 to 80; default = 40).
3. For each, select the Output Assignment from the drop list:
• C12.19 - default
• DNP
4. If Output Assignment is C12.19, for each assignment, select the Output Mode
Control from the drop list:
a. Level - Default
b. Pulse Low
c. Pulse High
5. If Output Mode Control is Pulse Low or Pulse High, enter the Output Pulse
Time (ms) (range of 10 to 2550; default is 10).
DNP component
The DNP component allows you to configure the DNP slave running in the IP
AxisLink router.
See Appendix E “DNP3.0 protocol definition” in TM42-4002 IP AxisLink Router
Installation and Administration Guide for more detailed information.
The DNP component includes the following elements:

24. Components
• Configuration parameters:
• Network
• Link
• Application
• Unsolicited response
• Time
• Binary output
• Analog Inputs
• Counters Points
• Binary Inputs
Note: Parameter names appearing in brackets [ ] are names as they
appear in the router’s web interface.
To configure the DNP component for the IP AxisLink router:
1. Open an existing DNP component.
— OR —
Figure 24-229. DNP component - configuration parameters

24. Components
2. Select the TCP/UDP Network Configuration (specifies how the IP connections

are managed on the IP AxisLink router [outstation or slave]) from the drop
list:
• Disabled - [default] TCP/UDP Networking is disabled.
• TCP Listening Endpoint - The IP AxisLink Router listens for connection
requests via a TCP passive open. In otherwords, the DNP master is
responsible for creating and sustaining a connection.
Note: TCP Listening Endpoint does not support unsolicited responses.
• Datagram (UDP) Endpoint - All message traffic is sent / received by way of
UDP datagrams. There is no concept of a sustained connection.
• TCP Dual Endpoint - Similar to the TCP listening endpoint, however the IP
AxisLink Router can also actively create the connection to the master.
3. Depending on the selected TCP/UDP Network Configuration:
TCP Listening Endpoint Datagram (UDP) Endpoint TCP Dual Endpoint
1 Enter the UDP Broadcast 1 Enter the UDP Broadcast 1 Enter the UDP Broadcast
Receive Channel Port Receive Channel Port Receive Channel Port
Number Number Number
2 Enter the Inbound TCP Port 2 Enter the Receive Channel 2 Enter the Outbound TCP/UDP
3 Enter the Keep-Alive Time Port Number IP Address
(min). 3 Enter the Transmit Channel 3 Enter the Outbound TCP Port
Port Number. 4 Enter the Inbound TCP Port
Note: Does not support 4 Select the Transmit Channel 5 Enter the Keep-Alive Time
unsolicited responses. Port Mode. (min)
a Send to UDP TX PORT
b Send to source Note: Supports unsolicited
5 Enter the UDP Initial responses.
Unsolicited TX Port
Note: Supports unsolicited

responses.
where
Configuration Setting Description Default Value
UDP Receive Port UDP receive port number (mode 1 only). 20000
Referenced in DNP3 Specification, Volume 7
as Po. Please note, UDP_RX_PORT must not
be set to the same port number as
UDP_BC_RX_PORT. If it is then the
broadcast receive port will be disabled and
a configuration warning issued.
UDP broadcast receive UDP broadcast receive port number (all 20000
port number modes). Set to 0 to disable broadcast
reception. Please note, since this is a UDP
broadcast receive port make sure no other
UDP port in the IP AxisLink (using the same
subnet) is set to this port number. If it is then
one or the other process will not operate
properly.
UDP Transmit Port UDP transmit port number (mode 1 only). 20000
Referenced in DNP3 Specification, Volume 7
as Pm
24. Components
Configuration Setting Description Default Value

UDP Transmit Port Mode UDP transmit port mode (mode 1 only). Send to
When set to 'Send to UDP_TX_PORT' a UDP_TX_PORT
solicited message response will be sent to
the port number indicated by
UDP_TX_PORT. If set to 'Send to source' the
response will be sent to the port from which
the request was received.
UDP Initial Unsolicited Tx UDP initial unsolicited Tx port number 20000
Port (mode 1 only). Referenced in DNP3
Specification, Volume 7 as Piu
Outbound IP Address Outbound TCP/UDP Ip Address of third 10.100.100.1
party DNP master station.
Outbound TCP Port Outbound TCP listen Port number (dual 20000
mode only) of third party DNP master
station.
Inbound TCP Port Inbound TCP Port number (listening mode 20000
and dual only).
Keep Alive Time This parameter specifies the keep-alive 60
time value associated with TCP
connections. The keep-alive timer is a
mechanism used to detect broken TCP
connections. The timer is 'pinged' or reset
with this value whenever an inbound
message is received. If the timer expires
the IP AxisLink Router will send a keep-alive
message as described in section 4.3.3.1 of
Volume 7 of the DNP3 specification. If there
is no response to the keep-alive message
the actions in section 4.3.3.2 of the above
document shall be taken. The default value
is 60 minutes.
4. To configure the Link Layer:

a. Source Address - specifies the DNP network address of the slave device
with respect to all other devices communicating on the same physical
network (range of this address is 0 to 65519; default is 4).
b. Destination Address - specifies the DNP network address of the DNP
master station (not the slave); range of this address is 0 to 65519; default
is 3.
This address also designates where unsolicited messages from the slave
device should be sent (when unsolicited response is enabled).
c. Source Address Validate - when enabled, the slave device will respond
not only when it is specifically addressed but when the request comes
from the master specifically designated with the source address; values
are Not Checked or Checked;default is Not Checked).
5. To configure the Application Layer:
a. Application Layer Confirmation Mode - affects how the slave device
requests application layer confirmations when transmitting messages to
the master computer (default is EventOnly).
b. Application Layer Fragment Size - specifies the maximum size of an
application layer response; default is 2048 bytes.
c. Application Layer Confirmation Timeout - specifies how long the meter
will wait for an application layer confirmation from the master in
milliseconds (range from 500 to 60000 milliseconds [0.50 to 60.0
seconds]; default is 10000 [10 seconds]).
24. Components
6. To configure the Unsolicited Response:

Note: The TCP Listening Endpoint connection type does not support
unsolicited responses; Datagram (UDP) Endpoint and TCP Dual
Endpoint connection types support unsolicited responses.
a. Unsolicited Response Mode - indicates whether unsolicited responses
can be transmitted by the slave device:
• Disabled - default
• Enabled
b. If Unsolicited Response Mode is enabled:
1) Unsolicited Response Delay (ms) - specifies the maximum amount of
time between the detection of an event and the unsolicited response
containing the corresponding event data (range from 0 to 60000
milliseconds [0.0 to 60.0 seconds]; default is 20000 [20 seconds]).
2) Unsolicited Response Retry Delay (ms) - specifies the time, in
milliseconds, to delay after an unsolicited confirm timeout before
retrying the unsolicited response (range from 500 to 60000
milliseconds [0.50 to 60.0 seconds]; default is 5000 [5 seconds].
3) Unsolicited Max Retries - specifies the maximum number of unsolicited
response retries (range from 0 to 255; default is 3).
Note: Setting the value to 255 will cause unlimited retries.
4) Unsolicited Response Class 1 Events - specifies one condition under
which unsolicited responses may be transmitted (range from 0 to 255;
default is 5).
Specifically, an unsolicited response will be generated if unsolicited
responses are enabled by Unsolicited Response Mode = Enable, if the
slave device is not waiting for an application layer confirmation of an
earlier response, and if the number of class 1 events detected and not
yet reported or confirmed equals or exceeds this value.
5) Unsolicited Response Class 2 Events - for Class 2 events; see Class 1
Events above (default is 10).
6) Unsolicited Response Class 3 Events - for Class 3 events; see Class 1
events above (default is 25).
7. To configure Clock Synchronization
a. Auto Time Set Request - checking enables the DNP slave to request time
synchronization (values are enabled = No Time Request or disabled =
Time Request Enabled; default is disabled).
Note: Unsolicited Response Mode must be enabled for this to
operate.
b. DNP Clock Valid Period - specifies how long the local clock will remain
valid after receiving a time synchronization (range is 5 to 65535 in
minutes; default is 60).
Note: In IP AxisLink router Release 2.0, the router uses the time
synchronization method from EA_MS.
8. To configure Binary Outputs:
a. SBO Timeout period - specifies how long a select operation is valid before
the subsequent operate must occur (range is 5 to 65535 in units of 10’s of
milliseconds; default is 500).
b. Trip / Close mode select - when enabled, digital outputs 1 and 2 will only
accept trip/close control codes; when disabled (default), the valid control
codes are Level on/off and Pulse on/off. Disabled or Enabled.
24. Components
9. To configure Analog Inputs (1 and 2):

• Assignment [Source] - the analog quantity returned:
• Control Voltage - primary power supply voltage (Volts x 100)
• Battery Voltage - battery power supply voltage (Volts x 100)
• Event Class Mask [Class] - the change event assigned class:
• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1, 2
• Class 3
• Class 1, 3
• Class 2, 3
• Class 1, 2, 3
10.To configure Counters Points (1 to 4):
a. Assignment [Source] - the specific counter returned:
• Binary Input 1 State Changes
• Unassigned
b. Event Class Mask [Class] - the change event assigned class:
• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1, 2
• Class 3
• Class 1, 3
• Class 2, 3
• Class 1, 2, 3
11. To configure Binary Inputs (1 to 12):
a. Assignment [Ssource] - the specific Binary Input returned:
• ROM Check Error
• Configuration Error
• EEPROM CRC Error
• Clock Invalid Status
• NVRAM CRC Error
• Hardware Error
• Network Error
• Reserved
• Input 1 State
• Input 2 State
• Input 3 State
• Input 4 State
24. Components
b. Event Class Mask [Class] - is the change event assigned class.

• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1, 2
• Class 3
• Class 1, 3
• Class 2, 3
• Class 1, 2, 3
12.Save the component.
Event Logs Configuration component

The IP AxisLink router supports logging of events (up to 255 events). IP AxisLink
routers (2.0 and higher) support the following events:

No Event Clock Change by Web
Device Power Down1 Device Reboot Occurred
Device Power Up1 Device Firmware Updated
Time Changed (Old Time) Diagnostic Test Event
Time Changed (New Time) Primary Power Down1
Procedure Invoked Primary Power Up1
Configuration Change EEPROM Memory Initialized
Event Log Cleared Nonvolatile Memory Initialized
Daylight Savings Time On Digital Input 1 Transitioned High
Daylight Savings Time Off Digital Input 1 Transitioned Low
Pending Table Activation Digital Input 2 Transitioned High
Pending Table Clear Digital Input 2 Transitioned Low
Configuration Error Detected Digital Input 3 Transitioned High
Rom Failure Detected Digital Input 3 Transitioned Low
Nonvolatile Memory Failure Detected Digital Input 4 Transitioned High
Clock Error Detected Digital Input 4 Transitioned Low
Security Log Entry Made Digital Output 1 Driven High
Clock Change by C12.19 Digital Output 1 Driven Low
Clock Change by DNP3.0 Digital Output 2 Driven High
Clock Change by SNTP Digital Output 2 Driven Low
To configure event logs for the IP AxisLink router:
1. Open an existing Event Logs Configuration component.

— OR —
2. Check to enable logging for the specified events:
• Power down
• Power up
• Time changed (old time)
• Time changed (new time)
• Digital Input 1 transitioned high
• Digital Input 1 transitioned low
24. Components

• Digital Output 1 driven high
• Digital Output 1 driven low
• Digital Output 2 driven high
• Digital Output 2 driven low
Note: Other events supported by the IP AxisLink router are not
configurable and are always enabled.
Event Notifications component

The IP AxisLink router supports event notifications over the WAN connection. To
configure the Event Notifications component:
1. Open an existing Event Notifications component.

— OR —
Figure 24-230. Event Notifications component

24. Components
2. Enter the Exception Port used for notifications (default is 1153).

3. Enter the number of Exception Hosts (range of 0 to 4).
4. If one or more Exception Hosts are enabled, for each Exception Host:
a. Enter the AP Title for the host.
b. Enter the IP Address for the host.
c. Enter the Max number of retries (range of 0 to 255; default is 3).
d. Enter the Retries delay (min) (range of 0 to 65535; default is 1).
e. Enter the Exclusion period (min) (range of 0 to 65535; default is 0).
f. For each Exception Host, enter the Number of exception types to report
(range of 1 to 16; default is 1).
g. For each event, select the Exception Event from the drop list:
Events for which notification is available include the following:
• No Event • Clock Change by Web

• Device Power Down1 • Device Reboot Occurred
• Device Power Up1 • Device Firmware Updated
• Time Changed (Old Time) • Diagnostic Test Event
• Time Changed (New Time) • Primary Power Down1
• Procedure Invoked • Primary Power Up1
• Configuration Change • EEPROM Memory Initialized
• Event Log Cleared • Nonvolatile Memory Initialized
• Daylight Savings Time On • Digital Input 1 Transitioned High
• Daylight Savings Time Off • Digital Input 1 Transitioned Low
• Pending Table Activation • Digital Input 2 Transitioned High
• Pending Table Clear • Digital Input 2 Transitioned Low
• Configuration Error Detected • Digital Input 3 Transitioned High
• Rom Failure Detected • Digital Input 3 Transitioned Low
• Nonvolatile Memory Failure Detected • Digital Input 4 Transitioned High
• Clock Error Detected • Digital Input 4 Transitioned Low
• Security Log Entry Made • Digital Output 1 Driven High
• Clock Change by C12.19 • Digital Output 1 Driven Low
• Clock Change by DNP3.0 • Digital Output 2 Driven High
• Clock Change by SNTP • Digital Output 2 Driven Low
In addition to the above router events, the router’s gatekeeper module

can report the following events:
• MFG Meter Event Call
• LANOB Diagnostic
• LANOB Immediate Call
• LANOB Status Call
• LANOB Scheduled Call
• LANOB Power Restoration
• LANOB Power Outage
5. Save the component
Network component
The IP AxisLink router requires configuration of the follow items:
• Ethernet WAN network
24. Components
• DTLS and tunnel parameters to connect to the IP AxisLink Secure Tunnel

Server (or IP AxisLink server)
• HTTP settings for the router’s web server interface
• Serial Edge interface
Note: If you are connecting the router serially to a DA device you must
to configure these parameters.
• Clock source
Note: A DTLS tunnel is required if the router will support Edge DA
devices (Ethernet, Serial or IO).
See Ch. 5 “Commissioning the router” and Ch. 6 “Configuring for SCADA” in
TM42-4002 IP AxisLink Router Installation and Administration Guide for more
detailed information.
Note: Parameter names appearing in brackets [ ] are names as they

appear in the router’s web interface.
1. Open an existing Network component.
— OR —
Figure 24-231. Network component - C12.22 WAN configuration
2. To configure C12.22 WAN parameters:

Note: The IP AxisLink Router 2.0 supports only Static IP mode.
24. Components
a. Enter the IP Address for the Ethernet WAN interface.

b. Enter the Subnet Mask for the interface.
c. Enter the Default Gateway address.
3. To configure DTLS parameters for the DTLS tunnel:
a. From the DTLS Enable [Tunnel Admin State] drop list, select:
• Enable
Note: For DA functionality, must be Enabled so the Tunnel Manager
will attempt to keep an IP tunnel established with the IP AxisLink
server.
• Disable - default
b. Enter the Inbound Port number [DTLS Reconnect Port] - the port in the IP
AxisLink server (outbound) and the router (inbound); (default is 4433).
Note: Typically do not change the default value. The value must match
the server side Reconnect Port of the IP AxisLink server.
c. Enter the Server Port number [DTLS Server Port] - the port in the IP AxisLink
server (inbound) and the router (outbound).; (default is 4433).
Note: Typically do not change the default value. The value must match
the Server Port on the IP AxisLink server.
d. Enter the Server IP address or URL [WAN IP address] - address of the IP
AxisLink server used by the Tunnel Manager to establish a DTLS session.
See TM42-4001 IP AxisLink Secure Tunnel Server Installation and
Administration Guide for details.
e. Enter the Maximum Transmission Unit (bytes) [MTU] (the maximum IP
packet size, used by the IP tunnel; larger IP packets are fragmented when
traversing the tunnel); (default is 1500).
Note: Typically do not change the default value.
4. To configure Tunnel Control:
Caution: These values should only be changed if directed by your

IP AxisLink server administrator and router configuration
management. Changing a value in the router without changing
the corresponding value in the IP AxisLink server may result in a
loss of DA network connection.
Note: The parameters in the table below should not be changed. If

changed Elster support would need to change comparable
attributes in the IP AxisLink server.
a. Connect Delay Min (s) [Min Connect Delay] - the minimum number of
seconds between attempts to establish a tunnel connection (range of 0 to
65536; default is 10).
b. Connect Delay Max (s) [Max Connect Delay] - the maximum number of
seconds between attempts to establish a tunnel connection (range of
Note: The active delay value is doubled after each failed attempt to
establsh a tunnel and resets to the minimum after a successful
connection.
c. Fast Heartbeat Delay (.1s) - the number of tenths of seconds to delay
before sending a heartbeat message after receiving data through the
24. Components
tunnel. This heartbeat will confirm to the other side that the link is valid, if
no other data was sent (range of 0 to 65536; default is 20).
d. Fast Heartbeat Timer (.1s) [Fast Heartbeat Time] - the number of tenths of
seconds to wait for data (or heartbeat) after transmitting. If no data is
received, the link integrity check mode is entered.
(range of 0 to 65536; default is 120
e. Slow Heartbeat Delay (s) - the number of idle seconds to wait before
sending a heartbeat message (range of 0 to 65536; default is 7000).
f. Slow Heartbeat Timer (s) [Slow Heartbeat Time] - the number of idle
seconds to allow, before going into link integrity check mode (range of 0
to 65536; default is 7100).
g. Timer Link Down (s) [Link Down Time] - the number of seconds of not
being able to establish a tunnel session, before restarting the tunnel
manager services (range of 0 to 65536; default is 3600).
h. Timer Link Init (s) [Link Init Time] - the number of seconds to allow the
tunnel connect phase to run before timeout (range of 0 to 65536; default
is 600).
i. Timer Validation (s) [Validation Time] - the number of seconds before an
unanswered link validation request is to be considered a link failure
j. Handshake Request Retry (s) [Handshake Request Retry Time] - the initial
number of seconds to wait before resending handshake requests (range
of 0 to 65536; default is 10).
k. Tunnel Request Retry (s) [Tunnel Request Retry Time] - the number of
seconds to wait before resending tunnel management requests to the
server (looking for an ACK or response) (range of 0 to 65536; default is 2).
l. Tunnel Status Retry (s) [Tunnel Status Retry Time] - the number of seconds
to wait before resending status requests to the server (already received
ACK, looking for response) (range of 0 to 65536; default is 10).
m.Tunnel Request Expire (s) [Tunnel Request Expire Time] - the number of
seconds to wait before timing out on tunnel management requests to the
server (range of 0 to 65536; default is 45).
5. To configure HTTP settings for the router’s web server interface:
a. Http port [HTTP server port] - the TCP port that the web server listens on,
both the local USB/PPP interface and the remote interface (default is 80).
Note: This value can not be changed.
b. Response timeout (s) - the maximum time in seconds HTTP server waits
for a response (default is 20 sec).
c. Max Allowed Connections [Maximum allowed connections] - the
maximum number of HTTP connections. Backlog of connections for
listen() (default is 10).
Note: Elster strongly recommends not changing the default value.
d. Max keep-alive Requests [Max keep-alive connections] - the maximum
number of requests per persistent connection (default is 5).
e. Keep-alive Timeout (s) - the persistent connection timeout in seconds
(default is 1).
f. Session timeout - the authenticated session timeout, in seconds (default is
600).
24. Components

g. Trusted authentication mode - controls authentication mode for remote
connections:
• Trusted IP mode is enabled - access is only allowed form a trusted IP
address, no password is asked.
• Password authentication - [default] Password required to access.
h. Trusted Proxy IP address [Trusted auth IP address] - the IP AxisLink server
populates this IP address of a trusted remote HTTPS proxy server (for
example, EA_MS Interfaces server).
Note: This parameter is only used when Trusted Authentication mode
is Trusted IP.
i. Server Name [HTTP server DNS name] - the DNS host name.
j. Graphics Pkg URL [Graphics package URL] - the URL path to a graphic
package folder that hosts icons and images for the Web Configuration
Interface.
k. CSS URL [CSS style sheet URL] - the URL path to a CSS file for external style
customizations:
• Logging in locally
• Remote access thru EA_MS does not work this way.
l. Java script URL - the URL path to an external JavaScript file for user
interface customizations.
24. Components
Figure 24-232. Network component - Serial edge-interface configuration
6. To configure Serial Edge interface parameters for the RS-232 serial interface
of the router:
a. Enable Edge Device Interface [State]:
• Disabled - default
• Enabled
Note: This parameter must be enabled if the Edge device is serially
connected to IP AxisLink router.
b. Baud Rate - Serial interface baud rate (default is 9600).
Note: The value depends on Edge serial device configuration.
c. Parity - Parity bit setting values:
• None - default
• Odd
• Even
d. Stop Bits - number of stop bits:
• 1 bit - default
• 2 bits
Note: The value depends on the Edge serial device configuration.
e. Handshake Enable - Hardware handshake:
24. Components
• Off - default
• On
f. Interface Mode [Mode] - Sets the DNP network mode of operation.
• TCP Listening Endpoint - default
• Datagram (UDP) Endpoint
• TCP Dual Endpoint
Note: This setting depends on the third party DNP master station
configuration.
g. Depending on the selected Interface Mode, enter the following settings:
TCP Listening Endpoint Datagram (UDP) Endpoint TCP Dual Endpoint
1 Inbound TCP port 1 UDP receive channel port number 1 Inbound TCP port
2 UDP broadcast receive channel port 2 UDP transmit channel port number 2 Outbound TCP port
number 3 UDP transmit channel port mode 3 Outbound TCP/UDP IP Address
3 TCP Keepalive Time (s) 4 UDP initial unsolicited transmit port 4 UDP broadcast receive channel port
5 Outbound TCP/UDP IP Address number
6 UDP broadcast receive channel port 5 TCP Keepalive Time (s)
number
Parameters available for configuration include the following:

Metercat IP AxisLink router
Name Web interface Description Default Value
name
UDP receive UDP receive UDP receive port number (mode 1 only). 30000
channel port channel port Referenced in DNP3 Specification, Volume 7 as
number number Po.
UDP transmit UDP transmit UDP transmit port number (mode 1 only). 30000
channel port channel port Referenced in DNP3 Specification, Volume 7 as
number number Pm.
UDP transmit UDP Tx Port Mode UDP transmit port mode (mode 1 only). Send to
channel port • If set to Send to UDP_TX_PORT a solicited UDP_TX_PORT
mode message response will be sent to the port
number indicated by UDP_TX_PORT.
• If set to Send to source the response will be
sent to the port from which the request was
received.
UDP initial UDP initial UDP initial unsolicited Tx port number (mode 1 30000
unsolicited unsolicited Tx port only). Referenced in DNP3 Specification, Volume 7
transmit port as Piu.
Outbound TCP/ Outbound TCP/ Outbound TCP/UDP IP Address of third party DNP 10.100.100.1
UDP IP Address UDP Ip Address master station.
Outbound TCP Outbound TCP Outbound TCP Port number (dual mode only) that 30000
port Port is, the DNP port of third party DNP master station.
Inbound TCP port Inbound TCP Port Inbound TCP Port number (port for listening mode 30000
and dual mode only).
TCP Keepalive Keep-alive Time Keep-alive time for TCP connections in units of 60
Time (s) seconds (minimum is 5 seconds).
7. To configure the Clock Source:

a. From the Clock Source Selector drop list, select;
24. Components
• C12.19 Procedure - default

Note: For IP AxisLink routers functioning as gatekeepers within EA_MS,
the clock source must be C12.19 Procedure.
Note: In Release 2.0 of the router, only C12.19 Procedure is supported.
The router must be added to a sychronization schedule in
EA_MS
Note: If a Time Source other than C12.19 Procedure is selected and the
router is added to an EA_MS synchronization schedule, the time
source will automatically change to C12.19 Procedure.
• DNP Time Sync
Note: If DNP Time Sync is selected, the router’s time must be set by the
DNP SCADA master station.
• SNTP Client
Note: If SNTP Client is selected, an NTP/SNTP server may be polled by
the SNTP client.
b. If SNTP Client is selected, check SNTP Client Enabled to configure the SNTP
client parameters.
c. Enter the proper values for each SNTP parameter.
Note: For future use only. In this mode the IP AxisLink server would be
the SNTP server.
Note: Currently the SNTP client will only store Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC) with no daylight saving time adjustments.
The table below details the parameters and settings for configuring SNTP:
Item Description Default Value
Client Enabled If true, and the clock source is SNTP, the Disabled
SNTP client will actively be polling for
time.
Time Zone Enabled Note: Not used. Disabled
Future use. If true, the SNTP client will
add a fixed number of seconds to the
UTC time received.
Client DST Enabled Note: Not used. Disabled
Intended to selectively enable future DST
support.
Server IP or URL ASCII representation of the server 127.0.0.1
address (allowing for future DNS
support).
Server Port SNTP server UDP port (standard NTP/ 123
SNTP port = 123).
Timezone Offset Note: Not used. 0
Future use: If Time Zone Enabled is
enabled, the number of seconds to add
to the received NTP clock.
Sync Difference Defines the lower bound (in 30000
Minimum milliseconds) of the automatic time
correction range. If the difference
between the internal clock and the NTP
time is in the automatic time correction
range, the internal clock will be
adjusted.
24. Components
Item Description Default Value

Sync Difference Defines the upper bound (in seconds) of 4294967295
Maximum the automatic time correction range. If
the difference between the internal clock
and the NTP time is in the automatic
time correction range, the internal clock
will be adjusted.
Startup Random The maximum random delay in seconds 120
Delay before the initial startup query.
Response Limit The maximum wait time in seconds for a 60
server response.
Polling Frequency If a time query succeeds, the number of 86400
seconds to wait before polling again.
Poll Random Delay The maximum random delay in seconds 300
to add to the Polling Frequency.
Retry Frequency If a time query fails, the number of 240
seconds to wait before polling again.
Retry Random Delay The maximum random delay in seconds 120
to add to the Retry Frequency.
Client Retry Limit The maximum number of retries to allow 65535
before waiting for the next polling
window (applying Polling Frequency to
the original failure time).

A GLOSSARY
ADPU
Application Protocol Data Limit.
Adjusted Kd
Also known as the demand constant.
Adjusted Ke
Also known as the pulse constant or KYZ output constant. Ke value used by the
meter to convert pulses to unit-hours. Adjusted Ke is calculated and programmed
by Metercat. See Factory Ke.
Adjusted Kh
Also known as the watt-hour constant. Kh value used by the meter to convert
energy pulses to watchers. Metercat allows Adjusted Kh to be programmed into
A. Glossary
the meter. See Factory Kh.

Alarm Indication
One or more of the following alarm conditions that will trigger the relay:
Error - General Configuration Warning - End Of Calendar
Error - Carryover Warning - Improper Meter Engine Operation
Error - Power fail data save Warning - Service Voltage Test Failure
Error - Clock Warning - Service Current Test Failure
Error - EEPROM Access Event - Pulse Profiling Wrap
Error - Internal Communication (I2C) Event - Profile 1 Wrap
Error - Crystal Oscillator Event - Profile 2 Wrap
Warning - Low Battery Event - Event Log Wrap
Warning - Potential Indicator Event - History Log Wrap
Warning - Reverse Energy Flow Event - Rate Override
Warning - Demand Overload
Warning - Possible Tamper
Alarm Trigger
Error, warnings, and events that trigger an alarm call.
The following errors shall be enabled The following warnings shall be enabled or
or disabled for triggering alarm call- disabled for triggering alarm call-origination
origination, with default values of with default values of disabled:
disabled:· • Low Battery
• General Configuration • Reverse Energy Flow
• Carryover • Demand Overload
• Power fail data save • Low Outage Battery
• Clock • Possible Tamper
• EEPROM Access • End Of Calendar
• Internal Communication (I2C) • PQM Test Failure
• Crystal Oscillator • Improper Meter Engine Operation
• Table CRC • Service Voltage Test Failure
• Service Current Test Failure
• Demand Threshold Exceeded
• Potential Indicator
• Phase A, B, or C Sag
• Phase A, B, or C Outage
The following events shall be enabled or disabled for triggering alarm call-origination
with default values of disabled:
• Pulse Profiling Wrap
• Calendar Demand reset
• Button Press Demand reset
• Profile 1 Wrap
• Profile 2 Wrap
Alarm Trigger Period

Each alarm is only able to trigger an alarm call once every specified period. The
values are 1 to 24 hours in one hour increments with a default value of 24 hours.
The following alarms are exceptions, they trigger an alarm every occurrence:
Calendar Initiated Demand Reset, Button Press Demand Reset, qualified power
fail warning, and power fail warning (every power fail).
ALPHA Keys
A system combining hardware and software to upgrade existing electronic
meters (for example, A3 ALPHA meter). Keys allow addition of new functionality to
an existing meter for an additional fee.
alternate mode
Alternate mode displays a second set of quantities on the LCD. The alternate
mode is most often used for displaying non–tariff data, but it can be
A. Glossary
programmed to display any of the available quantities.

answer windows
The allowable time periods to accept calls. Answer windows length is between
00:01 and 23:59.
Apparent (K)
See apparent power.
apparent power
Also known as kVA, equal to Voltage Current or the amount of apparent work
(without loss due to inefficiency).
AP Title
Application-process Title; the unique address of a node in a C12.22 network. The
AP Title is used by C12.22 networks to propagate C12.22 messages from a source
to a destination over any network architecture. When the C12.22 application
protocol is implemented over a TCP/IP transport and networking layers, then the
IP networking layer is responsible for addressing the C12.22 application data
packet from source through destination. Even in a case of IP addressing, the AP
Title C12.22 address is still required and it is transmitted as part of the C12.22
message. The format of the AP Title is specified in the ANSI C12.22 standard.
autoread period
Either the number of days between each automatic reading of the meter or the
day of the month upon which each reading is to occur.
average power factor
The average power factor (PF) calculated from the kWh and kVAh accumulated
since the last demand reset.
billing data
Metered quantities used for billing.
Bit Rate range
The modem will attempt communications using the maximum bit rate and if a
connection is not successful, the modem will step down the bit rate and attempt
to connect. The modem will continue to step down the bit rate until the minimum
bit rate is tried. If communications is not successful, the session will fail.
call windows
The allowable time periods to place billing, alarm, or restoration calls. Call
windows length is between 00:01 and 23:59.
Charge Up Delay
The length of time to wait before sending the modem initialization string. A
default value of zero means no delay [primarily intended for communication with
devices other than a modem (for example, a radio transmitter might require time
to charge up after a power outage before it can transmit)].
class amps
the maximum rated current a meter is designed to handle.
Coincident
The recording of a specified demand and/or average power factor (if available) at
the time of another specified peak demand. For example, coincident kVAR
Demand is the kVAR Demand occurring during the interval of peak kW Demand.
Cold Load Pickup Period
The length of time, in minutes, to wait to perform a relay close or open operation.
communication session count
The number of data–altering communications occurring since the A3 ALPHA
meter was last programmed or was cleared of stored values and statuses.
complete LCD test
A display showing 8 in all the digit display areas and all annunciators on the LCD
A. Glossary
turned on. This confirms that all segments are operating properly.
component
A meter configuration program is subdivided into several components. Taken
together, these components form a complete configuration for a meter. These
components may be shared among programs. Sharing promotes more
modularity in the process of program development and management.
Component Editor
The tool within Metercat that enables a user to view and edit an individual
component outside of the context of the entire meter configuration program.
Connected
The relay is closed.
continuous cumulative
A display technique used with Demand calculations and similar to cumulative
Demand. The difference is that upon Demand reset, the continuous cumulative
Demand becomes the new base to which the new Demand will be added.
Cumulative Demand
Measurement that provides a security feature indicating if unauthorized demand
resets have occurred. Used to describe a method for storing and displaying
demand data. For example, upon demand reset, the present Maximum Demand
is added to the sum of the previous maximum billing period Demand values.
Cumulative Demand Type
Whether cumulative demand data is collected when a demand reset occurs or
continuously.
Current State
State of the relay before an open or close relay command is sent.
current transformer (CT) ratio
Also known as CTR or CT ratio, the ratio of the primary current to the secondary
current of a current transformer. For example, 400A to 5A would have a current
transformer ratio of 400:5 or 80:1. This value is programmable in the field by
Metercat, and it is used by the meter to convert instrumentation values to primary
values. This value is not used directly by the meter to compute energy values, but
it is used to compute Adjusted Ke in primary metering applications.
day types
The assignment of actual days of the week (Monday-Friday), Saturdays, Sundays,
and Holidays to one of four categories (that is, day types): Weekday, Weekend,
Holiday, and Special; have associated rate switch times (see switch times).
DCPM
Downloadable Communication Protocol Module.
delivered (Del)
Used to specify the energy delivered (provided) to an electric service.
demand
The average power (kWh) computed over a specific time.
Demand Forgiveness Outage Time
The minimum time span (in minutes) for a power outage required to initiate a
demand forgiveness period.
Demand Forgiveness Time
The time span (in minutes) during which maximum demand is not calculated
following an outage. The forgiveness period begins as soon as power is restored.
The default value of zero minutes disables this function.
demand interval
The time period over which Demand is calculated. Demand interval must be
A. Glossary
evenly divisible into 60 minutes.

demand only meter
An A3D meter or any other meter type that has been programmed as a demand
meter. See also TOU meter.
demand reset
The act of resetting the present Maximum Demand to zero.
demand reset count
The total number of Demand resets since the meter was last programmed.
demand reset date
The date of the last Demand reset.
Demand Reset Lockout Time
The amount of time the meter is locked after performing a demand reset. If set to
zero (0), the meter will not lock.
demand threshold
The present value of Demand which when reached initiates a relay closure or
other programmed action.
Device ID
The remote number for identifying each port; one (1) for the master; should be 1
for all applications where the meter has a dedicated communications link (for
example, a modem); should be in the range of 2-254 in applications where
multiple meters (but not the master) share a common communications link (for
example, a modem sharing unit).
Dialing Timeout
Specifies the duration (in seconds) of allowed inactivity between dialed digits. If
the limit is exceeded, the dialing process will timeout.
direct metering
Primary Metering with a Register Multiplier equal to 1.0.
Disconnected
The relay is open.
display quantity
Any value available for display on the LCD.
DLMS
Device Language Message Specification; protocol support by the A1800 ALPHA
meter on either remote ports 1 and 2. When DLMS and ANSI are selected the
specified port can communicate using either of the two protocols.
DNP
Distributed network protocol; used by the binary I/O interface of the IP AxisLink
router and by the Special Option Board component for the ACB version 3.7.
DTR
Data terminal ready.
Gatekeeper module
Formerly known as the Internal LAN controller (or ILC), the Gatekeeper module
allows an A3 ALPHA meter to act as a gatekeeper for data collection from REX
meters and other elements equipped with the EA_NIC (formerly known as the ILN)
as part of the EnergyAxis System.
EA_NIC
Formerly known as the Internal LAN node (or ILN), the EnergyAxis network
interface card (EA_NIC) allows a meter to communicate with a gatekeeper as part
of the EnergyAxis System.
EEPROM
Acronym for electrically erasable read only memory. This memory retains all
information even when electric power is removed from the circuit (said to be
A. Glossary
nonvolatile).
Effective Date
The date on which the program will take effect.
Enable Large Timeouts
Enables a response timeout of 15 seconds for C12.21 communications; otherwise,
the meter will use the default timeout of 4 seconds.
end of interval
Also known as EOI, the indication that the end of the time interval used to
calculate Demand has occurred. An EOI indicator is on the LCD and an optional
relay can be supplied to provide an EOI indication.
energy
Also known as Wh, is power measured over a period of time (Power × Time).
energy decimal places
See register multiplier.
error display
The method by which the meter displays an error message which consists of Er
and numeric codes. The code indicates a condition or conditions that can
adversely affect the proper operation of the meter.
Escape Sequence Inter-character Delay
For A3 ALPHA meters using a CDPD (cellular digital packet data) modem, the
escape sequence for inter–character delay (that is, the length of time required to
switch the modem from transmission mode to command mode).
event log
The event log records the date and time of demand resets, power failures, time
changes of the meter clock, and test mode entries. Demand only meters store a
sequential listing of events; TOU meters store the date and time that events occur.
Some events consist of two distinct events (such as a power outage which has a
begin-outage event and an end-outage event) and result in two event-records.
Exponential Response
Also known as thermal (lagged) demand. Thermal response demand provides a
continuous logarithmic average of the load with a time characteristic of 15
minutes; 15 minutes after application of a constant load, the demand indication
will be 90% of the final value.
Extended Memory Option Board
An option board that increases total memory in the meter by 1 MB.
external dial multiplier
Used when the transformer factor is larger than can be stored within the A3
ALPHA meter. When programmed with Elster meter support software for an
external dial multiplier, display quantities read from the meter LCD must be
manually multiplied by this value to yield proper readings.
factory default
Operating parameters that are programmed into the meter at the factory and
assure that the meter is ready for correct energy measurement when installed.
Factory Ke
Ke value set in the meter at the factory. Factory Ke is not programmable in the field
by Metercat and it is not used by the meter to compute energy. See Ke and
Adjusted Ke.
Factory Kh
Kh value set in the meter at the factory. Factory Kh is not programmable in the field
by Metercat. See Adjusted Kh.
four quadrant metering
The figure below illustrates energy relationships for delivered and received real
A. Glossary
power (kW), apparent power (kVA), and reactive power (kVAR).
function shortcut
A key or a sequence of keys that when pressed will trigger the execution of a
Metercat-defined function.
Gatekeeper Immediate Call
Events reported to EA_MS, for example, demand threshold exceeded and load
side voltage present.
Gatekeeper Power Outage
Allows the gatekeeper to call-in for Power outage and Power restoration
exception events generated by REX2 meters or A3 ALPHA meters with EA_NIC
meters only if enabled on the respective meter programming forms AND if the
EA_Gatekeeper Programming form has Enable meter outage call in or Enable
meter power restoration call in enabled.
Gatekeeper Scheduled Call
Events reported to EA_MS if the customer checks Enable registration exception
message call in option on the EA_Gatekeeper Programming form. Exception calls
occur once per day.
history log
The history log records the date, time, and which areas of the meter
programming were altered. The history log stores table information and
procedure ID for configuration-altering writes to the meter. Demand only meters
store a sequential listing of records; TOU meters record the date and time. The
meter records this information as an audit trail, maintaining a history of
programming changes made to the meter.
Hold Time
The length of time that an item remains visible on the meter’s LCD display.
Inactivity Timeout
The number of minutes (during a remote communication session) Metercat will
wait for a response from the modem.
Initial Dialing Delay
The maximum length of time the modem pauses between initiating a call and
starting to dial the number. The actual delay time is a random number of minutes
A. Glossary
between 0 and this value.

Instrumentation Profiling
The A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter can record up to 16 channels of
instrumentation data per set for the following quantities:
per phase voltage per phase voltage % THD1
per phase current per phase current % THD1
per phase kW per phase TDD1
per phase kVAR system kW
per phase kVA system kVAR - vectorial
per phase voltage angle system kVAR - arithmetic
per phase current angle system kVA - vectorial
per phase PF1 system kVA - arithmetic
per phase PF angle1 system PF - vectorial1
per phase fundamental current system PF - arithmetic1
per phase 2nd harmonic current system PF angle - vectorial1
per phase harmonic current (2nd – 15th) system PF angle - arithmetic1
per phase 2nd harmonic current magnitude line frequency
per phase fundamental voltage
per phase 2nd harmonic voltage magnitude
per phase 2nd harmonic voltage %1
1. This measurement cannot be recorded using the Average algorithm.
A1800 ALPHA reactive meters

kWh-Del kVAh-Q4
kWh-Rec KVAh-(Q1-Q4)
kWh-Sum KVAh-(Q2-Q3)
kWh-Net KVAh-(Q3-Q2)
kVAh-Del kVARh-Q1
kVAh-Rec kVARh-Q2
kVAh-Sum kVARh-Q3
kVARh-Del kVARh-Q4
kVARh-Rec kVARh-(Q1+Q4)
kVARh-Sum kVARh-(Q2+Q3)
kVARh-Net KVARh-(Q1-Q4)
kVAh-Q3
Interval
The demand interval must be evenly divisible by the demand subinterval and
evenly divisible into 60.
interval data
Also known as interval or load profiling, load profile records energy usage per a
specific time interval while the meter is energized. Load profile data provides a 24
hour record of energy usage for each day of the tariff period.
Interval length
Specifies the length of the profiling interval; zero (0) disables interval data
recording.
ITM1
Internal telephone modem release 1. Elster’s first internal telephone modem was
introduced in 1995.
ITM2
Internal telephone modem release 2. Elster’s second internal telephone modem
was introduced in 1997. It was Elster’s first meter to be capable of placing calls to
A. Glossary
indicate that a power outage has occurred.

ITM3
Internal telephone modem release 3. Elster’s third release of the internal
telephone modem introduced in 2003. This is the first telephone modem to
include extended memory (available only to A3 ALPHA meters) in addition to
outage reporting capabilities.
Intrusion Detection
The A3 ALPHA meter with ITM3, when it attempts to dial out, can detect when the
phone line is busy or, during a communication session, can detect when
someone (or another device) picks up an extension and will hang up to free the
telephone line.
Ke
Also known as the pulse constant and KYZ output constant. The amount of
energy per pulse available within the meter.
Kd
Also known as the demand constant. Directly related to Ke (pulse constant) and is
dependent on the user-configured demand interval length; represents units per
pulse per demand interval depending on the measured quantity to which you are
referring (watts, VA, or VAR).
Kh
Also known as the watthour constant. A meter constant representing the
watthours per output pulse on the optical port. Historically, Kh represents the
energy equivalent to one revolution of an electromechanical meter.
kVA
Kilovolt Ampere; for A3K (see apparent power) meters; kVA quantities (both
delivered and received) are recorded from the kVAh input lines.
kVAR
Kilovolt Ampere Reactive; for A3R (see reactive power) meters; kVAR quantities
(delivered or received) are recorded from the VARh input lines and further
segregated with respect to the last Wh pulse received. Delivered VARh pulses are
divided into Quadrant 1 and Quadrant 2 quantities and are based on the last Wh
pulse received. Received VARh pulses are divided into Quadrant 3 and Quadrant
4 quantities and are based on the last Wh pulse received. Whenever more than
one quadrant is referred to in a quantity, the result is the sum of the quantities in
both quadrants.
kW
Kilowatt; kW quantities are recorded directly from delivered or received Wh input
lines.
kW overload value
The kW threshold which, when exceeded, will cause the display of the kW
overload warning message.
KYZ Divisor
Also known as energy pulse divisor. An integer between 1 and 999 that is used to
scale the Factory Ke pulses for relay pulse outputs.
KYZ Value
A number that is between 0.000001 and 100.000000 and greater than the
meter’s Factory Ke that represents the energy pulse value (in kilo units) per pulse
for relay outputs.
LAN ID
A unique number of up to ten digits (maximum value is 2147483647) that is
displayed on the gatekeeper’s nameplate and identifies the particular
A. Glossary
gatekeeper and the meters that are registered to it.

light emitting diode (LED)
A small light that turns on and off (for example, a light that blinks as a hard drive
is accessed). ALPHA meters use an infrared LED which cannot be seen with the
naked eye.
line frequency
The frequency of the AC current on the transmission line, often used in
timekeeping applications in lieu of the internal oscillator. Depending upon the
country or region, the line frequency is either 50Hz or 60Hz.
Line Sharing
When the A3 ALPHA or A1800 ALPHA meter has an ITM3 with the RS-485 option
board, the meter can act like a MSU (modem sharing unit) with other connected
meters (via RS-485), therefore line sharing should be enabled. Additionally, if the
meter has an ITM3 and an EA_Gatekeeper option board, the meter can act like a
gatekeeper within the EnergyAxis System 900 MHz network.
liquid crystal display (LCD)
The liquid crystal display allows metered quantities and other information about
the A3 ALPHA meter and installed service to be viewed. Display quantities are
programmable through Elster meter support software.
load control
Also known as LC, used to describe a relay dedicated to operate based upon
entering a specific TOU rate period or when a Demand threshold is reached.
Low Current
The per phase low current per phase value will cause the Service Current test to
fail and display an error on the meter’s display when any single phase is below
the programmed low current limit. The value is expressed as a percent of meter
class amps. If all phases are below the absolute minimum current threshold, the
low and missing current failure will not be reported. It is assumed that this is a
valid, no-load condition. The exception to this assumption is for a 1-element
meter. In this case, the low and zero current warnings will display if the condition
exists.
Low Current Threshold
Indicates the threshold defined for detecting an under current condition on this
phase.
Maximum Demand
The highest demand calculated during any demand interval over a tariff period.
Maximum Duration
The maximum time that the condition can exist and be logged. Should the
condition exist for longer than this time, it will not be considered a sag event and
will not be logged.
Metering Application
See primary metering and secondary metering.
Min Lagging PF
The minimum lagging power factor threshold below which a lagging power
factor will cause a low power factor system service current test failure. Please see
the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for more details. The phase angle is
inversely proportional to the Power Factor (PF =Cosine theta) [where theta is the
angle between the given phase's voltage and current].
Min Leading PF
The minimum leading power factor threshold below which a leading power
factor will cause a low power factor system service current test failure. Please see
the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for more details. The phase angle is
inversely proportional to the Power Factor (PF =Cosine theta) [where theta is the
A. Glossary
angle between the given phase's voltage and current].

Minimum Duration
The minimum time that the condition must exist to be logged.
Minimum Outage Time to Trigger Call
The minimum length of time of the outage before the outage modem attempts to
place an outage call.
Minimum Retry Delay
The minimum number of minutes the meter waits between call-in retry attempts
within the call-in window. The time between attempts will actually be a random
number between this value and the Maximum Retry Delay. Setting the Minimum
and Maximum Retry Delays to the same number will specify a fixed retry interval.
Minimum Retry Interval
The minimum length of time between attempts made by the modem to
successfully complete an outage call.
Minimum Time to Reset Outage Detection
Minimum amount of time between power outages required to trigger an outage
call by the internal modem.
Maximum Dialing Delay
The maximum number of seconds the internal modem waits before attempting
to place an outage call.
Maximum Retry Delay
The maximum number of minutes the meter waits between call-in retry attempts
within the call-in window. The time between attempts will actually be a random
number between the Minimum Retry Delay and this value. Setting the Minimum
and Maximum Retry Delays to the same number will specify a fixed retry interval.
Maximum Off Hook Wait Time
The maximum length of time the internal modem waits off hook in an attempt to
place an outage call. If the call is not successful, the modem hangs up and
schedules another call attempt.
Modem Init String
The modem initialization string is the list of commands that the software sends to
the modem to initialize it and prepare it for a connection. The modem init string
typically sets options such as speed, error correction, compression, various
timeout values, and how to display results to you.
MSU
Modem Sharing Unit.
Multiple Meter Installation (MM)
More than one meter accessible at this phone number (for example, meters
attached to a MSU).
Net
Delivered quantity – Received quantity.
nonrecurring dates
Holidays or other special dates that do not occur on the same date every year or
in a repeatable pattern (for example, Easter).
normal mode
The default operating mode for a meter. Typically, normal mode displays tariff
data on the LCD following a programmed sequence.
optical port
A photo–transistor and an LED on the face of the meter that is used to transfer
data between a computer and the meter via pulses of light.
Over Current
The current threshold at which the meter detects an over current condition will
A. Glossary
trigger the Service Current test to fail and display an error on the meter’s display
when any single phase is over the programmed over current limit. The value is
expressed as a percent of meter class.
Overload
Occurs when the demand value exceeds the programmed overload value. It is
generally intended to inform a utility when the installation is requiring more
power than the service equipment was originally designed to handle. When this
warning occurs, an error of F1 010000 displays on the meter (see the A3 ALPHA
Meter Technical Manual, TM42-2190, for details). If you do not want a kW
overload flag, enter all zeros (for example, 000000, 00000.0, or 0000.00).
If the demand overload value has been set lower than appropriate for the
installation, this value can be changed by executing a function that includes a
Change Demand Overload task or by reprogramming the meter with a higher
overload value.
Packet Retries
The maximum number of times a packet can be sent to the recipient without
receiving an acknowledgement of receipt. When the packet has been resent the
maximum number of retries, the transmission fails with a communication error.
Packet Size
Size of a block of data transmitted over a communication network ensuring
reliability and efficiency of transmission.
Perform Self Read on Every Demand Reset
Select this option to have the meter perform a self read at every demand reset
regardless of how the demand reset is initiated (using the RESET button, using a
communication command, or using the meter calendar). This option must be
selected if self reads are desired on a meter configured for demand only (no
timekeeping) operation. For meters with timekeeping, self reads can also be
triggered by placing “self read” action entries in the meter calendar. Note that in
some circumstances, it might be desirable to have self reads triggered only by
the meter calendar and not by manual (button press or communicated) demand
resets.
Phase Indicator Threshold
The phase indicator threshold is the voltage level below which a phase voltage is
defined as not being present. The threshold value is given as a percentage of the
lowest per phase nominal voltage. For example, on a 240V, 3-element, 4-wire
delta service, the nominal phase voltages are 120V and 208V. If 90 % is selected
as the threshold, the voltage threshold is 90 % of 120V, or 108V, for all phases.
When the phase indicator threshold is exceeded the phase indicators on the
display will blink and a warning will also be displayed (and if alarm calling is
enabled an alarm call will be initiated). The phase indicator threshold is also used
to define the voltage level for sags.
Power Factor
The active power divided by apparent power; used to determine leading
(overcompensated) or lagging (inefficient) power usage.
power outage log
Display quantity that shows the cumulative total outage time in minutes.
PPP
Point-to-point protocol; used to provide a direct IP connection over the IP AxisLink
router’s local Mini-B USB port.
PQM
power quality monitoring.
PQM log
Also known as the Power Quality Monitoring log, Demand only meters store a
sequential list of records; TOU meters record: 1) the date and time when the PQM
A. Glossary
first detects a failure and the PQM number of the monitor; 2) the date and time
when the PQM no longer detects a failure and the PQM number of the monitor.
See the A3 ALPHA Meter Technical Manual for details on PQM identifiers.
PQM Version
Factory code indicating the version of the PQM test configuration (that is,
configured PQM tests) supported by meter.
previous billing data
Used to describe the tariff–related data recorded at the Demand reset.
previous season data
Used to describe the tariff–related data for the season preceding the present tariff
season.
primary metering
The measured energy and demand quantities multiplied by voltage and current
transformer ratios for the particular meter location. The displayed quantities
reflect energy and demand on the primary side of the instrument transformers.
primary rated
A condition where the energy and demand as measured by the meter are
increased by the current and voltage transformer ratios. Meter data will reflect the
energy and Demand actually transferred on the primary side of the instrument
transformers.
program
A meter program is the complete set of configuration settings that define the
meter's operation. This is not to be confused with the firmware program that
resides in the meter's memory, but instead it is the configurable settings that
customize the meter's operation.
Program Editor
The tool within Metercat that enables a user to view and edit the contents of a
meter configuration program. Components are presented within the context of
the program this means that the meter family, type, and program function are
known. The presentation of these components is adjusted to conform to the
program context.
program change date
The date when the meter program was last changed.
Pulse Divisor
Also known as Scaling Factor or Interval Scaling Factor; the divisor used to scale
down interval-by-interval input pulses for storage in the meter.
pulse ratio (P/R)
The number of pulses per equivalent disk revolution; on Elster ALPHA meters, 1
revolution is equal to 1 Kh period.
pulse relay
A relay used with the meter to provide output pulses from the meter to an
external pulse collector. Each pulse represents a specific amount of energy
consumption.
Rate Threshold
See Threshold.
Reactive (R)
See reactive power.
reactive power
Also known as kVAR; the amount of work lost due to inefficiency or the difference
between real power and apparent power.
real power
Also known as active power or kW, the actual rate of usage or the actual amount
A. Glossary
of work performed.
received (Rec)
Used to specify the energy received by the utility at an electric service.
recurring dates
Holidays or other special dates that occur on a the same date every year or in a
repeatable pattern (for example, New Year’s Day); recurring days include season
change days, and daylight saving time (DST) adjustment days.
register multiplier
Also known as: register constant, dial constant, dial multiplier, external multiplier,
and reading multiplier. The value that indicates the number of decimal places (for
example, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000, or 1000000) that the meter uses to
adjust its programmed Ke value to obtain a calculated value that can be stored in
the meter without losing significant digits. An artificial external multiplier applied
to readings. Since this value is multiplied by the reading to yield a scaled reading,
Metercat must divide the Factory Ke by this value to produce the reading that
eventually will be scaled externally. The register multiplier may be applied to
Factory Ke whether the metering application is primary or secondary.
relative timekeeping meter
A meter which keeps time relative to its last power restoration (usually refers to a
single rate demand meter that does not have a clock).
relay options
Certain meters coming equipped with option boards containing configurable
relay outputs that trigger under specified conditions (for example, KYZ, cold load
pickup, etc.).
remote
Used to configure remote communications using a modem.
RTS
Request to send.
Sag log
Meters with power quality monitoring capabilities can record the date, time and
phase of a voltage sag event (maximum 1 entry per second). Demand only
meters provide a sequential list of sag log events; TOU meters record the date,
time, and phases of any detected voltage sags. Also called See Voltage Sag Log.
season change
The date and time when a season change occurs (for example, from Spring to
Summer).
secondary metering
Secondary metering does not use the voltage or current transformer ratios in
calculating Adjusted Ke (unlike primary metering). The displayed quantities reflect
the energy and demand on the secondary side of the instrument transformers
even if the ratios are programmed into the meter.
Security Call Back
When the meter answers a call within its answer window, the only allowed
communication is a request for a return call (that is, the meter calls back to the
system using the specified phone number). The meter will immediately call back
after the current call is disconnected. This way a potential tamperer could not
access the meter even if they happened to get both the meter phone number and
the meter password because the meter will immediately hang up and dial the
specified billing or alarm phone number.
self read
Self read captures the current billing data and stores it in memory (a maximum of
15 self reads can be stored in the A3 ALPHA meter) so that data can be collected
or compared at a later date. A self read can be triggered by a calendar event
A. Glossary
(Special Date) in TOU meters or by a demand reset in any A3 ALPHA meter. To

program a meter to perform a self read on a demand reset see “Special Features
Set Version
Factory code indicating which tests are configured as a test set from tests
supported by the meter. One PQM Version can have many test sets with different
Set Versions.
special characters
Includes: ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + = - < > ?. Elster recommends that you not use
|(pipe), \(back slash), /(forward slash), and .(period) in identification numbers
because they are reserved characters for most operating system.
special dates
Listing of defined recurring and nonrecurring dates.
special option board
An option board (internal to the meter) which provides additional features and/or
functionality to the meter. An example is the Itron® 50ESS ERT.
Sportster Delay
If the host computer is using a US Robotics Sportster modem, the A3 ALPHA meter
will insert a delay character into the data transmission to prevent data corruption
at the host end.
Subinterval
Subintervals are used to calculate rolling demand and also contain an end of
interval boundary. The demand interval must be evenly divisible by the demand
subinterval. A maximum of 15 subintervals is allowed. The default value is 15
minutes. Block interval demand is calculated only if the subinterval size equals
the interval size.
Sum
Delivered quantity + Received quantity.
switch times
Those times of day at which demand and energy information will begin being
allocated to a particular rate type (A, B, C, or D) for a given day type within a given
season.
tariff data
See billing data.
test mode
The test mode stores tariff data in a secure memory location while the meter
measures and displays energy and demand data for testing purposes. The TEST
annunciator will flash while the test mode is active. When test mode is exited, the
accumulated test data is discarded and the original tariff data is restored.
TDD
Total demand distortion; distortion based on the root mean square value of the
fundamental current component at maximum demand.
THD
Total harmonic distortion; distortion based on the nominal system voltage; the
effect of nonlinear loads (such as, copiers, fax machines, computers, etc.) on the
linear sine waveform of the current or the voltage in an electrical power system.
Distortion can result in communication errors, overheating (for example,
transformer overheating and/or failing, tripping of circuit breakers and burning
out of electrical connectors) and consequent hardware damage.
Threshold
The demand values (kW, kVAR, or kVA) to be used to trigger the closing of a load
A. Glossary
control or customer alert relay.

time of use (TOU)
A billing rate that records energy usage and Demand data related to specific
times during the day; may also use season changes and special dates (for
example, holidays).
TOU meter
An A3T, A3K, A3Q, or A3R meter that is programmed to record energy usage and
demand data on a TOU basis. See also demand only meter.
timekeeping
The ability of the meter to record the time of the day.
Timeout
The length of time the modem will wait for a signal before retrying the
communication.
transformer–rated
A meter designed to work with current or voltage transformers. The maximum
current of a transformer–rated A3 ALPHA meter is typically 20A.
transformer factor
The combined factor of the current transformer ratio multiplied by the voltage
transformer ratio.
Turnaround Delay
The minimum length of time between the last byte of data has been received and
the ACK character is transmitted by the meter. This parameter is usually needed
for half-duplex media (radio frequency).
Utility ID
The unique identifier for the utility who owns and reads the selected meter.
Voltage Angle
Indicates the voltage angle present on the phase.
Voltage Sag Log
Meters with power quality monitoring capabilities can record the date, time and
phase of a voltage sag event. If multiple voltage sags occur in the same phase
within one second only a single event is recorded in the log. Demand only meters
provide a sequential list of sag log events; TOU meters record the date, time, and
phases of any detected voltage sags. The log records a maximum of 1 entry per
second.
voltage transformer (VT) ratio
Also known as VTR or VT ratio, the ratio of primary voltage to secondary voltage of
a transformer. For example, 12,000V to 120V would have a voltage transformer
ratio of 100:1. This value is programmable in the field by Metercat, and it is used
by the meter to convert instrumentation values to primary values. This value is not
used directly by the meter to compute energy values, but it is used to compute
Adjusted Ke in primary metering applications.
Web Services
A standard mechanism that allows a client and a server to communicate over a
network by exchanging XML messages formatted according to the SOAP (Simple
Object Access Protocol) standard.
WIC
Wide area network (WAN) interface card; used by Gatekeepers in the EnergyAxis
System.
Zero Current
The zero current threshold is the value below which the meter rounds non-zero
current values to zero. The threshold is a percentage of the meter class.
B REPORT SAMPLES
This appendix contains examples of the following reports:
• Viewset Report
• Program Report
• Function Completion Report
• Import Activities Report
• REX Meter ID Info Completion Report
• Call in log
• ASCII Export Files
• Interval per Row
• Day per Row
• Day per Column
B. Report Samples
Viewset Report
B. Report Samples
Program Report
B. Report Samples
Function Completion
Report
B. Report Samples
Import Activities Report

B. Report Samples
REX Meter ID Info

Completion Report
B. Report Samples
Call in log
B. Report Samples
ASCII Export Files Interval per Row
Interval Data (Profile)
ACCOUNT DATE TIME INT CHANNELS
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","17:00",15, 107.70,
179.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","17:15",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","17:30",15, 1620.00,
2700.30, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","17:45",15, 1620.60,
2700.90, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","18:00",15, 1620.60,
2700.90, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","18:15",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","18:30",15, 1620.30,
2700.60, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","18:45",15, 1620.30,
2700.60, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","19:00",15, 1620.30,
2700.60, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","19:15",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","19:30",15, 1620.30,
2700.30, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","19:45",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","20:00",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","20:15",15, 1620.00,
2700.30, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","20:30",15, 1620.00,
2699.70, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","20:45",15, 1619.70,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","21:00",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","21:15",15, 1620.00,
2700.00, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","21:30",15, 1619.40,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","21:45",15, 1619.70,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","22:00",15, 1619.40,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","22:15",15, 1620.00,
2699.70, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","22:30",15, 1619.40,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","22:45",15, 1619.40,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","23:00",15, 1619.70,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","23:15",15, 1619.70,
2699.70, 0.00
B. Report Samples
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","23:30",15, 1619.70,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","23:45",15, 1619.70,
2699.70, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/05","24:00",15, 1619.70,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","00:15",15, 1619.40,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","00:30",15, 1619.70,
2699.70, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","00:45",15, 1619.70,
2699.40, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","01:00",15, 1619.40,
2699.10, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","01:15",15, 1620.60,
2700.90, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","01:30",15, 1620.30,
2700.60, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","01:45",15, 1620.60,
2700.60, 0.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/06","02:00",15, 1620.30,
2700.60, 0.00
Interval Data (Instrumentation)
Instrumentation Profiling Set 1
"Account:" "Date" "Time" "Int.Len" "End Line Frequency"

"Average Phase A current" "Minimum Phase B current" "Maximum
Phase C current" "Average Phase A voltage" "Minimum Phase B
voltage" "Maximum Phase C voltage" "End Phase A kW" "Average
Phase B kW" "Maximum Phase C kW" "Average Phase A kVA" "End
Phase B kVA" "Maximum Phase C kVA" "End Phase A voltage angle"
"End Phase B voltage angle" "End Phase C voltage angle"
"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "12:12" 2 0.000000000000000

0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "12:14" 2
56.689600000000006 13.468000000000000 -3.923200000000000
6.626400000000000 -208.753600000000006 -285.683199999999999 -
108.873600000000010 27.257227200000003 -17.922161600000003 -
9.149022400000000 28.732916800000002 5.596483200000001
24.346347200000000 190.168000000000006 -174.284000000000020 -
142.098000000000013
"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "12:16" 2 -
13.321000000000002 -11.000000000000000 -22.543200000000002 -
16.990400000000001 -198.633600000000001 -217.940800000000024 -
435.001599999999996 21.549371200000003 -9.795744000000001
26.648473600000003 -30.364275200000002 14.999891200000000 -
19.588956800000002 -320.913999999999987 -91.927000000000007
120.483000000000004
"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "12:18" 2 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000
B. Report Samples
0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000 0.000000000000000

"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "12:20" 2
23.672000000000001 17.005600000000001 13.945600000000001 -
17.945600000000002 77.035200000000003 -212.608000000000004
180.224000000000018 3.580382400000000 10.691788800000001
34.587582400000002 7.785971200000001 -20.563468800000003
10.795568000000001 90.288000000000011 304.831999999999994 -
325.864000000000033
"77777777777777777710" "05/13/04" "13:18" 2 1.707200000000000
2.470400000000000 4.352800000000000 15.064000000000000
256.995200000000011 -558.536000000000058 -286.175999999999988
24.947507200000000 32.414547200000001 0.002531200000000
4.411881600000000 -38.762796800000004 -38.783046400000004
0.011000000000000 -326.612000000000023 -244.860000000000014
Day per Row
ACCOUNT, DATE, START TIME, END TIME, INTERVAL LENGTH (min),

CHANNEL #, [channel data]
"__________9988776655","01/11/06",
"00:01","24:00",15,1,1619.40,1619.70,1619.70,1619.40,1620.60,
1620.30,1620.60,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.
60,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.60,16
20.30,1620.30,1620.90,1620.00,1620.90,1620.90,1620.60,1620.90
,1620.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1619.70,1619
.40,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1619.40,1620.00,1620.30,1619.70,1
619.70,1620.30,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.30,1620.00,1620.0
0,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.30,162
0.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,
1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1620.30,1620.30,1620.60,1620.00,1620.
60,1620.60,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,16
20.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.30
,1619.70,1619.40,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70
"__________9988776655","01/11/07",
"00:01","24:00",15,1,1619.70,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,
1619.70,1620.00,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.
00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1620.00,16
19.70,1619.70,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.30,1620.60,1620.30
,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1619
.70,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1
619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1620.0
0,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,161
9.70,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,
1619.70,1619.70,1620.30,1620.60,1620.60,1620.90,1620.00,1620.
60,1620.60,1620.90,1620.30,1620.60,1620.30,1620.30,1620.60,16
20.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.60,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.60
,1620.00,1620.30,1619.70,1620.60,1620.60,1620.30,1620.00
"__________9988776655","01/11/08",
"00:01","24:00",15,1,1620.00,1620.30,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,
1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.
00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.60,1620.00,16
20.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.60,1620.30,1620.30
,1620.30,1620.00,1620.30,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1619.70,1619
.70,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1619.70,1620.00,1
619.70,1620.30,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.0
0,1620.00,1620.30,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,162
0.00,1620.00,1619.70,1620.00,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,
1619.70,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.
B. Report Samples
30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.30,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.00,16
20.00,1620.00,1620.00,1620.30,1619.70,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00
,1619.70,1619.40,1619.70,1619.70,1620.00,1619.40,1619.70
Day per Column
[time, ACCOUNT,INTERVAL LENGTH (min)

DATE1, DATE2,DATE3,etc.]
" ","__________9988776655",15
" ","01/11/05","01/11/06","01/11/07","01/11/08","01/11/
09","01/11/10","01/11/11","01/11/12","01/11/13","01/11/
14","01/11/15","01/11/16","01/11/17","01/11/18","01/11/
19","01/11/20","01/11/21","01/11/22","01/11/23","01/11/
24","01/11/25","01/11/26","01/11/27","01/11/28","01/11/
29","01/11/30","01/11/05","01/11/06","01/11/07","01/11/
08","01/11/09","01/11/10","01/11/11","01/11/12","01/11/
13","01/11/14","01/11/15","01/11/16","01/11/17","01/11/
18","01/11/19","01/11/20","01/11/21","01/11/22","01/11/
23","01/11/24","01/11/25","01/11/26","01/11/27","01/11/
28","01/11/29","01/11/30","01/11/05","01/11/06","01/11/
07","01/11/08","01/11/09","01/11/10","01/11/11","01/11/
12","01/11/13","01/11/14","01/11/15","01/11/16","01/11/
17","01/11/18","01/11/19","01/11/20","01/11/21","01/11/
22","01/11/23","01/11/24","01/11/25","01/11/26","01/11/
27","01/11/28","01/11/29","01/11/30",
[“START TIME1“,“START TIME2“,“START TIME3“, etc.]

" ", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01", "00:01",
"00:01",
[“END TIME1“,“END TIME2“,“END TIME3“, etc.]

" ", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00", "24:00",
"24:00",
[CHANNEL #,CHANNEL #,CHANNEL #, etc.]
" ", 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
B. Report Samples
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2,
2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,
2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,
2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,
2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3,
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
3,
[“TIME”,DATA,DATA,DATA,ETC.]
"00:15", 0.00, 1619.40, 1619.70, 1620.00, 1620.30,
1620.30, 1620.00, 1620.00, 1620.00, 1619.70, 1620.00,
1619.40, 1620.00, 1619.10, 1619.70, 1619.70, 1620.00,
1620.30, 1620.00, 1620.00, 1619.70, 1619.70, 1619.70,
1619.40, 1620.00, 1620.00, 0.00, 2699.40, 2699.70,
2700.30, 2700.30, 2700.30, 2700.00, 2699.70, 2700.00,
2699.70, 2699.70, 2699.10, 2700.00, 2698.50, 2699.40,
2699.70, 2699.70, 2700.00, 2699.70, 2699.70, 2699.40,
2699.70, 2699.40, 2698.80, 2699.70, 2699.70, 0.00,
0.00, 0.00,
C DISPLAYABLE CHARACTERS
Meter displays are limited in the characters they can display. The A3 ALPHA meter
LCD uses 7 segments for character formation whereas the A1800 ALPHA meter
LCD uses 16 segments.
See “Displayable Characters” on page 555 for a table of the characters the LCD
can display.
A3 ALPHA Meter LCD

The figure below details the areas of the A3 ALPHA meter’s liquid crystal display
(LCD).
Figure C-233. A3 ALPHA meter LCD

Operating mode
Quantity identifier identifier Display quantity
Display
identifiers Potential
indicators
A B C
Power/energy End of interval

Alternate energy indicator
units identifier indicators
Real energy
indicators
Table C-7. LCD regions

Item Description
quantity identifier identifies the displayed quantity. Using Elster meter support
software, a numeric identifier can be assigned to most quantities
(see “Selecting display items” on page 439). For instrumentation
quantities, the identifiers are fixed.
operating mode indicates that the meter is currently operating in either TEST or ALT
indicator mode.
C. Displayable Characters
Item Description
display quantity shows metered quantities or other displayable information (see
“Selecting display items” on page 439). Depending on the meter
family, from 3 to 8 total digits with up to 9 decimal places can be
used. These digits are also used to report the following:
• operational errors
• system instrumentation and service test errors
• warnings
• communication codes
phase indicators phase A, phase B, and phase C, respectively- correspond to a
phase voltage present on the meter connections.
• If the indicators are on, then all phase voltages are present.
• If an indicator is blinking, then that phase voltage is either
missing or below the defined threshold for voltage sag
detection.
EOI ten seconds before the end of the demand interval, the EOI
indicator will be turned on and remain on until the end of the
interval.
alternate/real indicates the directions of active and reactive energy flow (positive
energy indicators energy flow is energy delivered to the consumer load, while
reverse energy flow is energy received from the consumer load)
power/energy units indicates the unit of measurement for the quantity currently
identifier displayed on the LCD.
display identifiers more precisely identifies the information presented on the LCD.
Displayable Characters
The character display portion of the A3 ALPHA meter’s liquid crystal display (LCD)
is illustrated in the following figure. The quantity identifier and the display quantity
are programmable (“Selecting display items” on page 439).
A1800 ALPHA Meter LCD

The A1800 ALPHA meter supports up to 64 quantities for display on the LCD. The
LCD can be divided into different regions, as described in Table . See the
A1800 ALPHA Meter Series Technical Manual for more detailed information on the
LCD regions.
Figure C-234. A1800 ALPHA meter LCD
Item Description
quantity identifier identifies the displayed quantity. An alphanumeric identifier can be
assigned to most quantities (see “Selecting display items” on
page 439). For instrumentation quantities, the identifiers are fixed.
alternate display indicates that the meter is currently displaying items in the alternate
indicator display list
active COM port indicates that a communication session is in progress and the
indicators communication port that is being used: either COM 0, COM 1 or
COM 2
power/energy units indicates the unit of measurement for the quantity currently
identifier displayed on the LCD.
Display indicators indicates whether the meter is currently doing the following:
• accumulating in tariff (T1 - T4)
• has reached the end of an interval (EOI)
• compensating for transformer line loss (LC)
• indicating that either the terminal cover (TC) or the meter cover
has been removed
• is operating in test mode (TST)
display quantity shows metered quantities or other displayable information (see
“Selecting display items” on page 439). From 3 to 8 total characters
with up to 9 decimal places can be used. These digits are also used
to report the following:
• operational errors
• system instrumentation and service test errors
• warnings
• communication codes
display identifiers more precisely identifies the information presented on the LCD.
Item Description
energy direction indicates the directions of active (P) and reactive (Q) energy flow
indicators (positive energy flow is energy delivered to the consumer load,
while reverse energy flow is energy received from the consumer
load)
error indicator indicates either of the following:
• flashes when any error flag is set
• remains on if a displayable warning flag is set and no error
exists
low battery if the indicator is turned on, the battery warning flag has been set.
indicator
phase indicators L1, L2, and L3 (phase A, phase B, and phase C, respectively)
correspond to a phase voltage present on the A1800 ALPHA meter
connections.
• If the indicators are on, then all phase voltages are present.
• If an indicator is blinking, then that phase voltage is either
missing or below the defined threshold for voltage sag detection.
D RELAYS
KYZ pulse output relays If one or more relay outputs are configured for KYZ (energy) pulse output1,
Metercat allows you to use a KYZ Divisor to configure energy output pulses based
on a positive, non-zero integer divisor applied to the Factory Ke to calculate the
quantity of energy per pulse.
KYZ divisor  Factory K e = KYZ pulse output
For example, when using a pulse divisor of 24 with an A3 ALPHA meter with a
Factory Ke equal to 0.075. You would multiply the Factory Ke by the pulse
multiplier to calculate the watthour value per pulse (1.80 Wh/pulse or 0.00180
kWh/pulse).
24  0.075 = 1.8
Alternatively, in A3 ALPHA meters (with firmware version 3.01 or later) and A1800
ALPHA meters with KYZ Value (pulse value) enabled (see “Setting programming
options” on page 47), Metercat allows you to use a positive, non-zero KYZ Value
to configure energy output (in kilo units) relays to generate output pulses based
on a configured amount of energy (in the range of 0.000001 to 100.000000) per
pulse.
For example, if you want a single output pulse to indicate 2.0 Wh output:
KYZ pulse output
KYZ value = ------------------------------------------
1000
2.0 Wh
KYZ value = ----------------- = 0.002
1000
You would enter a KYZ Value of 0.002000 to have one pulse represent the
equivalent of 0.002 kWh.
Note: KYZ Value cannot be less than the meter’s Factory Ke expressed
in kilo units (that is, the Factory Ke / 1000). In the example
described above, the meter has a Factory Ke of 0.075.
Therefore, the KYZ Value must be greater than 0.000075 (or
0.075 / 1000).
Note: A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meters will accumulate energy
measurements for each KYZ output and issue a pulse at the
appropriate times while carrying remainders to the next pulse
accumulation.
Note: Elster recommends using the 3-wire relays (A, B, C, D), if
available, for energy pulse outputs.
Relay E and Relay F are two-wire relays driven by the meter over an internal
communications bus and are primarily intended for use as control relays (for
example, demand threshold, EOI, etc.). A two-wire relay may be used for energy
pulse outputs but not for testing meter accuracy.
1. If no relays are configured for KYZ output, KYZ output is disabled.

D. Relays
Note: Elster does not recommend using energy pulses from a two-
wire relay for testing meter accuracy.
Note: Elster recommends that energy pulses from a two-wire relay
not be operated at speeds greater than 10 pulses per second.
Relay options Relays are only applicable to meters containing one or two option boards that
include relay outputs. Up to six relays (A-F) can be configured for an A3 ALPHA
meter.
3 Wire Form C 2 Wire Form A

• Relay A • Relay E
• Relay B • Relay F
• Relay C
• Relay D
Wiring diagrams
Relay A
N C Yellow
Y
N O Black Z R elay A
COMMON R ed K
Relay B
NC Wht/Blk Y
NO Blue Z
Relay B
COMMON Orange (2 relays)
K
NC Wht/Blk Y
NO Blue Relay B
Z
COMMON Red (>2 relays)
K
Relay C
N C Violet Y
N O W hite Z Relay C
CO M M O N Red K
D. Relays
Relay D
NC Gray Y
NO W ht/Brn Z Relay D
COMMON Red K
Relay E
NO Orange EOI Relay E

COMMON Red K
Relay F
NO Brown LC1
COMMON Green
Relay F
LC2
E METER EVENTS, ERRORS &
WARNINGS
The following tables detail A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter error and warning
conditions that are reported on the Status view (see “Status view” on page 302) by
Metercat:
• Conditions tab
• Events
• Warnings
• Errors
• EnergyAxis Option tab (A3 ALPHA meters only)
• A3 ALPHA Meter with EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC Errors
• A3 ALPHA Meter with Gatekeeper or EA_NIC status
See the REX Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2210), the REX2 Meter Technical
Manual (TM42-2220), and the gREX Meter Technical Manual (TM42-2420). A PDF
of each document is located on the Metercat Installation CD in the
\Documentation\REX folder) for information on REX, REX2, and gREX meter errors
and statuses.
Meter Series Technical Manual (TM42-2410) for details on the events, errors, and
warnings reported by the meter.
Events The following table details those events that Metercat reports in the Conditions
tab of the Status view from an A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter.
Event Meter LCD Description

Calendar Demand reset None Calendar initiated demand reset occurred.
Season Change Occurred None Season change occurred.
Self Read Occurred None Self read occurred.
Pending Table Activated None Pending Table activated.
Time Change None Time change occurred.
Button Press Demand reset None Button press demand reset occurred.
Button Press Clear Data None Button press clear data occurred.
Event Log Wrap None The event log has overflowed.
Pulse Profiling Wrap None Indicates that pulse profiling data has overflowed (memory has wrapped).
Profile 1 Wrap None Indicates that Set 1 Instrumentation profiling data has overflowed (memory
has wrapped).
E. Meter Events, Errors & Warnings
Event Meter LCD Description

Profile 2 Wrap None Indicates that Set 2 Instrumentation profiling data has overflowed (memory
has wrapped).
Demand Threshold Exceeded F2-000200 Indicates that the demand has exceeded the programmed demand
threshold.
History Log Wrap None Indicates the history log overflowed (memory has wrapped) or would have
overflowed if overflow was not inhibited.
Sag Log Wrap None Indicates the sag log has overflowed (memory has wrapped).
Rate Override None Indicates the TOU tier is currently being overridden (real-time pricing
application).
PQM Log Wrap None Indicates the PQM log has overflowed (memory has wrapped).
Button Press Test Mode Activation None Indicates the meter has been put into test mode since the last clear event
Occurred flags or clear data task was executed. The event can be cleared by
executing either the Clear Event Flags task or Clear Data task.
Metercat Installation CD in the \Documentation\REX folder) for information on REX
meter errors and statuses.
Warnings The following table details those warnings that Metercat reports in the Conditions
tab of the Status view from an A3 ALPHA (preceded by ‘F’) and A1800 ALPHA
(preceded by ‘W’) meter.
Warning Meter LCD Description Action to take

Low Battery F1-000001 Indicates the battery test is enabled and the Replace the battery. This warning message
W1-000001 measured battery voltage is less than the is not relevant to demand only units.
configured threshold.
Improper Meter Engine F1-000010 Indicates that the meter engine program If the meter engine is successfully
Operation W1-000010 may be corrupt or is not executing correctly. reinitialized, then the warning code will be
This warning condition is typically triggered automatically cleared from the LCD. If the
when the microcontroller reinitializes the code continues to be displayed on the LCD,
meter engine. the meter should be returned to the factory
for repair or replacement.
Reverse Energy Flow F1-000100 Indicates the meter measured twice the Kh If the service being metered normally
W1-000100 value in reverse energy flow (Whrev) in a returns energy to the utility, disable this
single demand interval. warning using Metercat. If the service
being metered normally does not return
energy to the utility, investigate the cause
for the reverse direction pulses and take
action as required. To clear the warning,
correct the condition and wait one demand
interval or manually reset the demand.
Potential Indicator F1-010000 Phase voltage error. Indicates that a Check the voltages of the different phases
W1-010000 recognized phase voltage is below its low to determine which one(s) is missing. Then
voltage threshold. correct the problem causing the missing
Note: Metercat indicates that phase that voltage.
is missing - Phase A, Phase B, and
Phase C.
Demand Overload F1-100000 Indicates that demand overload is Action is determined by the utility.
W1-100000 exceeded.

Service Current Test Failure F2-000002 Indicates the last occurrence of service
W2-000002 current test failed.
Line Frequency F2-002000 Indicates that the line frequency is Action is determined by the utility.
W2-002000 configured to be used as the time base, and The meter will use the crystal oscillator for
it was found to be more than 5 % off the timekeeping until the line frequency returns
nominal frequency. to within 5 % of nominal.
PQM Test Failure F2-020000 Indicates that one or more PQM tests have Use the meter system instrumentation
W2-020000 detected a value outside the programmed displays or read the meter using Metercat
thresholds. to gain additional information on the
specific PQM test causing the problem.
The code will be automatically cleared
once PQM conditions return to a value
within the programmed thresholds.
End Of Calendar F2-200000 Is Displayed on a configurable number of Program the meter with a new Special
W2-200000 days prior to the last nonrecurring date in the Dates component. See “Special Dates
meter calendar. component” on page 492 and “Program
task” on page 134).
Read without Power W3-000001 This code indicates that the Read without Contact Elster if this warning is displayed
Battery Discharged Power battery, which is used only to enable on the display.
(A1800 ALPHA meter only) the Read without Power mode during an
outage, failed the meter’s most recent self
test.
Read without Power mode W3-000030 This code indicates that the meter is This code is cleared automatically when
active (A1800 ALPHA meter operating in the Read without Power mode. the meter exits the Read without Power
only) mode.
Bad Display Item None Indicates that an item in a display list is Contact Elster if this error occurs.
invalid.
Low Outage Battery None If the outage modem is configured to make Replace the battery. To clear the warning,
outage calls, indicates that the outage reset the demand or communicate to the
modem has reported a low battery. meter using Metercat.
Modem not None Indicates the outage modem is expected but Contact Elster if this error occurs.
communicating with meter the meter can no longer communicate with
it.
Outage modem None Indicates that the outage modem has Contact Elster if this error occurs.
configuration reported a checksum error.
Outage modem internal None Indicates that the outage modem has Contact Elster if this error occurs.
test failure reported a self test error.
Possible Tamper None The meter records the number of failed Action is determined by the utility.
password attempts that were used in trying
to access the meter. An internal warning will
be generated if ten failed password attempts
occur since the last demand reset. This
warning can be used to control a relay
output or to trigger an alarm call.
Possible Tariff Data None Indicates possible corruption of the tariff Action is determined by the utility.
Corruption data. This may occur if a communication
session is abnormally terminated while
writing data to the billing registers (for
example, register edit).
Service Voltage Test Failure None Indicates the last occurrence of service Contact Elster if this error occurs.
voltage test failed.

Write Protect Override None For meters that are write protected, this Contact Elster if this error occurs.
indicates that the meter tables are
temporarily unlocked.
XMB Not Communicating None Indicates the extended memory option Contact Elster if this error occurs.
with Meter board is expected but the meter can no
longer communicate with it.
Service Disconnect Switch Indicates the state of the internal polyphase Use Metercat’s A3 Connect Service task to
is opened service control switch as opened (that is, the connect service to the meter, if appropriate.
meter is disconnected).
Errors The following table details those errors that Metercat reports in the Conditions tab
of the Status view from an A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA meter
Error Meter LCD Description Action to take

Carryover Er1-000001 Indicates a failure of a RAM checksum test Record all displayed quantities, then power
on data stored in the meter’s volatile RAM down the unit, replace the battery, reapply
during a power failure. power to the unit, and reset time and error
statuses using Metercat. If the error still is
displayed, return the unit to the factory for repair.
Crystal Oscillator Er1-000010 Indicates that a problem has occurred Return the meter to the factory for repair or
with the crystal oscillator. Timekeeping replacement.
may be inaccurate.
Table CRC Er1-000100 Indicates a possible error in the meter’s Reprogramming the meter with Metercat may
programming. This code might appear if a correct the problem. If the error code displays
communications interruption occurs after reprogramming, return the meter to the
during meter programming. Depending factory for repair or replacement.
on which area of the meter is affected,
billing data may not be reliably
accumulated while this error condition
exists.
Internal Er1-001000 Indicates the meter had an internal Return the meter to the factory for repair or
Communication (I2C) communication error. replacement.
EEPROM Access Er1-010000 Indicates the meter had a problem Return the meter to the factory for repair or
accessing its nonvolatile EEPROM. replacement.
General Configuration Er1-100000 Indicates a problem with the meter’s Reprogram using Metercat to correct the errors.
configuration or program.
Security Configuration Er2-000002 Indicates an error is present in the meter’s Contact Elster if this error displays on the LCD.
security configuration.
ROM Failure Er2-020000 Indicate that an attempt was made to re- Re-FLASH the meter firmware.
FLASH the firmware but the attempt was
incomplete.
Security CRC Er2-000020 Indicates a Password CRC (cyclic Contact Elster if this error occurs.
redundancy check) error
Security CRC Er2-000200 Indicates a CRC (cyclic redundancy check) Contact Elster if this error occurs.
error involving the C12.21 Authenticate
Service.
Security Configuration Er2-000002 Indicates a security configuration error. Contact Elster if this error occurs.
Error Meter LCD Description Action to take

Power fail data save Er2-200000 Indicates that an EEPROM error was Return the meter to the factory for repair or
detected. replacement.
Clock Er3-030000 Set if the time can not be maintained over The meter battery may need to be replaced, and
a power fail and timekeeping is enabled. the error will need to be reset using Metercat. If
This error will almost always occur the error code is still present, the meter must be
simultaneously with a Carryover error (Er1- returned to the factory for repair or replacement.
000001).
Display Locked by a Er3-300000 Indicates that the display is locked by a Use Metercat or the alternate display mode to
Warning Condition warning condition. display the warning code. Use the code to
determine the cause for the warning condition
and the corrective action required.
Metercat Installation CD in the \Documentation\REX folder) for information on REX
meter errors and statuses.
A3 ALPHA Meter with To have the meter’s LCD display the EA_Gatekeeper or EA_NIC error codes, you
EA_Gatekeeper or must add the REX LAN item EA_Gatekeeper Error to the meter’s programmed
display list (see “Displaying EnergyAxis errors and statuses” on page 435).
EA_NIC Errors
The following table details the errors that can occur in the (EA_Gatekeeper and
EA_NIC option boards and Metercat reports in the in the EnergyAxis Option tab of
the Status view.
EA_Gatekeeper Error Meter LCD1 Description Action to take

Clock Error iii-000001 Indicates that either the meter has lost it's Replace the meter battery and perform an
time or the EA_Gatekeeper cannot EA_Gatekeeper clear status command using
communicate with the meter. In this state, all Elster meter support software. If the error code
the nodes on the network will be put in displays after the battery has been replaced,
relative time mode and they will record all return the A3 ALPHA meter with EA_Gatekeeper
energy in the default tier. option board to Elster for repair or replacement.
Carryover Error iii-000010 Indicates that the EA_Gatekeeper has lost Replace the battery using procedures detailed
it's battery-backed RAM after a power in IL42-4001. Clear the EA_Gatekeeper option
failure (usually occurs because the meter's board error using Metercat.
battery died).
Table CRC Error iii-000100 Indicates that one or more of the Reprogramming the meter with Metercat may
configuration tables in the EA_Gatekeeper correct the condition. If the error code displays
has a CRC that does not match what is after reprogramming, return the A3 ALPHA
recorded (usually means that table has not meter with EA_Gatekeeper option board to
been written yet). Elster for repair or replacement.
Configuration Error iii-001000 Indicates that one or more of the Reprogram using Metercat to correct the error.
configuration tables in the EA_Gatekeeper Contact Elster if this error code continues to be
has been set up incorrectly. displayed on the LCD.
Shared Memory Error iii-010000 Indicates that either the amount of data set Reprogram the meter using Metercat. Contact
up for shared memory exceeds the amount Elster if this error code continues to be
of physical memory or the shared memory displayed on the LCD.
configuration has changed and a Clear
Data task has not been executed.
Power Fail Data Save iii-100000 Indicates that the meter did not finish it's Reprogram the meter and clear the data from
Error power down handling on a power failure the EA_Gatekeeper option board. Contact Elster
(could indicate a hardware problem with if this error code continues to be displayed on
the EA_Gatekeeper). the LCD.
1. where iii is the 3 digit Display ID entered in the Display subcomponent.
A3 ALPHA Meter with To have the meter’s LCD display the Gatekeeper or EA_NIC status codes, you must
Gatekeeper or EA_NIC add the REX LAN item EA_Gatekeeper Status to the meter’s programmed display
list (see “Displaying EnergyAxis errors and statuses” on page 435).
status
The following table details the statuses that can occur in the (EA_Gatekeeper and
the EA_NIC option boards and Metercat reports in the in the EnergyAxis Option
tab of the Status view.
EA_Gatekeeper Meter LCD1 Description Meaning

LAN Node Type iii-000000 Indicates the meter is functioning as a Node
node.
iii-000001 Indicates the meter is functioning as a RF Gatekeeper
gatekeeper (for REX meter data).
1. where iii is the 3 digit Display ID entered in the Display subcomponent.
See the REX2 Meter Technical Manual (a PDF of the document is located on the
Metercat Installation CD in the \Documentation\REX folder) for information on
REX2 meter errors and statuses.
F CONFIGURING THE E-WIC
Configuring the E-WIC The E-WIC option board is configured using Elster meter support software,
special option board Metercat. To configure the E-WIC:
1. In Metercat, create a new component using the Special Option Board type.
Figure F-235. Special Option Board component (C12.22)
2. Select A3 ALPHA meter as the Meter Family.

3. Select the appropriate Meter Type:
• K (Apparent Power)
• Q (Q-hour Power)
• R (Reactive Power)
4. Select the appropriate Program Type:
• Single Rate Demand (No Timekeeping)
• Time of Use
F. Configuring the E-WIC
5. To configure for C12.22 communications, select ACB Version 3.x/Wired-WIC

from the Special Option Board Format drop list (see “Configuring for C12.22”
on page 568).
— OR —
To configure for C12.21 communications, select ACB Version 2.x from the
Special Option Board Format drop list (see “Configuring for C12.21” on
page 575).
To verify the version of the Special Option Board, perform a diagnostic read
and refer to the Special Option Board view > Firmware Version.Revision.
Configuring for C12.22

To configure the E-WIC for C12.22 protocol communications:
1. Select ACB Version 3.x/Wired-WIC from the Special Option Board Format
drop list.
2. Select Ethernet as the WIC Type.
3. To configure ACB Network Port Parameters, select C12.22 as the Protocol.
Proceed to Configuring C12.22 parameters.
Configuring C12.22 parameters

To configure C12.22 Specific Parameters:
1. IFor using a static IP address:

a. Enter the IP Address assigned to the WIC (for example, 192.168.1.2).
In most cases where the Ethernet WIC connects to a modem or radio, a
private IP address is required.
b. Enter a valid Subnet Mask (for example, 255.255.255.192).
For example, if the Mask is 255.255.255.255, the incoming host IP
Address must exactly equal the Allowed Host IP Address.
If the Mask is 255.255.255.0, the incoming host IP Address must equal
the first three IP Address groups (octets) with the fourth octet group having
any value allowing for a range of valid host IP Addresses.
The mask algorithm works as follows:
If the Mask & inbound IP Address = Mask & Allowed Host IP Address
(where & is a bitwise AND operation) then the inbound IP Address is
allowed.
c. Enter the Default Gateway IP address (the IP address to which the WIC
directs its outbound communications).
Note: The Default Gateway IP address is needed for outgoing
messages.
2. Enter the C12.22 Meter Port Number (IANA default is 1153).
Port 1153 is registered with the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)
for ANSI C12.22 internet traffic and is therefore recommended by Elster.
However, other port numbers may be used. However, if this value does not
equal 1153, then the E-WIC will no longer conform to ANSI C12.22 standards.
CAUTION: Elster strongly recommends using the default value.

The port number that the head-end software will use (together with the
network-assigned IP address) to communicate with the WIC and A3 ALPHA
meter. Also known as the C12.22 listening port for the WIC. EA_MS will use
this port to contact the meter. With the possible exception of the Telnet port,
no communications to any other port will be accepted.
3. Enter the Telnet Port Number (default is 23).
Note: The E-WIC does not currently support Telnet connections.
4. Enter the Connection Activity Time (default is 255 seconds).

The E-WIC will terminate a C12.22 connection if the connection is idle longer
than this time (in seconds). The connection activity timer is reset to this value
whenever activity occurs on the established connection.
5. Enter the Channel Traffic Timeout (default is 40 seconds).

This parameter is related to the communication process the WIC uses to
obtain data from other devices/options within the meter. This parameter is
the traffic timeout (in seconds) associated with this inter-device
communication.

Figure F-236. Special Option Board - C12.22 Specific Parameters
Proceed to Configuring the host access control list.
Configuring the host access control list

The purpose of the ACL is to accept IP traffic from known sources only, blocking
traffic from unwanted sources. The IP Address and corresponding Mask define a
range of allowable inbound (source) IP Address from which the E-WIC will accept
IP packets. The Mask acts as a subnet mask in defining a range of valid
addresses based on the IP address. If the inbound Address is outside of the
allowable range, any connection established to the E-WIC will be immediately
closed.
To configure the Host Access Control List:
CAUTION: Use Access Control Lists with care. If a desired host does not fall
within one of the allowed host IP address/Mask ranges, that
host will not be able to communicate with the E-WIC. For
example, Metercat installed on a laptop computer may use a
dynamically assigned IP address that does not fall in the ACL.
Using an ACL in this case would prevent Metercat from
accessing the WIC-enabled device.
1. Check to Enable Source Checking.

2. For each Allowed Host (to a maximum of 8):
a. Enter a valid IP Address (for example, 192.168.5.215; 0.0.0.0 indicates the
host IP Address is not used).
b. Enter a valid Mask (for example, 255.255.255.0).
For example, if the Mask is 255.255.255.255, the incoming host IP
Address must exactly equal the allowed host IP Address (for example,
192.168.5.215).
If the Mask is 255.255.255.0, the incoming host IP Address must equal
the first three IP Address groups (octets) with the fourth octet group having
any value allowing for a range of valid host IP Addresses.
If the Mask & inbound IP Address = Mask & Allowed Host IP Address
allowed.
c. Repeat for each Allowed Host (to a maximum of 8).
Figure F-237. Special Option Board - Host Access Control List
Proceed to Configuring exception notification.
Configuring exception notification

To configure Exception Notification to one or more hosts (to a maximum of 4):
1. Check to Enable Notifications.

2. Enter the Exception Port (default value is 1153 which is the IANA-registered
C12.22 port).
This is the C12.22 Listening Port on the host application computer (typically
running EA_MS) that will receive the notification messages.
Note: The same Exception Port must be used by all exception hosts.
3. Select the Number of Exception Hosts (default is 0; maximum of 4 allowed).
4. For each Exception Host (up to 4 maximum):
a. Enter the AP Title.
Elster recommends using the following as the AP Title:
2.16.124.113620.1.22.0.156.5454
CAUTION: A valid non-blank value must be provided otherwise exception

messages will not be transmitted.
The AP Title is a C12.22 device identifier string included in the C12.22

message. This AP Title identifies the host device to which the exception
message is targeted (for example, EA_MS).
b. Enter the IP Address for the C12.22 listening port of the host system.
Note: For successful exception messaging, this address (and the
related Exception port) must be opened in any intervening
firewall.
c. Enter the Max number of retries that the E-WIC will use to send the
exception message without receiving an acknowledgement (default is 0;
Elster recommends 3).
d. Enter the Retries delay (in minutes) as the delay time between
unsuccessful exception notification message transmissions (default is 0;
Elster recommends 1 minute).
e. Enter the Exclusion period (in minutes) during which duplicate events will
be ignored for the configured amount of time (default is 0).
Figure F-238. Special Option Board - Exception Notification
1) Enter the Number of exception types to report (to a maximum of 16).

Up to 16 Exception events may be communicated at one time to each
Exception Host. In general, Exception events are generated in the
EA_LAN (via the meter’s gatekeeper function), locally in the A3_ALPHA
host meter, and in the WIC option board.
2) Select the Exception Events that should be reported to the system.
See Appendix A, “Exception events” for a complete list of exception

events.
Elster recommends, at a minimum, the following events be reported:
C12.22 Exception Events reported by WIC
Event Generated by device
Primary Power Down A3 ALPHA meter
Primary Power Up A3 ALPHA meter
LANOB Immediate Call / Gatekeeper Immediate Call EA_Gatekeeper module
LANOB Scheduled Call / Gatekeeper Scheduled Call EA_Gatekeeper module
LANOB Power Outage / Gatekeeper Power Outage EA_Gatekeeper module
MFG Meter Event Call EA_Gatekeeper module
Note: The MFG Meter Event Call event must be configured in

WIC-enabled gatekeepers to enable sending WAN notifications
for power quality events generated by A3 ALPHA meters with
EA_NICs.
Figure F-239. Special Option Board - Exception Events
5. Save the Special Option Board component with an appropriate name.

You are ready to begin programming gatekeepers and A3 ALPHA meters
equipped with E-WIC option board.
Configuring for C12.21

To configure the E-WIC for C12.21 protocol communications:
1. Select ACB Version 2.x from the Special Option Board Format drop list.
Figure F-240. Special Option Board component - C12.21
2. Select C12.21 from the Protocol drop list.

3. Select the Port Baud from the drop list (default is 19200).
4. Select the Parity from the drop list:
• None - default
• Odd
• Even
5. Select the Data Bits from the drop list:

• 8 Bits - default
• 7 Bits
6. Select the Stop Bits from the drop list:

• 1 Bit - default
• 2 Bits
Proceed with Configuring common protocol parameters.
Configuring common protocol parameters

To configure the common protocol parameters:
1. Enter the Identity Number (range of 0 [default] to 255).

2. Enter the Maximum Number of Packets (128 [default], range of 0 to 255).
3. Enter the Maximum Bytes per Packet (256 [default], range of 64 to 1024).
Note: The Maximum Bytes per Packet should match the Packet Size
entered in the Metercat Phone Book.
4. Enter the Channel Traffic Timeout (secs) 10 [default].
5. Enter the Intercharacter Timeout (secs) 1 [default].
6. Enter the Packet Response Timeout (secs) 3 [default].
7. Enter the Maximum Number of Retries 3 [default].
Note: The Maximum Number of Retries should match the number of
Packet Retries entered in the Metercat Phone Book.
Proceed with Configuring C12.21 specific parameters.
Figure F-241. Special Option Board component - Common Protocol Parameters

Configuring C12.21 specific parameters

To configure C12.21 specific parameters:
1. If using DHCP, check to Obtain an IP Address Using DHCP (default is

unchecked).
Figure F-242. Special Option Board component - C12.21 Specific Parameters
2. Enter the IP Address.

3. Enter the Subnet Mask.
4. Enter the Default Gateway IP address (the IP address to which the WIC
directs its outbound communications).
Note: The Default Gateway IP address is needed for outgoing
messages.
5. Enter the C12.21 Port Number.
Note: The default port is 1000, however, this setting can be configured
to any value.
6. Enter the Telnet Port Number.
7. Enter one or more Client IP Addresses (1 to 8 addresses).
8. Check to Enable ILC Routing.
9. Enter the Transmit Accumulate Time (ms).
10.Enter the Connection Activity Time (secs).
Figure F-243. Special Option Board component - C12.21 Specific Parameters (cont.)
Configuring the C12.21 To configure the Remote component for C12.21 E-WIC communications:
Remote component 1. In Metercat, create a new component using the Remote type.
2. Select External Modem as the Port 1 Usage.
Figure F-244. Remote component - External Modem Port 1
3. Select ANSI as the Port 1 Protocol.

4. Select the Port 1 Modem tab.
5. Configure the modem.
6. Select the Port 1 Alarms tab.
Figure F-245. Remote component - External Modem Port 1 Alarms
7. Configure the alarms settings:

• Enter the IP address and port number of the head end system to which
the WIC device sends alarm notifications (for example,
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000).
8. Select the Port 1 Restoration tab.
Figure F-246. Remote component - External Modem Port 1 Restoration
9. Configure the restoration settings:

• Enter the IP address and port number of the head end system to which
the WIC device sends alarm notifications (for example,
IP=192.168.0.1,PORT=1000).
10.If the E-WIC-enabled device also has the EA_Gatekeeper module, select
Direct Connect as the Port 2 Usage.
Figure F-247. Remote component - Direct Connect
11. Select ANSI as the Port 2 Protocol.

12.Select the Port 2 Direct Connect tab.
13.Select 9600 as the Baud Rate.
G CONFIGURING THE W-WIC
Adding the W-WIC The W-WIC supports a special display item that indicates the W-WIC’s network
display item signal status (RSSI) and status on the meter LCD. See “About the W-WIC display
item” on page 585 for detailed information about the W-WIC display item.
The W-WIC display item is optional; however, Elster recommends that the W-WIC
display item be added to either the normal display list or the alternate display list.
Note: If you received the PED file used to program your W-WIC-
enabled meter, you must import the PED file before you can edit
the Display component. Refer to the Metercat User Guide for
details on importing a program file.
To add the W-WIC special display item to a display list:
1. In Metercat, open the Program that was used to program your W-WIC
containing meter.
2. Select the Metering > Display component.
3. Select the appropriate display list (for example, either Normal or Alternate).
4. In the Displayable Items list, locate Special Display Item 1 under the Status
category.
5. Click Add to move Special Display Item 1 to the display list and arrange the
item as desired.
6. Assign a unique, three-digit code in Display ID, as desired (for example,
777).
Note: This Display ID will show on the meter’s LCD in the Quantity
Identifier field.
G. Configuring the W-WIC
Figure G-248. Display component

8. Program the meter with the updated program.
About the W-WIC display item

The W-WIC display item shows the following indicators on the meter’s LCD:
• Quantity identifier (if entered)

Note: The Metercat Display ID will show on the meter’s LCD in the
Quantity Identifier field.
• W-WIC cellular radio status code (see Table G-8 on page 586)
• a lower case “r” followed by the radio signal strength indicator (RSSI)
Figure G-249. W-WIC display item on LCD
Table G-8. W-WIC radio status codes

Status
Status State Comments
Code
0 Reset During the cellular system acquisition process, the W-
WIC proceeds from status 0 through 9, skipping 6.
1 Off
2 Initialization State 9 is the normal connection state. An unsuccessful
acquisition will usually end in state 0.
3 RSSI Wait
4 Get Device ID OTASP means “Over the Air Service Provisioning.”
On initial startup, and at other intervals determined by
5 Tower the network, the W-WIC enters OTASP for radio
Registration configuration by the cellular network.
Wait
7 OTASP
8 Bearer
9 Connected
The RSSI value may vary between 0 and 31, with 31 indicating the best possible
signal strength. An RSSI value greater than 10 is considered adequate for wireless
communications. An RSSI value of 99 indicates an unknown or non-detectable
signal.
Configuring the Remote Note: If you received the PED file used to program your W-WIC-
component enabled meter, you must import the PED file before you can edit
the Remote component. Refer to the Metercat User Guide for
details on importing a program file.
To configure the Remote component for the W-WIC:
containing meter.
2. Select the Remote component.
3. Proceed based on the meter functionality:

• for a gatekeeper with W-WIC
• for an A3 ALPHA meter with W-WIC
for a gatekeeper with W-WIC

To configure an A3 ALPHA meter with a EA_Gatekeeper module in addition to the
W-WIC:
1. For Port 1 Usage (for the W-WIC):

a. Select Direct Connect.
b. Select a Bit Rate of 9600.
Note: This Bit Rate describes the baud rate between the W-WIC and
the A3 ALPHA meter, not the baud rate of the wireless
connection.
2. For Port 2 Usage (for the EA_Gatekeeper module):
3. Save the changed component.
Figure G-250. Remote component - Direct Connect gatekeeper
for an A3 ALPHA meter with W-WIC

To configure an A3 ALPHA meter with a W-WIC:
1. For Port 1 Usage (for the W-WIC):
Note: This Bit Rate describes the baud rate between the W-WIC and
the A3 ALPHA meter, not the baud rate of the wireless
connection.
2. For Port 2 Usage:
a. Select Disabled.
3. Save the changed component.
Figure G-251. Remote component - WAN-connected A3 ALPHA meter
Configuring the Special Note: If you received the PED file used to program your W-WIC-
Option Board component enabled meter, you must import the PED file before you can edit
the Special Option Board component. Refer to the Metercat
User Guide for details on importing a program file.
To configure a Special Option Board component for the W-WIC:
containing meter.
2. Select the Special Option Board component.
3. From the Special Option Board Format drop list select the most recent
release for the Wireless WIC (for example, WIC Wireless Version 1.4).
Note: To verify the version of the Special Option Board, use Metercat to
perform a Diagnostic Read task and select the Special Option
Board view > Firmware Version.Revision. Refer to the Metercat
User Guide for details on performing a diagnostic read.
4. From the WIC Type drop list, select the appropriate protocol:
• CDMA
Note: To verify the protocol of the Special Option Board, perform a

Diagnostic Read task and select the Special Option Board view
> Device Type.
Figure G-252. Special Option board - WIC Wireless > CDMA
Proceed with Configuring WAN settings.
Configuring WAN settings

To configure the WAN settings that control the W-WIC's interface to the head-end
software system (typically EA_MS):
1. Enter the C12.22 Meter Port Number (default is 1153).

This is the port number that the head-end software (for example, EA_MS)
will use (together with the network-assigned IP Address) to communicate
with the W-WIC.
CAUTION: This port number MUST match the configuration setting in the
head-end software (that is, EA_MS) and must be opened for
bidirectional traffic in any intervening firewall.
2. Enter the Telnet Port Number (default is 23).

Note: The W-WIC does not currently support Telnet connections.
3. Enter the Connection Activity Time (default is 255 seconds).

The W-WIC will terminate a socket connection if the connection is idle longer
than this time.
4. Enter the Channel Traffic Timeout (default is 40 seconds).

This is a port setting internal to the A3 ALPHA meter.
Figure G-253. Special Option board - WAN configuration
5. Continue with Configuring the host ACL.
Configuring the host ACL

The W-WIC supports using access control list as part of its security mechanism.
The purpose of the access control list (ACL) is to accept IP traffic from known
sources only, blocking traffic from unauthorized sources. Each configured ACL IP
address and corresponding mask define a range of allowable inbound IP
addresses from which the W-WIC will accept IP packets. If the inbound IP address
is outside of the allowable range, any connection established to the W-WIC will
be immediately closed.
CAUTION: Use Access Control Lists with care. If a desired host does not fall
within one of the allowed host IP address/Mask ranges, that
host will not be able to communicate with the E-WIC. For
example, Metercat installed on a laptop computer may use a
dynamically assigned IP address that does not fall in the ACL.
Using an ACL in this case would prevent Metercat from
accessing the WIC-enabled device.
To configure the Host Access Control List:
1. Check Enable Source Checking to enable verification of the in-coming IP

address (default is unchecked).
2. If source checking is enabled, for each Allowed Host (to a maximum of 8):
a. Enter a valid IP Address (for example, 192.168.5.215).
Note: An IP Address of 0.0.0.0 indicates the host IP Address is not
used.
b. Enter a valid Mask (for example, 255.255.255.0).
If the inbound IP Address & Mask = ACL Allowed Host IP Address & Mask
allowed. For example:
• If the Mask is 255.255.255.255, the incoming host IP Address must
exactly equal the allowed Host IP Address. This is the simplest and
most restrictive setting.
• If the Mask is 255.255.255.0, the incoming host IP Address must equal
the first three IP Address groups (octets) with the fourth octet group
having any value. This allows for a range of accepted host IP
Addresses.
c. Repeat for each Allowed Host (to a maximum of 8).
Figure G-254. Special Option Board - ACL
3. Continue with Configuring exception notification.

Configuring exception notification

The W-WIC can send notifications to EA_MS or other servers when certain events
occur. These configurations allow the customer to decide what events trigger the
event notification and where it is sent.
The W-WIC supports two types of exception messaging systems:
• Exceptions - generated by the gatekeeper or the A3 ALPHA meter and read

by the W-WIC
• Check ins - generated by the W-WIC option board (see “Configuring check-in
calls” on page 596)
Up to four exception hosts can be defined with an individual list of events going to
each host.
Note: Elster recommends configuring the W-WIC for exception

notification.
To configure exception notification to one or more hosts (to a maximum of 4):
1. In the Special Option Board component, check to Enable Notifications

(default is unchecked).
2. Enter the Exception Port (default value is 1153 which is the IANA-registered
C12.22 port).
The Exception Port is the C12.22 listening port on the host application
machine (typically running EA_MS) that will receive the notification
messages. Other port numbers may be used.
CAUTION: The same Exception Port must be used by all exception hosts.
3. Select the Number of Exception Hosts (default is 0; maximum of 4 allowed).

Note: Elster recommends configuring at least one exception host
using the C12.22 listening port 1153.
4. For each Exception Host (up to 4 maximum):
a. Enter the AP Title.
2.16.124.113620.1.22.0.156.5454
CAUTION: A valid, non-blank value (for example, 1.2.3.4) must be provided

otherwise exception messages will not be transmitted.
The AP Title is a required C12.22 device identifier string included in the

C12.22 message.
b. Enter the IP Address for the C12.22 listening port of the host system.
CAUTION: For successful exception messaging, this IP Address and the

related Exception Port must be opened in any intervening
firewall.
c. Enter the Max number of retries (default is 3).

This is the number of times that the W-WIC will attempt to send the
exception message without receiving an acknowledgement.
d. Enter the Retries delay (default is 1 minute).

This is the delay (in minutes) between unsuccessful exception notification
message transmissions.
e. Enter the Exclusion period (default is 0 minutes).

This configures an event filter so that duplicate event types will be ignored
for the period of time (in minutes) specified.
Figure G-255. Special Option - W-WIC Exception Notification
f. Enter the Number of exception types to report.

Up to 16 exception events may be communicated at one time to each
Exception Host. In general, exception events are generated by the
following devices:
• the host A3_ALPHA meter
• the EA_Gatekeeper module (reporting EA_LAN events)

• the W-WIC option board
g. Select the Exception Events that should be reported to the system.
Elster recommends, at a minimum, the following events be reported:
C12.22 Exception Events reported by WIC
Event Generated by Description
Primary Power Down 1 A3 ALPHA meter Notification of outage in
A3 ALPHA meter.
Primary Power Up A3 ALPHA meter Notification of restoration in
A3 ALPHA meter.
LANOB Immediate Call / EA_Gatekeeper module Notification of immediate call
Gatekeeper Immediate Call placed by gatekeeper.
LANOB Scheduled Call / EA_Gatekeeper module Notification of scheduled call
Gatekeeper Scheduled Call placed by gatekeeper.
LANOB Power Outage / EA_Gatekeeper module Notification of outages of
Gatekeeper Power Outage1 devices (for example, REX2
meters) in the EA_LAN
managed by gatekeeper.
1. The W-WIC will transmit outage event notification after power is restored to the device. Therefore,
this event notification is not a last gasp notice (see “Configuring for last gasp outage notification” on
Note: The MFG Meter Event Call event must be configured in WIC-
enabled gatekeepers to enable sending WAN notifications for
power quality events generated by A3 ALPHA meters with
EA_NICs.
See Appendix A, “Exception events” for a complete list of exception
events.
Figure G-256. Special Option Board - W-WIC > Exception Notification
5. Continue with Configuring check-in calls.
Configuring check-in calls

Check-in calls are made periodically by the W-WIC to send data to the head-end
system over the wireless network. EA_MS logs this data and makes it accessible
to the Elster Support for troubleshooting purposes.
To configure Check-in calls:
1. Check to Enable check-in calls.

Note: Elster recommends configuring the W-WIC for check-in calls to
ensure events related to last gasp outage notification are
transmitted to the head-end system.
2. Enter the Call-in Delay for the time period (in seconds) between check-in
messages (default of ).
Note: Elster recommends values in the range of 900 seconds (15
minutes) to 7200 seconds (2 hours) for the call-in delay.
3. Enter the Initial Reply Time for the delay time (in seconds) between the initial
check-in call and the subsequent re-try attempt, if the initial check-in call
was unsuccessful (default is 5 seconds).

4. Enter the Incremental Reply Time for the delay time (in seconds) between the
previous call-in and the next check-in re-try attempts if multiple check-in call
attempts are required (default is 30 seconds).
5. Enter the Number of Retries (default is 3; range of 0 to 255).
6. Enter the Random Backoff Factor for the value (in seconds) of which a
random fraction is added to the Call-in Delay between check-in call re-try
attempts (default is 2 seconds).
Figure G-257. Special Option Board - Check in calls
7. Select the parameters to report during the check-in call:

Elster
Minimum Parameter Description
Recommend
Y Current Time Record The current meter time and date.
Y Cell Signal Strength Record Cellular signal strength as measured by the W-WIC.
Cell Signal Bit Error Rate Record This field is a measure of the signal quality at the W-
WIC.
Y Temperature Record Temperature (°C) inside the meter near the W-WIC.
Voltage Record DC voltage as measured on the main W-WIC power
supply rail.
Current Record (mA) Current consumption of the W-WIC option board.
Y Event Record W-WIC events Code
Power-down1 0
Power-up2 1
Temperature, transition normal to 2
restricted modes
Temperature, in restricted mode 3
Temperature, transition power-off to 4
restricted mode
Temperature, transition restricted to 5
normal modes
Network connection achieved 6
1. The W-WIC notifies the head-end system of last gasp outage.

2. The W-WIC notifies the head-end system of power restoration.
Figure G-258. Special Option Board - Check in calls
8. To configure the Check-in Hosts (to a maximum of 3):

The W-WIC supports up to three check-in hosts: Primary, Secondary, and
Last Resort. For each check-in message, the WIC attempts to send the
message to the Primary host first, using the re-try settings configured for
check-in calls. If communication with the Primary host is unsuccessful, the
WIC then tries the Secondary host, followed by Last Resort host.
Note: Elster recommends configuring at least one Check-in host, the
Primary. For unused hosts, leave the IP address as 0.0.0.0.
Note: Elster recommends using the Exception Host 1 as the Primary
Check-in Host. Therefore, the AP Title, IP address and Port
Number should be the same as the Exception Host 1 settings.
a. Enter the AP Title for the check-in host.
2.16.124.113620.1.22.0.156.5454
b. Enter the IP Address for the check-in host.
c. Enter the Port Number for the check-in host (default is 1153).
d. Select the C12.22 Security Mode:
1) None - no encryption required for communicating with the device
2) Authentication Only (default) - device password required for
unencrypted communication with the device
3) Encryption with Authentication - device password and WAN seed1
required for encrypted communication with the device
1. Refer to the Metercat User Guide for details on synchronizing Metercat with EA_MS
and communicating with encryption-enabled devices.
Figure G-259. Special Option Board - Check in hosts
9. Save the Special Option Board component with an appropriate name.

You are ready to begin programming gatekeepers and A3 ALPHA meters
equipped with W-WIC special option board.
Configuring for last gasp To configure a gatekeeper or A3 ALPHA meter equipped with a W-WIC option
outage notification board for last gasp outage notification:
• As described in “Configuring check-in calls” on page 596 section of the

Special Option Board component, check to Enable check-in calls.
With Enable check-in calls checked, EA_MS receives and logs last gasp
notification of W-WIC power down events.
H CONFIGURING ACB
VERSION 3.7 (DNP)
To configure a Special Option Board component for the ACB version 3.7 (DNP):
1. From the Special Option Board Format drop list, select ACB Version 3.7
(DNP).
• The WIC Type, Serial, is automatically selected.
Figure H-260. Special Option Board - ACB version 3.7 (DNP)
2. To configure the ACB Network Port Parameters:

• The Protocol, DNP 3.0, is automatically selected.
a. Select the Port Baud from the drop list (default is 19200; range of 300 to
57600).
b. Select the Parity:
• None (default)
H. Configuring ACB version 3.7 (DNP)
• Even
• Odd
c. Select the Data Bits:
• 7 bits
• 8 bits (default)
d. Select the Stop Bits:
• 1 bit (default)
• 2 bits
3. To configure the DNP 3.0 Specific Parameters:

a. Select the Auto Time Set Request (No Time Request, Request on DNP 0).
b. Enter the Transmit Delay (in milliseconds) (default is 0; range of 0 - 5000).
c. Enter the Source Address (default is 0; range of 0 to 65519).
d. Enter the Destination Address (default is 0; range of 0 to 65519).
e. Select the Source Address Validation (Checked or Not Checked).
f. Select the Data Link Confirmation Mode (Never, Multiframe, Always).
g. Enter the Data Link Confirmation Timeout (in milliseconds) (range 100 -
20000).
h. Enter the Data Link Retries (range 0 - 255).
i. Select the Application Layer Confirmation Mode (Event Only, Event/

Multifrag).
j. Select the Application Layer Fragment Size (256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280,
1536, 1792, 2048 bytes).
k. Enter the Application Layer Confirmation Timeout (in milliseconds) (range
500 - 60000).
l. Check to Enable Unsolicited Responses.
4. To configure DNP point assignments:

DNP Class Assignment allows you to group points so that the values of only
certain points are returned by the DNP slave when the master station
performs a read for a specified Class.
The ACB version 3.7 (DNP) supports the following class groups:
• Analog Inputs
• Counters
• Binary Inputs
a. For the appropriate Analog Input point (Input 1 to Input 41):
1) Select the Assignment.
2) Select the Event Class:
• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1 and 2
• Class 3
• Class 1 and 3
• Class 2 and 3
• Class 1, 2 and 3
See “DNP Analog Points” on page 606 for details on default index
assignments.
b. For the appropriate Counter points (point 1 to point 7:

• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1 and 2
• Class 3
• Class 1 and 3
• Class 2 and 3
See “DNP Counter Points” on page 607 for details on default index
assignments.
c. For the appropriate Binary Inputs (Input 1 to Input 16):

• None
• Class 1
• Class 2
• Class 1 and 2
• Class 3
• Class 1 and 3
• Class 2 and 3
See “DNP Binary Points” on page 607 for details on default index
assignments.
DNP Analog Points
Name Default Index

Line frequency = 0,
Phase A Amps = 1,
Phase B Amps = 2,
Phase C Amps = 3,
Phase A Volts = 4,
Phase B Volts = 5,
Phase C Volts = 6,
Phase A Current Angle = 7,
Phase B Current Angle = 8,
Phase C Current Angle = 9,
Phase A Voltage Angle = 10,
Phase B Voltage Angle = 11,
Phase C Voltage Angle = 12,
Phase A Watts = 13,
Phase B Watts = 14,
Phase C Watts = 15,
Total Watts = 16,
Phase A VARs = 17,
Phase B VARs = 18,
Phase C VARs = 19,
Total VARs = 20,
Phase A VAs = 21,
Phase B VAs = 22,
Phase C VAs = 23,
Total VAs = 24,
Phase A Power Factor = 25,
Phase B Power Factor = 26,
Phase C Power Factor = 27,
Total Power Factor = 28,
Watt Demand (Delivered) = 29,
Watt Demand (Received) = 30,
VAR Demand (Delivered) = 31,
VAR Demand (Received) = 32,
VA Demand (Delivered) = 33,
VA Demand (Received) = 34,
Watt Max. Demand (Delivered) = 35,
Watt Max. Demand (Received) = 36,
Name Default Index

VAR Max. Demand (Delivered) = 37,
VAR Max. Demand (Received) = 38,
VA Max. Demand (Delivered) = 39,
VA Max. Demand (Received) = 40,
Unassigned = 41,
DNP Counter Points
Name Default Index

Demand Resets = 0,
Current Data, Total Block, Summation 1 = 1,
Unassigned = 9;
DNP Binary Points
Name Default Index

Configuration error = 0,
Self check error = 1,
RAM Memory Failure = 2,
ROM Memory Failure = 3,
Registered memory error = 4,
Clock error = 5,
Measurement error = 6,
Low battery indication = 7,
Loss of Potential = 8,
Demand Overload = 9,
Power Failure detected = 10,
Tamper detected = 11,
Reverse Phase Rotation = 12,
Name Default Index

PQM Warning number 1 = 13,
Unassigned = 16;
I WIC EXCEPTION EVENTS
Note: The Exception Event drop list in the Special Option Board
component shows all the standard events defined in ANSI
C12.19. Not all of the events listed are supported by the
A3 ALPHA meter or the EA_Gatekeeper.
Note: Metercat 3.4 supports the A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4 equipped
with the DA I/O special relays option board.
Table I-9. C12.22 Exception Events reported by WIC

Clock Error Detected Not Supported
Communication Terminated Abnormally Not Supported
Communication Terminated Normally Not Supported
Configuration Error Detected Not Supported
DA I/O Binary Input 1 Activated DA I/O Relays board
DA I/O Binary Input 1 Not Activated DA I/O Relays board
DA I/O Binary Output contact K1 Closed DA I/O Relays board
DA I/O Binary Output contact K1 Opened DA I/O Relays board
DA I/O Binary Output contact K2 Closed DA I/O Relays board
DA I/O Binary Output contact K2 Opened DA I/O Relays board
Daylight Saving Time Off Not Supported
Daylight Saving Time On Not Supported
Demand Overload Detected Not Supported
Demand Reset Occurred A3 ALPHA meter
End Device Accessed for Read Not Supported
End Device Accessed for Write Not Supported
End Device Programmed A3 ALPHA meter
Event Log Cleared A3 ALPHA meter
I. WIC Exception events

Event Log Pointers Updated Not Supported
Gatekeeper Diagnostic Not Supported
Gatekeeper Immediate Call EA_Gatekeeper module
Gatekeeper Power Outage EA_Gatekeeper module
Gatekeeper Power Restoration Not Supported
Gatekeeper Scheduled Call EA_Gatekeeper module
Gatekeeper Status Call Not Supported
History Log Cleared Not Supported
History Log Pointers Updated Not Supported
Low Battery Detected Not Supported
Low Loss Potential Detected Not Supported
Measurement Error Detected Not Supported
Meter Shop Mode Started Not Supported
Meter Shop Mode Stopped Not Supported
Metering Mode Started Not Supported
Metering Mode Stopped Not Supported
MFG Enter Tier Override A3 ALPHA meter
MFG Exit Tier Override A3 ALPHA meter
MFG External Event 0 A3 ALPHA meter
MFG Meter Event Call1 EA_Gatekeeper module
No Event A3 ALPHA meter
Nonvolatile Memory Failure Detected Not Supported
Pending Table Activation Not Supported
Pending Table Clear Not Supported
Phase A Voltage Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Phase A Voltage Not Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Phase B Voltage Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Phase B Voltage Not Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Phase C Voltage Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Phase C Voltage Not Active A3 ALPHA meter FW v4.4
Power Failure Detected Not Supported
Primary Power Down A3 ALPHA meter
Primary Power Up A3 ALPHA meter
Procedure Invoked Not Supported
RAM Failure Detected Not Supported
I. WIC Exception events

Rate Change Not Supported
Reset List Pointers Not Supported
Reverse Rotation Detected Not Supported
ROM Failure Detected Not Supported
Season Change Not Supported
Self Check Error Detected Not Supported
Self Read Occurred A3 ALPHA meter
Special Schedule Activation Not Supported
Table Written To Not Supported
Tamper Detected Not Supported
Test Mode Started A3 ALPHA meter
Test Mode Stopped A3 ALPHA meter
Tier Switch Changed Not Supported
Time Changed (new time) A3 ALPHA meter
Time Changed (old time) A3 ALPHA meter
Update List Pointers Not Supported
WIC Flash Download Completed WIC
WIC Security Log Entry Made WIC
1. This event must be configured in WIC-enabled gatekeepers to enable

sending WAN notifications for power quality events generated by A3 ALPHA
meters with EA_NICs.
J CONFIGURING LOSS
COMPENSATION
Transformer Loss To configure transformer and line loss compensation in the A3 ALPHA and
Compensation A1800 ALPHA meters, use the Transformer Loss Compensation Tool
(A3A1800LossComp.exe) and see IL42-5001, Loss Compensation Tool for
A3 ALPHA and A1800 ALPHA Meters located on the Metercat installation CD in
the \LossComp folder.
Elster Solutions © 2013 by Elster. All rights reserved.
208 S Rogers Lane Information herein is subject to change without notice.
Raleigh, NC 27610-2144 Product specifications cited may change. Contact your
T +1 800 257 9754 (US sales) Elster representative for the most current product
T +1 800 338 5251 (US support) information. Produced in the United States.
T +1 905 634 4895 (Canada) www.elster.com

Metercat User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metercat User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metercat™

2 Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

3 Using account information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

4 Configuring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

5 Setting system preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

6 Managing users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

7 Security audit log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Viewing only Metercat events list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

8 Synchronizing with EA_MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Billing Read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Configuring the Edit PQM Thresholds task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

REX Meter Identification Info task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

11 Managing machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

12 Managing meter passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

About password sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

13 Managing stored readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

14 Managing viewsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

LCD Display Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Factory Codes tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

16 Managing the Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

17 Programming a device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

18 Reading a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

19 Exporting a program or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

20 Importing a program or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

21 About programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

22 Using the Program Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

23 Using the Component Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Deleting a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

6. Total Harmonic Distortion Current (%) . . . . . . . . . . . 456

B Report Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Day per Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

C Displayable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

E Meter Events, Errors & Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

F Configuring the E-WIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

G Configuring the W-WIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

H Configuring ACB version 3.7 (DNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

I WIC Exception events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

J Configuring Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

In addition to its basic functionality, Metercat includes the following features:

• meter shop administrators and supervisors

Figure 1-1. Metercat main window

Help Type Description

Program editor help

Viewing release To view information about your current release of Metercat:

Figure 1-2. Tree mode

To view in tree mode:

Figure 1-3. Tab mode

Status Field Description

Status Field Description

Note: If you define a date without setting a specific time, Metercat

To start AlphaPlus meter support software:

1. From the Metercat Tools menu, select Launch AlphaPlus.

Alpha Keys is a combination of hardware and Windows software that can

Note: Alpha Keys software is shipped on the Metercat installation CD-

Changing the interface Metercat, supports languages other than English.

1. From the Help menu, select Language.

1. Click on the Start button.

• Single user system

Single user system

Multiple user system

To have a log on name, an administrator must first:

• create your log on name and password

There are two ways you can log on to Metercat: